SEPTEMBER

Humanities,
Social Sciences
&
Languages
 CATALOGUE
Eastern Economy Editions

SEPTEMBER 2021

Humanities,
Social Sciences
and Languages

PHI Learning’s Eastern Economy Editions (3Es) consist of

outstanding works of Indian authors and unabridged reprints
of established titles widely used by universities. These lower
priced editions are published for the benefit of students.
 Contents
HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES   (pages 3–120)

Economics  (pages 3–20)

Education  (pages 20–44)

English Literature, Linguistics, Phonetics and Grammar  (pages 44–57)

Law  (pages 57–74)

Philosophy/Religion  (pages 74–78

Political Science  (pages 79–85)

Psychology  (pages 85–94)

Public Administration  (pages 94–102)

Sociology and Social Work  (pages 103–110)

Journalism/Mass Communication  (pages 111–119)

Library Science  (page 120)

AUTHORWISE ALPHABETICAL LISTING  (pages 121–126)

WHOLESALERS AND STOCKISTS  (pages 127–140)

• All prices are subject to change when a reprint or a new edition of an existing title is released.
• The export rights of Eastern Economy Editions are vested solely with the publisher.
 Humanities, Social Sciences and Languages
Economics  HIGHLIGHTS OF THE BOOK
Business Environment
AHMED & ALAM
Business Environment: Indian and
Global Perspectives, 3rd ed.
FAISAL AHMED, Associate Professor of International
Business at FORE School of Management, New Delhi.
M. ABSAR ALAM, Assistant Professor of Economics at
M.K.S. College, L.N. Mithila University, Darbhanga, Bihar.
This fully revised and updated third edition carries a
holistic approach to the new and emerging realities of
Indian as well as the global business environment. It
incorporates the new challenges emanating from Covid-19
outbreak and also other enablers shaping up the business
environment. This new edition brings forth a contemporary
and pragmatic appeal to the learners. The text provides
an incisive insight into the subject via simple, elegant and
explicit presentation that amalgamates theory logically
and rigorously with the practical aspects.
Organised in 24 chapters, the book aims to develop
a broader understanding of the concepts and their
applications and dexterously assimilates the latest statistics
depicting the national and global perspectives. This text is
suitable for both PG and UG students of Management,
Commerce, Economics, and Business Studies. Besides, it
is of immense value to the aspirants of civil services and
the professionals, including policy makers, working in the
government departments.
NEW TO THE THIRD EDITION
• Presents latest developments viz. Economic slowdown
due to lockdowns, Impact of the outbreak of Covid-19,
Atmanirbharta (self-reliance), Union Budget 2021–22,
Policy changes amid slowdown, FDI policy changes,
and also about Indian economic scenarios, NITI Aayog,
Manufacturing in defence sector, Climate Change,
Make in India, Geo-economic aspects, GST, BREXIT,
SDGs, Latest developments in global environment, WTO
issues, and others.
• Updates sections, sub-sections, opening and closing
cases to keep abreast of new developments.
• Introduces revised tables and figures to represent the
latest scenarios, in most cases with data up to 2019–20.
• Includes latest domestic and global policy frameworks
influencing business environment.
3
• Each chapter commences with an opening case to
emphasise the topic of importance, and ends with a
closing case to help in satisfying a learner from the
point of view of understanding the chapter.
• Relevant box items call readers' attention to practical
examples and experiences for in-depth learning.
• Case-based questions and review questions help in
assessing learner's ability to grasp basic concepts.
• Companion website http://phindia.com/ahmed
containing useful resources for the teachers and study
aids for the students.
Contents: List of Boxes. List of Figures. List of Tables.
Preface. Acknowledgements. Concepts. Contemporary
Perspectives. Environmental Scanning. Economic Systems.
Planning and Reform. Macroeconomic Indicators. Industrial
Policies. Fiscal Policy. Monetary Policy. Balance of Payments.
Money and Capital Markets. Legal Framework. Principles of
International Law for Business. International Organisations.
Models and Frameworks of International Trade. Inter-
nationalisation of Firms. Foreign Direct Investment (FDI).
Trends in Global Trade and Economic Integration. The WTO
Regime. Major Provisions under WTO. Cross-cutting Issues
in International Environment. Foreign Exchange Risk and
Exposures. Country Risk and Political Risk Analysis. Doing
Business in Select Markets. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 496 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 895.00
ISBN-978-93-5443-773-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-884-4 (e-Book)
PAILWAR
Business Environment
VEENA KESHAV PAILWAR, Professor, Institute of
Management Technology (IMT), Nagpur.
Designed primarily as a text for undergraduate and
postgraduate students of management and commerce,
this comprehensive and well-organized book equips the
readers with the knowledge to analyze the domestic and
global business environment. The focus of the book is on
the assessment of the evolving business scenario using
analytical underpinnings and latest data.
This book clearly brings out the implications of changes
in socio-economic and legal environment of business,
and covers business environment by tracking changes in
national income, inflation, fiscal deficit, money supply,
exchange rate, balance of payment and many other
economic variables. Besides, it briefs on legal aspects,
deliberates on demographic changes and changes in
technical and natural environment of business.
 4 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Besides students, practising managers and policy makers
will also find the book as a useful reference.
KEY FEATURES
• Illustrations using latest data (upto June 2013)
• Boxes containing numerical illustrations and technical
details
• Cases depicting Indian Business Environment and
providing glimpses of evolving global business
environment
• Review questions, numerical problems and case analysis
Companion Website: This text is supported by the
companion website: www.phindia.com/veenapailwar/
containing useful resources for the teachers and study
aids for the students.
Instructors’ Resources: To support the teaching efforts
the website contains—Answers to the end of the chapter
Numerical Problems with explanation; More than 1000
crisp, clear and colourful PowerPoint Slides; and more
than 1000 Multiple Choice Questions.
Students’ Resources: To strengthen the understanding
of the students on the subject the website resources
comprise—Interactive Multiple Choice Questions and
hints for solving chapter-end Numerical Problems.
Contents: Preface. Business Environment and Its
Constituents. Economic System: Planning and Market.
Economic Structure and Stages of Development. Business
Cycles and Fluctuations. National Income: Measurement
and Environment Scanning. Poverty, Growth and Inclusive
Growth. Inflation and Business Environment. Fiscal Policy
and Environment. Financial System, Crisis and Reforms.
Monetary Policy and Economic Environment. Industrial
Structure, Policy and Business Environment. Balance of
Payment: Accounting, Adjustments and Imbalances. Trade
Flows, International Linkages and External Environment.
Capital Flows, Growth and Macroeconomic Instability.
Exchange Rate Regimes and Currency Convertibility. Legal
Environment of Business. Demographic Environment of
Business. Technological Environment. Natural Environment
and Business Sustainability. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 608 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 795.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4890-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90464-47-0 (e-book)
PAILWAR
Economic Environment of Business,
3rd ed.
VEENA KESHAV PAILWAR, Professor, Institute of
Management Technology (IMT), Nagpur.
Since liberalization, Indian economy is going through
some dynamic changes. From a primarily closed agrarian
economy, India has become service-oriented open
economy, becoming more and more susceptible to
economic fluctuations.
This comprehensive book, in its third edition, continues
to equip the readers with the necessary skills to assess
and analyze the evolving economic scenario in India and
world over. The new edition has been thoroughly revised
and updated to incorporate the recent changes taking
place in Indian and global economic environment. Every
chapter is incorporated with a section on Understanding
Economic Environment (UEE), in which the Indian
economic environment is compared with the economic
environment of its neighbouring countries, emerging
markets and major players in the world economy.
All chapters are well-supported with illustrative examples
and cases to provide an analytical insight to the topics.
The chapters also include the topic Implications for
Managers, in which implications of a particular aspect
of an economy are summarized for the managers.
Besides, for an easy assessment of the data, most of the
quantitative information is presented in a graphical form
rather than in the conventional tabular format.
Designed primarily as a textbook for the postgraduate
students of management and commerce, this book is
useful for the practising managers and policy makers as
well.
KEY FEATURES
• Includes illustrations using latest data (upto 2011)
• Provides several numerical problems to strengthen the
quantitative aspect of the subject
• Each chapter concludes with a Case Analysis to support
the chapters with the applicative tools
• Companion website www.phindia.com/veenapailwar
provides useful resources for the teachers as well as for
the students and has been updated as per the current
edition
Contents: List of Cases. List of Boxes. List of Case
Analysis Exercises. Preface. Acknowledgements. Economic
Environment and Business Fluctuations. Data Sources
and Interpretations. National Income: Measurement
and Environment Scanning. Inflation and Business
Environment. Fiscal Policy and Environment. Money:
Demand and Supply. Financial System, Crisis and Reforms.
Monetary Policy and Economic Environment. Balance of
Payment: Accounting, Adjustments And Imbalances. Trade
Flows, International Linkages and External Environment.
Capital Flows, Growth and Macroeconomic Instability.
Exchange Rate Regimes and Currency Convertibility. Index.
Latest Print 2018 / 512 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4492-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-456-3 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Developmental Economies
MUKHERJEE & CHAKRABARTI
Development Economics:
A Critical Perspective
APARAJITA MUKHERJEE, Former Professor of Economics,
Visva-Bharati, Santiniketan, West Bengal.
SAUMYA CHAKRABARTI, Associate Professor of Economics,
Department of Economics and Politics, Visva-Bharati,
Santiniketan, West Bengal.
Development economics is a branch of economics that
focuses on improving the economies of developing
countries. It considers promotion in economic growth,
and examines both macroeconomic and microeconomic
factors relating to the structure of a developing economy.
The main objective of the book is to present different
viewpoints taken by different thinkers, including the
most modern thinking, with regard to the major issues
of development economies. It takes up an analysis of
the limitations of accumulation-centric growth process
and introduces the readers to alternative development
paradigms along with their critics.
The book introduces alternative paradigms and theories,
and analyses their philosophical basis and political
economic necessities that led to their emergence. Besides,
it also takes care of structural dynamics of less developed
economies with the help of macro models of agriculture-
industry interactions.
Extensions and modifications to different theories and
models in different chapters are also incorporated in the
book. Based on the critical analysis of the limitations
of the widely-accepted theories and policies, recent
development of the subject as well as issues emerging
out of recent changes occurring at the national and global
level are discussed in the book.
The book is primarily intended for the undergraduate and
postgraduate students of economics.
Contents: Preface. Introduction. Some Important
Features of Less Developed Economies. Development
Ideas and Theories: The Early Paradigms. Post World
War Development Ideas. Development Economics under
Dual Economy Framework. Some Macro Models of
Development Based on Industry—Agriculture Interactions.
Structure of Agriculture in Less Developed Economies.
Population and Economic Development. The Role
of Market and the State in Economic Development.
The New Paradigm in Development Economics:
Capability Approach to Development and Development
Management. Inequality, Poverty and Development.
Environment, Resources and Sustainable Development.
Open Economy Issues: Early Paradigms. Open Economy
Issues: Globalisation. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 404 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5219-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-534-8 (e-Book)
5
Environmental Economics
MUTHUKRISHNAN
Economics of Environment, 2nd ed.
SUBHASHINI MUTHUKRISHNAN, Associate Professor and
Head, Department of Economics, St. Joseph’s College
(Autonomous), Bangalore.
This book, now in its Second Edition, continues to
provide a comprehensive and coherent discussion of
environmental economics. The text begins with an
overview of the interdependence of economics and the
environment. It then focuses on the theories and concepts
from mainstream economics and describes how they are
applied to environmental issues. The book discusses in
detail the issues of market failure, externality and welfare
with regard to the environment. It also analyzes population
dynamics and its relationship with the environment.
The concepts and issues related to natural resources
economics and valuation of environmental resources as
important part of environmental economics have been
dealt with. Finally, the book presents important national
and international environmental issues and legislations.
The book is specially designed for the undergraduate and
postgraduate students of economics.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
The most obvious change in this second edition is the
new chapter entirely focusing on the interaction between
economy and environment using the material balance
model and examining the nature of environmental
problems. It focuses on applying the principles of welfare
economics to environment and its role in decision making
relating to environmental resource use.
KEY FEATURES
• Discusses various real-life environmental issues for
better understanding of the theory.
• Provides a list of assignment topics to encourage the
students to gain practical knowledge.
• Includes a glossary containing important terms.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Introduction
to Environmental Economics. Interaction Between
Economics and Environment. Markets, Market Failure
and the Environment. Natural Resources. Degradation of
Environment. Population and Environment. Sustainable
Development. Environmental Valuation and Techniques.
Indian Environmental Issues and Legislations. Global
Environmental Issues. Appendix: Assignments. Glossary.
Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2015 / 248 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5135-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-551-5 (e-Book)
 6 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
RAY & SINHA
Mine and Mineral Economics
SUBHASH C. RAY, former Professor and Head, Department
of Mining Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology,
Kharagpur.
INDRA N. SINHA, Professor, Department of Mining
Engineering, Indian Institute of Engineering Science and
Technology, Shibpur.
For any country’s economy, mineral resources form an
important part in generating revenue and increasing its
GDP. Therefore, learning the economics behind mines
and minerals becomes mandatory and logical. This book
investigates and promotes understanding of economic and
policy issues, programmes and strategies for exploration,
mining, beneficiation and marketing activities.
Divided into ten chapters, the book puts emphasis on
elaborating the principles of mine and mineral economics.
The introductory chapter discusses the scope of the
subject and the issues addressed by it. Outline of reserve-
resource dynamics and the recent approaches towards
estimating ore-reserves are then elaborated, followed by
a discussion on mineral availability. Focus is then shifted
to more technical and quantitative aspects of mineral
sampling.
Issues relating to mineral property evaluation and project
feasibility assessment are then taken up. Both quantitative
and logical aspects of mine finance and accounting have
been discussed. Nitty-gritties of mine taxation are further
outlined and the reader is introduced to aspects relating
to marketing and trading of minerals. Distinctive features
of the mineral policies of a few countries are highlighted
while discussing the characteristic features of a national
mineral policy. The last chapter of this book is on mineral
industry and the environment.
The book is designed for the undergraduate students
of mining engineering. The book may be helpful for the
postgraduate students of earth science as well.
KEY FEATURES
• Book is supported with numerous illustrations, for
better understanding of the text.
• Numerical and logical-type questions are included in
every chapter.
Contents: Preface. Minerals and the Economy. Reserve-
Resource Dynamics. Availability of Minerals. Mine
Sampling. Valuation of Mineral Properties and Project
Evaluation. Mine Finance and Accounting. Mine Taxation.
Mineral Markets and Trade. National Mineral Policy.
Mineral Industry and the Environment. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 256 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5174-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-681-9 (e-Book)
Game Theory
CHADHA
Game Theory for Managers: Doing
Business in a Strategic World, 2nd ed.
ALKA CHADHA, Adjunct Associate Professor (Economics),
Indian Institute of Management, Sambalpur.
The new edition of the book has been streamlined for
effective reading and clarity. It explains the concepts of
game theory in a way that is easy to understand and will
be useful for the students of MBA programmes. It will
help the readers to think strategically in interactions that
they may encounter as managers. The book uses a mix of
mathematics and intuitive reasoning for efficient learning
outcomes. The case studies dwell on diverse issues such
as politics, diplomacy, geopolitics, movies, sports, health
care, environment, besides business and economics. Each
chapter includes Solved Examples, Summary, Key Words
and Exercises. An Instructor’s Manual is available for
professors who adopt this book that includes PowerPoint
slides, answers to select problems given in the text and a
variety of multiple-choice questions.
What’s New in the Second Edition?
The second edition of the book has expanded the text and
included more diagrams for a clearer understanding of
concepts such as mixed strategy games, duopoly games,
strategic moves and coalition games. It has also updated
case-studies on current topics including corona virus
pandemic, oil crash, trade war, arms race escalation etc.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Introduction.
Simultaneous-move Games: Pure Strategies. Games
of Coordination. Games using Randomised Strategies.
Dynamic Sequential-move Games. Oligopoly Models of
Continuous Strategies. Repeated Games. Asymmetric
Information. Auctions. Bayesian Games. Coalition Games.
Bargaining and Contracts. Index.
Latest Print 2020 / 240 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-81-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-82-0 (e-book)
CHATTERJEE
Linear Programming and Game Theory
DIPAK CHATTERJEE, Director, Budge Budge Institute
of Technology, Kolkata. Earlier he served as Principal,
Institute of Engineering and Management, Kolkata and
as Distinguished Professor and HOD, St. Xavier’s College,
Kolkata.
This compact book is an excellent elucidation of the basics
of optimization theory in the areas of linear programming
and game theory. The theory has been developed in a
systematic manner with a recapitulation of the necessary
mathematical preliminaries including in good measure the
elements of convexity theory. All the essential topics such
as simplex algorithm, duality, revised simplex method,
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
two-phase method and dual simplex method have
been discussed lucidly. The age-old transportation and
assignment problems have been treated thoroughly to
manifest all the dimensions of the problems. Finally, the
game theory comes with grandeur of reality of conflicts.
This user-friendly text is designed for the undergraduate
students in mathematics. Besides, it will be useful to
students pursuing courses in engineering, management
and economics.
Contents: Preface. Mathematical Programming.
Mathematical Preliminaries. Simplex Method. Duality.
Dual Simplex Method. Revised Simplex Method. Integer
Programming. Sensitivity Analysis. Transportation
Problems. Assignment Problems. Theory of Games.
Appendix. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2009 / 320 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 525.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2677-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-029-9 (e-Book)
Indian Economy
GHOSH
Indian Economy
SAHANA GHOSH, Assistant Professor, Indian Statistical
Institute, Kolkata.
The book aims to give readers an overall idea of
the structural changes of the Indian Economy since
Independence with greater focus on the period since
reforms of the 1990s. Besides giving an overview of the
broad trends of the economy, an attempt has been made
to define various important concepts that may be useful
for any average student learning the subject.
Comprehensive coverage of contemporary issues such
as sectoral reforms, various welfare schemes of the
government, employment generation schemes etc. are
dealt with in great detail and the book is up-to-date with
latest data from Economic Survey 2018-19.
Primarily designed for General Studies paper of the Civil
Services Examinations (IAS and PCS) and the optional
paper on Economics in the Main examination, the
book will be handy for other competitive examinations.
Undergraduate and postgraduate students of commerce
economics and management will immensely benefit by
reading the book.
KEY FEATURES
• Up-to-date with latest data from Economic Survey
2018–19
• MCQs, short-answer and long-answer questions based
on exam pattern are the highlight of the book
• Previous years’ examination questions
• Important issues/developments highlighted
Contents: Preface. Introduction. National Income and
Economic Growth. Planning and Development Strategy.
Population Growth and Demographic Structure. Labour
Force and Employment. Savings and Capital Formation.
7
Human Development and Sustainability. Poverty and
Income Inequality. Prices and Inflation. Sustainable
Development and Climate Change. Agriculture Trends
and Patterns. Technology Revolutions in Agriculture. Land
Ownership and Tenancy. Farm Input and Management.
Food Availability, Distribution and Food Security. Rural
Credit and Insurance. Agricultural Marketing, Contract
Farming and Food Processing. Rural Labour and
Income. Shifts in Industrial Policy. Industrial Growth and
Productivity. Infrastructure Development. Public Sector,
Disinvestment and Privatisation. Small and Medium
Industries. Industrial Finance and Corporate Resource
Mobilisation. Industrial Sickness and Bankruptcy. Industrial
Labour Relations. Some Major Industries. The Service
Sector. Foreign Trade. Balance of Payment and Foreign
Exchange System. Foreign Investment. World Trade
Organization. Regional Trade Agreements. Reserve Bank
of India. Commercial Banking. Other Financial Institutions
and Products. Capital Market. Government Revenues.
Fiscal Deficit. Centre-State Fiscal Relations. Index.
568 pp. (approx.) / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / TBA
ISBN-978-93-89347-31-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-32-6 (e-Book)
GHOSH & GHOSH
Indian Economy: A Macro-theoretic
Analysis
CHANDANA GHOSH, Assistant Professor, Indian Statistical
Institute, Kolkata.
AMBAR GHOSH, Professor of Economics Department,
Jadavpur University, Kolkata.
India is an open economy, and the dynamics of it can be
witnessed from the inflation and deflation of the rupee
value in the market. This comprehensive book on Indian
Economy shows how it behaves, and how its parameters
are weighed and analyzed vis-à-vis the macroeconomic
theories. This book attempts to make a more complete
and clearer presentation of the basic models of
macroeconomics principles, and their effect on India’s
current economic conditions.
International Monetary Fund (IMF) thrusted upon New
Economic Policy in India, which aims at leaving the
allocation of resources entirely to the market forces
deriving its rationale from neoclassical macroeconomics.
This neoclassical macroeconomics is dealt with in a
proper perspective in the book. Part I presents the basic
models of open economy macroeconomics, and Part II
applies them to explain India’s recent macroeconomic
performance.
The book also assesses India’s current fiscal policy,
monetary policy and the policy of forcible land acquisition
for promotion of modern industry.
The book is designed as a reference for the undergraduate
and postgraduate students of Economics.
KEY FEATURES
• Interspersed with solved numerical examples
 8 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
• Chapters are contained with analytical problems with
the hints provided for the most difficult ones
• Tables containing the data to support economic policies
from the authentic sources.
Contents: Preface. India’s New Economic Policy,
Resource Allocation and Neoclassical Microeconomics:
A Must Read for the Senior Students of Economics.
Part I: OPEN ECONOMY MACROECONOMICS—Balance
of Payments. Open Economy Macroeconomics under
Perfect Capital Mobility. Perfect Versus Imperfect Capital
Mobility. Determination of Output and Employment
under Imperfect Capital Mobility. Interest Rate Targeting,
Growth and Inflation in an Open Economy. Part II: INDIAN
ECONOMY—Indian Economy Prior to the Adoption of the
New Economic Policy. India’s Current Macroeconomic
Scenario. External Shocks to Indian Economy and Fiscal
Policy. India’s Macroeconomic Performance and Monetary
Policy. Growth and Foreign Exchange Constraint in India.
India’s Growing Inequality, Forcible Acquisition of Land
and Industrialisation. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 268 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5244-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-404-4 (e-Book)
KANAGASABAPATHI
Indian Models of Economy, Business and
Management, 3rd ed.
P. KANAGASABAPATHI, Professor of Management,
presently working as the Director, Tamil Nadu Institute of
Urban Studies, Coimbatore.
This comprehensive and extensively researched study
deals primarily with the economic, business and
management models from the Indian perspectives.
The third edition of the book presents updated details,
latest data and new information obtained from authentic
sources in order to understand the topics discussed. It
provides detailed information collected from field studies
undertaken in different industrial and business centres
across the country.
The details contained in the book have been obtained
from various empirical and research studies and reputed
national and international sources. The author contends
that India remained a strong economic, business and
management power for most of the time in history, and
the country has the potential to achieve the premier
status even today. He gives masterly analysis of not only
the Indian economic, business and management models,
but also the popular economic, business and manage-
ment models of the other countries. The author asserts
that a paradigm shift in thinking is urgently needed to
understand the ground realities and the functioning Indian
systems, so that the country could be taken forward with
the necessary orientation and suitable policies.
Intended primarily for the postgraduate students of
Management, the book would also be useful to the
students of Economics and Commerce, as well as to
the professionals interested in the study of the Indian
economy, business and management from the Indian
perspectives.
KEY FEATURES
• A unique presentation of the Indian economic
environment and its functioning models since the
ancient periods.
• Comparative study of the Eastern and Western business
models giving a holistic view of the subject.
• Historical development of the Indian management
systems and the Western theories with details of
contemporary management practices.
• Text reinforced with plenty of data to validate the
concepts and a large number of examples and case
studies to illustrate the concepts discussed.
• Updated with the latest data, recent developments and
new information.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Introduction.
Indian Economic Models. Other Economic Models.
Basic Features of Different Economic Models. Types of
Business Models. Indian Business Models. Basic Features
of Different Business Models. Management Models.
Emerging India. Conclusion. Bibliography. Name Index.
Subject Index.
Latest Print 2012 / 352 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 275.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4563-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-275-0 (e-Book)
Industrial Organisations
BASU, et al.
Industrial Organization and Management
S.K. BASU, Professor Emeritus at College of Engineering
Pune (formerly known as Government College of
Engineering).
K.C. SAHU, former Director of NITIE Bombay. He has also
served as former Professor, VG School of Management and
former Professor/Founder-Chair, Industrial Engineering
and Management (IIT Kharagpur).
B. RAJIV, Associate Professor, Department of Production
Engineering, College of Engineering, Pune.
This comprehensive text provides a glimpse of various
theories and principles of management along with their
applications in engineering industries. The authors have
explained classical management, economic analysis,
techno-economic life and various quantitative techniques
associated with plant and facilities layout, behavioural
studies, and human relations. Ergonomics and human
factors in engineering has assumed a new dimension to
design and manufacturing of products. The application
of these principles, in relation to human effort and plant
efficiency, has been discussed at length. It also discusses
the biodynamic analyses of man-machine system in a
stress-free environment.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
This practice-oriented book, which contains a large
number of worked-out examples, exercises and other
pedagogic features, is intended for the undergraduate
students of Industrial and Production Engineering. It can
also be used as a reference by practising engineers.
Contents: Preface. Management. Organisation Structures.
Formation of Company and its Legal Aspects. Financial
Planning: Finance and Economic Analysis. Depreciation
and Replacement. Product Engineering. Physical
Facilities. Production Planning and Control. Inventory
Control. Work Study. Job Evaluation, Merit Rating and
Wage Incentives. Personnel Management. Assurance
Engineering and Sciences: Reliability, Quality Control
and Maintainability. Sales Forecasting. Financial Control.
Plant Engineering and Maintenance. Behavioural Aspects
of Management. Productivity. Automation. Engineering
Economy. Ergonomics and Human Factors in Engineering.
Operations Research. References. Index.
Latest Print 2012 / 432 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 350.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4421-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-205-7 (e-Book)
CABRAL
Introduction to Industrial Organization,
2nd ed.
LUÍS M.B. CABRAL is Paganelli-Bull Professor of Economics
and International Business and Chair of the Department
of Economics at the Leonard N. Stern School of Business
at New York University.
The study of industrial organization (IO)—the analysis of
the way firms compete with one another—has become
a key component of economics and of such related
disciplines as finance, strategy, and marketing. This
book provides an issue-driven introduction to industrial
organization. Although formal in its approach, it is written
in a way that requires only basic mathematical training. It
includes a vast array of examples, from both within and
outside the United States. This second edition has been
thoroughly updated and revised.
In addition to updated examples, this edition presents a
more systematic treatment of public policy implications.
It features added advanced sections, with analytical
treatment of ideas previously presented verbally; and
exercises, which allow for a deeper and more formal
understanding of each topic. The new edition also includes
an introduction to such empirical methods as demand
estimation and equilibrium identification. Supplemental
material is available online.
“Luis Cabral has updated his industrial organization
textbook. The revision retains the strengths of the original:
it is clear and succinct, with an emphasis on how the field
addresses important applications. The many new examples
ensure the relevance of the material.”
—Robert Porter, William R. Kenan Jr. Professor of
Economics, Northwestern University; coeditor of
Handbook of Industrial Organization
9
“Introduction to Industrial Organization is a rare
commodity: an intellectually rigorous textbook that is
elegant, concise, and a pleasure to read. Cabral manages
to communicate difficult ideas precisely while keeping
the focus squarely on issues that matter for the real
world. It is the ideal introduction for undergraduates,
MBA students, or anyone else looking for a non-technical
overview of the field.”
—Matthew Gentzkow, Professor of Economics,
Stanford University
“Cabral’s Introduction to Industrial Organization is clear,
precise, relevant, even fun. This delightful volume is
your best choice for crisp and accessible coverage
of IO theory. The second edition sparkles just like the
first.”
—Carl Shapiro, Transamerica Professor of Business
Strategy, Haas School of Business, University of California
at Berkeley
“This is a wonderful textbook: concise, precise, and full
of up-to-date examples. If you are looking for an intuitive
treatment of industrial organization that is rigorous and
yet doesn’t bog you down in excessive detail, this is a
great choice.”
—Ali Hortacsu, Ralph and Mary Otis Isham Professor of
Economics, University of Chicago
“Luis Cabral’s book covers all the basic topics in Industrial
Organization in an easily accessible way. It is a perfect
exposition for an undergraduate class or for a professional
who wants to become acquainted with the topics IO deals
with and why they are important. He has done the field
a great service.”
—Ariel Pakes, Thomas Professor of Economics,
Harvard University; editor, Microeconomic Insights
“Cabral introduces the theoretical ideas and frameworks
of contemporary IO expertly, succinctly, and with flair.
Motivating examples and stylized facts bring the theories
alive. The new edition of Introduction to Industrial
Organization updates and improves the organization of
the first, while keeping its expository charms.”
—Michael H. Riordan, Laurans A. Arlene Mendelson
Professor of Economics, Columbia University
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgments. What is Industrial
Organization? Part 1—Microeconomics Foundations.
Consumers. Firms. Competition, Equilibrium, and
Efficiency. Market Failure and Public Policy. Price
Discrimination. Part 2—Oligopoly. Games and Strategies.
Oligopoly. Collusion and Price Wars. Part 3—Entry and
Market Structure. Market Structure. Horizontal Mergers.
Market Foreclosure. Part 4—Non-Price Strategies. Vertical
Relations. Product Differentiation. Innovation. Networks.
Latest Print 2021 / 440 pp. / 20.0 × 25.0 cm / ` 895.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-26-4 (Print Book)
 10 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
TIROLE
Theory of Industrial Organization, The
JEAN TIROLE.
This book by award winning author Jean Tirole
(Nobel Memorial Prize in Economic Sciences) gives a
straightforward account of developments in the theory of
industrial economics and blends them into the tradition
of industrial organization. The text primarily presents
accomplishments of what the author calls, ‘The Second
Wave’, which began in the 1970s and made a sizeable
impact in the theoretical aspects of industrial organization,
though the earlier contributions that laid the foundation
are not forgotten.
The book is divided into two parts. The first part features
market behaviour and considers monopolist’s choices of
price and quality, the spectrums of goods advertising
and the distribution of structure. Part two analyses the
choice price, capacity, product positioning, research
and development, and other strategic variables in a
comparatively monopolistic market.
Contents: Preface. Introduction. The Theory of the Firm.
I: The Exercise of Monopoly Power—Monopoly. Product
Selection, Quality, and Advertising. Price Discrimination.
Vertical Control. II: Strategic Interaction—Short-Run
Price Competition. Dynamic Price Competition and Tacit
Collusion. Product Differentiation: Price Competition and
Non-Price Competition. Entry, Accommodation, and Exit.
Information and Strategic Behavior: Reputation, Limit
Pricing, and Predation. Research and Development and
the Adoption of New Technologies. Noncooperative Game
Theory: A User’s Manual. Review Exercises. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 496 pp. / 21.6 × 27.8 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-1049-0 (Print Book)
Macroeconomics
GHOSH & GHOSH
Macroeconomics, 2nd ed.
CHANDANA GHOSH, Assistant Professor at the Economic
Research Unit, Indian Statistical Institute, Kolkata.
AMBAR GHOSH, Professor of Economics, Jadavpur
University, Kolkata.
Macroeconomics, which along with microeconomics
forms one of the two most general fields of studies in
economics, deals with an economy as a whole—national,
regional and global. This textbook on macroeconomics
in its second edition makes significant contribution to
teaching and learning of the subject. Macroeconomics
texts that are available present mathematical models and
theories without using mathematics. Hence, students find
it difficult to get a clear idea of the theories presented.
Using elementary tools of school level mathematics, this
book presents the theories mathematically and illustrates
them diagrammatically. The purpose is to give the students
a clear vision of the theories presented. Meanings of
every equation, every expression and intuition of every
result are clearly explained. Every mathematical step
involved in the derivation of the results is fully explained.
Upon reading this book, a student will learn how to
construct a macroeconomic model mathematically, how
to illustrate the solution of the model diagrammatically
and how to carry out stability analysis and comparative
static exercises mathematically and diagrammatically.
The book presents both Keynesian and neoclassical
macroeconomic theories lucidly, evaluates them in the
light of real life experiences and makes a comparative
assessment of the two schools of thought in
macroeconomics. In this respect also, this book constitutes
a unique contribution as a textbook of macroeconomics.
KEY FEATURES
• Explains the concepts in an easy-to-understand language.
• Includes numerous exercises within the text as well as
at the end of each chapter.
• Illustrates the concepts with the help of examples,
figures and tables.
NEW TO THE EDITION
• Chapters 3, 9 and 10 have been revised thoroughly to
add new insights into the theories presented there.
• Some of the other chapters have also been revised to
improve their quality and coverage.
• The data tables have also been updated to illustrate
the applications of the theories using recent data.
• Solution hints have been added to most of the difficult
problems.
• This book is intended mainly as a text for undergraduate
and postgraduate students of Economics for their
courses in Macroeconomics. Besides, students of
management will also find the book immensely useful in
acquiring fundamental knowledge of macroeconomics,
which is crucial for making business decisions.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the first Edition. PART I:
SUBSTANTIVE MACROECONOMICS—Introduction. National
Income Accounting. Aggregate Demand and Determination
of GDP. The Financial Sector, Money Supply and Interest
Rates. IS-LM Model. Classical Theory. Complete Keynesian
Model. The Real Sector and the Financial Sector.
Consumption Function. Theories of Investment. Demand
for Money. PART II MACROECONOMICS GONE ASTRAY—
New Classical and New Keynesian Theories. Modern
Theories of Growth: A Critique. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 468 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 795.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-87-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-88-3 (e-Book)
KENNEDY
Macroeconomic Essentials:
Understanding Economics in the News,
3rd ed.
PETER E. KENNEDY, formerly Professor Emeritus of
Economics at Simon Fraser University.
This introductory text offers an alternative to the
encyclopedic, technically oriented approach taken by
traditional textbooks on macroeconomic principles.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Concise and non-technical but at the same time rigorous,
its goal is not to teach students to shift curves on
diagrams but to help them understand fundamental
macroeconomic concepts and their real-world
applications. This is accomplished by the clear exposition
of introductory macroeconomic theory provided in the
book along with more than 700 two/three sentence
“news clips” of economics media coverage that serve as
illustrations/exercises of the concepts discussed.
This updated edition includes subprime mortgage crisis
and other subjects; new “curiosities” (boxed expositions
of important topics) have been added, as have “news
clips” about recent events; and the most challenging end-
of-chapter questions are now separated from the less
challenging. Many chapters include a set of numerical
exercises (quite different from those found in traditional
texts); a sample exam question appears at the end
of each section within a chapter; and a test bank of
multiple-choice questions (with answers) is available
online. Technical material appears in appendices following
each chapter. Other appendices offer answers to the
sample exam questions and the even-numbered end-of-
chapter exercises.
“By setting aside much of the formal apparatus of ‘curve-
shifting’ economics, Macroeconomic Essentials focuses
attention just where it should be—on understanding key
concepts and on thinking. At the center of economics
is, after all, the study of human behavior, not the art of
mathematical manipulation.”
—Lloyd J. Dumas, Professor of Economics
University of Texas at Dallas and author of
The Peacekeeping Economy
“In the third edition of Macroeconomics Essentials,
Peter Kennedy sets himself a difficult task and succeeds
beautifully. Kennedy’s textbook marries impressive
breadth, simplicity, and rigor. He provides a concise and
non-technical overview of the core analytical concepts
in macroeconomics who are tethered to bits of relevant
empirical evidence. This is a particularly useful textbook
for instructors outside of economics departments that
want to bring students quickly up to speed on the
principles that underlie recent political economic trends
and events (including the subprime crisis).”
—Stephen Nelson, Northwestern University
Contents: Preface. Introduction. The Basics of Supply
and Demand, and a Big Picture. Measuring GDP and
Inflation. Unemployment. The Role of Aggregate
Demand. The Supply Side. Growth and Productivity. The
Money Supply. The Monetarist Rule. Monetary Policy
and Interest Rates. Real-versus-Nominal Interest Rates.
Stagflation. The Balance of Payments. Policy in an Open
Economy. Purchasing Power Parity. Interest-Rate Parity.
Appendices—A: Answers to Sample Exam Questions.
B: Answers to Even-Numbered Exercises, Glossary, Index.
Latest Print 2014 / 480 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4486-0 (Print Book)
11
KENNEDY
Macroeconomic Theory
M. MARIA JOHN KENNEDY, Associate Professor, Economics,
Arul Anandar College, Karumathur, Madurai.
Macroeconomic theories were designed to cope up with
the economic turmoil, such as Great Depression, so as to
stabilize the economy. This book comprehensively explains
the broad aggregates and their interactions such as
national income and output, the unemployment rate, and
price inflation, and sub-aggregates like total consumption
and investment spending, and their components.
Divided into six parts, the textbook elaborates various
aspects of macroeconomics—circular flow and its effects
on national income, monetary theory, business cycle
theory and macroeconomic policies—in detail. The book
makes clear the difference between three approaches
to economics—Keynesian economics, which focuses on
demand; New-classical economics, which is based on
rational expectations and efficient markets; and Innova-
tion economics, which is focused on long run growth
through innovation.
A prominent feature of this text is the use of simple
algebraic expressions and formulations to reinforce
analytical expositions of complex macroeconomic theories
in students. The book also explicates how macroeconomic
models and their forecasts can be utilized by both
governments and large corporations to assist in the
development and evaluation of economic policy. The
chapters are incorporated with real-life examples giving
practical insight on the subject.
Primarily intended for the undergraduate and post-
graduate students of economics, this book can also
be beneficial for the students opting for the courses in
commerce.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Introduction—Micro-economics
and Macroeconomics. Basic Concepts in Macro-economics.
Part II: Circular Flow and National Income—Circular Flow
of Income. The National Income and Its Distribution.
Part III: Macroeconomic Theory—The Classical Theory of
Employment. Say’s Law of Market. The Keynesian Theory
of Income and Employment. The Multiplier. Balanced
Budget Multiplier and Foreign Trade Multiplier. The
Acceleration Principle. Super Multiplier. Consumption
Function. Theories of Consumption Function. Savings and
Investment. Rate of Interest. Keynes’ Theory of Money
and Prices Reformulation of the Quantity Theory of
Money. Evaluation of Keynesian Theory of Employment.
Part IV: Monetary Theory—IS-LM Function: General
Equilibrium of Product and Money Markets. Inflation.
Theories of Inflation. The Phillips Curve. Part V: Theories
of Business Cycle—Business Cycles. Some Alternative
Theories of Trade Cycle. Part VI: MacroEconomic Policy
and Theories of Distribution. Macroeconomic Policy.
Monetary Policy. Fiscal Policy. Incomes Policy. Rational
Expectations. Monetarism vs Keynesianism. Supply
Side Economics. New Classical Macroeconomics. Macro
Theories of Distribution. Index.
Latest Print 2018 / 400 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4240-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-70-7 (e-Book)
 12 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
MICHL
Macroeconomic Theory: A Short Course
THOMAS R. MICHL, Professor of Economics at Colgate
University.
This book presents all the key topics in intermediate-
level macroeconomic theory, using simplest mathematical
models possible, and highlights the casual linkages of
economic theory. The discussion opens the possibility
that the standard models are incomplete, challenging
students to form their own opinions about, for example,
the existence of a unique natural rate of unemployment.
The key chapter on inflation focuses on the relationship
between inflation and unemployment, which makes the
treatment of monetary policy more realistic and modern.
Other chapters explore the open economy under fixed
and floating exchange rates, the classical growth model,
and the Solow-Swan growth model. Classroom-tested
problems and a mathematical appendix supplement the
chapters.
Graduate students as well as those teaching macro-
economics should find this book highly useful since the
basic models developed here are indispensable.
Contents: Preface. Macroeconomic Accounting. Prices
and Output. Keynesian Theory. The IS Curve. The LM
Curve. The IS-LM Model. The Aggregate Demand Curve.
The Aggregate Supply Curve. The AS-AD Model. Inflation
and Unemployment. A Model with Active Monetary
Policy. Open Economy Basics. Fixed Exchange Rates.
Flexible Exchange Rates. The Classical Growth Model. The
Neoclassical Growth Model. A. Mathematical Appendix.
B. Answers to Selected Even Problems. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2009 / 284 pp. / 15.3 × 22.9 cm / ` 225.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2446-6 (Print Book)
PARCHURE
Macroeconomics
SUNAYINI PARCHURE, PhD, is Vice-Principal and Head,
Department of Economics, Symbiosis College of Arts and
Commerce, Pune.
This book titled Macroeconomics is an outcome of the
author's teaching-learning experience spanning several
years of teaching economics at the undergraduate and
postgraduate levels and has evolved from the earlier
works of the author on the theme of Macroeconomics. It
has evolved from actual classroom teaching and therefore
adopts a conversational and lucid style of communication.
The book seeks to capture the interest of the students
towards macroeconomic issues and make it relatable to
the actual dynamic functioning of economies.
Primarily intended for the undergraduate students of
commerce and economics, it will also be useful for the
students pursuing BBA course. It covers an array of topics
ranging from national income and related aggregates,
the demand and supply of money, the role of central
banks, theories of output, income and employment
determination with special focus on Keynes theory, post-
Keynesian developments like monetarism, supply-side
economics. It also covers issues like inflation, deflation,
Phillips curve, trade cycles, public finance, budget,
budgetary deficits and so on. It has chosen to restrict
itself to a closed economy and hence, does not deal
with issues of an open economy which requires a totally
different treatment.
KEY FEATURES
1. Evolved from actual classroom teaching.
2. Analysis of major concepts, theories and issues in
macroeconomics.
3. Blends economic concepts, theories and real data
wherever relevant.
4. Relevant statistics and data in the Indian context.
5. An exhaustive list of references including websites is
provided for ready reference.
6. Key takeaways, thoughtproving questions and relevant
exercises provided at the end of every chapter.
Contents:  Preface. Acknowledgements. Macroeconomics.
National Income. Money: Definitions and Functions.
Demand for Money. Supply of Money. Central Bank:
Credit Control Measures. Commercial Banks: Multiple
Credit Creation. Quantity Theory of Money. Inflation
and Deflation. Phillips Curve. Trade Cycle. Classical
Theory of Output, Income, Employment Determination.
Keynes Theory of Output, Employment and Income
Determination. Consumption Function. Investment
Function. Investment Multiplier and Principle of
Accelerator. Post Keynesian Developments: Monetarism.
Post Keynesian Developments: Supply Side Economics.
Maximum Social Advantage. Public Finance. Budget:
Meaning and Types. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 324 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 550.00
ISBN: 978-93-90544-03-5 (Print Book)
ISBN: 978-93-90544-04-2 (e-Book)
Mathematics for Economics
HOY, et al.
Mathematics for Economics, 3rd ed.
MICHAEL HOY, Professor in the Department of Economics
at the University of Guelph.
JOHN LIVERNOIS, Professor and Chair of the Department
of Economics at the University of Guelph.
CHRIS MCKENNA, Professor in the Department of
Economics at the University of Guelph.
RAY REES, Professor of Economics (Emeritus) at the Center
for Economic Studies (CES), University of Munich.
THANASIS STENGOS, Professor of Economics at the
University of Guelph.
This text offers a comprehensive presentation of the
mathematics required to tackle problems in economic
analyses. To give a better understanding of the
mathematical concepts, the text follows the logic of
the development of mathematics rather than that of an
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
economics course. The only prerequisite is high school
algebra, but the book goes on to cover all the mathematics
needed for undergraduate economics. It is also a useful
reference for graduate students. After a review of the
fundamentals of sets, numbers, and functions, the book
covers limits and continuity, the calculus of functions of
the one variable, linear algebra, multivariate calculus, and
dynamics. To develop the student’s problem-solving skills,
the book works through a large number of examples and
economic applications.
This streamlined third edition offers an array of new
and updated examples. Additionally, lengthier proofs
and examples are provided on the book’s website
http://mitpress.mit.edu/math_econ3. The book and
the Web material are cross-referenced in the text. A
Student Solutions Manual is available in ebook form,
and instructors are able to access online the Instructor’s
Manual, which includes PowerPoint slides.
Mathematics is the language of economics, and this book
is an excellent introduction to that language.
—George J. Mailath, Walter H. Annenberg Professor
in the Social Sciences and Professor of Economics,
University of Pennsylvania.
While there are many mathematics texts for economics
available, this one is by far the best. It covers a compre-
hensive range of techniques with interesting applications,
and the numerous worked examples and problems are a
real bonus for the instructor. Teaching a course with this
book is enjoyable and easy.
—Kevin Denny, University College Dublin
Contents: Preface. Part I: Introduction and Fundamentals—
Introduction. Review of Fundamentals. Sequences, Series,
and Limits. Part II: Univariate Calculus and Optimization—
Continuity of Functions. The Derivative and Differential
for Functions of One Variable. Optimization of Functions
of One Variable. Part III: Linear Algebra—Systems of
Linear Equations. Matrices. Determinants and the
Inverse Matrix. Some Advanced Topics in Linear Algebra.
Part IV: Multivariate Calculus—Calculus for Functions of
n-Variables. Optimization of Functions of n-Variables.
Constrained Optimization. Comparative Statics. Concave
Programming and the Kuhn–Tucker Conditions.
Part V: Integration and Dynamic Methods—Integration.
An Introduction to Mathematics for Economic Dynamics.
Linear, First-Order Difference Equations. Nonlinear,
First-Order Difference Equations. Linear, Second-Order
Difference Equations. Linear, First-Order Differential
Equations. Nonlinear, First-Order Differential Equations.
Linear, Second-Order Differential Equations. Simultaneous
Systems of Differential and Difference Equations. Optimal
Control Theory. Answers. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 976 pp. / 17.8 x 23.5 cm / ` 795.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4648-2 (Print Book)
13
Microeconomics /
Managerial Economics
CHAUHAN
Microeconomics: An Advanced Treatise,
2nd ed.
S.P.S. CHAUHAN is a visiting professor of Economics in
the Lal Bahadur Shastri Institute of Management (LBSIM),
New Delhi and IBS, Gurgaon, Haryana. He has worked
as an Associate Professor of Economics, Department
of Commerce, Delhi College of Arts and Commerce,
University of Delhi.
Enriching contents of the book in its Second Edition, the
author proffers a thoroughly revised and updated text
with main focus on Game Theory, Linear Programming
and Output-Input Analysis. Besides he gives due weightage
to the topics on International Trade, Decision Theory,
Pricing Policies in Practice and Basics of Econometrics
for Estimation of Economic Functions— by introducing
them as independent chapters in the present edition. The
concepts have been introduced keeping decision-makers in
mind, who may be associated with the corporate world or
pursuing management courses offered by various institutes
in India and abroad. The mathematical treatment of the
topics, which is one of the distinguishing features of the
book, is facilitated in a student-friendly approach.
PEDAGOGICAL FEATURES
• Scientific and logical organisation to provide a link
between the topics.
• Caselets to correlate the concepts to the real-world
economic scenario.
• Illustrative examples to reinforce understanding of the
concepts.
• Key terms and concepts to provide a bird’s eye-view of
each chapter for quick revision.
• Short and long answer questions to test the reader’s
grasp of the subject-matter.
• Answers, solutions and hints, wherever necessary are
appended to check correct application of the concepts
for building confidence among the readers.
Primarily intended for the undergraduate and postgraduate
students of commerce, economics and management, the
book is a comprehensive text in accordance with the
syllabi of B.Com, B.Sc (Economic Hons.), M.Com, M.A.
(Economics) and Master of Business Economics (MBE)
courses. Besides academic pursuits, the book will also be
useful for the aspirants of competitive examinations such
as Indian Administrative Services (IAS), Provincial Civil
Services (PCS), and Indian Economic Services (IES).
Contents: Preface. Introduction to Economics. Forces of
Demand and Supply in Action: The Price Mechanism.
Elasticity of Demand and Supply. Approaches to Demand
Analysis and Consumer Behavior. Production and
Producer’s Equilibrium. Costs and Revenue. Market Forms.
Price-output Decisions Under Perfect Competition. Price
 14 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Output Decisions of a Monopoly. Price Output Decisions
of Monopolistically Competitive Firms. Classical Oligopoly.
Game Theory. Sales Maximization. Determination of
Factor Prices. Investment Decisions and Capital Asset
Pricing. General Equilibrium and Economic Efficiency.
Markets with Asymmetric Information. Externalities and
Public Goods. Linear Programming. Input-output Analysis.
International Trade, Factor Mobility and comparative
Advantage. Decision Theory. Estimation of Functions in
Economics: Basics of Econometrics. Pricing in Practice.
Statistical Tables. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 968 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5222-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-322-1 (e-Book)
CHAUHAN
Microeconomics: Theory and
Applications (Part I)
S.P.S. CHAUHAN, Associate Professor in Economics,
Department of Commerce, Delhi College of Arts and
Commerce, University of Delhi.
This book presents a scientific and systematic development
of the underlying concepts of micro-economics, with due
emphasis on analytical and mathematical treatment of
the discipline, so that the students develop skills to apply
these concepts, in the light of current developments, to
real-world problems.
The book is organized into four units. The first unit is an
introduction to the study of the science of economics. It
defines the central problems of economics and outlines
the tools to solve them. The students are introduced to the
meaning and role of Production Possibility Curves to solve
application-oriented problems in economics. The second
unit gets students started on the study of microeconomics.
It explains interaction of demand and supply curves
and concept of equilibrium price. The factors affecting
elasticity of demand and supply are discussed. This unit
also looks at behaviour of consumers and explains several
tools used to analyse demand. The third and fourth units
elucidate the factors of production, the theory of costs
and revenue, different forms of markets, and price-output
determination in competitive markets.
Though the book is primarily intended for under-graduate
and postgraduate students of economics and commerce,
it would be immensely useful to management students
as well.
KEY FEATURES
• Over 250 neatly drawn figures to clarify the concepts
• Chapter-end summaries as ‘Key Terms and Concepts’ to
facilitate quick revision.
• Chapter-end short and long type questions of
numerical and analytical nature with hints and answers
as appropriate to probe the student’s understanding of
the material covered.
• Numerous illustrative examples throughout the text to
illustrate the application of concepts.
• Two case studies to encourage application orientation
among the students.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Unit I: Foundation
of Economics—Introduction to Economics. Unit II: Theory
of Price and Consumer Behaviour—Forces of Demand
and Supply in Action: The Price Mechanism. Elasticity
of Demand and Supply. Approaches to Demand Analysis
and Consumer Behaviour. Unit III: Production, Costs
and Revenue—Production and Producer’s Equilibrium.
Cost and Revenue. Unit IV: Forms of Markets—Market
Forms. Price-output Decisions of a Firm under Perfect
Competition. Index.
Latest Print 2008 / 432 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 295.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3604-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-316-0 (e-Book)
CHAUHAN
Microeconomics: Theory and
Applications (Part II)
S.P.S. CHAUHAN, Associate Professor in Economics,
Department of Commerce, Delhi College of Arts and
Commerce, University of Delhi.
This book presents a scientific and systematic develop-
ment of the underlying concepts of microeconomics with
due emphasis on analytical and mathematical treatment,
much needed for an application orientation of mind, to
help students in understanding and tackling the real-
world problems.
The book is organized into nine chapte` The first chapter
is devoted to price-output decisions of a monopoly. It
provides a comprehensive account of these decisions
under all their manifestations in a systematic manner
with illustrative sketches and mathematical explanations.
Chapters 2 to 4, devoted to imperfect markets, cover
monopolistic competition, duopoly and oligopoly under
different situations of product pricing and quantity
determination. The analysis is systematic incorporating
illustrative sketches and mathematical explanations.
Chapter 4 presents the sales maximization models of
Baumol.
Chapter 5 is devoted to factor pricing and Chapter 6 to
capital and investment decisions. The former focuses on
pricing of variable and fixed factors of production while
the latter on intertemporal analysis and choice under
uncertainty.
Chapters 7 to 9, devoted to general equilibrium and
market failure, analyse topics on general equilibrium and
Pareto efficiency, markets with asymmetric information
and externalities and public goods.
KEY FEATURES
• Over 145 neatly drawn figures to clarify the concepts.
• Chapter-end summaries as ‘key terms and concepts’ to
facilitate quick revision.
• Over 410 chapter-end short and long answer questions
of numerical and analytical nature with hints, and
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
answers as appropriate to probe the student’s
assimilation of the material covered.
• Numerous illustrative examples throughout the text to
illustrate the application of concepts.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Price-output
Decisions of a Monopoly. Price-output Decisions of
Monopolistically Competitive Firms. Price-output
Decisions in Oligopoly. Sales Maximization. Determination
of Factor Prices. Intertemporal Analysis and Decisions
under Uncertainties. General Equilibrium and Economic
Efficiency. Markets with Asymmetric Information.
Externalities and Public Goods. Index.
Latest Print 2009 / 288 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3715-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-321-4 (e-Book)
DATTA
Managerial Economics
DEBABRATA DATTA is a Former Professor, Institute of
Management Technology (IMT), Ghaziabad and Asutosh
College, University of Calcutta.
Managerial Economics, also known as business economics,
is a branch of microeconomics, which helps in dealing
with business decisions and management units. This book
elaborates on the theories and applications of Managerial
Economics through its various quantitative techniques,
operations research, mathematical programming, game
theory for strategic decisions and other computational
methods.
Divided into 8 sections and 24 Chapters, the book shows
how conveniently with the help of Managerial Economics
one can find a solution to the business problems such
as Risk analysis, Production analysis, Pricing, Budgeting,
Sales promotion and so on.
Section I analyses the economic behaviour of the
consumers; Section II discusses producers’ behaviour and
issues related to the production; Sections III, IV and V talks
about markets and firms and their types. The concluding
Sections VI, VII and VIII delves on the application part
of Economics in human resource management, finance,
marketing and strategy. The chapters are well-supported
with the Cases, Figures and important facts
The book is equipped with pedagogical aids in the form of
Summary, Glossary, Important Terms, Numerical problems
and Multiple Choice Questions.
Intended for the postgraduate students of Management,
the book will be equally beneficial for the practicing
Business Managers.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Introduction to
Managerial Economics. Section I: Analysis of Human
Behaviour as a Consumer—Consumer Behavior.
Demand. Choice Under Risk and Uncertainty. Section II:
Producer’s Behaviour. Theory of The Firm. Economics of
Production. Cost of Production. Section III: Market 1—
Market Morphology. Different Forms of Market. Monopoly.
Monopolistic Competition. Section IV: Market 2—Game
Theory. Oligopoly. New Market Institutions. Economics
15
of Information. Section V: Application of Economics In
Human Resource Management. Application of Consumer
Behaviour Theory to Human Resource Management.
Principal Agent Problem and Economic Incentive.
Section VI: Application of Economics in Marketing
Management—Behavioural Theory of Consumer Behaviour.
Forecasting. Pricing and Advertising Strategies. Section
VII: Application of Economics in Financial Management—
Financial Economics of Consumption and Investment.
Section VIII: Application of Economics in Strategy—
Business Firm Strategy. Boundaries of Firm. Economic
Regulation of Business. Reference and Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2017 / 604 pp. / 21.6 × 27.8 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5241-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90464-65-4 (e-book)
DEAN
Managerial Economics
JOEL DEAN, Graduate School of Business, Columbia
University and Joel Dean Associates.
The purpose of this book is to show how economic
analysis can be used in formulating business policies.
The book draws upon economic analysis for the concepts
of demand, cost, profit, competition, and so on, that
are appropriate for the development, of an economic
approach to executive decisions. Although the text is
preoccupied with concepts rather than detailed techniques
of estimation, it concentrates on those concepts that can
be measured and applied to management problems.
The book does not attempt to cover all aspects of either
management or economics: it deals with those phases
of enterprise economics that are particularly useful to
the management of a large industrial corporation. The
author’s endeavour successfully bridges the gap between
the problems of logic that intrigue economic theorists
and the problems of policies that plague practical
management needs in order to give executive access to
the practical contributions that economic thinking can
make to top-management policies.
Contents: Preface. Profits. Competition. Multiple Products.
Demand Analysis. Cost. Advertising. Basic Price. Product-
Line Pricing. Price Differentials. Capital Budgeting. Author
Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2017 / 640 pp. / 15.3 × 22.9 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-81-203-0116-0 (Print Book)
GOODWIN, et al.
Microeconomics in Context, 2nd ed.
NEVA R. GOODWIN, co-director of the Global Develop-
ment and Environment Institute (GDAE) at Tufts University.
JULIE A. NELSON, senior research associate at GDAE Tufts
University.
FRANK ACKERMAN, director of the Research and Policy
Program at GDAE, Tufts University.
THOMAS WEISSKOPF, Professor of Economics, University
of Michigan.
 16 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
This text updates the introductory undergraduate
students on critical concerns of the 21st century including
distributional equity and ecological sustainability; includes
discussions of historical, institutional political and social
factors to encourage students get engaged with the
subject matter.
It offers clear and insightful coverage of standard concepts
and models.
Unlike most microeconomics textbooks which focus
exclusively on markets and efficiency, this book starts
with the question of human well-being and then examine
how economic activities can contribute to or detract from
our well-being.
Microeconomics in Context also includes new develop-
ments in the roles of households, non-profit organizations,
market institutions and governments.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Sample Course
Outlines. Part One: The Context for Economic Analysis—
Economic Activity in Context. Economic Actors and
Organizations. Part Two: Supply and Demand—Market
Institutions. Supply and Demand. Working with Supply
and Demand. Part Three: Resource Maintenance,
Production, Distribution, and Consumption—Capital
Stocks and Resource Maintenance. Production Costs.
Production Decisions. Distribution: Exchange and Transfer.
Consumption and the Consumer Society. Part Four:
A Closer Look at Markets—Markets without Market
Power. Markets with Market Power. Markets for Labor.
Markets for Other Resources. Part Five: A Closer Look at
Economic Organizations—The Core Sphere: Households
and Communities. The Business Sphere: For-Profit Firms.
The Public Purpose Sphere: Governments and Nonprofits.
Part Six: Economic Outcomes and Economic Ideology—
The Variety of Economic Systems. Market Systems and
Normative Claims. Glossary. Index. About the Authors.
Latest Print 2009 / 560 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 350.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3747-3 (Print Book)
MAHESHWARI
Managerial Economics, 3rd ed.
YOGESH MAHESHWARI, Professor of Finance with the
Indian Institute of Management Indore.
For courses in managerial economics, this textbook,
now in its third edition, is specifically designed for the
students of management, commerce and economics
to provide them with a thorough understanding of
economic concepts and methodologies and the economic
environment influencing managerial decisions.
The book first lays a sound theoretical foundation
of basic concepts, definitions, and methodologies of
economics, being an essential prerequisite for students
to understand the theory of managerial economics. All
the basic principles are introduced with mathematical
complexity kept to minimum—essentials of applied
mathematics needed for comprehending the underlying
ideas of models and theories of economics are covered.
The book then moves on to systematically enumerates
the various tools of analysis such as demand analysis,
cost analysis, elasticity of demand, production analysis
and price theory, and highlights their importance in
managerial decision making through the concept-example
format, wherein a concept discussed is immediately
followed by a practical situation so that the reader can
understand its application. The end-of-chapter questions
reinforce a deeper understanding of the concepts
introduced in the text.
An exclusive chapter on linear programming emphasizes
the importance of this mathematical tool in finding
optimal business solutions. The book concludes with an
exhaustive introduction to macroeconomics, analyzing
in depth the concepts of inflation, income, savings and
investments, and growth and employment in Indian
context.
NEW TO THE THIRD EDITION
• Revised and expanded coverage of evolution of
economic thought, and basic economic terms.
• An enriched inclusion of demand forecasting techniques,
and the Cobb-Douglas production function.
• An extensive illustration of the commonly used pricing
methods and market power.
• Value addition to the existing list of case studies to
enhance students’ understanding of the theoretical
concepts.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition.
Acknowledgements Introducing Economics. Basic Applied
Mathematics. Introduction to Managerial Economics.
Demand Analysis. Elasticity of Demand. Demand
Forecasting. Production Analysis. Cost Analysis. Pricing.
Linear Programming. Introductory Macroeconomics.
Glossary. References. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 368 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4667-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90464-69-2 (e-book)
MUKHERJEE, et al.
Microeconomics
SAMPAT MUKHERJEE, MALLINATH MUKHERJEE and
AMITAVA GHOSE, all with Department of Economics,
St. Xavier’s College, Kolkata.
This comprehensive text on Microeconomics provides
complete understanding of the subject and is written in
reader-friendly language. Each chapter introduces the
major economic concepts with illustrative examples. The
theories have been spelt out without the use of rigorous
mathematics. The text is prepared strictly referring to
the new All-India Syllabi. It contains both numerical and
logical questions at the end of each chapter. Each chapter
is followed by a list of major concepts and their brief
elaboration—that will help the students to quickly review
the main arguments.
The text is suited for courses in Microeconomics for
graduate students of Economics and Management.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Contents: Preface. Introduction. Elasticities of Demand
and Supply. Consumer’s Behaviour. Production. Costs of
Production. Perfect Competition. Monopoly. Imperfect
Competition. An Introduction to Factor Pricing and Income
Distribution. Rent. Wages. Interest. Profit. Investment
Analysis. Welfare Economics. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 368 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2318-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-542-3 (e-Book)
NADAR & VIJAYAN
Managerial Economics, 3rd ed.
E. NARAYANAN NADAR, former Principal and Head,
Department of Economics, V.H.N. Senthikumara Nadar
College, Virudhunagar, Tamil Nadu.
S. VIJAYAN, former Head, Department of Management
Studies at V.H.N. Senthikumara Nadar College,
Virudhunagar, Tamil Nadu, is a well-known Management
Consultant.
Managerial Economics has assumed a predominant role
in today’s globalized and liberalized economy because
of the financial implications of many decisions that a
manager has to take in his day-to-day professional life.
This comprehensive and student-friendly book strives to
equip the young, practising and budding managers to find
solutions to the real-world problems through the efficient
and effective use of economic tools and techniques.
The authors who admirably combine academic and
professional experience give a clear and straightforward
analysis of the various topics in managerial economics.
The text begins with an overview of managerial economics
and describes the modern business firm and its objectives
along with the concepts of market mechanism, demand
theory and production analysis. The text then moves
further to explain managerial techniques, macroeconomic
theory and international trade and finance along with the
risks and uncertainties involved in business. Besides, it
also explains the cost and revenue, supply, pricing, profit
and investment analyses. Finally, this book discusses
some important Case Studies to reinforce the concepts
presented in the text.
The third edition of the book comprises multiple choice
questions (with answers) at the end of each chapter to
test the understanding of the concepts discussed in the
chapter.
Intended as a text for postgraduate students of
Management, Commerce and Economics, the book would
also be useful for undergraduate engineering courses
where Managerial Economics is offered. Finally, the book
can be profitably used by marketing and management
consultants, business executives and other related
professionals.
KEY FEATURES
• Includes several simple, numerical examples with
solutions for easy understanding of theory.
• Contains a large number of tables and figures to
illustrate the concepts.
17
• Provides chapter-end exercises to check students’
comprehension of the subject.
Contents: Preface. Introduction to Managerial Economics.
Fundamental Concepts and Models of Managerial
Economics. Modern Business Firm. Market Mechanism
and Circular Flow of Economic Activity. Demand
Analysis—Part 1 (Theory of Demand). Demand Analysis—
Part 2 (Elasticity of Demand). Demand Analysis—
Part 3 (Demand Forecasting). Production Analysis.
Cost and Revenue Analysis. Supply Analysis. Pricing
Analysis. Profit Analysis. Investment Analysis. Managerial
Techniques. Macroeconomic Analysis. International
Economics and Finance. Analysis of Risk and Uncertainty.
Cases for Discussion. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 364 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-93-87472-79-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-87472-80-8 (e-book)
PARCHURE
Macroeconomics
SUNAYINI PARCHURE, is Vice-Principal and Head,
Department of Economics, Symbiosis College of Arts and
Commerce, Pune.
This book titled Macroeconomics is an outcome of the
author's teaching-learning experience spanning several
years of teaching economics at the undergraduate and
postgraduate levels and has evolved from the earlier
works of the author on the theme of Macroeconomics. It
has evolved from actual classroom teaching and therefore
adopts a conversational and lucid style of communication.
The book seeks to capture the interest of the students
towards macroeconomic issues and make it relatable to
the actual dynamic functioning of economies.
Primarily intended for the undergraduate students of
commerce and economics, it will also be useful for the
students pursuing BBA course. It covers an array of topics
ranging from national income and related aggregates,
the demand and supply of money, the role of central
banks, theories of output, income and employment
determination with special focus on Keynes theory, post-
Keynesian developments like monetarism, supply-side
economics. It also covers issues like inflation, deflation,
Phillips curve, trade cycles, public finance, budget,
budgetary deficits and so on. It has chosen to restrict
itself to a closed economy and hence, does not deal
with issues of an open economy which requires a totally
different treatment.
KEY FEATURES
1. Evolved from actual classroom teaching
2. Analysis of major concepts, theories and issues in
macroeconomics
3. Blends economic concepts, theories and real data
wherever relevant
4. Relevant statistics and data in the Indian context
5. An exhaustive list of references including websites is
provided for ready reference
6. Key takeaways, thought provoking questions and
relevant exercises provided at the end of every chapter
 18 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Macroeconomics.
National Income. Money: Definitions and Functions.
Demand for Money. Supply of Money. Central Bank:
Credit Control Measures. Commercial Banks: Multiple
Credit Creation. Quantity Theory of Money. Inflation
and Deflation. Phillips Curve. Trade Cycle. Classical
Theory of Output, Income, Employment Determination.
Keynes Theory of Output, Employment and Income
Determination. Consumption Function. Investment
Function. Investment Multiplier and Principle of
Accelerator. Post Keynesian Developments: Monetarism.
Post Keynesian Developments: Supply Side Economics.
Maximum Social Advantage. Public Finance. Budget:
Meaning and Types. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 364 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 550.00
ISBN-978-93-90544-03-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90544-04-2 (e-Book)
PRUSTY
Managerial Economics
SADANANDA PRUSTY, Professor, Institute of Management
Technology (IMT), Ghaziabad (UP).
The role of Managerial Economics has become all the
more important today because of the increasingly
competitive business world and the financial implications
of many managerial decisions in such a scenario. This
compact yet comprehensive book discusses the basic
concepts and techniques of microeconomic analysis and
their applications to managerial decision making with
many useful and practical examples.
The text explains the basic concepts of the demand
function and demand curve, the supply function and the
supply curve, demand elasticities and their applications,
techniques of demand estimation, and the theory of con-
sumer behaviour. It also analyzes the theory of produc-
tion, clarifies the nature of economic costs, and describes
the profit maximizing tools of a business firm. Finally,
the book describes standard pricing rules under different
assumptions about the structure of the market in which
the firm operates and examines certain pricing practices
such as mark-up pricing and multiple products pricing.
KEY FEATURES
• Gives many Indian cases and Indian examples.
• Provides data analysis of certain firms and industries
in India with respect to sales or demand forecasting
through statistical tools.
• Gives multiple choice, analytical and applied questions
at the end of each chapter.
Intended as a text for the postgraduate students of
management, the book would be equally useful for the
postgraduate students of Commerce and Economics.
Besides, practising managers should find the book quite
valuable.
Contents: Preface. Demand-supply Analysis. Elasticity
and its Applications. Demand Analysis, Estimation
and Forecasting. Theory of Consumer Choice. Welfare
Economics. Production Analysis of the Firm. Analysis
of Cost of Production of the Firm. Profit Analysis of
the Firm. Perfectly Competitive Market. Monopolistic
Market. Monopolistic Competitive Market. Oligopoly
Market. Game Theoretic Approaches to Oligopoly. Pricing
Practices. Index.
Latest Print 2010 / 304 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4094-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-417-4 (e-Book)
REDDY & SARASWATHI
Managerial Economics and
Financial Accounting
M. KASI REDDY, Associate Professor, School of
Management Studies, Chaitanya Bharathi Institute
of Technology, Hyderabad.
S. SARASWATHI, Senior Assistant Professor, School of
Management Studies, Chaitanya Bharathi Institute
of Technology, Hyderabad.
This text presents an accessible introduction to techniques
and applications of economic analysis and financial
accounting as a method for approaching real-life business
problems for managerial decision making in a logical
manner. It focusses on the essential skills needed to
formulate business policies that help gain a competitive
edge in today’s work environment.
The book discusses the basic concepts, terminology, and
methods that eventually allow students to interpret,
analyse, and evaluate actual corporate financial
statements. It covers the major areas of managerial
economics and financial accounting such as the theory
of the firm, the demand theory and forecasting, the
production and cost theory and estimation, the market
structure and pricing, investment analysis, accountancy,
and different forms of business organisations.
The book includes numerous examples, problems, self-
assessment tests, as well as review questions at the
end of each chapter to aid in working out solutions to
business problems.
The book will be particularly suitable for courses in
Managerial Economics and Financial Accounting as part
of an engineering degree education at undergraduate
level where the students have no previous background in
economic and financial analysis. It will also be immensely
useful for M.B.A., M.Com and C.A. students, business
executives, and administrators who need to learn the
application of economic theory to realistic business
situations.
Contents: Preface. Managerial Economics: The Basics.
Demand Analysis. Production and Cost Analysis. Capital
Management and Investment Decisions. Accountancy.
Types of Business Organisation. Glossary. Bibliography.
Model Questions. Present Value Tables. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 592 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 375.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3321-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-157-9 (e-book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Public Economics
GHOSH & GHOSH
Public Finance, 3rd ed.
AMBAR GHOSH, Professor of Economics, Jadavpur
University, Kolkata.
CHANDANA GHOSH, Assistant Professor, Indian Statistical
Institute, Kolkata.
This book, in its third edition, continues to present,
in detail, the theories of public finance, fundamental
principles, and decisions taken by the Government on
the basis of the guidelines yielded by these theories.
It makes the comprehension of the subject easier
by developing simple mathematical models to derive
the major results in each of the above areas, and by
explaining the economic intuition of the results in detail.
The concepts are illustrated with the help of simple
examples taken from the Indian economy. Moreover, the
book assesses India’s economic policies in the light of the
theories discussed.
KEY FEATURES
This book exposes the students to various facets of public
finance which develops analytical frameworks to:
• Address the issues of efficient allocation of resources
between private, public and mixed goods
• Ensure equitable distribution of tax burden among
individuals
• Find ways of minimizing inefficiency of the tax structure
• Study the statutory and economic incidence of different
types of taxes
• Examine the implications of government borrowing
• Develop the rationale of distributing economic or fiscal
responsibilities and tax powers among different tiers of
government.
NEW TO THE THIRD EDITION
• Introduces a new Chapter 11 on Goods and Services
Tax (GST)
• Incorporates updated data (in the tables) throughout,
including the newly revised tax slabs
TARGET AUDIENCE
• Undergraduate and postgraduate students of Economics
for a course in Public Finance/ Public Economics.
Contents: Preface. Introduction. Public Goods, Mixed
Goods and Externality. Principles of Tax Equity. Efficiency
of Taxation. Tax Incidence. Personal Income Taxation.
Corporation Income Tax. Sales Tax. Public Debt. Fiscal
Federalism. Goods and Services Tax. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 380 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-27-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-28-8 (eBook)
19
KENNEDY
Public Finance
M. MARIA JOHN KENNEDY, Associate Professor in
Economics, Department of Economics, Arul Anandar
College, Karumathur, Madurai, Tamil Nadu.
Public finance is a fascinating, challenging and
evergrowing subject which has the unique distinction of
having intimate interaction between theory and practice.
This thorough and comprehensive textbook explains the
core concepts of public finance such as taxation, public
expenditure, budgeting, federal finance and related
aspects in a concise and systematic manner.
Systematically divided into nine parts, the book elaborates
the various aspects of fiscal economics in a student-
friendly manner. As the Indian economy is committed
to the goal of growth with justice, there is an inherent
analysis of growth and welfare consideration in the
treatment of the subject. The chapters are incorporated
with real-life examples giving practical insight into the
subject.
Well-written and eminently readable, the text is suited to
the needs of undergraduate students of economics for a
course in Public Finance/Public Economics. Besides, this
book will also be beneficial to the students preparing for
various competitive examinations.
KEY FEATURES
• Chapter-end summary reminds students the most
important aspects of the chapter.
• Key terms provide a bird’s eye-view of each chapter for
quick revision.
• Review questions and multiple-choice questions at
the end of each chapter are designed to probe a
student’s grasp of concepts discussed in the text.
• References are provided for further study and research.
Contents: Preface. Part I—Definition and Scope of Public
Finance. Public Goods and Externalities. Part II—Public
Revenue. Adam Smith’s Canons of Taxation. Theories
and Principles of Taxation. Types of Taxes. Incidence and
Shifting of Taxation. Effects of Taxation. Taxable Capacity.
Taxes on Income and Wealth. Commodity Taxes. Part III:
Public Expenditure—Public Expenditure. Theories of Public
Expenditure. The Principle of Maximum Social Advantage.
Effects of Public Expenditure. Part IV: Public Debt—Public
Debt. Part V: Budgeting—Public Budget. Balanced Budget
and Multiplier. Supply Side Economics. Part VI: Fiscal
Policy—Fiscal Policy. Part VII: Fiscal Federalism—Federal
Finance. Finance Commissions. Part VIII: Local Finance—
Local Government Finance. Part IX: Public Enterprises—
Public Enterprises In India. Black Money. Index.
Latest Print 2012 / 312 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4539-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-398-6 (e-Book)
 20 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Other Titles
KENNEDY
International Economics
M. MARIA JOHN KENNEDY, Associate Professor,
Department of Economics, Arul Anandar College
(Autonomous), Karumathur, Madurai, Tamil Nadu.
During the last few decades, the global economy has
undergone rapid structural changes. With the increasing
internationalisation of economic life, the study of
International Economics becomes more complex due to
the conjuncture of several economic, social, demographic
and political factors operating both at the national and
international spheres.
Organized in five parts, this book captures all the recent
developments in International Trade Theory in a simple,
concise manner. The book provides a thorough review
and analysis of the international trade and business
environment, and helps students to apply this knowledge
to practical aspects of doing business in international
markets. A rigorous approach is used to provide students
with a good understanding of the complex nature of
international trade and business activities. It emphasizes
the economic, geographical, and political factors that
make international business significantly different from
domestic business activities.
The book is primarily intended as a textbook for under-
graduate and post-graduate students of economics,
commerce and management for their courses on inter-
national trade, foreign trade and international economics.
KEY FEATURES
This book helps students to
• Understand the fundamental determinants of the
balance of payments and exchange rates
• Identify and analyse different theoretical models of
international economics in light of ‘real world’ situations
• Learn multidimensional perspective of the goals,
operations and consequences of different trade policies
• Gain an understanding of basic economic framework to
analyze international economic policies
Contents: Preface. Part I: Pure Theory of International
Trade—Inter-Regional and International Trade. Classical
Theory of Comparative Cost Advantages. Haberler’s
Theory of Opportunity Cost. Heckscher–Ohlin Theory
(Modern Theory of Factor Endowments). Recent Theories
on International Trade. Gains from Trade and Terms
of Trade. Prebisch–Singer Thesis (Secular Deterioration
Hypothesis). Part II: Commercial Policy—Free Trade vs.
Protection. Tariffs. Quotas. Dumping. Exchange Control.
Theory of Customs Union. Part III: Balance of Payments—
Balance of Payments: Meaning and Components.
Adjustment Mechanisms of Balance of Payments. Foreign
Trade Multiplier. Foreign Exchange. Foreign Exchange
Market. Foreign Exchange Rate Policy. Hybrid Intermediate
Exchange Rate System. Optimum Currency Area. Part IV:
International Economic Relations—International Monetary
Fund. World Bank. World Trade Organisation. Asian
Development Bank (ADB). Euro Dollar (Euro Currency)
Market. Part V: International Capital Flows—Capital
Movements. Foreign Direct Investment. Multinational
Corporations. New International Economic Order: North
Dialogue. Answer to Multiple-Choice Questions. Index.
Latest Print 2014 / 344 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4986-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-406-8 (e-Book)
SULPHEY
Behavioural Finance
M.M. SULPHEY, Professor and Head, HR Domain, TKM
Institute of Management, Kollam (Kerala).
This comprehensive, lucidly written text is an ideal
introduction to behavioural finance. The book caters
to the needs of both undergraduate and postgraduate
management courses. It covers almost all important
topics of behavioural finance prescribed in the syllabi of
various universities across India, including Neurofinance
and Forensic Accounting, which have rare occurrence in
other books but are important from future perspective.
There is a dearth of literature in behavioural finance, and
if available, then the books are of large volumes, written
by foreign authors citing examples and case studies
from the countries other than India. Hence, the present
book aims at providing information in global scenario,
particularly Indian cases.
A number of case studies and box items make this text
interesting and informative. Review questions given at
the end of each chapter help students in assessing their
knowledge after having learned the concepts. Overall, the
book will help readers in gaining adequate knowledge of
the subject.
Contents: Preface. Standard Finance. Behaviour and
Decision Making. Evolution of Behavioural Finance.
Financial Market Anomalies. Theories of Behavioural
Finance. Market Bubbles. Neurofinance. Forensic
Accounting. Behavioural Corporate Finance. The Way
Forward. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 208 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5028-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90464-30-2 (e-book)
Education  
Childhood Care and Education
MANGAL & MANGAL
Childhood and Growing Up
S.K. MANGAL, formerly Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R. College
of Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
SHUBHRA MANGAL, Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R.S. College
of Education, Noida.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
The book, with comprehensive and practicable coverage,
acquaints its readers with the thorough knowledge and
skills to help the growing children in their proper growth
and development enabling them to reach the limit of
their excellence on one hand, and instilling in them the
sense of responsibility towards their society and nation
on the other hand. It dwells on the essential topics such
as nature of the process of growth and development
going on at the various ages and developmental stages of
children, their developmental needs and characteristics,
individual differences and diversities existing among
them, development of various abilities and capacities
like intelligence, creativity, and overall personality
characteristics, nature of the age-linked behavioural
problems, adjustment and mental health, parenting
styles, and methods of dealing with the behavioural
problems, adjustment, and stressful conditions of the
developing children. The text equips the readers with all
what is in demand for helping the developing children
at this juncture of rapid industrialisation, globalisation,
urbanisation, modernisation and economic change.
KEY FEATURES
• Incorporates quite advanced topics such as emotional
intelligence, use of reflective journals, anecdotal
records and narratives as method of understanding
child’s behaviour, and so on.
• Includes detailed discussion of theories of child
development, theories of learning, theories of
intelligence, theories of achievement motivation,
theories of creativity, and theories of personality.
• Offers engaging language and user-friendly mode of
discussion.
• Adequately illustrated with examples, figures and tables
• Comprises chapter-end summary for quick glance of
the concepts.
The book is primarily designed for the undergraduate
students of education.
Contents: Preface. Growth and Development: Concept,
Principles and Influencing Factors. Growth and
Development During Different Stages. Theories of
Development. Heredity and Environment. Maturation:
Concept and Educational Implications. Developmental
Tasks and their Educational Implications. Individual
Differences: Concept, Dimensions and Educational
Implications. Methods and Ways to Understand Children’s
Behaviour. Adolescents: Developmental Characteristics,
Problems and Stress Related Issues. Intelligence: Concept,
Theories and Measurement. Emotional Intelligence:
Concept, Measurement and Development. Creativity:
Concept, Theories and Development. Personality:
Meaning, Nature and Theories. Diverse or Exceptional
Children. Adjustment: Meaning, Nature and Methods.
Understanding Needs and Behavioural Problems of
Children. Mental Health and Hygiene. Parenting styles or
Child Rearing Practices. Deprivation and Deprived Children.
Schooling of The Developing Children. Childhood in the
Context of Globalization, Adult Culture, Urbanization and
Economic Changes. Counseling of Children in Specific
Stressful  Conditions. Socialization: Concept and Agencies.
21
Social and Cultural Changes: Concept and their Impact on
Child Development. Impact of Media on Growing Children.
Marginalization and Stereotyping in the Society. Protection
of Child Rights. Equity Issues and Inclusion. Child Obesity:
Causes and Remedies. Concept, Dimensions and Factors
Affecting Well being of the Children. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 556 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm
ISBN-978-93-88028-14-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-15-8 (e-Book) / ` 595.00
eaxy ,oa eaxy
ckY;dky ,oa o`f) &mUeq[k ckyd
(Childhood and Growing up)
,l-ds- eaxy] lh-vkj- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqd's ku jksgrd] gfj;k.kk
ds Ákpk;Z ,oa ÁksQslj in ls lsokfuo`r gSaA
'kqHkzk eaxy] lh-vkj-,l- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqds'ku] uks,Mk esa
izkpk;Z ,oa izksQslj in ij lsokjr gSaA
ckY;koLFkk rFkk lEcfU/kr fodklkRed o"kks± dks ekuo thou dk
Lof.kZe dky dgk tkrk gSA ckydksa dk leqfpr fodkl vkSj lek;kstu
u dsoy muds Lo;a ds fy;s gh ewY;oku fl) gksrk gS cfYd lekt
;k jk"Vª fo'ks"k dh izxfr esa Hkh mldk mYys[kuh; ;ksxnku jgrk gSA
bl mís'; dh iwfrZ gsrq ikB~; iqLrd dh fo"k;oLrq dks rhl fofHkUu
v/;k;ksa esa foHkkftr fd;k x;k gSA bl fn'kk esa ckydksa dh o`f) ,oa
fodkl dh vo/kkj.kk] izfu;e rFkk dkjdksa dh ppkZ djrs gq, ckydksa
ds 'kkjhfjd] xked] ekufld] lkekftd] laosxkRed] uSfrd rFkk
Hkk"kkxr fodkl vkSj muls lEcfU/kr fodkl fl)kUrksa dks foLrkj esa
o.kZu fd;k x;k gSA oa'kkuqØe ,oa okrkoj.k lEcU/kh izfØ;kvksa dh
ckyd dh o`f) ,oa fodkl ds lanHkZ esa foLrkj ls ppkZ dh xbZ gS A
ifjiDou dh izfØ;k rFkk fodkl”khy ckydksa dh o`f) ,oa fodkl
ij iM+us okys mlds izHkko dk o.kZu gSA
ckydksa ds fodkl ds lEcU/k esa mudh fd'kksjkoLFkk dks dkQh
egÙoiw.kZ le; ekuk tkrk gSA fd'kksjkoLFkk vkSj mlls tqM+h gqbZ lHkh
ckrksa ij izdk'k Mkyus dk iz;Ru fd;k x;k gSA
ckydksa ds lek;kstu] O;ogkjxr leL;kvksa rFkk ekufld LokLF;
lEcU/kh igyqvksa ds o.kZu dks bl iqLrd esa egRo fn;k x;k gSA
vkxs ds v/;k; vBkjg esa ekrk&firk }kjk vius ykyu&ikyu gsrq
dke esa yk;s tkus okys fofHkUu rjhdksa ;k 'kSfy;ksa dh ppkZ dh xbZ gSA
ckydksa ds fodkl vkSj fgr fpUru ls lEcfU/kr ckrksa ij izdk'k
Mkyk x;k gSA
ikB~;iqLrd ds fofHkUu izdj.kksa ds mfpr Li"Vhdj.k ,oa cks/k gsrq
blesa vko';d mnkgj.kksa] vkjs[kksa] vkd`fr;ksa rFkk rkfydkvksa dks
LFkku fn;k x;k gS tks bl iqLrd dks vU; iqLrdksa ls fHkUu djrh gSA
fo"k; lwph% izLrkoukA o`f) ,oa fodkl&vo/kkj.kk] lkekU;
fl)kUr ,oa dkjdA oS;fDrd fodkl ds vk;keA fodkl
ds fl)kUrA oa ” kkuq Ø e ,oa okrkoj.kA ifjiDork&lEiz R ;;
,oa “kS f {kd fufgrkFkZ A fodklkRed dk;Z ,oa muds
 22 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
fufgrkFkZA oS;fDrd Hksn A ckydksa vkSj fd”kksjksa ds O;ogkj
ds ckjs esa tkuus dh fof/k;ka ,oa rjhdsA fd”kksj&fo”ks’krk;sa]
vko”;drk;sa ,oa ruko ls lEcfU/kr ckrsaA cqf)&vFkZ] izÑfr]
fl)kUr ,oa ekiuA laosxkRed cqf)&vo/kkj.kk] ekiu ,oa fodklA
l`tukRedrk&lEizR;; ,oa fodklA O;fDrRo&vo/kkj.kk ,oa
lajpukA fofHkUu ;k fof”k’V ckydA lek;kstu dk euksfoKkuA
ckydksa vkSj fd”kksjksa dh vko”;drkvksa rFkk O;ogkjkRed leL;kvksa
dh le>A ekufld LokLF; ,oa LokLF; foKkuA isjsfUVax LVkby
;k ikyu iks’k.k ds rjhdsA oapu ,oa oafpr ckydA fodkl”khy
ckydksa dh fo|ky;h f”k{kkA oS”ohdj.k] “kgjhdj.k vkSj vkfFkZd
ifjorZuksa dk ckydksa ds fodkl ij izHkkoA fo”ks’k rkuoiw.kZ
fLFkfr;ksa esa ckydksa dks ijke”kZA lkekthdj.k&vo/kkj.kk ,oa
laLFkk,¡A lkekftd ,oa lkaLÑfrd ifjorZu&vo/kkj.kk rFkk ckyd
ds fodkl ij izHkkoA fodklksUeq[k ckydksa vkSj fd”kkjksa ij tuek/;
dk izHkkoA lekt esa ik”ohZdj.k ,oa :f<+okfnrk ;k :f<+c)rkA
ckyd vf/kdkj laj{k.kA lerk lEcU/kh ekeys vkSj lesdrs hdj.kA
ckydksa esa eksVik&dkj.k ,oa mipkjA Bhd&Bkd gksuk&vo/kkj.kk]
vk;ke rFkk izHkkfor djus okys dkjdA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2021 / 612 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 895.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-55-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-56-1 (e-Book)
SEN GUPTA
Early Childhood Care and Education
M. SEN GUPTA, Professor and Principal, KIIT College of
Education, Gurgaon.
Early Childhood Care and Education (ECCE) programme
has gained importance today. Driven by socio-economic
compulsions these days both parents seek jobs and
remain away from the child for the whole day. Early
Childhood Care centres provide them a safer alternative
where their children can grow and develop in a stimulative
environment. Therefore, ECCE has been comprehensively
included in teacher training programmes at all levels.
Designed as a text for the undergraduate students of
education (B.Ed.) and elementary education (B.El.Ed.),
it provides uptodate and ready to use material. A
complete section in the book is devoted to planning
a pre-school or ECCE centre, organizing and managing
it for its optimum utility and efficient functioning.
The effort has been made to include the topics which will
help students to understand the ECCE and its functioning
in a straightforward and unconventional manner.
KEY FEATURES
• Written in a conversational style
• Comprehensive coverage with sample activities
• Numerous figures and illustrations for better under-
standing of the subject
• Integration of theory and practice
• Conceptual clarity and practical approach
The book would also be extremely useful to the nursery
school teachers, teacher educators, parents, post-graduate
students of education (M.Ed.) and for those who would
like to run an ECCE centre as a good reference material.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Early Childhood Care and
Education in India: Progress and Prospects. Growth and
Development of Child. Health, Nutrition and Personal
Safety. Early Childhood Education Curriculum. ECCE
Programme Planning, Organization and Management.
Stimulating Child-centred Programme. SAMPLE
ACTIVITIES—1. Fostering Physical Skills. 2. Conducting
Self-expressional Activities. 3. Conducting a Field Trip.
4. Conducting Home Visits. 5. Conducting a Case Study
of a Child. 6. Story Telling. 7. Organizing Parent Education
Meetings. 8. Preparing Flash Cards. 9. Making Puppets for
Children. 10. Developing Reasoning and Problem Solving.
11. Developing Memory Skills. 12. Developing Reading
Readiness. References. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 320 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 295.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3964-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-81-3 (e-Book)
lsu xqIr
izkjafHkd ckY;koLFkk% ns[k&Hkky vkSj f'k{kk
eathr lsu xqIr] funs'kd] ds-vkbZ-vkbZ-Vh-] dkWyst vkWQ ,tqds'ku]
xqM+xkaoA
Ekkuo thou esa ÁkjafHkd ckY;koLFkk vR;ar laosnu'khy rFkk Hkkoh
laHkkoukvksa ds }kj [kksyus esa fu.kkZ;d fl) gksrh gSA
bl iqLrd esa 0-6 o"kZ ds cPpksa dh ns[kHkky] mudh f'k{kk
ckSf)d] 'kkjhfjd o HkkoukRed vko';drkvksa ,oa mfpr ikyu-iks"k.k
ds rF;ksa dks mnkgj.k lfgr ljy Hkk"kk esa le>k;k x;k gSA ÁkjafHkd
ckY;koLFkk ns[k-Hkky vkSj f'k{kk dsanz dh LFkkiuk lacaèkh rF; ,oa
fofoèk xfrfofèk;ksa ds uewus Hkh bl iqLrd esa ÁLrqr fd, x, gSa tks
m|fe;ksa rFkk Á'kkldksa dk ekxZn'kZu djus esa l{ke gSaA
oSKkfud fo"k;-oLrq dks O;kogkfjd 'kSyh esa ÁLrqr fd, tkus ds dkj.k
;g iqLrd ch-,M- rFkk ch-,y-,M- fo|kfFkZ;ksa ds vfrfjDr lHkh ekrk-
firk] Áf'k{k.kkfFkZ;ksa] vè;kidksa] vè;kid Áf'k{kdksa rFkk 'kksèkdÙkkZvksa ds
fy, leku :i ls mi;ksxh fl) gksxhA
iqLrd dh fo'ks"krk,a
• ljy Hkk"kk esa izLrqrhdj.kA
• vusd Ásjd fØ;kvksa o fp= lfgr fØ;kfof/k;ksa dk fcanqokj o.kZuA
• Hkkjrh; ifjfLFkfr;ksa ,oa ijaijkvksa dks /;ku esa j[krs gq, f'k{kk
dsanzksa dk o.kZuA
• lS)kafrd vkSj O;kogkfjd nksuksa i{kksa ij i;kZIr cyA
fo"k; lwph% ÁkDdFkuA vkeq[kA vkHkkjksfDrA Hkkjr eas ÁkjafHkd
ckY;koLFkk ns[kHkky vkSj f'k{kk % Áxfr ,oa laHkkouk,aA cPps dh
o`f) vkSj fodklA LokLF;] iks"k.k rFkk O;fDrxr lqj{kkA ÁkjafHkd
ckY;koLFkk f'k{kk dh ikB~;p;kZA ÁkjafHkd ckY;koLFkk ns[kHkky vkSj
f'k{kk dk;ZØe dk fu;kstu] laxBu rFkk ÁcaèkA lh[kuk  % ,d
lgt Áo`fÙkA mn~nhid % cky-dsafnzr dk;ZØeA fØ;k,a % 'kkjhfjd
dkS'kyksa dk fodkl( vkRekfHkO;fDr dh fØ;kvksa dk lapkyu(
{ks=-Hkze.k dk lapkyu( ?kj ij eqykdkr dk lapkyu( cPps ds
thou-o`Ùk dk v/;;u( dFkk okpu( ekrk-firk dks f'kf{kr djuss
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
gsrq cSBdsa vk;ksftr djuk( ¶yS'k dkMZ cukuk( cPpksa ds fy,
dBiqrfy;ka cukuk( rdZ rFkk leL;k lek/kku ds dkS'ky dk
fodkl( Le`fr dkS'ky dk fodkl( iBu rRijrk dk fodklA
lanHkZ xzaFkA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2013 / 324 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4822-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-834-9 (e-Book)
Curriculum Development
JOSHI & SALUNKE
Content Based Methodology
ANANT N. JOSHI, Director, School of Education, Yashwantrao
Chavan Maharashtra Open University (YCMOU), Nashik.
KAVITA S. SALUNKE, Lecturer in School of Education,
YCMOU.
This concise and easy-to-read book deals with the theory
and practice of content based methodology. It begins by
showing the importance of integration of teaching units
of one discipline with those of other disciplines and a
critical evaluation of the subject curriculum, syllabi and
textbook to identify their limitations. Thereafter, the text
describes the methods for determining the higher level
of knowledge required for a teacher to teach a specific
teaching unit. Besides, considerations which teachers
need to take into account before teaching their subjects,
pedagogical analysis of content, selection of proper
approaches, teaching methods, and models of teaching to
suit the nature of teaching contents are also explained.
Finally, those factors which are to be taken into account
for verifying whether the objectives have been achieved
or not are discussed with sufficient examples.
Primarily meant for undergraduate students of education
(B.Ed. and D.Ed.), the text can also serve as a source book
for teacher-educators, teachers, and teacher-trainees,
whatever their teaching subjects may be.
Contents: Preface. Content-cum-Methodology: Concept
and Nature. Nature and Structure of Discipline. Role of
Curriculum, Syllabus and Textbooks in Teaching. Content
Analysis of Teaching Units. Knowledge Enrichment.
Pedagogical Analysis. Integration of Content and Teaching
Method. Knowledge Representations. Evaluation in
Context of Content-cum-Methodology. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2006 / 204 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 175.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2977-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-227-9 (e-Book)
23
SEN GUPTA
Knowledge and Curriculum
M. SEN GUPTA, Director, KIIT College of Education,
Gurugram. Spanning a long career of more than five
decades, he has also served at the National Council of
Educational Research and Training (NCERT), New Delhi in
various capacities.
Designed as per the latest NCERT syllabus and syllabi of
several universities offering teacher education courses,
the book incorporating 16 chapters is an up-to-date and
comprehensive treatise, which deals with the basic as
well as advanced topics of the field of knowledge and
the field of contextualisation of knowledge (curriculum).
In the opening chapters, knowledge is conceived and
described in a broad perspective. This is followed by an
extensive discussion on curriculum, including the various
issues and concerns, different approaches, curriculum
design, development and evaluation.
A peep into the modern classrooms, shift in pedagogy
and skill-based curriculum makes the book a complete
organic entity for comprehensive understanding of the
continuum of knowledge and curriculum.
It is primarily intended for the undergraduate students
of education and elementary education as well as for the
postgraduate students of education. Moreover, teacher
educators and researchers will also find the book useful.
HIGHLIGHTS OF THE BOOK
• Presents intensive analysis of the concepts in a logical
sequence
• Includes practical illustrations along with clear, concise
and lucid language
• Follows professional and analytical approach
• Incorporates flowcharts, diagrams and chapter-end
exercises
• Comprises a bibliography at the end of the book
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Knowledge: Meaning, Nature
and the Process of Knowing. Knowledge: Construction,
Acquisition, Forms and Facets. Child-centred Education,
Learning Process and Contributions of Prominent
Thinkers. Curriculum Perspectives and Role of Apex
Bodies. Curriculum: Issues, Concerns, Meaning, Concept
and Levels. Curriculum: Principles, Bases, Types and
Theories. Curriculum Planning, Development and Policy
Guidelines. Educational and Instructional Objectives.
Curriculum Approaches and Curriculum Design. Models of
Curriculum Development. Curriculum Development Trends
and Curriculum Change. Curriculum Evaluation. Teaching-
Learning and Micro-Teaching for Skill Development.
Teaching Methods and Instructional Techniques. Evaluation
and Examination Reform. Skill-based Curriculum: Planning,
Development and Implementation. Bibliography. Index..
Latest Print 2021 / 304 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 650.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-97-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-98-2 (e-Book)
 24 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Developmental Psychology
CHOUDHARY
Adolescence Education
GIRISH BALA CHOUDHARY, Associate Professor, Lady Irwin
College, University of Delhi.
The young and adolescents are an epitome of change,
hope and progress. The lives of adolescents are subject to
global challenges faced by information and technological
revolution, changing markets and globalization, and
specific changes taking place in family dynamics, cultural
traditions, religious beliefs and other socialization
practices. This book on Adolescence Education assumes
importance in view of the likely impact of acquired skills
and behaviours during this period on an individual’s
prospects in adulthood.
This book is an attempt to understand the broader
context in which adolescent lives are embedded. The
theoretical perspective presents a multi-disciplinary view
of adolescence that helps to understand the evolution
of the concept of adolescence. Presenting an elaborate
account of adolescence as experienced by young in India
and highlighting the challenges that emerge as a result
of dynamic changes in society, the attempt is made to
identify the emerging issues and concerns that impact
the lives of adolescents and provide a perspective to
adolescence education. The historical account presented
helps to build an understanding of the various socio-
cultural forces that led to the emergence of the existing
Adolescence Education Programme (AEP).
The text presents the key features of the present AEP
that are imperative for its successful implementation. The
UN and civil society initiatives are mapped with a view
to locate the characteristic features and thrust of various
interventions. The text gives some gleaning insights
from available evidences regarding execution of various
existing adolescent programmes, and existential realities
of adolescents’ lives.
The book is intended for the undergraduate and
postgraduate students of Education, Psychology and
Sociology. Besides, the book is equally beneficial for the
students opting for Psychology at their +2 level.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. List of Boxed Items. List
of Figures. List of Abbreviations. Re-conceptualising
Adolescence. Adolescence in India. The Genesis of
Adolescence Education Programme in India. Legislation,
Policy Framework and Programmes for Adolescent
Development. Implementation of the Adolescence
Education Programme in India. Mapping UN Agencies and
Voluntary Sector Contribution to Adolescent Development.
Adolescents with Special Needs. Empowering Adolescents
Challenges, Issues and Debates. Appendices—1: Theories
of Adolescence. 2: Contents of Adolescence Education
Programme. 3: Life Skills for Students. 4: Life Skills for
Teachers. Index.
Latest Print 2014 / 416 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 425.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4980-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-331-3 (e-Book)
Educational Psychology
KAKKAR
Educational Psychology
S.B. KAKKAR, Formerly, Head, Department of Psychology,
Government College of Education, Patiala.
Designed as a textbook for undergraduate courses in
Educational Psychology, this well-organized study gives
a detailed description of key concepts such as learning,
intelligence and personality and various contemporary
theories governing these. The present volume attempts
to provide teachers and prospective teachers with those
facts, principles and procedures which are of maximum
utility in the classroom situations. Apart from helping
the teacher-trainee gain a clearer understanding of
the nature and behaviour of the learner, the book also
provides assistance in evaluation and in understanding
the concept of guidance services. The significance of
educational and vocational guidance, particularly of
exceptional children, is clearly and forcefully brought out.
The text is well illustrated with diagrams to elucidate the
concepts discussed.
KEY FEATURES
• The book is child centred and practical in its approach
and views Educational Psychology from the standpoint
of actual problems faced by classroom teachers.
• A chapter is devoted to elementary statistics.
• Importance of guidance and counselling services is
clearly brought out.
• One full chapter is set apart for a discussion on
guidance of exceptional children.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Introduction. Growth
and Development. Learning. Intelligence. Personality.
Measurement and Evaluation. Elementary Statistics.
Guidance. Organization of Guidance Services. Guidance of
Exceptional Children. References. Bibliography. Suggested
Reading. Author Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2014 / 204 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-0810-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-693-2(e-Book)
MANGAL
Advanced Educational Psychology,
2nd ed.
S.K. Mangal, formerly, Principal, Professor and Head,
Department of Postgraduate Studies at C.R. College of
Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
This revised and expanded edition is a sequel to the
first edition which was warmly received by the student
and teaching community for its in-depth analysis and
refreshing approach to the subject.
NEW CHAPTERS TO THIS EDITION
• Psychology of Individual differences
• Transfer of Learning or Training
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
• Emotional Development and Emotional Intelligence
• Learning Disabilities and Learning Disabled Children.
Beginning with an introduction to the nature and scope,
and the various schools of psychology, the book discusses
the systems propounded by Freud, Adler, Jung and
Piaget, taking into account their critical importance to
the subject. It then focuses on the psychology of growth
and development, psychology of individual differences,
motivation, attention and personality, with an emphasis
on the individual’s attitude towards learning, and the
factors influencing learning. The text also elaborates
the nature and theories of learning and the aspects
of memory such as remembering and forgetting. The
cognitive aspect, i.e. intelligence, and vital topics like
creativity and the psychology of thinking, reasoning and
problem-solving have been accorded due prominence. A
detailed discussion on exceptional children and learning
disabled children together with the educational measures
for overcoming such disabilities is also included. The text
concludes with an important aspect of human behaviour,
namely, adjustment.
Interspersed with examples, illustrations and tables,
this text is ideally suited for postgraduate students of
education and psychology. It can also be profitably used
by teachers, teacher-educators, guidance and counselling
personnel, and administrators of educational institutions.
Contents: Psychology—Meaning, Nature and Scope.
Educational Psychology—Meaning, Nature and Scope.
Methods of Educational Psychology. Systems or Schools
of Psychology and Their Bearing on Education. Psycho-
analysis—Freud’s System of Psychology. Adler’s System
of Individual Psychology. Analytical Psychology—Jung’s
System of Psychology. Piaget’s Developmental Psychology
and its Bearing on Education. Psychology of Growth
and Development. Psychology of Individual Differences.
Psychology of Motivation. Attention. Nature and Theories
of Learning. Transfer of Learning or Training. Memory—
Remembering and Forgetting. Intelligence. Emotional
Development and Emotional Intelligence. Creativity.
Psychology of Thinking, Reasoning and Problem-solving.
Aptitude. Personality. Educating Exceptional Children.
Learning Disabilities and Learning Disabled Children.
Psychology of Adjustment.
Latest Print 2021 / 536 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2038-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-56-1 (e-Book)
MANGAL
Essentials of Educational Psychology
S.K. MANGAL, formerly, Principal, Professor and Head,
Department of Postgraduate Studies at C.R. College of
Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
A harmonious blend of the theoretical and practical
aspects of educational psychology, this student-friendly
text provides a base for the understanding of the subject.
The book discusses the various aspects of growth and
development, specifically during childhood and adole-
25
scence, and accords due importance to the cognitive
aspect of human behaviour with elaborate text on
intelligence, creativity, thinking, reasoning and problem-
solving.
Besides maintaining a logical progression of topics, the
author has interspersed the text with examples and
illustrations to provide an in-depth analysis of the subject
matter.
The book is ideally suited for the B.Ed. and B.A.
(Education) courses but can also be a valuable reference
for teachers, teacher-trainees, and practising counsellors
at various levels of school education.
KEY FEATURES
• Cogent and coherent style of writing
• Assignment problems and sample tests at the end of
various chapters
• Wide range of examples and over 50 illustrations to
support and explain the topics discussed
Contents: Preface. Psychology—Meaning, Nature and
Scope. Educational Psychology—Meaning, Nature and
Scope. Methods of Studying Behaviour. Heredity and
Environment. Human Growth and Development—Stages
and Dimensions. Physical Growth and Development.
Cognitive or Mental Development. Emotional Develop-
ment and Emotional Intelligence. Social Development.
Spiritual Development (Development of Character). Stage
Specific Characteristics and Developmental Tasks. Growth
and Development during Adolescence. Maturation and
Training. Individual Differences. Learning—Concept,
Nature and Domains. Factors Influencing Learning.
Theories of Learning. Transfer of Learning or Training.
Motivational Aspect of Behaviour. Memory. Forgetting.
Intelligence—Concept, Theories and Measurement.
Creativity. Aptitude—Concept and Measurement.
Attitude—Concept and Measurement. Attention.
Interest—Meaning, Nature and Measurement. Habits—
Meaning, Nature and Development. Concept Formation.
Psychology of Thinking, Reasoning and Problem-Solving.
The Concept and Structure of Personality. Determinants
of Personality. Assessment of Personality. Exceptional
Children. Behavioural Problems—Meaning, Concept
and Treatment. Adjustment, Frustration and Conflicts.
Mental Health and Hygiene. Sex Education. Guidance
and Counseling. Group Dynamics and Group Behaviour.
Statistical Data—Meaning, Organisation and Presentation.
Measures of Central Tendency and Percentiles. Measures
of Variability or Dispersion. Correlation. Administration
and Interpretation of Psychological Tests (Practical Work).
Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 736 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 575.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3055-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-083-1 (e-Book)
 26 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
eaxy
f'k{kk euksfoKku
,l-ds- eaxy] lh-vkj- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqd's ku jksgrd] gfj;k.kk
ds Ákpk;Z ,oa ÁksQslj in ls lsokfuo`r gSaA
f'k{kk euksfoKku ds fl)kUr rFkk O;kogkfjd igyqvksa ls i;kZIr rkyesy
fcBkrh gqbZ ;g jpuk f'k{kk euksfoKku ls lEcfUèkr lHkh vko';d
vkèkkjHkwr izdj.kksa ¼ftUgsa ns'k ds fofHkUu fo'ofo|ky;ksa us ch-,M- rFkk
ch-,- ds 'kSf{kd ikB~;Øeksa esa LFkku ns j[kk gS½ ij leqfpr izdk'k Mkyrh
gSA fo|kfFkZ;ksa dks Bhd rjg tkudj mUgsa euksfoKku ds fl)kUrksa dk
vuqlj.k djkrs gq, vf/kxe iFk ij vxzlj djus] mudk Hkyh-Hkk¡fr
lek;kstu djus] ekufld LokLF; dks cuk;s j[kus rFkk muds O;fDrRo
ds lok±xh.k fodkl gsrq f'k{kk euksfoKku dh ftu vkèkkjHkwr ckrksa dk
Kku ,oa dkS'ky f'k{kdksa rFkk f'k{kk izsfe;ksa ds fy, pkfg,( og lHkh bl
iqLrd esa mfpr] Øec)] ljy ,oa cks/kxE; :i esa izLrqr fd;k x;k gSA
fuLlangs ;g iqLrd fofHkUu fo'ofo|ky;ksa ,oa f'k{kd izf'k{k.k laLFkkuksa
ds Mh-,M-] ch-,M- rFkk ch-,- ¼f'k{kk½ ds ikB~;Øeksa dh vko';drkvksa
dks leqfpr <ax ls iwjk djrh gSA blds lkFk gh ;g iqLrd ,e-,M-]
,e-,- ¼f'k{kk½ ds fo|kfFkZ;ksa] f'k{kdksa] f'k{kk ijke'kZnkrkvks]a rFkk 'kSf{kd
iz'kkldksa vkfn gsrq Hkh lexz n`f"Vdks.k ls fo'ks"k mi;ksxh gSA
eq[; vkd"kZ.k
• fo"k;-oLrq dk ljy] ljl] jkspd ,oa cks/kxE; izLrqrhdj.kA
• lS)kfUrd vkSj O;ogkjkRed Kku dk mfpr leUo;A
• v/;k; fo'ks"k esa D;k iBu lkexzh gS] ;g tkuus gsrq v/;k; ds
izkjEHk esa v/;k; :ijs[kk rFkk var esa iqujko`fÙk gsrq ^lkjka'k* rFkk
fo'ks"k v/;;u gsrq lanfHkZr ,oa fo'ks"k vè;;u xzUFkksa dh izLrqfrA
• ikB~; lkexzh ds mfpr izLrqrhdj.k gsrq mnkgj.kksa] n`"Vkarksa]
rkfydkvksa rFkk js[kkfp=ksa ,oa vkjs[kksa dk lekos'kA
• fo|kfFkZ;ksa dh {kerkvksa ,oa ;ksX;rkvksa ds vkdyu gsrq izkjfEHkd
,oa 'kSf{kd lkaf[;dh dk izLrqrhdj.kA
fo"k; lwph% izkDdFkuA euksfoKku–vFkZ] izÑfr ,oa {ks=A f'k{kk
euksfoKku–vFkZ] izÑfr] {ks= ,oa dk;ZA euksfoKku dh fof/k;k¡A oa'kkuqØe
,oa okrkoj.kA o`f) ,oa fodkl–voLFkk;sa ,oa vk;keA 'kkjhfjd o`f)
,oa fodklA ckSf)d vFkok ekufld fodklA laosxkRed fodkl ,oa
laosxkRed cqf)A lkekftd fodklA vkè;kfRed ;k pkfjf=d fodklA
voLFkktU; fo'ks"krk,¡ ,oa fodklkRed dk;ZA fd'kksjkoLFkk esa o`f) ,oa
fodklA ifjiDork ,oa izf'k{k.kA oS;fDrd HksnA vfèkxe–voèkkj.kk]
izÑfr ,oa vuq{ks=A vfèkxe dks izHkkfor djus okys dkjdA vfèkxe ;k
lh[kus ds fl)kUrA lh[kus vFkok izf'k{k.k dk LFkkukUrj.kA O;ogkj dk
vfHkizsj.kkRed i{kA Le`frA foLe`frA cqf)–izÑfr] fl)kUr ,oa ekiuA
l`tukRedrkA vfHk#fp–lEizR;; ,oa ekiuA vfHko`fÙk–lEizR;; ,oa
ekiuA è;ku ;k voèkkuA #fp–vFkZ] izÑfr ,oa ekiuA vknrsa vFkZ]
izÑfr ,oa fodklA fparu] rdZ ,oa leL;k lekèkku dk euksfoKkuA
O;fDrRo–izÑfr] izdkj ,oa fl)karA O;fDrRo ds fuèkkZjdA O;fDrRo dk
ewY;kaduA fof'k"V ckydA lek;kstu] dq.Bk ,oa var%}U}A ekufld
LokLF; ,oa LokLF; foKkuA ekxZn'kZu ,oa ijke'kZA lewg xfr'kkL=
,oa lewg O;ogkjA vk¡dM+ksa ;k iznÙkksa dk O;oLFkkiu ,oa izLrqrhdj.kA
dsUæh; izo`fÙk ds izekiA fopyu ds izeki ;k fopyu ekuA lglacaèkA
euksoSKkfud ijh{k.k–iz'kklu ,oa O;k[;kA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2021 / 784 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 525.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3280-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-860-8 (e-Book)
Education in Emerging Indian Society
GHOSH & RADHA MOHAN
Education in Emerging Indian Society:
The Challenges and Issues, 2nd ed.
SUNANDA GHOSH, former Principal, and Professor of
Education, Stella Matutina College of Education, Chennai.
RADHA MOHAN, former Principal, Rajalakshmi College of
Education, Chennai.
This thoroughly revised and updated text, now in
its Second Edition, is intended as a textbook for
undergraduate students of Education. The book provides
a detailed insight into the stages of evolution of Education
in the country and the ongoing trends in the field.
The book, divided into twenty-five chapters, continues
to explain the history of Indian education, its several
commissions, the issues that beset primary, secondary,
higher and adult education, national integration and
international understanding, democracy, human rights,
value crisis, the recent trends of globalisation, and the
changes brought into the education and technology.
NEW TO THE SECOND EDITION
• The text now incorporates a new chapter on Twenty-
First Century….The Way Forward, which talks about the
recent trends in the field.
• New Sections on Formal Education, Informal Education,
Aims of Education, Philosophies of Education, Free
and Compulsory Education as Fundamental Right
and RTE Act of 2010, Different Boards of Educations,
Recommendation of National Knowledge Commission
(2008), Rationale for Secondary Education, Higher
Education Institutions, Issues and Limitations of
Environmental Education and Non-formal Education
have been added in various chapters.
• Several sections have been updated to provide the
reader with the latest information taking place in the
field of Education.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Education:
Its Nature and Aims. Philosophy and Education.
Contemporary Indian Society. Society and Culture.
Agencies of Education. The Teacher. Indian Education
through Ages. Education Committee Reports since
Independence. The Indian Constitution and Education.
Various Boards of Education. Pre-primary Education.
Primary Education. Secondary Education. Higher
Education. Adult Education. Democracy, Human Rights,
Children Rights and Education. Environmental Education.
Social Change, Sustainable Development and Education.
Population Education. Education for National Integration.
Education for Peace and International Understanding.
Value Education. Some Statutory Bodies. Review of the
Issues and Challenges of Indian Education. Twenty-First
Century…. The Way Forward. Index.
Latest Print 2015 / 252 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 295.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5168-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-042-8 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
SAMUEL RAVI
Education in Emerging India
S. SAMUEL RAVI, Assistant Professor, N.M. Christian
College, Marthandam, Tamil Nadu.
India is evolving in every sphere and its education system
no exception. The change, however, is largely towards the
betterment of the society as a whole; but still constraints
are many in achieving a stringent yet ‘beneficial for all’
education system in India. This book gives a thorough
account on the Indian Education system—from its
inception to the present day, and underlines the hurdles
faced and the improvements needed to achieve a flawless
system of imparting knowledge to the students.
The book begins by explaining the fundamental theories
of education—its meaning, nature and so on, and
then proceeds to discuss the emerging Indian society
and the constraints faced by its education system like
corruption, poverty, social discrimination, ill practices
(drugs, violence, etc.) and so on. It further discusses
the philosophies preached by the Indian and Western
philosophers and educationists, like Swami Vivekananda,
Sri Aurobindo, Rabindra Nath Tagore, Mahatma Gandhi,
Rousseau, Froebel, and Maria Montessori, who also
helped in shaping the Indian Education system in some
way or the other.
The book further explains the concepts integral to
Education in Emerging India, which are Education for
All (Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan), Education for Women (girl
child), Education for the Children with Special Needs,
Education for National Integration, and Adult Education. It
also discusses the revised education policies, with special
emphasis on education commissions, and organizations
involved in it.
The book is designed for the undergraduate and
postgraduate students of Education.
Contents: Preface. Meaning and Nature of Education.
Scenario of Emerging India. Meaning of Educational
Philosophy. Philosophy and Branches of Knowledge.
Indian Philosophy and Education. Idealism. Naturalism.
Pragmatism. Existentialism. Rabindranath Tagore (1861–
1941). Mahatma Gandhi (1869–1948). Swami Vivekananda
(1863–1902). Sri Aurobindo Ghosh (1872–1950). Jean
Jacques Rousseau (1712–1778). Froebel (1782–1852).
John Dewey (1859–1952). Maria Montessori (1870–1952).
Meaning and Scope of Educational Sociology. School and
Community. Education and Social Change. Education and
Culture. Education and Human Resource Development.
Education and Economic Development. Universalisation
of Elementary Education. Equalisation of Educational
Opportunities. Education for Democracy. Education and
Secularism. Education and Modernisation. Values in
Education. Population Education. Agencies of Education.
Socialisation of the Child. Special Education. Globalization
and Education. Women’s Education. Adult Education.
Distance Education. 38. Education for National Integration.
39. Education for International Understanding. University
Education Commission (1948–1949). Secondary Education
Commission (1952–1953). Indian Education Commission
27
(1964–1966). New Education Policy (1986). Revised
Education Policy (1992). Educational Organizations.
Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2015 / 808 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 675.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5144-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-458-7 (e-Book)
Foundations of Education
SAMUEL RAVI
Comprehensive Study of Education, A
S. SAMUEL RAVI, Assistant Professor, N.M. Christian
College, Marthandam, Tamil Nadu.
Intended for the undergraduate and postgraduate students
of education, this book is an earnest endeavour to provide
the readers with a thorough understanding of the various
concepts of education. The exhaustive treatment of the
topics in a cogent manner will enable the students to
grasp the subject in an easy-to-understand manner.
Organized in seven units, the chapters encompass the
different pedagogical features of education addressing
some of the broad areas of concern, and upholding the
intrinsic details of education in the emerging society. The
various education commissions, their roles in spreading
education in the present age and the remedies to correct
their laws are also covered in great details.
This textbook can also be useful to the teachers and
research scholars as a reference material.
Contents: Preface. Unit I: Description of Education—
Meaning and Nature of Education. Functions of
Education. Aims of Education. Unit II: Educational
Philosophy—Educational Philosophy. Idealism. Realism.
Naturalism. Pragmatism. Existentialism. Unit III: Indian
and Western Philosophers—Rabindranath Tagore.
Mahatma Gandhi. Swami Vivekananda. Sri Aurobindo
Ghosh. Jiddu Krishnamurti. Jean Jacques Rousseau.
Friedrich August Froebel. John Dewey. Maria Montessori.
Ivan Illich. Unit IV: Educational Sociology—Meaning and
Scope of Educational Sociology. Education and Social
Mobility. Education and Social Stratification. School and
Community. Education and Social Change. Education and
Culture. Education and Human Resource Development.
Education and Economic Development. Unit V: Education
and Society—Universalisation of Elementary Education.
Education for Democracy. Education for Secularism.
Brahminisation and Sanskritisation. Education and
Modernisation. Values in Education. Population Education.
Women’s Education. Adult Education. Distance Education.
Health and Physical Education. Equalization of Education
Opportunities. Education for National Integration.
Education for International Understanding. Education
and Globalization. National Youth Programmes. National
Festivals. Unit VI: Education Commission, Committees
and Organisations—University Education Commission
(1948–1949). Secondary Education Commission
(1952–1953). Indian Education Commission (1964–
 28 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
1966). New Education Policy (1986). Revised Policy on
Education (1992). NCERT, NCTE, UGC, DIET and NAAC.
Unit VII: Environmental Education—Meaning, Nature
and Scope of Environmental Education. Environmental
Pollution. Environmental Hazards. Environmental Crises
and Control. Environmental Conservation and Sustainable
Development. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 976 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 795.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4182-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-95-0 (e-Book)
SAMUEL RAVI
Philosophical and Sociological Bases of
Education, 2nd ed.
S. SAMUEL RAVI, Assistant Professor, N.M. Christian
College, Marthandam, Tamil Nadu.
Education and philosophy go hand-in-hand. It is through
the power of knowledge, our philosophers laid a
foundation of educational theories, and set a stepping
stone for the modern day education system and
educational institutions.
This book gives a comprehensive account of the
fundamental theories laid by the philosophers, and the
society’s role in shaping them up. The special feature of
the book is that it teaches and explains more than what
an ordinary teacher does in a limited time. It stresses on
the understanding and practice of the concepts learnt
rather than mere memorisation.
NEW TO THE SECOND EDITION
Now, the book comprises 40 Chapters, out of which 15
have been newly introduced and are tactically placed
under the three units of the book.
• Unit 1: Philosophy and Education
Realism, Humanism, Awakenism, Existentialism,
Education for 21st century, Indian Philosophy and
Education, Philosophy and Branches of Knowledge
• Unit 2: Eastern and Western Philosophers
Sarvepalli Radhakrishnan, Jiddu Krishnamurty,
Pestalozzi, Maria Montessori
• Unit 3: Education and Society
Education for Peace, Education for New Social order,
Education for Human Rights and Education for
Modernisation
Primarily designed for the undergraduate and postgraduate
students of education, the book will be equally beneficial
for the teaching faculties, trainees, research scholars and
those who are preparing for competitive examinations in
education.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. UNIT I:
PHILOSOPHY AND EDUCATION—Educational Philosophy.
Idealism. Realism. Naturalism. Humanism. Pragmatism.
Awakenism. Existentialism. Eclectic Tendency in Education.
Education for 21st century. Indian philosophy and Educa-
tion. Philosophy and Branches of knowledge. UNIT II:
EASTERN AND WESTERN PHILOSOPHERS—Rabindranath
Tagore. Mahatma Gandhi. Swami Vivekananda. Sri
Aurobindo Ghosh. Sarvapalli Radhakrishanan. Jiddu
Krishnamoorthy.Jean Jacques Rousseau. Pestalozzi.
Froebel. John Dewey. Bertrand Russell. Maria Montessori.
UNIT III: EDUCATION AND SOCIETY—Meaning and Scope
of Educational Sociology. Agencies of Education. School
and Community. Socialisation of Child. Education and
Social Change. Education and Culture. Education and
Secularism. Education for peace. Education for Democracy.
Education for New social order. Education for Human
Rights. Education for modernization. Values in Education.
Education for National Integration. Education for
International Understanding. Globalization and Education.
Bibliography. Name Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 700 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 995.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-93-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-94-4 (e-book)
Inclusive Education
MANGAL
Educating Exceptional Children:
An Introduction to Special Education
S.K. MANGAL, formerly, Principal, Professor and Head,
Department of Postgraduate Studies at C.R. College of
Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
Intended as a text for undergraduate, postgraduate
(B.Ed./M.Ed.; B.A., M.A. Education) and diploma level
courses in Education as well as for courses in Special
Education, this comprehensive and accessible book
provides a sound base for understanding Special Children
through an insightful and incisive analysis on Special
Education.
The text dwells on exceptional children, or children with
special needs, who are found to be in one extreme or
the other and suffer from various deficits or disabilities
or are gifted. They cover a wide spectrum—the mentally
retarded, the visually and hearing impaired, the
emotionally disturbed, those with autism, cerebral palsy,
and the deprived, as well as the gifted and the creative.
This well-organized and pedagogically rich text should be
extremely useful to students as well as professionals—
special education teachers, those engaged in guidance
and counselling, educational policy makers, and field
workers, who have an abiding interest in the education
of exceptional children and in special education.
KEY FEATURES
• Has student-friendly features like illustrations, examples,
tables, and research-based experimental findings.
• Provides a complete picture of exceptionality, from the
early years of human history to the present day.
• Gives case histories to practically illustrate the subject.
Contents: Preface. List of Figures. List of Tables. Concept
of Exceptionality and Exceptional Children. Concept and
Provisions of Special Education. Historical Perspectives
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
in Special Education. Organization and Administration of
Special Education in India. Mentally Retarded Children.
Orthopaedic Impaired Children. Visually Impaired
Children. Hearing Impaired Children. Learning Disabilities
and Learning Disabled Children. Emotionally Disturbed
Children. Children with Communication Disorders. Children
with Autism. Children with Attention Deficit Hyperactive
Disorder. Children with Cerebral Palsy. Children with
Multiple Disabilities. Deprivation and Deprived Children.
Slow Learners or Educationally Back-ward Children.
Juvenile Delinquents. Gifted Children. Creative Children.
Glossary. Author/Name Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 604 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 895.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3284-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-141-8 (e-Book)
MANGAL & MANGAL
Creating An Inclusive School
S.K. MANGAL, formerly Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R. College
of Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
SHUBHRA MANGAL, Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R.S. College
of Education, Noida.
The book developed as per the issued directives of NCTE
equips its readers with the knowledge, understanding,
skills, interests and attitude needed for working in the
inclusive schools. It acquaints them with all the essentials
related to the nature of the different types of disabilities
or impairments, diversities and exceptionalities of the
children belonging to an inclusive school, the need
and means of introducing needed adaptations in the
environmental conditions, curriculum, teaching-learning
strategies, teaching-learning aids and equipment,
methods of assessing the progress of the diverse children,
and likewise so many other things and requirements for
fulfilling their responsibilities towards the diverse children
in the inclusive set-up of the school.
KEY FEATURES
• Full coverage of the current syllabi prescribed for
B. Ed., B. El. Ed. and D. Ed.
• Comprehensive description of the various aspects
of inclusive education and CWSN such as historical
perspectives to disability and inclusive education
needed pedagogical and assessment approaches for
CWSN, educational provisions for the disabled at
national and international levels, and so forth
• Inclusion of quite new topics such as learning styles
in the context of different types of disabilities and
children with special needs, forms of exclusions
on various grounds including disabilities in Indian
education, approaches and models of inclusion,
individual education programme, assistive and adaptive
technologies, and so on
• User-friendly language as well as mode of discussion
The book is primarily designed for the undergraduate
students of education.
29
Contents: Preface. Disabilities: Concept and Types. Special
Needs and Learning Styles of Children with Disabilities.
Historical Perspective to Disability and Inclusion. Forms
of Inclusion and Exclusion in Indian Education. Inclusive
Education: Need, Concept, Principles and Advantages.
Approaches and Models of Inclusion. Barriers to Learning
and Participation Of CWSN. Organisation and Management
of an Inclusive School. Support Services Available in an
Inclusive School. Pedagogical Approaches for CWSN.
Role of School Head and Teachers in Inclusive Education.
Making Learning more Meaningful to the Differently
Abled. Adaptation and Accommodation Adopted for
CWSN. Means of Providing Remedial Instruction and
Feedback. Assessment Approaches for CWSN. Educational
Provision for the Disabled in International Declaration and
Conventions. Constitutional Provisions, Programmes and
Policies for the Disabled and Inclusive Education. Role of
Organisations for Education of Children with Disabilities.
Individual Educational Programme (IEP). Assistive and
Adaptive Technologies in Inclusive Set-Up. Teacher
Preparation and Inclusive Education. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 336 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-16-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-17-2 (e-Book)
eaxy ,oa eaxy
Lkesfdr fo|ky; dh LFkkiuk
(Creating an Inclusive School)
,l-ds- eaxy] lh-vkj- dkWfyt vkWQ ,twd's ku] jksgrd ¼gfj;k.kk½ ds
izkpk;Z] izkQ
s l
s j ,oa foHkkxkè;{k in ls lsok-fuo`Ùk gSaA
mek eaxy] izkpk;kZ in ls lsok-fuo`Ùk] f'k{kk txr dh ,d
tkuh&ekuh f'kf{kdk] iz'kkld] ysf[kdk rFkk 'kks/kd=hZ gSaA
vkt lHkh fo|ky;ksa dks fo|kfFkZ;ksa dks f”k{kk nsus dh viuh O;oLFkk esa
lesdsrhdj.k uhfr dh vuqikyuk djus dh vfuok;Zrk gSA bl lEcU/k
esa viuh ftEesnkjh fuHkkus gsrq v/;kidksa ds fy, og lc tkudkjh
gksuk vko”;d gS tks lesfdr f”k{kk O;oLFkk esa muds dÙkZO; fuoZgu
ds fy;s t#jh gSA izLrqr iqLrd jk’Vªh; Lrj ij ^lesfdr f”k{kk* dh
f”k{k.k&vf/kxe vko”;drkvksa dh iwfrZ gsrq gh fy[kh xbZ gSA
vius bl mÌs”; dh iwfrZ gsrq ikB~; iqLrd dh fo’k; lkexzh
dks bDdhl fofHkUu v/;k;ksa esa foHkkftr djds izLrqr
fd;k x;k gSA bl lEcU/k esa fofHkUu izdkj dh v{kerkvksa ls
lEcfU/kr vo/kkj.kk] izdkj rFkk mudh fo”ks’krkvksa ls ifjfpr djkrs
gq, v{kerkvksa ls ;qDr ckydksa dh fof”k’V vko”;drkvksa rFkk
vf/kxe “kSfy;ksa dh ppkZ “kkfey gS tks v/;kidksa dks vius f”k{k.k
vkSj f”k{kd mÙkjnkf;Roksa dks lesfdr f”k{kk O;oLFkk ls tqM+s gq;s fHkUu
;ksX;rkvksa okys ckydksa ds lkFk leUo; fcBkus esa lgk;d fl) gks
gksxhA
v{kerkvksa ls ;qDr ckydksa dh f”k{kk] ns[kHkky rFkk lek;kstu
dks ysdj muds iwjh rjg ls izFkDdhdj.k rFkk muds lkFk fd;s
x;s vR;kpkjksa ls “kq# djds muds lkFk fd;s tk jgs ekuoksfpr
O;ogkj dk lEiw.kZ o.kZu gSA iqLrd esa lesfdr f”k{kk dh vko”;drk]
 30 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
vo/kkj.kk] lS)kfUrd ekU;rkvksa] fl)kUrksa rFkk mlls gksus okys ykHkksa
ds ckjs esa vko”;d ppkZ dh xbZ gSA
ckg~; fof”k’V lgk;d ,tsfUl;ksa] O;kolkf;d n{k O;fDr;ksa] fof”k’V
f”k{kk v/;kidksa] fpfdRlk lsok iznkrkvksa rFkk vfHkHkkod ,oa leqnk;
lg;ksx dh Hkwfedk ij izdk”k Mkyrs gq, mi;ksxh f”k{k.k foKku
mikxeksa dh ppkZ dh xbZ gS tks fof”k’V ;k fHkUu ;ksX;rkvksa okys
ckydksa dks oS;fDrd] lkewfgd rFkk lkekftd vf/kxe esa egÙoiw.kZ
<+ax ls lg;ksxh fl) gks ldrs gSaA
iqLrd esa v/;kidksa gsrq mu lHkh vko”;d ckrksa dk Hkh Kku
dk lekos”k tks fo”ks’k vko”;drkvksa@;ksX;rkvksa ls ;qDr ckydksa
dh f”k{kk] lek;kstu] iquokZl rFkk dY;k.k gsrq vUrjkZ’Vªh;
?kks’k.kkvksa rFkk lEesyu izLrkoksa] uhfr;ksa ds fu/kkZj.k rFkk laoS/kkfud
izko/kkuksa rFkk mi;ksxh dk;ZØeksa ds #i esa LFkkuh;] jk’Vªh;] {ks=h;
rFkk vUrjkZ’Vªh; Lrj ij miyC/k gSaA
bl izdkj izLrqr iqLrd esa ;g Hkjld iz;kl fd;k x;k gS fd bldh
fo’k; lkexzh vkSj izLrqrhdj.k v/;kidksa dks ml lHkh Kku] dkS”kyksa
ls ;qDr djus esa leFkZ gks tks mUgsa ,d lesfdr fo|ky; esa f”k{kk
izkIr dj jgs lHkh ckydksa dks fcuk fdlh HksnHkko ds viuh fof”k’V
;ksX;rkvksa] {kerkvksa rFkk U;wurkvksa ds lanHkZ esa mi;qDr #i ls f”k{kk
xzg.k djus vkSj lok±xh.k fodkl dks izkIr gksus esa lgk;d cusA
fo"k; lwph% izLrkoukA v{kerk ;k fodykaxrk&vo/kj.kk ,oa izdkjA
v{kerk;qDr ckydksa dh fo'ks’k vko';drk,¡ vkSj vf/kxe 'kSfy;k¡A
v{kerk ,oa lesdsrhdj.k dk ,sfrgkfld ifjisz{;A Hkkjrh; f'k{kk esa
lesdsrhdj.k rFkk vyxko ds izk:iA lesfdr f'k{kk&vko';drk]
vo/kkj.kk] fl)kUr ,oa mi;ksfxrkA lesdsrhdj.k ds mikxe ,oa
izfrekuA fo'k’k vko';drk ;qDr ckydksa ds vf/kxe vkSj lgHkkfxrk
ds ekxZ esa vojks/kdA ,d lesfdr fo|ky; dk laxBu vkSj
izcU/kuA ,d lesfdr fo|ky; esa miyC/k lgk;d ;k leFkZu
lsok;saA lesfdr f'k{kk esa f'k{kk 'kkL=kh; ;k f'k{k.k O;wgjpuk,¡A
lesfdr f'k{kk esa fo|ky; ds iz/kkukpk;Z vkSj d{kk v/;kidksa dh
HkwfedkA fHkUu ;ksX;rkvksa ds ckydksa ds vf/kxe dks vf/kd vFkZiw.kZ
cukukA fHkUu vko';drk okys ckydksa ds fy, vuqns'kukRed mís';ksa]
ikB~;Øe vkSj lgikB~; fØ;kvksa esa vuqdwyuA mipkjkRed vuqns'ku
vkSj i`’Biks’k.k iznku djus ds lk/kuA fo'ks’k vko';drk okys ckydksa
ds fy, vkdyu mikxeA v{ke ckydksa ds fy, vUrjkZ’Vªh; ?kks’k.kk,¡
vkSj vf/kos'kuA v{ke ckydksa rFkk lesfdr f'k{kk gsrq laoS/kkfud
izko/kku ,oa dk;ZØeA v{kerk;qDr ckydksa dh f'k{kk ds fy, laxBuksa
dh HkwfedkA oS;fDrd 'kSf{kd dk;ZØeA lesfdr O;oLFkk esa lgk;d
vkSj vuqdwyu rduhdhA v/;kid rS;kjh vkSj lesfdr f'k{kkA
vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2021 / 336 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-59-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-60-8 (e-Book)
Learning and Development
MANGAL & MANGAL
Psychology of Learning and
Development
S.K. MANGAL, formerly Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R. College
of Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
SHUBHRA MANGAL, Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R.S. College
of Education, Noida.
The book furnishes proper understanding to its readers
for helping the growing children in their thoroughgoing
development. The subject-matter, dexterously divided into
35 chapters and organised in a simplified and logical manner,
first explicates educational psychology, development of
the growing children, process of learning, intelligence,
aptitude and attitude, and then expounds on psychology of
individual differences, learning styles, learning disabilities,
creativity, personality, mental health, adjustment, guidance
and counselling, and ultimately, social groups and group
dynamics.
The book is primarily designed for the postgraduate students
of education.
Contents: Preface. Educational Psychology: Concept,
Scope and Role. Methods and Techniques of
Educational Psychology. Growth and Development.
Heredity and Environment. Characteristics of Various
Stages of Development with Special Reference to
Adolescence. Dimensions of Individual Development.
Theories of Development. Developmental Tasks and
Their Implications. Maturation-Concept and Educational
Implications. Learning: Concept and  Importance. Factors
Influencing Learning. Theories of Learning. Constructivism
and Constructivist Learning. Transfer of Learning or
Training. Psychology of Motivation. Memory: Concept,
Types, Measurement and Development Forgetting:
Nature, Causes and Minimisation of Forgetting.
Intelligence: Concept, Theories and Measurement.
Emotional Intelligence: Concept, Measurement and
Development. Social, Spiritual and Artificial Intelligences.
Aptitude: Concept and Measurement. Attitude: Nature,
Measurement and Development. Dimensions of Individual
Differences in Learners. Learning Styles: Concept, Types
and Implications. Learning Disabilities: Meaning, Concept
and Types. Creativity: Concept, Theories and Development.
Personality: Meaning, Nature and Theories. Determinants
of Personality. Assessment of Personality. Mental Health
and Hygiene. Defence or Mental Mechanisms. Psychology
of Adjustment. Frustration, Conflicts and Stress. Guidance
and Counselling. Social Groups and Group Dynamics.
Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 708 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-20-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-21-9 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
eaxy ,oa eaxy
vf/xe ,oa fodkl dk euksfoKku
(Psychology of Learning and Development)
,l-ds- eaxy] lh-vkj- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqd's ku jksgrd] gfj;k.kk
ds Ákpk;Z ,oa ÁksQslj in ls lsokfuo`r gSaA
'kqHkzk eaxy] lh-vkj-,l- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqds'ku] uks,Mk esa
izkpk;Z ,oa izksQslj in ij lsokjr gSaA
ckyd ds fodkl esa ifjiDou rFkk vf/kxe nksuksa gh dkQh izHkkoiw.kZ
Hkwfedk fuHkkrs gSaA LokHkkfod izfØ;k ds rkSj ij tgk¡ ifjiDou ckyd
dks mlds o`f) ,oa fodkl esa fcuk fdlh cká lgk;rk ds enn
djrk gqvk fn[kkbZ nsrk gS ogha vf/kxe dks viuh Hkwfedk fuHkkus gsrq
okrkoj.kh; 'kfDr;ksa rFkk ekrk&firk] f'k{kdksa ,oa vU; cM+ksa dh enn
dh dkQh t:jr jgrh gSA okLro esa ns[kk tk, rks vf/kxe vkSj
fodkl nksuksa izfØ;k;sa gh ,d nwljs dk lgk;d curh gqbZ ckydksa ds
okafNr fgr vkSj dY;k.k dk ekxZ iz'kLr djrh gSaA
'kk;n ;gh ,d cM+k dkj.k gS fd jk"Vªh; v/;kid f'k{kk ifj"kn (NCTE) ds
fn'kkfunsZ'kksa ij pyrs gq;s gekjs ns'k ds lHkh fo'ofo|ky;ksa rFkk f'k{kk
laLFkkuksa ds ,e-,M- ikB~;Øe esa vf/kxe ,oa fodkl dk euksfoKku
(Psychology of Learning and Development) tSls v/;;u dks LFkku fn;k
gSA izLrqr ikB~; iqLrd blh v/;;u dkslZ dh vko';drkvksa dks iwjk
djus ds fy;s fy[kh xbZ gSA bl mís'; dh iw£r gsrq tgk¡ blls ,e-,M-
ds fo|kfFkZ;ksa rFkk v/;kid f'k{kdksa dh vko';drkvksa dk mfpr /;ku
j[kk x;k gS ogha vius ns'k ds fo|ky;ksa esa dk;Zjr v/;kidksa rFkk
izf'k{k.kkfFkZ;ksa] ekrk firk rFkk vU; lHkh ftudk lEcU/k ckydksa ds
fgr fpUru ls gS ds bl lEcU/k ;s fufgr iz;kstu dk Hkh iwjk /;ku
j[kk x;k gSA
vius mís'; dh iw£r gsrq bl iqLrd dh fo"k; lkexzh 35 fofHkUu
v/;k;ksa esa foHkkftr dj izLrqr dh xbZ gSA
fo"k; lwph% izLrkoukA f'k{kk euksfoKku&vFkZ] izÑfr] {ks=k ,oa HkwfedkA
f'k{kk euksfoKku esa v/;;u ds fy;s iz;Dq r fof/k;k¡ ,oa rduhdsAa
o`f) ,oa fodkl&vo/kkj.kk] lkekU; fl)kUr ,oa dkjdA oa'kkuqØe
,oa okrkoj.kA fodkl dh fofHkUu voLFkkvksa dh fo'ks"krk,¡ ¼fo'ks"kdj
fd'kksjkoLFkk ds lUnHkZ es½a A O;fDrxr fodkl ds vk;keA fodkl ds
fl)kUrA fodklkRed dk;Z ,oa muds fufgrkFkZA ifjiDork&laiRz ;; ,oa
'kSf{kd fufgrkFkZA vf/kxe&vo/kkj.kk ,oa egÙoA vf/kxe dks izHkkfor
djus okys dkjdA vf/kxe ;k lh[kus ds fl)kUrA jpukRedrkokn
,oa jpukRedrkoknh vf/kxeA vf/kxe ;k izf'k{k.k dk LFkkukUrj.kA
vfHkizsj.kk dk euksfoKkuA Le`fr&laizR;;] izdkj ,oa fodklA
foLe`fr&izÑfr] fl)kUr ,oa foLe`fr esa deh ykukA cqf)&vFkZ]
iz Ñ fr] fl)kUr ,oa ekiuA la o s x kRed cq f )&vo/kkj.kk]
ekiu ,oa fodklA lkekftd] vk/;kfRed ,oa Ñf=ke cqf) A
vfHk#fp&la i z R ;; ,oa ekiuA vfHko` f Ùk&la i z R ;; ,oa ekiuA
vf/kxedÙkkZvksa esa oS;fDrd Hksnksa ds vk;keA vf/kxe 'kSyh&
vo/kkj.kk] izdkj ,oa fufgrkFkZA vf/kxe v{kerk,¡&vFkZ] vo/kkj.kk ,oa
izdkjA l`tukRedrk&laiRz ;; ,oa fodklA O;fDrRo&vo/kkj.kk ,oa
fl)kUrA O;fDrRo ds fu/kkZjdA O;fDrRo dk ewY;kaduA ekufld
LokLF; ,oa LokLF; foKkuA j{kkRed ;qfDr;k¡ ;k euksjpuk,¡A
31
lek;kstu dk euksfoKkuA daBq k ;k HkXuk'kk vUr%}U} ,oa nckoA
ekxZn'kZu ,oa ijke'kZA lewg xfr'kkL= ,oa lewg O;ogkjA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2019 / 784 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 725.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-22-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-23-3 (eBook)
Measurement and Evaluation
MANGAL & MANGAL
Assessment for Learning
S.K. MANGAL, formerly Principal, Professor and Head
of the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R. College
of Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
SHUBHRA MANGAL, Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R.S. College
of Education, Noida.
Designed as per the issued directives of NCTE, the book
apprises its readers with the practices of improving
the inputs and processes of learning for bringing the
desired outcome of the teaching-learning process in an
appropriate manner.
It discusses Revised Bloom’s Taxonomy of Instructional
Objectives, the Construction and Standardisation of
Achievement and Diagnostic Tests, Policy Perspective on
Examination and Assessment, latest Assessment Tools
and Devices such as Portfolio Assessment. Besides, it
describes the development and use of Rubrics, Emerging
Trends and Assessment Practices such as Computer-based
online examination, Examination on demand, Open-
book examination, and Choice-based credit system, and
statistical means and ways of analysing and interpreting
students’ performances.
KEY FEATURES OF THE BOOK
• Thorough coverage of syllabi of all the Indian universities
• Comprehensive explanation with illustrative examples
• Thoughtfully sequenced chapters and topics for easy
inference
• Self-explanatory figures, tables, and diagrams for
observant reading
• Chapter-end summary for quick recapitulation
The book is primarily designed for the undergraduate
students of education.
Contents: Preface. Perspectives on Assessment or
Evaluation. Domains of Learning and Taxonomy of
Objectives. Tools and Techniques of Evaluation or
Assessment. Construction of an Achievement Test.
Standardization of an Achievement Test. Diagnostic Testing
and Remedial Teaching. Construction of Diagnostic Tests.
Group Dynamics and Assessment of Group Processes. Tasks
and Activities for the Assessment of Learning Outcomes.
Role of Feedback in Improving Learning and Learners’
Development. Portfolios Assessment and Development
of Rubrics. Reporting Students’ Progress. Using ICT In
Examination. Policy Perspectives on Examination and
Assessment. Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation.
 32 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Existing Practices in Assessment. Emerging Practices
or New Trends in Assessment. Issues and Problems in
Assessment. Analysis and Interpretation of Students’
Performance. Normal Distribution and Standard Scores.
Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 348 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-12-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-13-4 (eBook)
eaxy ,oa eaxy
vf/kxe ds fy, ewY;kadu
(Assessment for Learning)
,l-ds- eaxy] lh-vkj- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqd's ku jksgrd] gfj;k.kk
ds Ákpk;Z ,oa ÁksQslj in ls lsokfuo`r gSaA
'kqHkzk eaxy] lh-vkj-,l- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqds'ku] uks,Mk esa
izkpk;Z ,oa izksQslj in ij lsokjr gSaA
fdlh Hkh lekt ;k jk’Vª dk Hkfo’; mlds ckydksa dh f”k{kk vkSj
fodkl esa gh fufgr jgrk gSA vr% f”k{k.k vf/kxe izfØ;k ds izkjafHkd
pj.k esa f”k{kd ds fy;s fo|kfFkZ;ksa dk oS;fDrd vkSj lkewfgd #i
ls bl rjg vkadyu@ewY;kadu djuk t:jh gS fd ftlls mls ;g
irk py lds fd f“k{k.k vf/kxe ifjfLFkfr fo”ks’k esa bu fo|kfFkZ;ksa
dks fdl rjg ds vf/kxe vuqHko iznku fd;s tk ldrs gSaA
izLrqr iqLrd jk’Vªh; Lrj ij blh v/;;u dh vko”;drk iwfrZ gsrq
fy[kh xbZ gSA vius mÌs”; iwfrZ gsrq bl iqLrd dh fo’k; lkexzh
dks 20 fofHkUu v/;k;ksa esa ck¡Vdj izLrqr djus ds mfpr iz;Ru fd;s
x;s gSaA vuqns”kukRed mÌs”;ksa dh ^Cywe* ,oa mlds lg;ksfx;ksa }kjk
fodflr fofHkUu VSDlksukseht dh foLrkj esa ppkZ dh xbZ gSA
fujh{k.k@voyksdu] lk{kkRdkj] iz”ukoyh] jsfVax Ldsy rFkk pSd
fyLV ds #i esa mu vko”;d rduhd vkSj lk/kuksa dk Hkh lekos”k
gS ftudk mi;ksx lkekU;rkSj ij fo|kfFkZ;ksa ds O;ogkj esa vkus okys
ifjorZuksa ds vkdyu vkSj ewY;kadu gsrq fd;k tkrk gSA
blh dM+h esa vkxs ukSosa v/;k; esa ,sls dqN dk;Z vkSj xfrfof/k;ksa
tSls izkstsDV] vf/kU;kl] odZ”khV] iz;ksxkRed dk;Z rFkk lsehukj
,oa fjiksVZ dk mi;ksx vkfn dh ppkZ dh xbZ gS ftuds vkdyu ds
ek/;e ls fo|kfFkZ;ksa ds ikB~; ,oa lg&ikB~; fØ;kvksa ls lEcfU/kr
vf/kxe vuqHkoksa ds vtZu dh tkudkjh feyrh gSA fo|kFkhZ ewY;kadu
gsrq dke esa yk;s tkus okys ekStwnk i)fr;ksa ,oa ewY;kadu ds {ks= esa
vk jgh leL;kvksa] pqukSfr;ksa rFkk fooknkLin vo/kkj.kkvksa ij izdk”k
Mkyk x;k gSA
izLrqr lkexzh dks cks/kxE; ,oa jkspd cukus gsrq iqLrd esa ;= r=
vko”;d n`’VkUrksa] rkfydkvksa] fp= ,oa vkjs[kksa dk lekos”k fd;k
x;k gSA
fo"k; lw p h % iz L rkoukA vkdyu ;k ew Y ;ka d u ifjiz s { ;A
vf/kxe ds vuq{ks= ,oa mís”;ksa dh VsDlksuksehA ewY;kadu ;k
vkdyu ds midj.k ,oa rduhds a A miyfC/k ijh{k.k dk
fuekZ.k 
A miyfC/k ijh{k.k dk ekudhdj.k A funkukRed ijh{k.k
,oa mipkjkRed f”k{k.kA funkukRed ijh{k.k dk fuekZ.kA lewg
izfØ;kvksa dk vkdyuA vf/kxe izfrQy ds vkdyu ds fy,
iz;qDr dk;Z ,oa xfrfof/k;k¡A vf/kxe ,oa vf/kxedÙkkZ ds fodkl
esa i`’Biks’k.k dh HkwfedkA iksVZQksfy;ks vkdyu ,oa :fczDl dk
fodklA fo|kfFkZ;ksa dh fu’ifÙk ds ckjs esa lwfpr djukA lwpuk
,oa laizs’k.k rduhdh dk ijh{kkvksa esa mi;ksxA ewY;kadu vkSj
vkadyu gsrq fofHkUu uhfr ifjizs{;A lrr ,oa lexz ewY;kaduA
orZeku esa izpfyr ewY;kadu izo`fÙk;k¡A vkadyu ;k ewY;kadu esa
uohu izo`fÙk;k¡A vf/kxe vkadyu esa pqukSfr;k¡ vkSj leL;k,¡A
fo|kfFkZ;ksa dh fu’ifÙk ;k miyfC/k;ksa dk fo”ys”k.k vkSj O;k[;kA
lkekU; forj.k vkSj izkekf.kd izkIrkadA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2021 / 368 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-57-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-58-5 (e-book)
RADHA MOHAN
Measurement, Evaluation and
Assessment in Education
RADHA MOHAN, former Principal, Rajalakshmi College of
Education, Chennai.
Assessment and evaluation are central to the educational
system of a country as they impact the national policy
of education, besides helping in framing future strategies
for growth of the nation. The process of measurement,
evaluation and assessment is interlinked with curriculum
and teaching–learning methods enabling learning
outcomes to be determined. Good quality assessment is
instrumental in determining a student’s future goal and
career path, besides impacting all stakeholders of the
school system. An effective school system cannot be built
where the students are examined on the basis of mere
paper and pencil tests. Today schools have access to the
use of a range of techniques for student’s assessment,
teacher performance, school’s effectiveness and the
evaluation of the school system as a whole.
The aim of the book is to provide an in-depth knowledge
and understanding of measurement, evaluation and
statistics in education—both from theoretical and
practical aspects. It also offers a concise, step-by-step
guide that helps in making assessment simple and
economical in terms of money and time, besides being
a boon for any institution. The book contains effective
strategies to facilitate enhanced learning by explaining
the interpretation of test scores. It has several Illustrative
examples drawn from the authors experience. Portfolios
are proving to be a great way of assessment, and how to
incorporate them in the teaching–learning process is dealt
with in detail. Instructions for constructing rubrics for
evaluation of different domains of learning, i.e., cognitive,
psychomotor and affective have also been included in the
book. Item analysis, basic statistics and different types of
tests are discussed elaborately.
The book is intended for the students of B.Ed, M.Ed
and M.A. (Education). Besides, the teachers teaching at
various universities and colleges will also find this book
useful for classroom teaching.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
KEY FEATURES OF THE BOOK
• Comprehensive and lucidly written.
• Easy-to-understand because of the illustrations,
flowcharts and graphs.
• Chapter-end assignments to promote reflective thinking.
• A go-guide for teachers and trainers.
Contents: Preface. Goals, Objectives and Learning
Outcomes. Measurement, Evaluation and Assessment in
the Classroom. Basic Concepts Used in Measurement. A
Brief Introduction to Statistics–Definitions, Characteristics,
Place in Education. Interpreting Test Scores. Measurement
Errors. Reliability and Validity. Item Analysis. Achievement
Test. Diagnostic Tests. Intelligence Testing. Performance
Tests. Portfolio Assessment. Aptitude Testing. Attitude
Measurement. Grading and Scoring. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 312 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5250-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-449-5 (e-Book)
Pedagogy
AHMAD
Teaching of Biological Sciences
(Intended for Teaching of Life Sciences,
Physics, Chemistry and General
Science), 2nd ed.
JASIM AHMAD, Sr. Assistant Professor at Jamia Millia
Islamia, New Delhi.
Students of today, especially at the school level, perceive
science as a collection of facts to be memorized, whereas,
in reality, it is constantly changing as new information
accumulates and new techniques develop every day. The
objective of teaching is not restricted to imparting scientific
information to students, but also to help them apply
these principles in their daily lives. This comprehensive
book, written in an easy-to-understand language, covers
the entire syllabus of teaching of Biological Sciences in
particular and Science Teaching in general. In so doing,
it takes into account the needs of teacher-trainees and
in-service teachers.
Organized into 20 chapters, the book discusses in detail
the many facets and aspects of Biology/Science Teaching.
The text introduces modern approaches to teaching, with
the aim of improving student learning throughout their
course. It emphasizes the need for pedagogical analysis vis-
à-vis subject teaching, constructive approach, laboratory
work, Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation (CCE).
In addition, the text highlights the difference between
microteaching and simulated teaching. It also shows how
e-learning and co-curricular activities can be successfully
integrated in biological sciences teaching.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Inclusion of one chapter on ‘Concept Mapping in Biology
Teaching’. This chapter advocates the popularized
33
constructivist approach of teaching-learning process.
Besides, some figures, tables and flow charts are also
added to make the book more useful to the readers.
KEY FEATURES
• Analyses Constructivism versus Behaviourism.
• Includes self-explanatory model lesson plan.
• Discusses Information and Communication Technology
(ICT) in the context of Biology/Science teaching-
learning.
• Suggests how apparatus and devices can be secured
and cultured, and used in classroom demonstrations
and student projects.
Primarily intended as a text for students of B.Ed.
pursuing course on Teaching of Biological Sciences/
Life Sciences, the book should prove equally useful for
B.Ed. students following courses on Teaching of Physical
Sciences. In addition, diploma students of Elementary
Teacher Education (ETE) having a paper on Teaching of
EVS (General Science), and M.Ed. and M.A. (Education)
students with an optional/elective paper on Science
Education would find the book extremely useful.
Contents: Preface. New to This Edition. Acknowledge-
ments. Basic Concepts. Nature and Scope of Biological
Sciences. Objective-based Teaching. Curriculum in
Biological Sciences. Constructivism versus Behaviourism.
Pedagogical Analysis. Methods of Teaching Biological
Sciences. Unit Planning and Lesson Planning. Teaching
Skills. Microteaching and Simulated Teaching. Instructional
Aids or Teaching Aids. General Science and Biological
Sciences Laboratory. Biology through Co-curricular
Activities. Information and Communication Technology
in Biology Teaching. E-Learning in Biology. Evaluation in
Biological Sciences. Professional Competencies of Life
Science Teachers. Preparation of Slides and Collection
and Preservation of Specimens. Vivarium, Aquarium,
Terrarium and Herbarium. Concept Mapping in Biology
Teaching. References. Index.
Latest Print 2011 / 368 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4451-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-015-2 (e-Book)
DAVAR
Teaching of Science
MONIKA DAVAR, Assistant Professor at Maharaja Surajmal
Institute, Delhi.
A frequent use of scientific and technical methodologies
has revolutionized various fields of education, and science
education is not an exception. This book elaborates on
various important aspects of science education, and
comprehensively deals with its objectives and applications
in the classroom programmes.
The purpose of this book is to help the trainee teachers
learn the nitty-gritty of science teaching, and instill in
them the teaching skills and inquiry-based teaching
methodologies, so that they can apply these skills
 34 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
practically. Divided into six units comprising 23 chapters,
the book discusses step-by-step methodologies of
teaching science and the ways and means of preparing
the lesson plans. The chapter on Teaching aids provides
useful tips on using teaching aids to make the teaching-
learning process more interactive.
The book is intended for the undergraduate students of
Education and can also be used as a reference book for
the Science teachers.
KEY FEATURES
• Defines the objectives of science teaching as per
the National Curriculum Framework (NCF) 2005, and
simultaneously provides an exposure to other latest
policy perspectives.
• Provides up-to-date information on new evaluation
system of CCE and grading for Class X introduced by
the CBSE board in the year 2010.
• Guides the trainee-teachers in constructing practical
Test Paper, Viva Questions and Multiple Choice
Questions as per the latest CBSE guidelines.
Contents: Preface. Unit 1: Concept and Objectives
of Science—Science: The Basics. Objectives. Unit
2: Pedagogical Analysis—Science: The Basics. Unit
3: Planning for Transaction of Curricular and Co-curricular
Activities—Unit Planning. Lesson Planning. Teaching Aids.
Development of Demonstration Experiments. Co-curricular
Activities. Unit 4: Methods of Science Teaching—
Teaching-Learning Approaches. Lecture Method. Lecture-
demonstration Method. Inquiry Approach. Project
Method. Cooperative Learning. Constructivism. Heuristic
Method. Problem-Solving Method. Laboratory Method.
Computer Based Teaching. Unit 5: Teaching Skills and
Improvisation of Apparatus—Teaching Skills. Improvisation
of Apparatus. Unit 6: Evaluation—Concept of Evaluation.
Tools and Techniques of Evaluation. References. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 272 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4624-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-137-1 (e-Book)
GOWDA
Learning and the Learner: Insights into
the Processes of Learning and Teaching,
2nd ed.
N. SUKUMAR GOWDA is Founder-Director of Centre for
Studies in Education, Puttur (D.K.), Karnataka since 1995.
The book, in its new edition, continues to discuss
the processes and problems of learning in the triadic
framework of learner–curriculum–teacher. The purpose
of the book is to help the educators develop newer
insights into the nature and problems of the learner, and
as a result, to enable them develop their own approaches
to teaching so as to improve learning. The phenomenon
and the process of learning has been looked at in a
comprehensive and integrated manner in this book.
The concept of learning is discussed by positing its
meaning in the wider context of school curriculum and
education. He attempts to answer the question ‘how
people learn’ from the philosophical, physiological and
psychological perspectives.
Pedology and pedagogy are the two major components
of educational theory. The chapter on ‘Creative Pedagogy’
outlines the conceptual and practical interrelationship
between learning and teaching. This chapter also outlines
the different modes of teaching, and discusses the
teacher’s role in fostering creativity and teaching children
how to learn. Learning disabilities particularly those related
to reading, spelling and computation are also presented.
Finally, the book envisions the future classrooms and
strongly advocates liberated, creative, democratic,
collaborative and humanistic classrooms. He recommends
that Learning Resource Centres should be preferred to
the traditional classrooms.
This book is intended to be a useful handbook for the
students of education and psychology, and for educators,
at all levels.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Sections on Language and Communication, Reading and
Writing, Orthographic bases of Dyslexia and Dysgraphia
and Collaborative Classrooms, are added to update the
student with the latest developments in the field.
Contents: Preface. Introduction. How People Learn.
Psychological Correlates of Learning. Intelligence,
Creativity and Learning. Language and Communication.
Language, Literacy and Learning. Reading and Writing
as Modes of Learning. Creative Pedagogy. Learning
Disabilities. Desiderata. Endnotes. References. Name
Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2015 / 284 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 275.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5120-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-186-9 (e-Book)
KALRA
Science Education for Teacher Trainees
and In-service Teachers: Learning to
Learn Modern Science
R.M. KALRA, formerly Adjunct Professor in the Faculty of
Health Sciences, Simon Fraser University, Burnaby, British
Columbia, Canada.
KEY FEATURES
• Focuses on innovative methods for science teaching.
• Discusses science education in the context of globalization.
• Includes interesting, thought-provoking questions at the
end of each chapter to encourage group discussions.
This book is intended for the students undergoing
elementary teacher training courses, nursery teacher
training courses, and courses in B.Ed., B.A. (Education)
and M.A. (Education). It will also be immensely helpful
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
to in-service science teachers for the effective teaching of
science.
Contents: Preface. Introduction. Science and Technology
Education in the 21st Century. Recent Advances
in Science Technology and the Motivation Process
Encouraging Creativity. Objective Based Science Education.
Development of National Science Standards at the School
Stage in India. Developing an Inventory for Determining
the Attitude of Students Towards Science. Teaching of
Science and Inculcation of Values. Methods of Science
Teaching. Professional Growth and Competencies of
Science Teachers. Interdisciplinary Approach in Science
Teaching. Curriculum Development in Science Education.
Science Education and Action Research. Development of
Scientific Temper. Science Block in a High School. Evaluation
and Examination in Science Education. Assessment of
Elementary and Nursery Level Students. School Science:
Psychological Basis of Learning. Co-Curricular Activities in
Science Education. School Science Education in the Context
of Higher Education. Suggested Reading. Index.
Latest Print 2008 / 184 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3612-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-251-4 (e-Book)
KALRA & GUPTA
Teaching of Science: A Modern Approach
R.M. KALRA, formerly Adjunct Professor in the Faculty of
Health Sciences, Simon Fraser University, Burnaby, British
Columbia, Canada.
VANDANA GUPTA, Assistant Professor at Maharshi Valmiki
College of Education (University of Delhi).
This well-organized book emphasizes the various aspects
of science education, viz. the use of computers in science
education, software programs, the Internet, e-Learning,
multimedia, concept mapping, and action research. It
introduces students to the latest trends in the methods
of teaching. The book also strives to foster science
education through non-formal approaches, such as
distance education with special reference to common-
wealth of learning model, or academic games.
What distinguishes this text is its emphasis on making the
teachers understand that learning students’ psychology
is the prerequisite for the success of any education
programme. Keeping this view in mind, the text explains
the well-known theories of learning of Piaget, Ausubel,
Bruner and Gagne—which are closely related to science
teaching.
Primarily intended as a text for the undergraduate
students (degree and diploma) of Education (B.Ed. and
D.Ed.), this could serve as a source book for in-service
teachers and science educators. In addition, curriculum
developers and policy makers working in the field of
science education having an abiding faith in moulding
youngsters to face the challenges of 21st century should
find this book useful and stimulating.
35
KEY FEATURES
• Lays emphasis on inculcating values or the development
of scientific temper in students.
• Cites a number of examples related to teaching
methods from both urban and rural areas to illustrate
the concepts discussed in the text.
Contents: Preface. Teaching of Science at the School
Level in the 21st Century. Science and Technology
Education in Modern India. Aims and Objectives of
Teaching Science. Curriculum Development in Science
Education. Teaching Aids in Science: Audio and Visual
Aids. Using Computers in Science Education. Concept
Mapping: A Tool for Effective Science Teaching. Modern
Methods of Science and Technology Teaching. Planning
for Classroom Instruction: Lesson Planning and Unit
Planning. Science Laboratory. Non-Formal Approaches in
Science and Technology Teaching. Distance Learning with
Special Reference to Commonwealth of Learning Mode.
Evaluation and Examination in Science Education. Action
Research in Science Education. Microteaching. Theories
of Learning Relevant to Science Education. Science Fair
and Academic Games in Science Teaching. Teaching of
Science and Values. Inculcation and Implementation of
Human Values in Science Education at the School Level.
Development of Science Temper. Suggested Reading/
References. Index.
Latest Print 2015 / 216 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4544-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-259-0 (e-Book)
MANGAL & MANGAL
Emotional Intelligence: Managing
Emotions to Win in Life
S.K. MANGAL, has been Principal, and Professor and Head
of the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R. College
of Education, Rohtak, Haryana.
SHUBHRA MANGAL, Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R.S. College
of Education, Noida.
Emotional Intelligence (EI) is a personality development
tool which can be developed at any stage of life to
enhance one’s ability and get desired success in various
life pursuits. This book is conceived to prove as an
effective source of motivation and know-how of getting
imbibed with the EI skills.
The book describes emotional intelligence as a key
to attain success in life. It highlights how managing
emotional traits like anger, jealousy, empathy, love and so
on can help a person to be a better human being and
emerge as a winner in life. Organized well, the chapters
comprehensively explain the concept of emotional
intelligence with relation to its development and
utilization for getting desired success in one’s personal,
social and professional life.
The book, thus, have the needed potential to equip the
readers with the knowledge, skills and applied aspects
 36 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
of EI and its measure, EQ, for deriving rich dividends
through the development and application of EI skills
(mostly emotional and social in nature). The book also
helps people with high IQ to analyze that EQ and IQ goes
hand-in-hand, and by developing the EI skills they can
excel in those spheres of life, where they otherwise fail
to excel with IQ alone.
The book is designed for the postgraduate students of
Psychology, Education and Management. Besides, the
book is also useful for the professionals and general
readers. It is going to prove an asset for those who are
suffering from failures and lack of confidence.
KEY FEATURES
• Provides an easy workable model of EI for utilizing EI
skills as key to success.
• Includes reader-friendly features like key ideas (within
boxes), figures, tables, case studies and illustrations
from daily life and Panchatantra stories and folk tales.
Contents: Preface. List of Tables. List of Figures. Unit I:
Emotional Intelligence-Composition and Contribution to
Success—Concept of Emotions. Concept of Emotional
Intelligence. Success and Emotional Intelligence.
Working with Emotional Intelligence. Unit II: Intra-
personal Awareness—Emotional Self-Awareness. Accurate
Self-Assessment. Self-Confidence. Unit III: Intra-
personal Management—Emotional Self-Control. Stress
Tolerance. Independence. Self-Regard. Assertiveness.
Self-Actualization. Optimism. Unit IV: Inter-personal
Awareness—Awareness about Others. Empathy. Reality
Testing. Unit V: Inter-personal Management—Managing
Interpersonal Relationships. Flexibility. Problem Solving.
Conflict Management. Cooperation and Collaboration.
Inspirational Leadership. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 328 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 550.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5085-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-335-1 (e-Book)
MANGAL & MANGAL
Pedagogy of Social Sciences, 2nd ed.
S.K. MANGAL has been Principal, and Professor and Head
of the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R. College
of Education, Rohtak, Haryana.
UMA MANGAL, formerly Principal, Vaish College of
Education, Rohtak, Haryana.
Written in an easy-to-understand style, the text has been
thoroughly revised in tune with the spirit and need of the
new nomenclature Pedagogy of Social Sciences in place of
the old designation Teaching of Social Studies. It reflects
on the theoretical knowledge and practical skills required
to teach Social Sciences in an effective manner.
Introducing new chapters, the second edition of the book
mainly focuses on improving the methodological concepts
of the Social Sciences teachers. In doing so, it covers
various strategies and devices of teaching Social Sciences,
e-learning in Social Sciences, e-learning resources in Social
Sciences, and professional growth of the Social Sciences
teacher. Besides, the chapters of the previous edition
have been updated, with the required information given
in various new sections.
This book is suitable for a course on Pedagogy of Social
Sciences for the students of B.Ed. and M.A. (Education).
It can also be used for the in-service teacher education
programmes organized by the Central and State education
boards.
NEW TO THE SECOND EDITION
 In addition to the four new chapters, the book now
incorporates several new sections:
• Concept and meaning of the term Social Sciences;
distinguishing the subject Social Sciences from
Natural Sciences and the subject Social Studies;
justification for using the term teaching/pedagogy
of Social Sciences in place of teaching/pedagogy of
Social Studies (Chapter 1)
• Bloom’s revised taxonomy, 2001 (Chapter 4)
• Views of NCF and Focus Group (NCERT) about
curriculum at the various stages of school education
(Chapter 5)
• Survey method and cooperative learning method for
the teaching of Social Sciences (Chapter 7)
• Reference books in Social Sciences (Chapter 9)
• Atlases, newspapers, digital audio recorders and
players and documentaries as instructional material
or teaching aids (Chapter 11)
• Question banks, grading system, open book
examinations and use of rubrics as the means and
ways for improving the evaluation programmes in
Social Sciences (Chapter 23)
 Also, the chapter on ‘Relationship of Social Studies
with other Subjects’ has been replaced with a more
comprehensive and detailed chapter on ‘Correlation in
Social Sciences’ (Chapter 6).
KEY FEATURES
Chapter-end summary and study questions to help

readers review the important topics and drill the
concept discussed, respectively.
Numerous figures and tables to facilitate easy

understanding of the concepts.
References and Suggested Readings to provide scope

for further reading.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Social
Sciences: Meaning, Nature, Scope and Importance. Values
or Advantages of Social Sciences Teaching. Aims and
Objectives of Teaching Social Sciences. Formulation of
Instructional Objectives in Social Sciences. Social Sciences
Curriculum. Correlation in Social Sciences. Methods
of Social Sciences Teaching. Strategies and Devices of
Teaching Social Sciences. Social Sciences Textbook. Social
Sciences Room or Laboratory. Instructional Material or
Teaching Aids in Social Sciences. Utilization of Community
Resources in Social Sciences Teaching. Organization of
Co-Curricular Activities in Social Sciences. e-Learning in
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Social Sciences. e-Learning Resources in Social Sciences.
Team Teaching in Social Sciences. Social Sciences Teacher.
Professional Growth of The Social Sciences Teachers.
Individualized Self-Instruction Through Programmed
Learning. Development of Teaching Skills Through Micro-
Teaching. Pedagogical Analysis of the Contents in Social
Sciences. Unit Planning and Daily Lesson Planning in Social
Sciences. Evaluation in Social Sciences. Diagnostic Testing
and Remedial Teaching in Social Sciences. References.
Suggested Readings. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 664 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-93-87472-25-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-87472-26-6 (eBook)
esgrk
'kSf{kd izca/u
nhik esgrk] f'k{kk ladk;] cukjl fganw fo'ofo|ky; esa ofj"B
izoDrk ds :i esa dk;Zjr gSAa
orZeku vk/kqfud lekt esa izc/a ku ,d uohu vo/kkj.kk ugha jg
xbZ gS] vfirq thou ds lai.w kZ igyqvksa esa bldk iz;ksx vfr
vko';d gSA f'k{kk esa izc/a ku dk rkRi;Z ,slh izfØ;k ls gS ftlesa
laLFkk ds mís';ksa dks /;ku esa j[krs gq, mfpr fu;kstu] funs'Z ku]
,oa fu;a=.k fd;k tkrk gS rkfd laLFkkxr y{;ksa dh izkfIr
lqfuf'pr dh tk ldsA izLrqr iqLrd esa 'kSf{kd izca/ku dh ewy
vo/kkj.kkvksa dks foLr`r :i ls Li"V fd;k x;k gS rFkk
izca/ku laca/kh ladYiukvksa dh v|ru lkexzh iznku djus dk
iz;kl fd;k x;k gSA
;g iqLrd u dsoy 'kSf{kd izca/ku ds fo|kfFkZ;ksa gsrq cfYd blds
vH;kldrkZvksa gsrq Hkh mi;ksxh fl) gksxhA f'k{kk ds Lukrd
¼ch-,M-] ch-,-½] ijkLukrd ikB~;Øe ¼,e-,M-] ,e-,-½ ds
vfrfjDr izfrLi/khZ ijh{kkvksa ¼;w-th-lh- usV ds oSdfYid
fo"k;] izkpk;Z] izoDrk ,oa fo|ky;h iz'kklfud] mPp f'k{kk
iz'kklfud in½ gsrq Hkh ;g iqLrd mi;ksxh gSA 'kSf{kd izcaèku
esa fganh esa xq.koRrkijd lkexzh dh deh dh iwfrZ gsrq izLrqr
iqLrd ,d lkFkZd iz;kl gSA ,u-lh-Vh-bZ- }kjk izLrkfor
f}o"khZ; ch-,M- ,oa ,e-,M- ikB~;Øe ds vkyksd esa Hkh iqLrd
ykHkizn fl) gksxhA
fo"k; lwph% HkwfedkA 'kSf{kd Áca/ku dh ladYiukA 'kSf{kd
Á'kkluA 'kSf{kd Áca/kdA Áca/ku ds fl)karA Hkkjr esa
'kSf{kd iz'kkluA 'kSf{kd fu;kstuA 'kSf{kd foÙk izca/kuA
'kSf{kd usr`RoA usr`Ro dh 'kSfy;k¡A usr`Ro dk ekiuA 'kSf{kd
i;Zos{k.kA dk;ZØe ewY;kadu ,oa iqujh{k.k rduhdhA fu.kZ;uA
lgHkkxh izca/kuA dqy xq.koÙkk izcaèkuA y{; iz/kku izca/kuA
laxBukRed fodklA laLFkkxr vkns'kkuqikyuA cgqfodYih;
iz'uA lanHkZ xzaFkA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2019 / 240 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5106-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-865-3 (e-Book)
37
ik.Ms;
fgUnh Hkk"kk vkSj bldh f'k{k.k fof/k;k¡%
fgUnh Hkk"kk vkSj f'k{k.k fof/k;ksa dh
ifjpk;d
Jq f rdkUr ik.Ms ; ] ih,p-Mh-] vflLVs a V Áks Q s l j] ,feVh
fo'ofo|ky;] uks,MkA
fgUnh Hkkjro"kZ dh jktHkk"kk vkSj jk"VªHkk"kk gSA ;g ns'k ds yxHkx
42 djksM+ ukxfjdksa dh ekr`Hkk"kk rFkk d'ehj ls dU;kdqekjh vkSj
vle ls xqtjkr rd c`gÙkj Hkkjr essa tulkekU; dh lEidZHkk"kk
gSA ns'k ds vU;kU; fgLlksa esa blds mPpkj.k] 'kCn&iz;ksx]
okD;&foU;kl] orZuh vkSj O;kdj.k esa Hkjiwj fofoèkrk vkSj foÑfr;k¡
ikbZ tkrh gSAa ;g fLFkfr fgUnh Hkk"kk ds 'kq) iz;ksx ij ,d
iz'u fpUg gSA
vkt f'k{kk] tulapkj] O;kikj] i;ZVu] flusek tSls vusd
ek/;eksa ls fgUnh iwjs ns'k vkSj nqfu;k esa QSy jgh gSA {ks=h; rFkk
fons'kh Hkk"kkvksa ds 'kCnksa vkSj 'kSfy;ksa ds vifeJ.k ds dkj.k fgUnh
dk fut:i misf{kr gks jgk gSA bu ifjfLFkfr;ksa esa fgUnh Hkk"kk ds
ekud Lo:i dks l¡tksuk vkSj fodflr djuk vius vki esa ,d
pqukSrh gSA blds izfrdkj ds fy, gkyk¡fd lekt ds lHkh oxks±
dk ;ksxnku visf{kr gS] fQj Hkh fgUnh Hkk"kk ds v/;srkvksa vkSj
v/;kidksa dks bldh vfLerk dh j{kk ds fy, fo'ks"k ft+Eesnkjh
fuHkkuh gksxhA fgUnh vè;kidksa vkSj fo|kfFkZ;ksa dh ekSf[kd vkSj
fyf[kr Hkk"kk esa 'kq)rk vkSj ekudrk ds fodkl ds mn~n's ; ls
gh bl iqLrd dk l`tu fd;k x;k gSA
izLrqr iqLrd dh jpuk f'k{kd f'k{kk ds lHkh fMIyksek] fMxzh
vkSj LukrdksÙkj ikB~;Øeks& a ch-,M-] ch-,y-,M-] Mh-bZ-Vh-Vh-] Mh-,M-]
,e-,M-] ,e-,-&,tqds'ku vkfn ds Nk=k/;kidksa] dk;Zjr fgUnh
f'k{kdksa vkSj fgUnh f'k{k.k fof/k;ksa dks tkuus ds bPNqd fo|kfFkZ;ksa
ds mi;ksx gsrq fy[kh xbZ gS rkfd os vius fo|kfFkZ;ksas ds
vk/kkjHkwr Hkk"kk&dkS'kyksa esa lq/kkj ds fy, izsfjr vkSj l{ke gks
ldsaA iqLrd esa fgUnh Hkk"kk ds Lo:i dks lgt cks/kxE; cukus
vkSj fo|kfFkZ;ksa rd mlds vUrj.k dh izfØ;k dk foospu fd;k
x;k gSA
iz L rq r iq L rd dh o.;Z l kexz h vus d fo'ofo|ky;ks a ds
f'k{kd&izf'k{k.k ikB~;Øeksa dks /;ku esa j[kdj pquh xbZ gSA
;g iqLrd v/;srkvksa dks fgUnh ds lkekU; Lo:i] Hkk"kk&
vf/kxr izfØ;k] vk/kkjHkwr O;kdj.k] f'k{k.k&fu;kstu] f'k{k.k&
fof/k;ksa] ewY;kadu Áfof/k;ksa] fØ;kRed vuqlU/kku bR;kfn ls
voxr djkrh gSA lkFk gh iqLrd esa vk/kqfud fgUnh] fgUnh ds
foLrkj] izHkko] cnyrs Lo:i vkSj lEHkkoukvksa dk Hkh mYys[k
gSA ;g iqLrd fgUnh ds laj{k.k] f'k{k.k vkSj izlkj esa fuf'pr
:i ls mi;ksxh fl) gksxhA
fo"k; lwph% fuosnuA Hkk"kk dk ifjp;A fgUnh Hkk"kk dk mn~Hko
vkSj fodklA vkèkqfud Hkkjr esa fgUnh dh fLFkfrA fgUnh lkfgR;
dk laf{kIr bfrgklA fgUnh dh fyfi&nsoukxjhA fgUnh dk
O;kdj.kA fgUnh O;kdj.k dh o.kZ O;oLFkkA fgUnh O;kdj.k dh
'kCn O;oLFkkA fgUnh esa 'kCnl`tu dh izfØ;k&lfUèk rFkk leklA
fgUnh esa 'kCnl`tu dh izfØ;k&milxZ rFkk izR;;A mPpkj.k
vkSj orZuh dh v'kqf);k&dkj.k vkSj fuokj.kA fgUnh O;kdj.k
 38 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
dh okD; O;oLFkkA ekr`Hkk"kk fgUnh f'k{k.k dh mi;ksxh fofèk;k¡A
ek=ksrj Hkk"kk ds :i esa fgUnh f'k{k.k dh mi;ksxh fofèk;k¡A
fgUnh f'k{k.k esa izR;; lajpukokn ¼daLVªfDVfoT+e½ dk iz;ksxA
f'k{k.k fu;kstu&bdkbZ ;kstuk vkSj ikB;kstuk fuekZ.kA lw{e
f'k{k.k vkSj lw{e ikB;kstuk,¡A i| ¼dfork½ f'k{k.k izfofèkA
x| f'k{k.k izfofèkA O;kdj.k f'k{k.k izfofèkA ekSf[kd Hkk"kk&f'k{k.k
izfofèkA fyf[kr Hkk"kk&f'k{k.k izfofèkA Hkk"kk f'k{k.k esa ekiu rFkk
ewY;kaduA ikB~;oLrq dk f'k{k.k'kkL=h; fo'ys"k.kA Hkk"kk&f'k{k.k
esa lgk;d midj.kksa dk iz;ksxA Hkk"kk&f'k{k.k esa funkukRed
ijh{k.k ,oa fpfdRldh; f'k{k.kA fgUnh f'k{k.k esa fØ;kRed
vuqlUèkkuA fgUnh ikB~;iqLrd dk ewY;kaduA fgUnh f'k{k.k&,d
lrr izfØ;kA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2014 / 316 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5003-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-820-2 (e-Book)
RADHA MOHAN
Innovative Science Teaching: For
Physical Science Teachers, 4th ed.
RADHA MOHAN, former Principal, Rajalakshmi College of
Education, Thandalam, Chennai.
Science teaching has evolved as a blend of conventional
methods and modern aids owing to the changing needs
and techniques of education with an objective to develop
scientific attitude among the students. This Fourth Edition
of Innovative Science Teaching aims to strike balance
between modern teaching methods and time-tested
theories.
FEATURES OF THE FOURTH EDITION
• Chapters 3, 8 and 13 have been thoroughly revised and
updated in the light of advancements of application of
technology in teaching.
• Chapter 13—New Technology to Promote Learning—
has been expanded to include the impact of technology
on teaching and learning.
• E-learning materials and website addresses relevant to
science teaching have been updated.
• All chapters have been revised and extensive coverage
of all aspects of modern teaching has been included.
This edition of Innovative Science Teaching is designed
for the undergraduate and postgraduate students of
Education specializing in science teaching. It can also
prove useful as a reference book for administrators,
researchers and teacher-trainers.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Part I:
Background for Teaching of Physical Science­­—Nature
and Scope of Physical Science­. Theories of Learning
with Special Reference to Science Education­. Aims and
Objectives of Teaching Physical Science­. Curriculum in
Physical Science­. Models of Teaching­. Constructivism
in Science Education­. Part II: Techniques and Methods
of Teaching Physical Science­­—Microteaching­. Methods
of Teaching Physical Science­­. Part III: Planning for
Instruction­—Unit Planning­. Lesson Planning­. The Science
Laboratory­. Educational Aids to Science Teaching­. New
Technology to Promote Learning Part IV: Evaluation in
Science Teaching­­—Tools and Techniques of Evaluation in
Physical Science. Statistics­ for the Science Teacher. The
Science Teacher­. References. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 468 pp. / 15.8 × 24.0 cm / ` 425.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-08-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-09-8 (e-Book)
VYAS & PATEL
Teaching English as a Second
Language: A New Pedagogy for a
New Century, 2nd ed.
MANISH A. VYAS, Senior Lecturer with the Department of
English, VPMP Polytechnic, Gandhinagar, Gujarat.
YOGESH L. PATEL, Controller of Examination, Shree
Somnath Sanskrit University, Veraval-Somnath, Gujarat.
English Language Teaching (ELT), especially English as a
Second Language (ESL) and English as a Foreign Language
(EFL), has been witnessing unprecedented changes in
curriculum, teaching methodology, and the application of
learning theories. This has created a demand for teachers
who can teach English to learners of varied cultural,
socio-economic and psychological backgrounds.
The book, in its second edition, continues to discuss the
modern trends, innovations, as well as the difficulties and
challenges in teaching and learning ESL in a non-native
context. The book, with contributions from many experts
(each one specializing in a particular field) from countries
such as UK, USA, Australia, New Zealand, India, Nigeria,
Sri Lanka, China, and Japan, provides new methods,
strategies and application-oriented solutions to overcome
the problems in a practical way.
The book deals with all topics pertinent to English as a
Second Language or English for the non-native speakers,
and these are further reinforced by a large number of
examples and quotations from different sources.
The new edition comes along with thoroughly improvised
chapters on Narrative Inquiry for Teacher Development
(Chapter 13) and Mass Media, Language Attitudes
and Language Interaction Phenomena (Chapter 23):
to provide an insight on the innovative approaches in
Teacher training and in classrooms, and new approaches
and changing language dimensions in the world of media,
and in general.
What distinguishes the text is its focus on modern
innovations and use of technology in ELT/CLT (Communi-
cative Language Teaching).
Postgraduate Students of English, teachers, teacher-
trainees (B.Ed./M.A. Education/M.Ed.), and teacher-
educators who are concerned with teaching English as a
Second Language (ESL) should find this book immensely
helpful.
Contents: Preface. List of Contributors. English: An
Alladin’s Lamp. Part 1: Communicative Language Teaching
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
in ESL Context—What Can We Learn from Classroom
Observations?: A study of CLT in a Chinese University
Context. Communicative Language Teaching and English
Language Teaching in Nigeria. Communicative Language
Teaching: An Indian Teacher Resolves a Methodology
Dilemma. Integrating ICT in the Language Classroom: An
Intercultural Journey? Part 2: Multimedia in ELT—Computer-
Assisted Language Learning: Its Future. Podcasting as an
Effective Tool for Language Learning. Making Language
Teaching Relevant for the Digital Age. Part 3: Content
Based Instruction—Content-based Instruction. Familiarity
and Planning in Task-based Learning. A Fine ‘How Do
You Do’: Contextual Factors within English Greetings.
Part 4: Factors Affecting ESL Teaching—Motivation and
Demotivation Factors in Language Learning. Narrative
Inquiry for Teacher Development. Redefining Learner
Autonomy in the Indian ESL Context. Teaching English at
the Undergraduate Level: Groping in the Dark? Applying
Knowledge of Psycholinguistics in Language Teaching and
Learning. Part 5: Games and Activities in ESL Classroom—
Language-based Games and Motivation: Using Games
in the ESL Classroom. Dynamic, Interactive Classroom
Activities. Games and Students’ Motivation in Foreign
Language Learning. Part 6: Vocabulary Development—
Vocabulary Learning through Experience Tasks. Enhancing
ESL Learners’ Lexical Competence. Morphological Analysis
and Vocabulary Development: Critical Criteria. Mass Media,
Language Attitudes and Language Interaction Phenomena.
Part 7: Pedagogical Reorientation of Grammar—Revising
Our Paradigm: Teaching Grammar as Text Inquiry.
A Reflection of Pedagogic Value on Swan’s Design
Criteria and Westney’s Approach to Grammar Teaching.
Part 8: Developing Communication Skills—Developing the
Speaking and the Writing Skills at Technical Institutes:
A Classroom Investigation with Suggestions. Integrating
Skills: Business Presentations for Business Students. Part
9: Multiculturalism in ESL—Linguistic Migrations: Teaching
English in Multicultural Contexts. Identity Maintenance
for Non-native Speakers of English. Enacting a Plurilingual
Pedagogy: English Language Policy and Instruction in
India. Investigating Linguistic Diversity in American
Classrooms. Crosstalk in Multilingual Interactions among
Non-native Speakers of English. Part 10: Curriculum
Development—Universals in the Process of Curriculum
Development in ELT. Communicative Language Teaching:
Problems of Designing Syllabuses and Producing Materials.
Constructing Curriculum for an Intensive English Program.
Part 11: Language Testing—Testing Communicative
Competence. Index.
Latest Print 2015 / 524 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5152-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-756-4 (e-Book)
39
Research/Statistics in Education
ASTHANA & BRAJ BHUSHAN
Statistics for Social Sciences
(with SPSS Applications), 2nd ed.
HARI SHANKAR ASTHANA, Professor, Department of
Psychology, Banaras Hindu University, Varanasi.
BRAJ BHUSHAN, Professor, Department of Humanities
and Social Sciences, Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur.
Designed as a text for the undergraduate and postgraduate
students of psychology, education, sociology, demography
and economics, this comprehensive book explains the
theoretical and computational aspects of statistics. Since
the students of social sciences often find it difficult to
comprehend the statistical techniques due to complex
mathematical steps involved, this book explains each
concept and related statistical derivations or formulae in
a simple and clear manner.
The text provides solutions to basic concepts and
problems using a number of illustrations. In addition, it
demonstrates the simplest way of using SPSS software for
statistical analysis.
SPSS screen images are used to make the ideas more
clear to the readers. This is preceded by theoretical
details and solved examples so that even those having
minimal knowledge of computer can use SPSS easily and
comprehend the complex intermediate steps involved in
statistical analysis.
Besides the undergraduate and postgraduate students of
social sciences, the researchers and professionals in this
field should find this book immensely useful.
The Second Edition of the book has been prepared on
the basis of the feedback received from the readers. As
per their demand, a new chapter based on multivariate
analysis, i.e., Factor analysis has been introduced. Many
other chapters have been modified and updated make
them more effective and simple for the readers. Most
importantly, screenshots of the latest version of SPSS
have been incorporated in the relevant chapters to keep
the students abreast with the developments in tools and
techniques of statistics.
KEY FEATURES
• Demonstrates the simplest way of using SPSS for
statistical analysis.
• Provides solved examples throughout the text in a
graded manner.
• Gives chapter-end exercises and key terms for better
grasp of the topics covered.
Contents: Preface. Introduction. Sampling. Normal
Probability Curve. Classification and Graphing Techniques.
Measures of Central Tendency. Measures of Dispersion.
Chi Square Test. Hypothesis Testing. Correlation. Analysis
of Variance (ANOVA). Regression Analysis. Factor Analysis.
Non-Parametric Analysis. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 256 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5248-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-008-4 (e-Book)
 40 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
MANGAL
Statistics in Psychology and Education,
2nd ed.
S.K. MANGAL, formerly, Principal, Professor and Head,
Department of Postgraduate Studies at C.R. College of
Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
This extensively revised and fully updated second edition
is designed as a textbook for M.A. (Education), M.Ed.,
M.A. (Psychology and Sociology) and for research students
pursuing courses in Statistics related to these subjects.
It takes into account the present syllabi of various
universities and institutes of education across the country.
WHAT’S NEW TO THE SECOND EDITION
• Six new chapters added with emphasis on advanced
statistical concepts and techniques such as the following:
– Biserial correlation, point biserial correlation,
tetrachoric correlation, phi coefficient, partial and
multiple correlation.
– Transfer of raw scores into standard scores, T, C and
Stanine scores.
– Non-parametric tests like the McNemar test, Sign
test, Wilcoxon test, Median test, U test, Runs test,
and KS test.
– Analysis of covariance.
• Some chapters modified and reshuffled to reflect the
new emphasis.
• Entire text thoroughly checked and marked improve-
ments made to bring the topics up-to-date.
KEY FEATURES
• Statistical procedures and methods have been simplified
to facilitate understanding of the subject, and only the
minimum necessary mathematics is presented
• Gives detailed discussion on parametric tests using
very small samples for drawing valuable statistical
inferences.
• Numerous solved examples and assignments are
provided for practice and to illustrate the concepts and
applications.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Statistics—
Meaning and Use. Organization of Data. Graphical
Representation of Data. Measures of Central Tendency.
Percentiles and Percentile Rank. Measures of Variability.
Linear Correlation. The Normal Curve and its Applications.
Significance of the Mean and Other Statistics. Significance
of the Difference between Means. Chi Square and
Contingency Coefficient. Further Methods of Correlations.
Partial and Multiple Correlation. Regression and Prediction.
Scores Transformation. Non-Parametric Tests. Analysis of
Variance. Analysis of Covariance. Answers. Appendices.
Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 416 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2088-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-72-1 (e-Book)
MANGAL & MANGAL
Research Methodology in Behavioural
Sciences
S.K. MANGAL, formerly Principal, Professor and Head
of the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R. College
of Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
SHUBHRA MANGAL, Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R.S. College
of Education, Noida.
The quality and productivity of a research work very
much depends on the competency of the researchers.
Such competency needs to be generated and nurtured
properly among the researchers from the very beginning
of their research career. This comprehensive book on
research methodology discusses in detail how to carry
out research studies in various disciplines of behavioural
sciences in an organized manner.
The book is meant for the postgraduate students of
Education (M.Ed.), Sociology, Psychology and Management.
In addition, it will also be useful to research scholars in
learning the art of doing qualitative and quantitative
research studies in behavioural sciences.
Contents: Preface. Research Nature and Fundamental
Concepts. Research in Behavioural Sciences: Nature and
Types. Historical Research. Descriptive or Normative
Survey Research. Developmental Research. Experimental
Research and Designs. Quasi-experimental Research. Ex-
post Facto Research. Qualitative Research. Ethnographic
Research. Case Study and Single Subject Study Research.
Documentary Analysis Research. Research Problem:
Identification and Writing a Research Proposal (Synopsis).
Searching and Reviewing the Related Literature.
Research Hypotheses. Sampling. Data Collection Tools
and Techniques. Data Collection Tools Observation. Data
Collection Tools Questionnaire. Data Collection Tools
Interview. Data Collection Tools Rating Scales. Data
Collection Tools Attitude Scales. Data Collection Tools
Achievement Tests. Data Collection Tools Sociometry or
Sociometric Techniques. Data Collection Tools Personality
and Adjustment Inventories. Data Collection Tools
Projective Techniques. Construction and Standardization
of Research Tools. Interpretation of Test Scores Scores
Transformation and Development of Test Norms.
Reliability of Research Tools. Validity of Research Tools.
Quantitative Data Analysis. Qualitative Data Analysis.
Writing Research Report. Using Computer Technology in
Research. Appendix. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 764 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4808-0 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-327-6 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
eaxy ,oa eaxy
O;kogkfjd foKkuksa esa vuqla/kku fof/k;k¡
(Research Methodology in Behavioural Sciences)
,l-ds- eaxy] lh-vkj- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqd's ku jksgrd] gfj;k.kk
ds Ákpk;Z ,oa ÁksQslj in ls lsokfuo`r gSaA
'kqHkzk eaxy] lh-vkj-,l- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqds'ku] uks,Mk esa
izkpk;Z ,oa izksQslj in ij lsokjr gSaA
vuqla/kku dk;Z dk mfpr fØ;kUo;u vkSj mldh xq.koÙkk iwjh
rjg ls vuqlaèkkudÙkkZvksa dh vuqla/kku vfHk{kerkvksa ij fuHkZj
djrh gSA vuqla/kku lEcU/kh bl vfHk{kerk rFkk dkS'ky ds
fodkl dk dk;Z vuqla/kkudÙkkZvksa ds fo|kFkhZ thou ls gh
izkjEHk fd;k tkuk pkfg;s rkfd os le; ls gh vuqlaèkku dh
okLrfod izÑfr rFkk mlds fØ;kUo;u ds oSKkfud <ax ls
HkyhHkk¡fr ifjfpr gksdj vius 'kks/k dk;ks± dks mfpr vatke ns
ldsaA izLrqr iqLrd esa O;kogkfjd foKkuksa ds vuqla/kku v/;;uksa
ds fØ;kUo;u ls lEcfU/kr fofHkUu igyqvksa ij foLrkj ls izdk'k
Mkyrs gq, ;gh iz;Ru fd;k x;k gS fd fo|kFkhZ 'kksèkdÙkkZvksa
rFkk 'kksèk ds bPNqd O;olkf;;ksa ds fy;s 'kks/k vè;;u djus
gsrq vko';d vkèkkjHkwfe ,oa fofèkrU= dh tkudkjh mfpr :i
esa miyC/k gks ldsA
;|fi ewy:i ls bls f'k{kk] lekt'kkL=] euksfoKku] izcU/ku
rFkk 'kkjhfjd f'k{kk vkfn fo"k;ksa ds LukrdksÙkj d{kkvksa esa
v/;;u rFkk 'kks/kjr fo|kfFkZ;ksa ds fy;s fy[kk x;k gS] ijUrq
;g O;olk;jr O;fDr;ksa dh vuqla/kku vko';drkvksa dks Hkh iwjk
djus esa ;Fks"V :i ls l{ke gSA
eq[; vkd"kZ.k
• O;kogkfjd foKkuksa esa vuqla/kku djus ds fy;s vko’;d
dk;ZÁ.kkyh dk fooj.k iznku djus okyh fo"k;oLrq dk
rkfdZd ,oa Øec) izLrqrhdj.kA
• ikB~ ; lkexz h ds mfpr iz L rq r hdj.k ,oa cks / kxE;rk gs r q ]
n` " Vka r ks a ] rkfydkvks a ] js [ kkfp=ks a ] vkjs [ kks a ,oa dk;Z d kjh
mnkgj.kksa dk lekos'kA
• ifjek.kkRed ,oa xq.kkRed vuqla/kku v/;;uksa esa iz;qDr
vko';d iznÙk ladyu midj.kksa ds mi;ksx] fuekZ.k rFkk
ekudhdj.k dk foLr`r ifjp;A
• ifjek.kkRed ,oa xq.kkRed vuqla/kkuksa ds ÁnÙkksa dk fo'ys"k.k
djus gsrq iz;ksx esa ykbZ tkus okyh rduhdksa ,oa fof/k;ksa dh
mi;ksxh vkSj dk;Zdkjh tkudkjhA
• ifjek.kkRed ,oa xq.kkRed vuql a/ kku djus gs r q da I ;w V j
rduhdh ds mi;ksx ij vk/kkfjr ,d lEiw.kZ v/;k; dh
izLrqfrA
fo"k; lwph% fp= lwphA rkfydk lwphA vkeq[k. vuqlaèkku% izÑfr
,oa vkèkkjHkwr voèkkj.kk;saA O;kogkfjd foKkuksa esa vuqlaèkku%
izÑfr ,oa izdkjA ,sfrgkfld vuqlaèkkuA o.kZukRed ;k uksesZfVo
losZ{k.k vuqlaèkkuA fodklkRed vuqlaèkkuA izk;ksfxd vuqlaèkku ,oa
vfHkdYiA vèkZ-Ák;ksfxd vuqlaèkkuA ?kVuksÙkj vuqlaèkkuA xq.kkRed
vuqlaèkkuA tkfro`R;kRed vuqlaèkkuA O;fDrxr vè;;u vkSj ,dy
iz;ksT; vè;;u vuqlaèkkuA Áys[kh; fo'ys"k.k vuqlaèkkuA vuqlaèkku
leL;k% igpku ,oa vuqlaèkku ÁLrko ys[kuA lEcfUèkr lkfgR;
dh [kkst ,oa iquohZ{k.kA vuqlaèkku ifjdYiuk,¡A izfrn'kZ izfrp;uA
iznÙk ladyu% midj.k ,oa rduhdsaA iznÙk ladyu midj.k%
41
izs{k.kA iznÙk ladyu midj.k% Á'ukoyhA iznÙk ladyu midj.k%
lk{kkRdkjA iznÙk ladyu midj.k% fuèkkZj.k ekiuhA iznÙk ladyu
midj.k% vfHko`fÙk ekiuhA iznÙk ladyu midj.k% miyfCèk
ijh{k.kA iznÙk ladyu midj.k% lektfefr ;k lektferh;
rduhds a A iz n Ùk la d yu midj.k% O;fDrRo ,oa lek;ks t u
ifjlwfp;k¡A iznÙk ladyu midj.k% iz{ksih rduhdsaA vuqlaèkku
midj.kksa dk fuekZ.k ,oa ekudhdj.kA ijh{k.k izkIrkadksa dh
O;k[;k% izkIrkadksa dk :ikUrj.k ,oa ijh{k.k ekudksa dk fodklA
vuqlaèkku midj.kksa dh fo'oluh;rkA vuqlaèkku midj.kksa dh
oSèkrkA ifjek.kkRed ÁnÙk fo'ys"k.kA xq.kkRed ÁnÙk fo'ys"k.kA
vuqlaèkku Áfrosnu dk ys[kuA vuqlaèkku esa daI;wVj rduhdh dk
mi;ksxA ifjf'k"VA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2021 / 752 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 650.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4974-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-826-4 (e-Book)
Teaching Methods/
Educational Technology
MANGAL & MANGAL
Essentials of Educational Technology
S.K. MANGAL, formerly Principal, and Professor and Head,
Department of Post Graduate Studies at C.R. College of
Education, Rohtak, Haryana.
UMA MANGAL, formerly Principal, Vaish College of
Education, Rohtak, Haryana.
Use of technology has permeated all areas of knowledge,
and Education is no exception. This accessible and
easy-to-read book, emanating from an author who has
distinguished himself as teacher and able administrator
of education, and devised several educational and
psychological tests, encompasses a broad spectrum of
areas in educational technology. It focuses on the modern
trends and innovations in Educational Technology to
equip the teacher trainees and in-service teachers with
the necessary skills in this area.
The book not only covers the objectives, concepts, use
and management of Educational Technology, it also
emphasises the role of education and various other
techniques that help in teaching–learning.
KEY FEATURES
• The coverage is quite comprehensive and elaborate
catering to the needs of the students of most Indian
universities.
• The concepts given are illustrated with plenty of tables,
figures, and examples to make the reader comprehend
the subject better.
This book is ideally suited for the students of B.Ed., M.Ed.,
BA/MA (Education) courses. Besides, the text can be
profitably used by in-service teachers, teacher educators,
educational technology-resource personnel, and school
administrators.
 42 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Contents: Preface. Educational Technology: Meaning,
Nature and Scope. Psychological Basis for the Use
of Hardware and Software Technologies. Hardware
Instructional Aids. Software Instructional Aids. Concept
of Teaching and Learning. Task of Teaching. Theories of
Teaching. Principles and Maxims of Successful Teaching.
Formulation of Teaching or Instructional Objectives.
Teaching Strategies and Devices. Communication and
Teaching-Learning. Management of Teaching-Learning.
Modification of Teacher Behaviour and Interaction
Analysis. Action Research. Microteaching. Role Playing
and Gaming. Teacher Evaluation. Systems Approach.
Programmed Learning or Instruction. Learner Controlled
Instruction (LCI). Personalized System of Instructions
(PSI). Computer-Assisted and Managed Instruction.
Training Psychology. Cybernetics. Models of Teaching.
Lesson Planning. Team Teaching. Audio-tutorial
System, Language Laboratory and Teleconferencing.
Cooperative Learning. Information and Communication
Technology (ICT). Computers: Operation and Networking.
Resource Centres of Educational Technology. Virtual Class-
rooms and e-Learning. Distance Education. Bibliography.
Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 836 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3723-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-89-9 (e-Book)
eaxy ,oa eaxy
f'k{kk rduhdh
(Educational Technology)
,l-ds- eaxy] lh-vkj- dkWfyt vkWQ ,twd's ku] jksgrd ¼gfj;k.kk½ ds
izkpk;Z] izkQ
s l
s j ,oa foHkkxkè;{k in ls lsok-fuo`Ùk gSaA
mek eaxy] izkpk;kZ in ls lsok-fuo`Ùk] f'k{kk txr dh ,d
tkuh&ekuh f'kf{kdk] iz'kkld] ysf[kdk rFkk 'kks/kd=hZ gSaA
izLrqr iqLrd lqlaxfBr fo"k;oLrq ds lkFk jkspd 'kSyh esa fy[kh
x;h gSA bldh Hkk"kk vR;ar ljy] cks/kxE; rFkk ifjekftZr gSA blesa
f'k{kk rduhdh ls lacafèkr lHkh vkèkkjHkwr Ádj.kksa ij mfpr Ádk'k
Mkyk x;k gSA fo"k;oLrq dks lkjxfHkZr rFkk jkspd cukus ds fy,
blesa ;FkklEHko rkfydkvksa] fp=kas rFkk mnkgj.kksa dk lekos'k fd;k
x;k gSA ;g iqLrd Mh-,M-] ch-,M-] ,e-,M-] ,e-,- ¼f'k{kk'kkL=½ rFkk
,e-fQy- ¼f'k{kk'kkL=½ ds fy, vR;ar mi;ksxh gSA blds vykok] ;g
vè;kidksa] vuqlaèkkudÙkkZvksa rFkk fo|ky;ksa ,oa dkWystksa ds iz'kkldksa
ds fy, Hkh ykHkdkjh gksxh lkFk gh f'k{k.k laLFkkuksa }kjk lsokjr
vè;kidksa ds Áf'k{k.k ds fy, le;&le; ij vk;ksftr dk;Z'kkykvksa
ds fy, Hkh ;g mi;ksxh lkfcr gksxhA
f'k{kk rduhdh ds {ks= esa lHkh izdkj ds vk/qfudre fopkjksa rFkk
uohure iz;ksxks]a tSls&fo|kFkhZ fu;af=r vuqns'ku] O;fDrxr vuqns'ku
iz.kkyh] fofue;kRed fo'ys"k.k lfgr d{kk&d{k var%fØ;k fo'ys"k.k
dh fofHkUu rduhds]a lkbcjusfVDl] izf'k{k.k euksfoKku] Vksyh f'k{k.k]
lgdkjh vfèkxe] vkWfM;ks V~;wVksfj;y iz.kkyh] Hkk"kk iz;ksx'kkyk]
VsyhdkaÝfas lax] bZ&yfuZx
a ] daI;wVj lgk; rFkk izcfa /kr vuqn’s ku] lwpuk
,oa laizs"k.k rduhdh] vokLrfod d{kk&d{k rFkk nwjorhZ f'k{kk vkfn
dk blesa ;Fkksfpr o.kZu fd;k x;k gSA
fo"k; lwph% izkDdFkuA 'kSf{kd rduhdh&vFkZ] izÑfr ,oa {ks=A
vk/qfud rduhfd;ksa ds iz;ksx gsrq euksoSKkfud vkèkkjA gkMZos;j ;k
dBksj midj.kA lkW¶Vos;j ;k e`nqy midj.kA f'k{k.k ,oa vfèkxe
dh voèkkj.kkA f'k{k.k dk;ZA f'k{k.k fl)kUrA f'k{k.k ds izfu;e ,oa
lw=A f'k{k.k ;k vuqns'kukRed mn~ns';ksa dk fuekZ.kA f'k{k.k O;wg
jpuk;sa rFkk izfofèk;k¡A laizs"k.k ,oa f'k{k.k&vfèkxeA f'k{k.k&vfèkxe
dk iz c a / kuA f'k{kd O;ogkj dk ifjektZ u ,oa vUr%fØ;k
fo'ys"k.kA fØ;kRed vuqla/kkuA lw{e f'k{k.kA Hkwfedk fuokZg ,oa
ØhM+uA f'k{kd ewY;kaduA iz.kkyh mikxeA vfHkØfer vfèkxeA
fo|kFkhZ fu;af=r vuqns'kuA O;fDrxr vuqns'ku iz.kkyhA daI;wVj
lgk; ,oa daI;wVj izcafèkr vuqns'kuA Áf'k{k.k euksfoKkuA laizs"k.k
fu;a=.k foKkuA f'k{k.k ÁfrekuA bdkbZ ;kstuk ,oa ikB ;kstukA
Vksyh f'k{k.kA vkfM;ks&V~;wVksfj;y Á.kkyh] Hkk"kk Á;ksx'kkyk ,oa
VsyhdkaÝfas laxA lgdkjh vf/kxeA lwpuk ,oa laÁ"s k.k rduhdhA daI;wVj
dk;Ziz.kkyh ,oa usVofd±xA 'kSf{kd rduhdh ds lalkèku dsanzA
vokLrfod d{kk&d{k rFkk bZ&yfuZaxA nwjorhZ f'k{kkA ys[kd
vuqØef.kdkA fo"k; vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2019 / 1008 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 795.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3724-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-825-7 (e-Book)
MANGAL & MANGAL
Learning and Teaching
S.K. MANGAL, formerly Principal, Professor and Head
of the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R. College
of Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
SHUBHRA MANGAL, Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R.S. College
of Education, Noida.
This book comprises an organised comprehensive text
for the in-depth understanding of various theories and
concepts in the field of learning and teaching. It deals with
all the important topics of the subject by using descriptive
analytical approach and methodology. The book is an
all-in-one source to meet the requirements of students
considering their course content, and help them improve
their teaching skills as an integrated part of their study in
accordance with the guidelines of NCTE. Beginning with
the nature and importance of learning, the book discusses
all the popular theories propagated by behaviourists,
cognitivists and humanists. It also focuses on pedagogy,
andragogy, models of teaching, tasks and process of
learning, strategies of teaching, learning styles, concepts
of e-learning and m-learning in the applications of ICT.
KEY FEATURES
• Full coverage of syllabi of all the Indian universities
serving the purpose of students/teachers
• Meticulous explanation with illustrative examples and
case studies
• Thoughtfully sequenced chapters/topics for easy
inference
• Neat figures, tables, and diagrams for observant reading
• Chapter-end summary for recapitulation
Contents: Preface. Learning: Concept, Nature, Types and
Importance. Factors Affecting Learning. Behaviourism
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
and Behaviouristic Theories of Learning. Cognitivism
and Cognitivistic Theories of Learning. Humanism and
Humanistic Theories of Learning. Constructivism and
Constructivist Learning. Cognition and Learning. Learning as
Construction of Knowledge. Learning Strategies. Learning
Styles: Concept, Types and Implications. E-learning and
M-Learning. Transfer of Learning or Training. Motivation
in Teaching–Learning. Teaching: Concept, Nature and
Importance. Phases and Levels of Teaching. Variables in
the Teaching Process. Principles and Maxims of Teaching.
Theories of Teaching. Teaching Strategies. Simulated
Teaching. Team Teaching. Models of Teaching. Micro-
Teaching. Interaction Analysis. Pedagogy and Andragogy.
Role of Teacher in a Teaching–Learning Context. Teaching
Effectiveness and Effective Teachers. Teaching Profession
and Professional Ethics. Information and Communication
Technology. Diverse Teaching Strategies for Diverse
Learners. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 584 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 625.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-18-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-19-6 (eBook)
eaxy ,oa eaxy
vf/kxe ,oa f’k{k.k
(Learning and Teaching)
,l-ds- eaxy] lh-vkj- dkWfyt vkWQ ,twd's ku] jksgrd ¼gfj;k.kk½ ds
izkpk;Z] izkQ
s l
s j ,oa foHkkxkè;{k in ls lsok-fuo`Ùk gSaA
mek eaxy] izkpk;kZ in ls lsok-fuo`Ùk] f'k{kk txr dh ,d
tkuh&ekuh f'kf{kdk] iz'kkld] ysf[kdk rFkk 'kks/kd=hZ gSaA
fdlh Hkh ns”k ds fy; f”k{k.k&vf/kxe izfØ;k leqfpr #i ls
fu;ksftr ,oa laxfBr fd;k tkuk vko”;d gSaA vius bl mÌs”; dh
iwfrZ gsrq ikB~;iqLrd esa of.kZr fo’k; oLrq dks 30 fofHkUu v/;k;ksa esa
foHkkftr fd;k x;k gSA vf/kxe dh vo/kkj.kk] izd`fr] izdkj rFkk
egÙo ds ckjs esa ppkZ djrs gq, bldks izHkkfor djus okys dkjdksa
,oa vf/kxe fl)kUrksa dk foLrkj esa o.kZu fd;k x;k gSA blesa
O;kogkjoknh ,oa laKkukRedrkoknh euksoSKkfudksa }kjk izfrikfnr
vf/kxe fl)kUrksa dh ppkZ dh xbZ gS rFkk vf/kxe dk;Z vkSj izfØ;k
dks jpukRedoknh ifjizs{; esa le>kus dk iz;Ru fd;k x;k gSA pw¡fd
izR;sd fo|kFkhZ@vf/kxedÙkkZ dh vius vf/kxe gsrq ,d fof”k’V
vf/kxe “kSyh gksrh gS bl n`f’V ls fofHkUu izdkj dh vf/kxe “kSfy;ksa
dh ppkZ foLrkj ls dh xbZ gSA
var esa fHkUu ;ksX;rkvksa ls ;qDr fof”k’V vf/kxedÙkkZvksa ds fy;s
mi;ksx esa ykbZ tkus okyh fHkUu izdkj dh vf/kxe “kSfy;ksa dh ppkZ
djrs gq, iqLrd dks iw.kZ :i nsus dh ps’Vk dh xbZ gSA fo|kfFkZ;ksa ds
f”k{k.k&vf/kxe esa lwpuk ,oa laizs{k.k rduhdh (ICT) ds mi;ksx
dks Hkh “kkfey fd;k x;k gSA ,slh egÙoiw.kZ f”k{k.k O;wg jpukvksa dk
o.kZu fd;k x;k gS tks f”k{kdksa dks vius f”k{k.k dks lgt] jkspd
rFkk mi;ksxh cukus ds dke vkrh gSaA
var esa nks egÙoiw.kZ ckrksa lwpuk ,oa laizs{k.k rduhdh ds f”k{k.k&
vf/kxe esa mi;ksx rFkk fHkUu ;ksX;rkvksa okys vf/kxe dÙkkZvksa ds
43
f”k{k.k&vf/kxe gsrq viukbZ tkus okyh fof”k’V f”k{k.k O;w jpukvksa@
fof/k;ksa dk o.kZu fd;k x;k gSA
fo"k; lwph% izLrkoukA vf/kxe&vo/kkj.kk] izÑfr ,oa vuq{ks=A
vf/kxe dks izHkkfor djus okys dkjdA O;ogkjokn vkSj O;ogkjoknh
vf/kxe fl)kUrA laKkuokn vkSj laKkuoknh vf/kxe fl)kUrA
ekuorkokn vkSj ekuorkoknh vf/kxe fl)kUrA jpukRedrkokn ,oa
jpukRedrkoknh vf/kxe fl)kUrA laKku vkSj vf/kxeA vf/kxe Kku
dh l`f"V vFkok jpuk ds :i esaA vf/kxe O;wg jpuk;saA vf/kxe
“kSyh&vo/kkj.kk] izdkj ,oa fufgrkFkZA bZ&yfuZx rFkk ,e&yfuZxA
lh[kus vFkok izf'k{k.k dk LFkkukUrj.kA O;ogkj dk vfHkizsj.kkRed
i{kA f”k{k.k&vo/kkj.kk] izÑfr ,oa egÙoA f”k{k.k dh voLFkk;sa rFkk
LrjA f”k{k.k izfØ;k ds pjA f”k{k.k ds izfu;e ,oa lw=A f”k{k.k
fl)kUrA f”k{k.k O;wg jpuk,¡A vuq:i.k vkSj vuq:fir f”k{k.kA Vksyh
f”k{k.kA f”k{k.k izfrekuA lw{e f”k{k.kA f”k{kd O;ogkj dk ifjektZu ,oa
var%fØ;k fo'ys"k.kA f”k{k.k foKku vkSj o;Ld f”k{k.k foKkuA f”k{k.k
vf/kxe ifjfLFkfr;ksa esa v/;kid dh HkwfedkA f”k{k.k izHkko'khyrk vkSj
izHkko”kkyh v/;kidA f”k{k.k O;olk; ,oa O;olkf;d vkpkj lafgrkA
lwpuk ,oa laizs"k.k rduhdhA fof”k’V vf/kxedÙkkZvksa ds fy, fof”k’V
f'k{k.k O;wgjpuk,¡A vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2021 / 656 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 895.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-53-0 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-54-7 (e-Book)
RADHA MOHAN
Teacher Education
RADHA MOHAN, former Principal, Rajalakshmi College of
Education, Thandalam, Chennai.
Teacher education is at the base of all educational systems.
To make it effective, we need an education system that
equips the teacher trainees with the necessary skills to
perform their tasks effectively in the classroom. This
book discusses how to train teachers, improve teacher
education programmes, and impart quality education.
The book, now in its second edition, emphasizes
development of skills in teachers, keeping in mind
the rapid use of technology and changes in education
policies, procedures and provisions. Each chapter has
been carefully revised as per the latest NCTE norms and
standards recommended by Justice Verma Commission.
This well-organized book is primarily intended for the
postgraduate students of Education—M.A. Education and
M.Ed. Besides, teacher trainees enrolled in B.Ed. and
Diploma in teaching programmes, teacher educators,
distance education school-based administrators and
policymakers will also find the book useful.
KEY FEATURES
• Deals with necessary pedagogical skills and compe-
tencies to make the teachers professionally competent.
• Provides a comparative study of teacher education
of a number of countries to put things in the right
perspective.
 44 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
• Makes extensive use of flowcharts and diagrams to
enable the readers to understand the topics discussed
with great ease.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Reflections on Teacher Education—
Stakeholders. Distance Education. Part II: Process and
Practice—Microteaching. Interactional Analysis. Practice
Teaching. Part III: Stages and Phases—Pre-Service Teacher
Education. Induction. In-Service Teacher Education. Part IV:
Methods and Techniques: General and Modern—General
Methods of Teaching. Modern Techniques in Use in Teacher
Education. Part V: Performance and Evaluation—Evaluation
in Teacher Education. Central Agency for Accreditation.
Part VI: Professional Practice and Ethics—Characteristics
of a Profession. Professionalism in Teacher Education. Part
VII: Research and Action—Research in Teacher Education.
Action Research. Part VIII: Way Forward—Current Issues
and Problems in Teacher Education. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 316 pp. / 15.8 × 23.9 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-04-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-05-0 (e-Book)
English Literature, Linguistics,  Outer Space: A Reading of ‘Home’ in Great Expectations—
Phonetics and Grammar      Sanghamitra De. Anticipation and Realization: A Reading
European Literature
CHOUDHURY (Ed.)
Charles Dickens—Great Expectations
BIBHASH CHOUDHURY (Ed.), Reader, Department of
English, Gauhati University, Guwahati (Assam).
Among all the genres of literature, the novel has always
held a fascination for the readers over the centuries.
Rightly so, because it tells a story in a gripping and
dramatic style, which often reminds them of their lives,
sometimes transporting them into an imaginary world of
entertainment and escape, and enabling them to forget
their worries and concerns.
The 19th century England was prodigious for the
production of novels with such luminaries as William
Makepeace Thackeray, Charles Dickens, the famous
Bronte sisters—Charlotte Bronte, Anne Bronte and Emily
Bronte—George Eliot and Thomas Hardy adorning the
horizon. Among these, Dickens certainly holds a pride of
place: his prodigious writings, predominantly novels, and
his inimitable style bear testimony to this.
The child figure is ubiquitous in all his novels—from
Oliver Twist, Dombey and Son to Hard Times and Great
Expectations. The child is sometimes the victim and
sometimes the reminder of the innocence lost in a
materialistic world. Great Expectations is a fascinating
novel told with remarkable drama, humour and irony.
It is a gripping story, the story of Pip, the orphan boy
adopted by Mr. Joe Gragery, a blacksmith. Pip has both
good luck and great expectations; but then he loses both.
Through his rise and fall, Pip learns how to find happiness
and, in the process, falls in love. Pip is neither a hero nor
an antihero. He is just an ordinary human being who
experiences myriad emotions—fright, love, grief, misery
and happiness. As in his other novels, Dickens draws
memorable and haunting characters in this novel, too,
and also exposes the rampant corruption prevalent during
the period.
Besides a comprehensive Preface by the Editor, the
book gives the actual text, followed by specially written
critical essays on the novel by experts in the field, each
offering insights on different aspects of narrative, themes
and culture. Undergraduate and postgraduate students
of English Literature as well as researchers in the field
should find this book extremely useful and immensely
readable.
Contents: Introduction—Bibhash Choudhury. Text:
Great Expectation by Charles Dickens. Critical Essays on
Great Expectations. History in the Letter of the Text:
Reading Great Expectations—Himansu S. Mohapatra.
The Representation of ‘Childhood’ in Great Expectations—
Dipti R. Pattanaik. Great Expectations as an Anti-Comic
Novel—Pradipta Borgohain. The Dialectic of Inner and
of Great Expectations—Pronab Jyoti Neog.
Latest Print 2009 / 468 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 275.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3813-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-337-5 (e-Book)
CHOUDHURY (Ed.)
William Shakespeare—The Tempest
BIBHASH CHOUDHURY (Ed.), Professor, Department of
English, Gauhati University, Guwahati, Assam.
Performed variously as escapist fantasy, celebratory
fiction, and political allegory, The Tempest is one of the
plays in which William Shakespeare’s genius as a poetic
dramatist found its fullest expression. Critics see The
Tempest as explicitly concerned with its own nature as
a play, frequently drawing links between Prospero’s art
and theatrical illusion, and early critics saw Prospero as
a representation of Shakespeare, and his renunciation of
magic as signalling Shakespeare’s farewell to the stage.
THE PLAY
The play is set on a remote island, where the sorcerer
Prospero, rightful Duke of Milan, plots to restore his
daughter Miranda to her rightful place using illusion
and skillful manipulation. He conjures up a storm, the
eponymous tempest, to lure his usurping brother Antonio
and the complicit King Alonso of Naples to the island.
There, his machinations bring about the revelation of
Antonio’s lowly nature, the redemption of the King, and
the marriage of Miranda to Alonso’s son, Ferdinand. The
play portrays Prospero as a rational, and not an occultist,
magician by providing a contrast to him in Sycorax: his
magic is frequently described as destructive and terrible,
where Prospero’s is said to be wondrous and beautiful.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
The play is further critically analyzed through its two very
important essays—The Other in The Tempest: The Case of
Caliban; and Centrality of Prospero.
The book comes along with
• A comprehensive introduction to the entire play
• Simple yet descriptive explanatory notes
• Original text
• Illustrative Summary to the entire play (Act-wise)
• Critical essays giving a post-modern outlook to the play
Contents: Introduction. Text with Annotations and
Commentary. Critical Essays—The Other in the Tempest:
The Case of Caliban. The Centrality of Prospero: A Reading
of The Tempest. Bibliography. conspirators plan to assassinate him. Caesar’s wife,
Latest Print 2017 / 152 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5331-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-97-4 (e-Book)
DUA (Ed.)
William Shakespeare—As You Like It
KASHISH DUA (Ed.) is Assistant Professor at the Department
of English, Jesus and Mary College, Delhi University. She is
currently engaged in research on gender studies.
A pastoral comedy written by William Shakespeare, As
You Like It is regarded as one of his greatest comedies
for more than four centuries now. The play is set up
mostly in the Forest of Arden, and it narrates the story
of Rosalind and Celia’s experiences with disguises and
desires. While the readers also remain engaged with the
issues of primogeniture and exile informing the tensions
between the two sets of brothers Oliver-Orlando and
Duke Senior (Ferdinand)-Duke Frederick, respectively, the
play’s true captivating nature is lent by characters like
Audrey, Silvius, Phoebe and Adam, who come from the
lower social strata. The play ends on a note of forgiveness,
reunion and understanding.
The analysis of ‘The idea of the pastoral’ and ‘The operations
of gender’, both the primary subjects of criticism, have
been given a special focus in the two extremely informative
critical essays included at the end of the book.
KEY FEATURES
• Fully-annotated text explained in an easy-to-understand
language.
• Detailed introduction to the play encourages readers
to critically examine the background and the various
aspects of the play.
• Act-wise Summary given at the end of each Act.
Contents: Introduction. Text with Annotations and
Commentary. Critical Essays—The Golden Arden:
Pastoralism and Comedy in As You Like It. Gendering
As You Like It: Text and Performance. References.
Latest Print 2019 / 216 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 225.00
ISBN-978-93-87472-47-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-87472-48-8 (e-Book)
45
MITRA (Ed.)
William Shakespeare—Julius Caesar
ZINIA MITRA (Ed.), Head, Department of English,
Nakshalbari College, Darjeeling.
Shakespeare, in Julius Caesar, a history play, very
effectively portrays the Assassination episode of the
King Caesar, and how it was avenged by Mark Antony, a
faithful Soldier of Caesar’s Second triumvirate. The essays
on Role of Women in Julius Caesar and Important Themes
in Question help in analyzing the play, appropriately.
THE PLAY
Caesar returns to Rome after defeating Pompey, but
Calphurnia, has nightmares and tries to persuade Caesar
not to go to the Capitol. But he goes and is assassinated.
Caesar’s friend Antony rouses the crowd by his oration
and Brutus and Cassius have to flee to Rome. Antony
forms a triumvirate with Octavius Caesar and Lepidus,
and plans deaths of the conspirators by forming an
army. Brutus and Cassius agree to fight them together at
Philippi. Messala brings in news from Rome and reports
that Portia, Brutus’ wife has committed suicide. Caesar’s
ghost visits Brutus at night and warns him that he will
meet him at Philippi. In the battle, Brutus and Cassius
are defeated and power passes on to the hands of the
second triumvirs.
The book comes along with
• A comprehensive introduction to the entire play
• Simple yet descriptive explanatory notes
• Original text
• Illustrative summary to the entire play (Act-wise)
• Critical essays giving a post-modern outlook to the play
Contents: Introduction. Text with Annotations and
Commentary. Critical Essays—Major Themes in Julius
Caesar. Major Characters in Julius Caesar. Role of Women
in Julius Caesar. Further Reading.
Latest Print 2017 / 244 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 225.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5326-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-07-3 (e-Book)
SENGUPTA
Myriad-Minded Shaw:
Perspectives on Shavian Drama
(Politics, War and History)
GAUTAM SENGUPTA (Ed.) is former Professor and
Head, Department of English, Gurudas College, Kolkata.
Presently, he is Visiting Faculty at Shri Shikshayatan
College under University of Calcutta and Department of
English, and School of Women’s Studies, Rabindra Bharati
University, Kolkata.
Sir George Bernard Shaw’s contribution to the Western
theatre is unparallel, and hence, is imitated, remembered
and read by literature lovers even today. Over the course
 46 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
of his life he wrote more than 60 plays, and nearly all
his plays address prevailing social problems, but each
also includes a vein of comedy that makes their stark
themes more palatable. In these works, Shaw examined
education, marriage, religion, government, health care,
and class privilege as primary themes of his plays.
This book is an anthology of some of Shaw’s important
plays, which are much talked about, and also prescribed
in the English Literature syllabuses of all premier Indian
and International Universities. As the title suggests, the
book focuses on three important social components of
that period—Politics, War and History. The plays discussed
and critically analyzed are both in terms of Shaw’s
interpretation of his times, and the author’s research on
the subject.
This book is suited for the undergraduate and post-
graduate students of English. Besides, the students doing
research work in Shaw’s plays will be benefitted reading
this book.
Contents: Preface. Beyond Socialism: Shaw and Contem-
porary Politics. Shaw’s History Plays: A Brief Glimpse. War
and Peace: A Shavian Perspective. Highlighting a Few
Shaw Plays and Essay on Freedom. Conclusion. Works
Cited. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 140 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5211-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-703-8 (e-Book)
SENGUPTA (Ed.)
William Shakespeare—Hamlet
GAUTAM SENGUPTA (Ed.) is former Professor and
Head, Department of English, Gurudas College, Kolkata.
Presently, he is Visiting Faculty at Shri Shikshayatan
College under University of Calcutta and Department of
English, and School of Women’s Studies, Rabindra Bharati
University, Kolkata.
The Tragedy of Hamlet, shortened to Hamlet, is
Shakespeare’s longest play, and is ranked amongst the most
powerful and influential tragedies in English literature.
THE PLAY
Prince Hamlet is summoned home to Denmark from
school in Germany to attend his father’s funeral. Upon
reaching, he is shocked to find his mother Gertrude
already remarried to Claudius—Hamlet’s uncle and the
late King’s brother. The incident agitates Hamlet to the
core, making him angry and depressed. To worsen his
plight, his father appears as a ghost and reveals that
he was murdered by Claudius, to seize the throne. The
episodes prompt Hamlet to swear a revenge against his
father’s murder and mother’s infidelity.
The book comes along with
• Fully annotated and complete text
• Clear plot-summary in brief
• Act-wise and scene-wise, to-the-point critical commentary
• Student-friendly introduction to all important issues
• Essay on Hamlet: Through the Critic’s Lens provides
different perspectives of criticism on Hamlet, from
the early days till date, and another one on Hamlet:
The Themes in Question highlights the key questions
pertinent to the play, and are still unanswered.
Contents: Introduction. Text with Annotations and
Commentary. General Summary of the Plot. Critical
Essays—Hamlet: Through the Critics’ Lens. Hamlet:
Emerging Themes. Bibliography.
Latest Print 2017 / 240 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 225.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5328-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-15-8 (e-Book)
SENGUPTA (Ed.)
William Shakespeare—The Tragedy of
Macbeth
GAUTAM SENGUPTA (Ed.) is former Professor and
Head, Department of English, Gurudas College, Kolkata.
Presently, he is Visiting Faculty at Shri Shikshayatan
College under University of Calcutta and Departmentof
English, and School of Women’s Studies, Rabindra Bharati
University, Kolkata.
The Tragedy of Macbeth is the shortest tragedy written
by William Shakespeare. Macbeth, the protagonist of
the play, is portrayed as a successful Scottish general
in the army of King Duncan. Macbeth, one day, gets
politically instigated by a trio of witches that he would
become the King of Scotland soon. Encouraged by his wife
(Lady Macbeth) and taken over by greed and action,
Macbeth murders King Duncan, and becomes the King of
Scotland.
KEY FEATURES
• Clear language with complete annotations.
• Act-wise Scene-wise summary given at the end of every
Act.
• Plot-wise Commentary given at the end of the text.
• Critical Essay explaining ‘Themes that emerge out
of Macbeth’ and ‘Under the Critics’ Lens’ have been
provided.
Contents: Introduction. Text with Annotations and
Commentary. Critical Essays—Themes that Emerge Out of
‘Macbeth’. Under the Critics’ Lens. Bibliography.
160 pp. (approx.) / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / Forthcoming
ISBN-978-93-87472-45-7 (Print Book)
978-93-87472-46-4 (e-Book)
SINGH (Ed.)
William Shakespeare—A Midsummer
Night’s Dream
ISHITA SINGH (Ed.) is an Assistant Professor at Jesus and
Mary College, Delhi University.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
A Midsummer Night’s Dream is William Shakespeare’s
fourth comedy and is ranked amongst his best and
most complex comedies. The metadramatic features
and the centrality of labouring class characters makes
this comedy different from his others. It was written in
1596.
THE PLAY
A Midsummer Night’s Dream, a romantic comedy, is
a dramatic text that draws attention to the very fine
balance between tragedy and comedy, order and chaos,
reality and illusion, romance and violence and tyranny
and rebellion. The action of the play takes place over
two days and four interwoven plots: the wedding of
Hippolyta, the Amazonian queen and Theseus, Duke
of Athens; the discord in the Athenian forest due
to Titania and Oberon, the Fairy Queen and King
respectively; the inconstant love of young Athenians
Hermia, Helena, Demetrius and Lysander; and the practice
and performance of the play-within-the-play by Quice and
company.
The book comes along with:
• A comprehensive introduction to the play
• Fully annotated and complete text
• Act-wise plot-summary
• Critical Essays
Contents: Introduction. Text with Annotations and
Commentary. Critical Essays—Rebellious Daughters and
Dutiful Wives: Gender and Power in Midsummer Night’s
Dream. Weapons of the Weak: Rank and Rebellion in
Midsummer Night’s Dream. Further Reading.
Latest Print 2019 / 184 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-93-87472-49-5 (Print Book)
978-93-87472-50-1 (e-Book)
SINGH (Ed.)
William Shakespeare—The Merchant of
Venice
LOVELINA SINGH (Ed.), Professor at the Department of
English and Cultural Studies, Panjab University, Chandigarh
which was her Alma Mater as also Sacred Heart College,
Dalhousie.
William Shakespeare’s The Merchant of Venice is often
considered to be one of his most controversial plays. This
student’s Edition tries to explicate the core elements of
the play with clear and well-defined annotations as well
as exhaustive Critical Appreciations on interesting topics
such as Shakespeare’s treatment of Fools and Comedy;
the Role of Portia’s Ring; and the Art of Rhetoric in the
plot development of the play.
THE PLAY
The Merchant of Venice is a story of love, romance,
revenge and religious fanaticism set in the backdrop of
16th Century Venice. Not only is the play an intricate
meld of various plots involving a gallery of the most
fascinating characters in literature, but it is also imbued
47
with a rich and potent poetic expression. It encompasses
a wide range of themes and makes a very powerful
comment on the human condition. The dramatic force
of the play continues to resonate with audiences across
the world and makes it a favourite pick for performances
even in the contemporary context.
The book comes along with
• A comprehensive introduction to the entire play
• Simple yet descriptive explanatory notes
• Original text
• Illustrative summary to the entire play (Act-wise)
• Critical essays giving a post-modern outlook to the play
Contents: Introduction. Text with Annotations and
Commentary. Critical Essays—Portia’s Ring: An Indeterminate
Theatrical Sign in The Merchant of Venice. Folly Foolery
and the Fool: The Strange Case of Launcelot Gobbo in
The Merchant of Venice. Shakespearean Argot: The Art of
Rhetoric in The Merchant of Venice.
Latest Print 2017 / 188 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5309-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-627-7 (e-Book)
Grammar
GUPTA
Current English Grammar and Usage,
2nd ed.
S.M. GUPTA, Emeritus Professor of English at Sobhasaria
Group of Institutions, Sikar, Rajasthan.
In the present age of Information and Communication
Technology (ICT) revolution and social networking
scenario, fast and precise communication has become
the need of the hour. But in the whirlwind of fluency,
accuracy cannot be sacrificed. Sometimes, adequate
attention is not paid to the use of grammar and usage,
which leaves a very bad impression on the readers.
This book on English grammar presents the topics in an
innovative way and meets the long-felt need of a good
user-friendly grammar book.
The book makes the study of grammar very interesting,
challenging and exciting. It discusses grammatical
categories, processes and principles of sentence
construction in a very simple and lucid manner. The book
starts with the discussion of word classes and goes on
to describe phrases and sentences. More importantly,
it deals with the problem areas of tenses, modal verbs,
articles, determiners, prepositions, passive constructions
and direct and indirect narration in a novel way. The
composition section of the book includes a very useful
presentation of letter-writing, precis-writing, report
writing, reading comprehension and, above all, the use
of vocabulary. The Appendices on how to avoid spelling
errors and a complete list of the types of sentences are
very useful.
 48 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
This comprehensive and well-researched book should
prove very valuable for undergraduate students of all
streams. Besides, professionals, those preparing for
competitive examinations and even any lay reader who
wishes to possess the essentials of English grammar and
usage will find the book useful and interesting. In the
Second Edition of the book the introduction of two new
chapters on error analysis and functional grammar will
prove very useful to interviewees and competitors..
KEY FEATURES
• Explains difficult grammatical concepts in a simple and
lucid language.
• Provides models for every writing activity.
• Incorporates latest linguistic research in the conceptua-
lization and presentation of the grammatical material.
• Contains lots of exercises with solutions.
• Adds comprehensive material on error analysis and
functional grammar.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition.
Acknowledgements. Word Classes. Phrases. The Sentence:
Different Types. Sentence Patterns. Compound and
Complex Sentences. Conditional Sentences. Indirect
Speech. The Uses of Articles. Determiners. Prepositions.
Tenses. Modal Auxiliaries. Passive Voice. Letter Writing.
Precis Writing. Reading Comprehension. Report Writing.
Vocabulary. Common Errors. Functional Grammar.
Appendices: 1. Types of Clauses. 2: Rules for Spelling
Changes. 3: Punctuation Review. 4: Concord. 5: Forms of
Verbs.References. Index
Latest Print 2019 / 556 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 425.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-69-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-70-7 (e-Book)
SETHI
Standard English and Indian Usage:
Vocabulary and Grammar, 2nd ed.
J. SETHI, Formerly Professor of English at Central Institute
of English and Foreign Languages (CIEFL)—Deemed
University—Hyderabad.
The Second Edition of this text continues to build on the
three aspects of the language discussed in the previous
edition—vocabulary, grammar and idioms.
Divided into two parts—Part One: Vocabulary and
Part Two: Grammar—the book in Part One deals with
‘Words Often Confused’, ‘Indianisms’, ‘Indian Coinages’,
‘Idioms’, and ‘Archaisms’. Part Two takes up those areas
of grammar in which divergences from Standard English
are very common—articles, prepositions, tenses, verb
patterns, and so on.
The emphasis in the Grammar section is not so much on
form as on usage. The comments on each divergent item
include its Standard English equivalent (and sometimes
its origin as well), together with the author’s opinion on
whether the item should be retained at least within the
country.
WHAT’S NEW TO THE EDITION
• In Chapter 3, new items on ‘balance’/‘change’ and
‘marketing’/‘shopping’ are added.
• Additional examples have been provided for dependent
questions in Chapter 11.
• Explanations and comments have been made clear
at many places and a few items transferred to places
where they seemed to fit in better.
With such contents and features, the book should prove
very valuable to a large cross-section of the educated
population—students, English teachers, professionals and
businessmen.
Contents: Preface. Abbreviations Used. Introduction.
Part One: VOCABULARY—Introduction to Part One:
Vocabulary. Words Often Confused: Some Important
Distinctions. Indianisms. Indian Coinages. Idioms,
Idiomatic Expressions, Collocations. Archaisms, Style,
Cultural Implications. Part Two: GRAMMAR—Introduction
to Part Two: Grammar. Subject-Verb Agreement. Articles.
Inversion. Prepositions. Question Tags. Structure Words.
Tenses. Verb Patterns. Miscellaneous. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2011 / 180 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm /  ` 150.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4274-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-704-5 (e-Book)
Indian Writings in English
CHAKRABORTY (Ed.)
Indian Drama in English, 2nd ed.
KAUSTAV CHAKRABORTY (Ed.), Assistant Professor,
Department of English, Southfield (formerly Loreto)
College, Darjeeling, West Bengal.
The new edition incorporates two new essays on very
popular plays of all times—one, Manipuri dramatist Ratan
Thiyam’s Chakravyuh, and the second, Maharashtrian
playwright, Mahesh Elkunchwar‘s Desire in the Rocks.
The essays added give a panoramic view of the plays in
succinct style and simple language.
This edited volume on Indian Drama in English, including
Indian plays in English translation, with contributions from
experts specializing on the different playwrights, covers
the works of major dramatists who have given a distinctive
shape to this enormous mass of creative material.
This comprehensive and well-researched text explores
the major Indian playwrights in English. It encompasses
such works as Rabindranath Tagore’s Red Oleanders; Vijay
Tendulkar’s Silence! The Court is in Session, Kanayadan,
The Vultures, and Kamala; Girish Karnad’s Hayavadana,
Tughlaq, Naga Mandala, and The Fire and the Rain;
Mahasweta Devi’s The Mother of 1084; Mahesh Dattani’s
Final Solutions, Tara, Dance Like a Man, and Bravely
Fought the Queen; Habib Tanvir’s Charandas Chor; Indira
Parthasarathy’s Auranzeb; and Badal Sircar’s Evam Indrajit.
The book focuses on different aspects of their plays and
shows how the Indian Drama in English, while maintaining
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
its relation with the tradition, has made bold innovations
and fruitful experiments in terms of both thematic and
technical excellence.
The book is intended for the undergraduate and post-
graduate students of English literature. Besides, it will
also be valuable for those who wish to delve deeper into
the plays covered and analyzed in the text.
Contents: Preface. Contributors. Introduction:
Representative Playwrights of Indian English Drama—
Kaustav Chakraborty. Tagore’s Red Oleanders: A
Thematic Study—Ananda Lal. Translation of Symbols and
Other Tropes and Schemes in Red Oleanders—Basudeb
Chakraborti. The Outsider’s Vision: Samant in Silence!
The Court is in Session—Amrit Sen. De-Silencing
the Silence: Legal Institutionalization of a Woman’s
Victimization—Shyista Aamir Khan. “Wound that’s
born to bleed”: Critiquing Women’s Position in Indian
Society through Vijay Tendulkar’s Silence! The Court is in
Session—Tandrima Guha. Vijay Tendulkar’s Kanyadaan:
Negotiating Social ‘Truth(s)’—Joydeep Bhattacharyya.
Vijay Tendulkar’s The Vultures (Gidhade): A Study
in Violence—Rosy Chamling. Vijay Tendulkar’s The
Vultures: An Interface between Feminist Critique and
Existential Angst—Shubho Ray. Panopticons of Power:
The Infusion of Family, Gender and Social Opportunism
in Vijay Tendulkar’s Kamala—Ratul Nandi. Girish Karnad’s
Hayavadana Revisited—Fr. K.L. George. Hayavadana: A
Theatre-goer’s Response—Dattatreya Datta. Casteism and
Karnad’s Hayavadana—Kaustav Chakraborty. Reluctant
to Be Framed: Reading Tughlaq as a Medley of Voices
and Conflicting Personas in Girish Karnad’s Tughlaq—Raja
Basu. “And Why Should I Deserve That Madness?” The
Strange Case of Karnadian Tughlaq—Abhishek Jha. A Tale
of Subversion with a Conundrum of Mask: A Reading into
Girish Karnad’s Nagamandala—Zinia Mitra. Desires from
the World beyond and the Women in Nagamandal—
Paramita Ghosh. Conflict between Natural Law and
Moral Rectitude: Girish Karnad’s The Fire and the Rain—
Antara Saha. ‘Fire’ and ‘Rain’ in The Fire and the Rain—
Payel Sinha. Terror of Immortality in Girish Karnad’s The
Fire and the Rain—Shreyashi Chettri. The Mother of
1084: Political Drama Redefined—Gautam Sengupta. The
Personal is Political: Re-reading Mahasweta Devi’s Mother
of 1084—Jaydip Sarkar. Mahesh Dattani’s Final Solutions:
A Reconsider-ation—Ketaki Datta. History through
Modernity: An Analysis of Final Solutions—Samipendra
Banerjee. Multiple Appropriations: Writing the Contested
Body in Dattani’s Tara—Pathik Roy. Form and Content in
Mahesh Dattani’s Dance Like a Man—Indranee Ghosh.
Dance Like a Man: Revisiting the Title—Nilanjana Sen.
The Ironic Gaze: A Reading of Dattani’s Bravely Fought the
Queen—Anindya Sen. Charandas Chor: Re-imagining the
‘Fold’—Anshuman Singh. Rereading Indira Parthasarathy’s
Aurangzeb as Religio-Political Diatribe Beneath a Historical
Façade—Nitai Chandra Saha. Asif Currimbhoy: India’s
First Authentic Voice? Indrani Chakraborty. Songs and
Poems in Evam Indrajit: Towards a New Hermeneutics
of Entrapment and Alienation—Rajadipta Roy. Listening
to ‘the still, sad music of humanity’: An appraisal of
Badal Sircar’s Evam Indrajit—Archana Biswas. The
49
Poetics of Protest in Ratan Thiyam’s Chakravyuha—
Anirban Chakraborty. “And What Sin Am I Guilty OF?”:
Stereotyping the ‘Destereotype’ in Elkunchwar’ Desire in
the Rocks—Amrita Sarkar. Index.
Latest Print 2014 / 440 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 295.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5055-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-264-4 (e-Book)
CHOUDHURY (Ed.)
Amitav Ghosh: Critical Essays, 2nd ed.
BIBHASH CHOUDHURY, Associate Professor, Department
of English, Gauhati University, Guwahati, Assam.
Indian Writing in English has proliferated over the last
few decades and has made a huge impact on English
readers. Not only do the works of Indian authors writing
in English find a place on the best-seller list, they are also
receiving critical acclaim across the world. Starting from
Rabindranath Tagore, Sarojini Naidu, R.K. Narayan, Raja
Rao, Mulk Raj Anand to V.S. Naipaul, Salman Rushdie,
Vikram Seth and Amitav Ghosh, we have an array of
writers adorning the literary horizon. All these writers have
considerable following in the English speaking countries,
and Amitav Ghosh certainly occupies an important place
among them, and is much acclaimed for his literary style
and content.
One of the most prolific postcolonial writers writing
today, Amitav Ghosh has received many awards: The
Circle of Reason winning the Prix Medici Etranger
(one of France’s top literary award), The Shadow Lines
winning the Sahitya Akademi Award, and The Calcutta
Chromosome bagging the Arthur C. Clarke Award for
1997. His later novels, Sea of Poppies, River of Smoke
and Flood of Fire showcase his capacity for epic
narration, with each of these texts in the Ibis series,
exploring the layered dimensions of identity and cultural
form.
This book, in its second edition, continues to be an
anthology of critical essays, and deals with fictional as
well as non-fictional works of Amitav Ghosh. It focuses
on Ghosh’s idea and theory of the novel, postcolonial
rationality in The Circle of Reason, nationalism in the
context of Partition in The Shadow Lines, and the East-
West encounter in The Calcutta Chromosome. Besides,
it also discusses power structure operating within the
narrative of The Glass Palace, and the question of space,
identity and cultural difference in The Hungry Tide.
Though different from each other, some of the essays
take up common themes for discussion and offer new
insights into Ghosh’s works.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• This edition introduces critical analyses of Ghosh’s
three much talked-about books from Ibis Triology: Sea
of Poppies (2008), River of Smoke (2011) and the most
recent one Flood of Fire (2015). The essays examine
the plots of the two novels highlighting the Opium
culture being cultivated in India by the colonial powers.
 50 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
• This book is meant for the undergraduate and post-
graduate students of English literature. Besides, all
those readers who wish to delve deeper into the works
of Amitav Ghosh will find reading the text extremely
informative, and useful.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Amitav Ghosh,
Modernity and the Theory of the Novel—Bibhash
Choudhury. Police and Postcolonial Rationality in Amitav
Ghosh’s The Circle of Reason—Yumna Siddiqi. National
Allegory and Partition in The Shadow Lines—Thomas
F. Halloran. Postcolonial Melancholy: An Examination
of Sadness in Amitav Ghosh’s The Shadow Lines—Ian
Almond. The Calcutta Chromosome: Re-reading Western
Cultural Hegemony—Isabella Bruschi. In An Antique
Land: A Fragmentary History of the Indian Ocean—Claire
Chambers. The Suave Steps of Memory and Rebirth:
Dancing in Cambodia, Stories in Stones, At Large in
Burma—Andrea Duranti. Mapping of Power Discourse
in The Glass Palace—N.K. Rajalakshmi. ‘You and Your
Stories’: Narrating the Histories of the Dispossessed in
Amitav Ghosh’s The Hungry Tide and Salman Rushdie’s
Midnight’s Children—Hywel Dix. Rethinking ‘Diaspora’:
A Postcolonial Reading of The Hungry Tide and A Fine
Balance—Debashree Dattaray. The Cult of the Bomb:
Amitav Ghosh’s Countdown—Sandip Ain. Fraught with
a Background: Identity and Cultural Legacy in Sea of
Poppies—Bibhash Choudhury. Sea of Poppies: The Myriad
Shifts of Colonialism in Transit—Prasenjit Das. Critical
Theory, History and Fiction: A Reading of Amitav Ghosh’s
River of Smoke—Lalan Kishore Singh. From Recuperation
to Enactment of History: Amitav Ghosh’s Flood of Fire—
Sandip Ain. The Contributors. Index.
Latest Print 2015 / 232 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5132-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-338-2 (e-Book)
GOSWAMI
Mulk Raj Anand—Early Novels
KETAKI GOSWAMI, Reader in English, East Calcutta Girls’
College, Kolkata.
Today, Indian writing in English or Indo-Anglian writing
has certainly come of age, with the novel having a pride
of place and names such as Salman Rushdie, V.S. Naipaul,
Vikram Seth, Kiran Desai, Amitav Ghosh, Arundhati Roy,
and Arvind Adiga prominently figuring in the list. But the
credit for placing Indo-Anglian writing on a high pedestal
should go to earlier writers like Rabindra Tagore, Mulk Raj
Anand, R.K. Narayan and Raja Rao. Among these, Mulk
Raj Anand has a unique place because of the ideals and
ideas he espoused through his novels.
This concise book deals with Anand’s three early novels—
Coolie, Untouchable, and Two Leaves and a Bud—and
a few short stories, which were conceived, written and
published during the colonial period—the Raj. It also
includes critical essays on such themes as Life and Art,
Themes and Applications, Anand and His Use of Language
and a study on the Women in Anand’s Short Stories.
Dr. Ketaki Goswami, with her erudition and scholarship
and research findings on Mulk Raj Anand’s works,
brings out the quintessential Anand—the messiah of
the downtrodden, the unwanted and the unloved. For,
Anand intricately weaves through his novels, the theme
of exploitation and the apathy, the indifference and
the condescending attitude of the affluent towards the
marginalized sections of the society whose pangs and
pains wrenched his heart. Anand’s life-long quest was to
show love and compassion to the poor as also to alleviate
their pains and give a magic touch to the downtrodden
to make their lives bearable. In all the three novels and
the short stories discussed in the book, the author shows
that the novelist believed that the Summum bonum of a
human being is living a life with dignity which has been
denied to the lower castes and the outcasts—the lower
dregs of humanity—because of the repulsive attitude of
the rich. Being a humanist of the highest order, Anand
concerns himself with the whole man, his development,
sense of dignity and decency in living.
This book should be extremely useful and invaluable to
the students of English Literature who opt for the paper
on Indian Writing in English. The academic community also
will find reading the book highly interesting, stimulating
and ennobling.
Contents: Preface. Life and Art. Themes and Applications.
Coolie: A Socio-realistic Novel. Untouchable: A Journey
from Despair to Hope. Rage and Humour in Combination.
Two Leaves and a Bud: An Assessment. Gendered
Assessment. Anand and His Use of Language. Colonialism
and Literature. Appendix: ‘A Parrot in the Cage’: A Study
of the Claustrophobic Existence of Women in Anand’s
Short Stories. Index.
Latest Print 2009 / 96 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 95.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3763-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-170-8 (e-Book)
MITRA (Ed.)
Indian Poetry in English: Critical Essays,
2nd ed.
Edited by ZINIA MITRA, Head of the Department of English
at Nakshalbari College, Darjeeling, India.
Indian poets who wrote in English—a small middle class
minority—were divided from the regional language poets
by more than just language for long. The English poets
had a selected readership, were known unto themselves,
in academic circles if they were widely published, but
were looked down upon with a kind of derision by the
regional writers. However, the scenario has changed now.
From English being spurned as a colonizer’s tongue that
was nobody’s language, it has now become everybody’s
language with popular English medium schools, English
movies, Social networking sites, and so on.
For a generation living in a global village, genuine reader-
ship and appreciation of English poetry is no longer an
encumbrance. This book, in its second edition, continues
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
to educate the students with its diverse and thought-
provoking essays that vary from personal to argumentative
to objectively discursive. It is for the students of English
literature and for them who are genuinely interested in
Indian English poetry. The Fourteen poets selected in
this anthology are Michael Madhusudan Dutt, Toru Dutt,
Rabindranath Tagore, Aurobindo Ghosh, Sarojini Naidu,
Jibanananda Das, Nissim Ezekiel, Jayanta Mahapatra,
A.K. Ramanujan, Arun Kolatkar, Rajagopal Parthasarathy,
Kamala Das, Dilip Chitre and Eunice De Souza. The poets
included are all on the syllabi of major universities in India.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The new edition has been thoroughly revised and
updated as per the require-ment of Indian university’s
undergraduate and postgraduate English syllabus.
• Inclusion of a new poet Eunice D’Souza.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Contributors. Introduction.
I: Michael Madhusudan Dutt (1824–1873). II: Toru Lata
Dutt (1856–1877). III: Rabindranath Tagore (1861–
1941). IV: Aurobindo Ghose (1872–1950). V: Sarojini
Naidu (1879–1949). VI: Jibanananda Das (1899–1954).
VII: Nissim Ezekiel (1924–2004). VIII: Jayanta Mahapatra
(born 1928). IX: Attipati Krishnaswami Ramanujan (1929–
1993). X: Arun Kolatkar (1932–2004). XI: Kamala Das
(1934–2009). XII: Rajagopal Parthasarathy (born 1934).
XIII: Purushottam Chitre (1938–2009). XIV: Eunice D’Souza
(born 1940). Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 480 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5261-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-509-6 (e-Book)
PUTATUNDA
R.K. Narayan: Critical Essays
SARBANI PUTATUNDA, Lecturer in English, East Calcutta
Girl’s College Kolkata.
R.K. Narayan is one of the best Indian English novelists
whose works have been under public scanner for long.
His contribution to Indian English writing is huge. The
quintessence of his narrative art lies in metamorphosing
the mundane into something extraordinary. This edited
volume presents numerous useful essays written by
various persons eminent in the field. It includes important
Malgudi novels and short stories. All these works bring
out Narayan’s viewpoint regarding the psyche of the
educated section of the Indian populace and present an
interesting case study. Besides, the essays deal with the
subjects of utmost importance to the student.
The text is primarily intended for both undergraduate and
postgraduate level students of English Literature.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Overview—Introduction. A
general survey of Indian English writings in English.
R.K. Narayan_and_Graham_Greene. Part II: The Art of
Narayan—The Art of R.K. Narayan. Narratology and R.K.
Narayan’s Short Stories. Narayan’s art of Characterization.
Hybridity and Humour: A Postcolonial Reading of Malgudi
Days. Part III: The Cultural Milieu of Malgudi—Yesterday
51
Today and Tomorrow in the Fiction of R.K. Narayan.
Narayan’s Concept of Malgudi. Fractures, Heterotopologies
and the In-between Spaces of Malgudi(s). The cultural
milieu of Malgudi: The marital life of the Malgudians—The
Dark Room and The English Teacher. The Cultural Milieu
of Malgudi: The Theme of Renunciation–The Bachelor of
Arts, The Guide and Waiting for Mahatma. Swami and
Friends: The Odyssey of an Indian School Child. Part IV:
Narayan’s Feminism—Narayan’s Women: A Tale of Marital
Bliss? Are Narayan’s Women Really Emancipated? Caught
with the Crossroads of Tradition and Modernity: A Study
of Narayan’s Savitri and Rosie. A Romantic Betrayal:
Rosie’s Case–Part V: Myths and Symbols in Narayan—
Use of Myth in the Novels of R.K. Narayan. Symbolic
Connotations in R.K. Narayan’s Novels.
Latest Print 2012 / 312 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 225.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4536-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-433-4 (e-Book)
Linguistics
AKMAJIAN, et al.
Linguistics: An Introduction to Language
and Communication, 7th ed.
ADRIAN AKMAJIAN, formerly Professor of Linguistics,
University of Arizona.
RICHARD A. DEMERS, Professor Emeritus of the
Department of Linguistics, University of Arizona.
ANN K. FARMER, Information Engineer at Google.
LEE BICKMORE, Professor, Department of Anthropology
and Director of the Program in Linguistics and Cognitive
Science, University at Albany, State University of New York.
ROBERT M. HARNISH, Formerly Professor Emeritus of
Philosophy and Linguistics, University of Arizona.
The latest edition of a popular introductory linguistics
text, now including a section on computational linguistics,
new non-English examples, quizzes for each chapter, and
additional special topics.
This popular introductory linguistics text is unique for
its integration of themes. Rather than treat morphology,
phonetics, phonology, syntax, and semantics as completely
separate fields, the book shows how they interact.
The authors provide a sound introduction to linguistic
methodology, focusing on a set of linguistic concepts that
are among the most fundamental within the field. By
studying the topics in detail, students can get a feeling
for how work in different areas of linguistics is done.
As in the last edition, part I covers the structural and
interpretive parts of language—morphology, phonetics,
phonology, syntax, semantics, variation, and change.
Part II covers use and context of language and includes
chapters on pragmatics, psychology of language, language
acquisition, and language and the brain. This seventh
edition has been extensively revised and updated; new
material includes a chapter on computational linguistics,
more non-English examples, and a wide range of exercises,
quizzes, and special topics.
 52 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Contents: Acknowledgments. Note to the Teacher. PART
I: The Structure of Human Language—Introduction. What
Is Linguistics?. Morphology: The Study of the Structure of
Words. Phonetics and Phonemic Transcription. Phonology:
The Study of Sound Structure. Syntax: The Study of
Sentence Structure. Semantics: The Study of Linguistic
Meaning. Language Variation. Language Change. PART II:
Commumcation and Cognitive Science—Pragmatics: The
Study of Language Use and Communication. Psychology
of Language: Speech Production and Comprehension.
Language Acquisition in Children. Language and the Brain.
Appendix. Glossary. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 608 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 795.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-75-2 (Print Book)
AKSHAR BHARATI, CHAITANYA & SANGAL
Natural Language Processing:
A Paninian Perspective
AKSHAR BHARATI, VINEET CHAITANYA and RAJEEV
SANGAL, all of Department of Computer Science and
Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur.
This book is on Natural Language Processing presented
with a Paninian perspective. Panini (circa 500 B.C.) was
a grammarian and well known for his contribution to
the grammar and structure of the language. In this
book the reader is first introduced to Natural Language
Processing and then to Paninian grammar and framework
for processing of modern Indian languages using the
computer. Thereafter, a comparison of Paninian grammar
framework with that of modern western computational
grammars is presented.
This book is useful for courses in Computational Linguistics
in the linguistic departments, and for NLP in computer
science departments.
KEY FEATURES
• This book is the first of its kind in presenting a
comparison of Paninian Grammar (PG) with the existing
modern western computational grammars.
• Introduces three western grammar frameworks using
examples from English: Lexical Functional Grammar
(LFG), Trees Adjoining Grammar (TAG), and Govern-
ment and Binding (GB). The presentation does not
assume any background on part of the reader regard-
ing these frameworks.
• Each presentation also discusses either the applicability
of the framework to free word order languages, or a
comparison with PG framework.
• It is a single source in path-breaking research on
Natural Language Processing using the classic and time-
tested Paninian framework.
Contents: List of Figures. preface. Acknowledgements.
Introduction to NLP. Language Structure and Language
Analyzer. Words and Their Analyzer. Local Word
Grouping. Paninian Grammar. Paninian Parser. Machine
Translation. Lexical Functional Grammar. LFG and Indian
Languages. Tree Adjoining Grammar. Comparing TAG with
PG. Government and Binding. Comparing GB with PG.
Appendices: A—Panini’s Grammar and Sanskrit. B—Roman
Notation for Devanagri. Bibliography. Index. Glossary.
Latest Print 2021 / 236 pp. / 15.3 × 22.9 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-81-203-0921-0 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-135-7 (e-Book)
PRASAD
Course in Linguistics, A, 3rd ed.
TARNI PRASAD, Associate Professor, Department of
Linguistics, Addis Ababa University, Addis Ababa, Ethiopia.
TThis compact and student-friendly text, now in its Third
Edition, continues to cover in a single volume the diverse
aspects of Linguistics, such as phonetics, phonology,
morphology, syntax, semantics, historical linguistics, and
language families. It also deals, in detail, with Applied
Linguistics, Sociolinguistics, Psycholinguistics, and Stylistics.
Written in a clear and easy-to-understand style, this book
is thoroughly practical and should be of great help to
students in understanding the basic concepts with ease.
The third edition incorporates a new chapter on Cognitive
Linguistics, an interdisciplinary branch which explains the
mental processes involving language acquisition, storage,
comprehension of speech, production of speech and
writing.
The book is intended as a text for senior undergraduate
and postgraduate students [BA (Hons.) and MA] of
English, and undergraduate and postgraduate students
[BA (Hons.) and MA] of Linguistics. In addition, this book
would be of great help to all those who wish to have a
general knowledge of English linguistics.
KEY FEATURES
• All the concepts of linguistics are discussed in a single
book.
• Linguistic concepts are explained in detail, with examples,
diagrams, and tables for better comprehension of the
subject.
Contents: Preface. Introduction. Section 1: Descriptive
Linguistics—Phonetics. Phonology. Morphology. Syntax.
Syntactic Analysis. Semantics. Section 2: Comparative and
Historical Linguistics—Comparative and Historical Linguistics.
Language Family. Borrowings. Section 3: Applied Linguistics—
Applied Linguistics. Sociolinguistics. Psycholinguistics.
Stylistics. Suggested Further Reading. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 320 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-95-0 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-96-7 (e-Book)
SYAL & JINDAL
Introduction to Linguistics, An: Language,
Grammar and Semantics, 2nd ed.
PUSHPINDER SYAL, Professor, Department of English,
Panjab University, Chandigarh.
D.V. JINDAL, Former Faculty Member, Postgraduate
Department of English, Government College, Ludhiana.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
This compact and engagingly elegant text, now in
its Second Edition, continues to provide a succinct
introduction to Linguistics. The aim of the book
is to introduce basic concepts in Linguistics, and
to familiarize the students with the fundamentals of
modern Linguistics in a clear and simple manner.
Each chapter is expository as well as explanatory with
examples. Most of the examples in grammar and semantics
are based on the structure of the English Language, but
the principles of language study discussed in the text are
applicable to any language in general.
Divided into three sections, Section I: The Study of
Language; Section II: The Study of Grammar; and
Section III: The Study of Semantics, each chapter, besides
detailing with the concepts, contains Summary and
Comprehensive Questions for better understanding of the
subject and enhancing comprehension skills.
WHAT’S NEW TO THIS EDITION
• An exclusive chapter on the Study of Language Variation
(Chapter 5) with important terms such as Dialect,
Accent and Stylistics.
• More examples given in the grammar section.
• Devotes an entire chapter to a new topic—Supra-
sentential Grammar—a must for Linguistics study today.
Students of Linguistics and postgraduate students of
English pursuing courses in Linguistics should find this
text highly useful and a handy companion for their study.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition.
Section I: THE STUDY OF LANGUAGE—Language. What is
Linguistics? Some Fundamental Concepts and Distinctions
in Linguistics. Modern Linguistics: A Historical Survey. The
Study of Language Variation. Section II: THE STUDY OF
GRAMMAR—What is Grammar? Morphology and Word
Formation. Basic Sentence Patterns. Structuralist View of
Grammar and IC Analysis. Transformational Generative
Grammar. Supra-sentential Grammar. Section III: THE
STUDY OF SEMANTICS—What is Semantics? Theories
of Semantics. Semantics, Pragmatics and Discourse.
Principles of Lexicography. References. Index.
Latest Print 2020 / 188 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3216-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-23-3 (e-Book)
Literature
CHOUDHURY
English Social and Cultural History: An
Introductory Guide and Glossary, 2nd ed.
BIBHASH CHOUDHURY, Department of English, Gauhati
University, Guwahati, Assam.
The second edition of the book, with its emending and
updated text, provides a glimpse into the English life and
culture, starting from the middle ages to the twenty-first
century. As the English life and culture are inextricably
53
interwoven with the literary traditions of England and
its myriad aspects, this study provides significant insights
into the field of English literature and the contexts it
emerges from.
The text begins with a description of English life and culture
from the Medieval period to the Renaissance. The author
gives a masterly analysis of such subjects as Feudalism,
Medieval Drama and literature, the Renaissance, the
Reformation and most significantly, the Elizabethan
Theatre. A new sub-section on 'Women Writers of the
Renaissance' has been added to this chapter. Then, the
text goes on to describe in detail about the Restoration
Period and the Age of Reason. Besides, the book
gives a wealth of information on important topics like
Romanticism, the Industrial Revolution, Victorianism and
Victorian literature. The text concludes with a chapter
that deals on Modernism, Literature and Culture in the
Postmodern World, and Aspects of Contemporary Culture
and Society. In the last chapter, two sub-sections have
been introduced on 'British Fiction in the Twenty-First
Century' and 'Brexit'.
What distinguishes the text is the provision of a Glossary
at the end of each chapter, which gives not only the
meaning and definition of the terms but also provides
the entire cultural background and the history that these
terms are associated with.
Students of English literature—both undergraduate
honours and postgraduate students—will find this book
highly informative, enlightening, and refreshing in its
style. In addition, all those who have an abiding interest
in English life and culture will find reading this text a
stimulating and rewarding experience.
Contents: Preface. From the Medieval to the Renaissance
In Transition: From the Restoration to the Age of Reason
English Society and Culture in the Nineteenth Century
From The Modern to the Postmodern: The Twentieth
Century and Beyond. Bibliography.
Latest Print 2019 / 416 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-85-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-86-8 (e-Book)
NIAZI & RAMA GAUTAM
How to Study Literature: Stylistic and
Pragmatic Approaches
NOZAR NIAZI, Head of the Department of English
literature, Lorestan University, Iran.
RAMA GAUTAM, Professor and Head of the Department
of Communication at the International Institute of
Information Technology, Pune.
This concise and compact text shows how studying of
literature can be an ennobling and enjoyable experience
through a better understanding of the function and
significance of the language employed in the literary
works studied. Divided into two parts—Part One: A
Stylistic Approach to Literature and Part Two: A Pragmatic
Approach to Literature—, the text analyzes these two
 54 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
approaches in considerable detail as they have gained
importance in recent decades in the study of literature.
Dr. Nozar Niazi and Dr. Rama Gautam, with their rich
experience in the field, give a stylistic and pragmatic
analysis of some selected works—novels, poems and short
stories. While analyzing the novels, the authors examine
such aspects as use of symbols and metaphor, structure
of words, the plot, setting, characterization, themes and
imagery. Similarly, while analyzing the poems, the authors
examine aspects such as imagery, syntax, grammar,
semantics, and cohesion. Finally, while examining the
selected short stories, they consider aspects like the
setting, character, plot, themes, and context.
Part Two of the text dealing with A Pragmatic Approach
to Literature explores the role of situational context
in the formulation of meaning. Pragmatics studies
language not in isolation but in its socio-cultural context.
The text analyzes various theories and principles of
language and shows that a pragmatic approach enhances
understanding and enjoyment of literary works.
The book would be extremely useful to postgraduate
students of English literature and linguistics. Besides,
research students and academics would find the book
quite valuable.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Part I: A Stylistic Approach
to Literature—Introduction. Theoretical Framework. A
Stylistic Analysis of D.H. Lawrence’s Sons and Lovers.
A Stylistic Analysis of Hemingway’s A Farewell to Arms. A
Stylistic Analysis of Selected Poems. A Stylistic Analysis of
Selected Short Stories. Conclusions. Part II: A Pragmatic
Approach to Literature—Introduction. Theoretical Frame-
work. The Novel and the Five Major Speech Acts. The Role
of Indirect Speech Acts in the Novel. Other Speech Acts in
the Selected Novels. Conclusions. References. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 316 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4061-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-432-7 (e-Book)
PANNEERSELVAM
ELIMAIKKURAL
R. PANNEERSELVAM, Professor of the Department of
Management Studies, School of Management, Pondicherry
University, Pondicherry.
Since the birth of mankind, people started living in
groups, further they produced their necessary goods
on their own. In the process of coexistence, there is a
necessity for understanding others and also practicing
of give and take policy. Among the relatives, a perfect
understanding in terms of helping each other emanated
automatically. After the emergence of civilization, people
started living in villages and later migrated to towns and
cities. Then the formation of countries and continents
made people to connect internationally. In this process,
their characteristics, living styles and business practices
have improved to the current state of modern civilization
across the world. There is a necessity to have guidelines
for our life and culture, socialization and business
organizations. In this respect, this text, “Elimaikkural” is
fully developed based on authors 39 years of teaching and
research experience, and his global societal observations.
This text forms as a guide for the society at large and
learning text for students at various levels starting from
school to postgraduate level.
FEATURES OF THIS BOOK
• Contains one hundred and forty four (144) headings,
each containing 10 simple kurals.
• Total number of elimaikkurals in this text is one
thousand and four hundred and forty (1440).
• The one hundred and forty four headings are grouped
into 10 major headings:
o Devotion
o Wealth
o Education
o Relation
o Character
o Family
o Country
o Business
o Time
o Nature
• Full literature is developed with Venba grammar
Contents: Devotion. Wealth. Education. Relation.
Character. Family. Country. Business. Time. Nature.
Latest Print 2020 / 180 pp. / 12 × 14.6 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-43-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-42-5 (e-Book)
Phonetics
GANGAL
Practical Course in Spoken English, A
2nd ed.
J.K. GANGAL, Director of the Centre for Creativity and
Human Resource Development (CCHRD), Delhi, is a well-
known ELT expert.
This well-established and highly successful book, now in
its Second Edition, builds on the strength of the previous
edition, retaining many of the topics and incorporating
some new topics in consonance with the present-day
needs.
The accompanying CD contains all the attributes of a
good speech—proper stress, intonation and correct
pronunciation—to enable better comprehension of the
topics. Some of the conversations and Words Often
Mispronounced are also included in the CD to emphasize
on the correctness of learning and enrich the learners in
language skills.
Primarily intended for students and learners who wish to
enhance their spoken English skills, this book will be useful
also for those who have long-felt need to communicate
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
in English. It has all the rich ingredients to facilitate the
learners talk effectively and confidently:
• About 50 real-life conversations to improve one’s speech
• Extensive list of vocabulary to aid in group discussions
• Several useful language tips to pursue the global quest
for personal and academic excellence
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Discusses the need of the body language
• Gives dos and don’ts for an effective communicator
• Provides a list of a few non-verbal behaviours and their
universal interpretation
KEY FEATURES
• Application of idioms for effective and creative speaking
• Learning of expressions and phrases for better practical
presentation
• Numerous word meanings to clarify doubts
• Grammar and usage in almost all the chapters to grasp
the correct syntax
• Activity to instil confidence in public speaking
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition.
Acknowledgements. Key to Phonetic Symbols. Part I:
Phonetics—Sounds of English Language. Stress and
Intonation. Part II: English Conversations—Introducing
Yourself. Introducing Another Person. Meeting a Person
First Time. Meeting a Stranger in a Familiar Situation.
Meeting People after a Long Time. Asking for a Way and
Giving Directions. At the Railway Reservation Counter.
Buying a Railway Ticket and Boarding a Wrong Train. At
the Airport. Travelling by State Bus. Giving a Message
on Phone. Attending an Interview for a Job. At the
Bank. At the Hospital. At the Departmental Store. At
the Cinema. At the Public Library. At the Bookshop. At
the Dining Table. At the Hotel. Asking for Information.
Making a Request. Taking Leave of Somebody. Making
an Appointment. Accepting an Invitation. Declining
an Invitation. Apologising. Appreciating Something.
Expressing Disapproval. Meeting a School Friend after a
Long Time. At the Parent–Teacher Meeting. Interview for
Child’s Admission in School. Telling the Time. Interviewing
a Celebrity on Television [Rendezvous with Pradeep].
Expressing Condolences. Grading System vs. Marking
System (A Panel Discussion). Planning a Vacation. At
the Green Grocer’s. At the Post Office. Lodging an
FIR with Police. Ordering a Meal at the Hotel. At the
Beauty Parlour. Life in Metropolis. Talking about People.
Talking about Newspapers. Talking about Computers.
Talking about Television. Talking about Weather and
Temperature. Talking about Art and Music. Interviewing
a National Awardee Teacher. Part III: Essentials of
Spoken English—Idiomatic Expressions. Words Often
Mispronounced. Expressions for Effective Communication.
The Body Language. Part IV: Self-Evaluation—Self-
Evaluation. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 300 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4654-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-31-8 (e-Book)
55
SETHI & DHAMIJA
Course in Phonetics and Spoken
English, A, 2nd ed.
J. SETHI, formerly Professor of English, Central Institute of
English and Foreign Languages (CIEFL), Hyderabad.
P.V. DHAMIJA, Professor, Department of Phonetics and
Spoken English, CIEFL, Hyderabad.
This much improved revised edition of the book takes
into account the needs of the student in the context
of the present curricula followed in various universities
and English language teaching institutes. This edition
therefore devotes a new chapter to Assimilation, a
section to Tones in relation to Attitudes, and highlights
certain important aspects of pronunciation, such as rules
of word accentuation.
Starting with general phonetics, the book goes on to give
a brief functional account of general phonology and then
a selective and yet fairly exhaustive description of the
phonetics and phonology of English. It also provides a
number of conversational passages in phonetic script as
well as in ordinary spelling for practice in reading aloud.
What sets this text apart is its novelty of approach and
lucidity of treatment. English pronunciation is followed as
per the “Received Pronunciation of England”.
This text is specially designed for postgraduate students
of English, undergraduate and postgraduate students
of linguistics, and for those undergoing secondary and
tertiary level teachers’ training programmes in English.
KEY FEATURES
• Suitable and adequate practice material has been
included.
• Numerous exercises are given at the end of each
chapter, which are geared to teaching as well as testing.
• A revised IPA chart is provided.
Contents: Preface to the First Edition. The Organs of
Speech. The Description and Classification of Speech
Sounds. The Description and Classification of Consonants.
The Description and Classification of Vowels. Phonetic
Transcription. The Phoneme. The Syllable. Various
Accents of English. The Sounds of English—Vowels. The
Sounds of English—Consonants. Phoneme Sequences and
Consonant Clusters in English. Word Accent. Accent and
Rhythm in Connected Speech. Assimilation. Intonation.
Conver-sational Passages for Practice. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 232 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-1495-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-90-5 (e-Book)
 56 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
SETHI & JINDAL
Handbook of Pronunciation of English
Words, A (with two CD-ROMs)
J. SETHI, Formerly, Professor of English, Central Institute of
English and Foreign Languages, Hyderabad.
D.V. JINDAL, Former Faculty Member, Postgraduate
Department of English, Government College, Ludhiana.
Addressed to an educated user of English, the book,
together with a set of two CDs, offers a ‘Teach Yourself’
course in the pronunciation of English words. Written
in a non-technical language, it contains considerable
amount of practice materials too.
Part I deals with important facts about the pronunciation
of English words and the principal attributes of good
speech; Part II contains a pronouncing dictionary of some
2,500 commonly used, but often mispronounced, words
of English and about 60 foreign words and phrases often
used in English. The selection of the words and phrases is
based partly on research and partly on the authors’ long
experience.
KEY FEATURES
• The book takes into account the socio-linguistic
realities of the use of English, and accordingly attempts
the task of remediation of English pronunciation.
• A chart highlights the problems faced by Indian learners.
• It provides an exhaustive treatment of the relationship
between sound and spelling in English.
• A chapter is specially devoted to some general rules of
pronunciation including the treatment of double letters
and ‘silent’ letters, and the pronunciation of the past
and plural suffixes and contracted forms such as I’ve,
she’d, shan’t, mightn’t.
• The Dictionary is meant not only for reference, but also
for regular learning.
• Both the practice materials and the Dictionary are
recorded on two CDs available with the book.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Pronunciation of English
Words—Introduction. English Sounds and Symbols. Some
General Rules of Pronunciation. Word Accent in English.
Attributes of Good Speech. Part II: Dictionary—The
Dictionary. Select Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2010 / 112 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-0670-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-883-7 (e-Book)
SETHI, SADANAND & JINDAL
Practical Course in English
Pronunciation, A (with two CD-ROMs)
J. SETHI, Formerly Professor of English, Central Institute of
English and Foreign Languages, Hyderabad.
K. SADANAND, Formerly Professor and Head, Department
of Phonetics and Spoken English, Central Institute of
English and Foreign Languages, Hyderabad.
D.V. JINDAL, Former Faculty Member, Postgraduate
Department of English, Government College, Ludhiana.
English enjoys a preeminent position today among world
languages. However, even the large populations that are
proficient in the vocabulary and grammar of English are
not equally proficient in the pronunciation of the language.
This adult population is the target audience of this book.
Based on the RP (Received Pronunciation) model—the
most widely understood English pronunciation across the
world—this systematically organized and lucidly written
text covers the entire range from sound to connected
speech, i.e., dialogues, anecdotes, passages and short
speeches. The book is in two parts: Part I deals with
all important aspects of English pronunciation; Part II
comprises a pronouncing dictionary.
Intended for adult learners of English, the book chiefly
aims at remediation, and most of the practice materials
and exercises are given with this end in view. Besides,
with the help of numerous listening exercises, the
course sharpens the learners’ ability to comprehend
spoken English with ease, thereby training them to
face real-life situations (for example, interviews) with
confidence and competence.
KEY FEATURES
• Gives a fairly comprehensive account of the relationship
between sound and spelling.
• A whole chapter is devoted to Stress in English
compounds.
• The Dictionary — a Dictionary with a difference—
consists of words that are commonly used in the
language but are often mispronounced. The entire
Dictionary is recorded on CD with spaces for learners
to repeat each word after the teacher.
• The two CDs accompanying the book help the learner
in speaking as well as listening.
With its emphasis on practice, the book will prove to be
of great value to postgraduate students of English and
linguistics, teacher-trainees in colleges of education and
institutes of English, college faculty and school teachers,
institutes offering courses in spoken English, candidates
preparing for various competitive exams, and radio and
TV newsreaders.
Contents: Preface. Part I: PRONUNCIATION OF ENGLISH—
Introduction. Problems of Pronunciation. English
Consonants. English Vowels. Some General Guidelines for
Correct Pronunciation. Word Stress. Stress in Compound
Words. Sentence Stress and Rhythm. Intonation.
Additional Attributes of Good Speech. Practice in
Connected Speech. Part II: THE DICTIONARY—About the
Dictionary. The Dictionary. Section A: General English
Vocabulary. Section B: Some Common Personal Names,
Names of Days, Months and Literary Characters. Section
C: Some Common Geographical Names. Section D:
Foreign Words and Phrases Commonly Used in English.
Select Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2010 / 232 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2594-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-629-1 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Translation Studies
SHASTRI
Fundamental Aspects of Translation
PRATIMA DAVE SHASTRI, Assistant Professor, Department
of Applied Linguistics, Shreemati Nathibai Damodar
Thackersey (SNDT) Women’s University, Mumbai.
This concise and well-written text provides a deeper
insight into the discipline of translation and discusses all
the complexities involved in translation.
The book discusses in detail the process of translation,
different types of translation, and theory and principles
of translation. It also deals with different interdisciplinary
subjects such as semiotics, linguistics, lexicography and
socio-linguistics that contribute to effective translation.
Finally, it explains the problems of translation and the
techniques for evaluating translation. The book provides
plenty of examples to make the concept clear.
The book is intended as a text for the undergraduate
students of translation studies and postgraduate
students of English, Applied Linguistics, and English and
Comparative Literature.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Nature and Scope of
Translation. Process of Translation. Types of Translation.
Theory of Translation. Principles of Translation.
Translating Poetry: A Process of Transcreation. Translation
and Culture: A Semiotic Perspective. Linguistics and
Translation. Lexicography and the Tools for Translation.
Sociolinguistics and Translation. Problems of Translation.
Evaluation of Translation. Specimen Example of Evaluation
of Translation. References. Suggested Reading. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 136 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 295.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4474-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-735-9 (e-Book)
Women’s Writings in Nineteenth and
Twentieth Century
ABRAHAM
Women’s Writings in the Nineteenth and
Twentieth Centuries—Short Stories
TAISHA ABRAHAM, Associate Professor, Department of
English, Jesus and Mary College, New Delhi.
Intended as a text for undergraduate students of English
for their course on Women’s Writings in the Nineteenth
and Twentieth centuries, this compact and well-organized
book provides both the history of the development of the
short story in America and Britain and a comprehensive
introduction to the modes on critical practices based on
feminst thinking. It takes into account the strategies used
by the women writers of the period in the backdrop of
the gender issues that agitated their minds.
57
The text is divided into three parts—Part I: Introduction—
containing two chapters that deal with the development
of the American short story and the resurgence of radical
feminism in America. These provide the historical and
the feminist frame within which the short stories by
the Anglo American Women’s Writers should be read.
Part II gives four short stories: Kate Chopin—The Story
of An Hour; Charlotte Perkins Gilman—The Yellow
Wallpaper; Willa Cather—Coming, Aphrodite!; and
Katherine Mansfield—Bliss. Each short story is preceded
by a critical introduction, detailed references for further
reading, and a biographical time line. Part III comprises
three critical essays which provide sharp insights into the
period in which the four women writers were writing.
This book will be treasured not only by students but
also by those who wish to study critically the feminist
writings of the period. In addition, it will enrich readers’
understanding of American and British literary history and
culture.
SALIENT FEATURES
• The critical introduction to each short story traces the
development of the form from its origins, both histori-
cally and in terms of female literary contributions to its
development.
• The chapter on Radical Feminism is mapped in the
context of social, political and cultural development.
• The book provides historical, literary and biographical
contexts of the writers and their short stories.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Part I: Introduc-
tion—The Development of the American Short Story. The
Resurgence of Radical Feminism in America: Mapping
the Field. Part II: Short Stories—Kate Chopin (1850–
1904). Charlotte Perkins Gilman (1860–1935). Willa
Cather (1873–1947). Katherine Mansfield (1888–1923).
Kate Chopin’s Canonical and Market Place: Authorship,
Authorization and Authority—Bonnie James Shaker.
Bibliography. Women Readers and Reading in Victorian
Britain and America—Catherine J. Golden. Gay Literary
Traditions—John P. Anders.
Latest Print 2013 / 292 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4736-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-181-4 (e-Book)
Law  
Administrative Law
JAYAKUMAR
Administrative Law
N.K. JAYAKUMAR, Professor and Head, Department of
Law, and Dean, Faculty of Law, University of Kerala.
This concise yet comprehensive book covers the entire
range of topics on administrative law prescribed for
undergraduate students of Law (LL.B./B.A., LL.B.) and
presents them with great clarity and commendable insight.
 58 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
The book begins by describing the reasons for the rapid
growth and tremendous development of administrative
law in modern times and goes on to discuss delegated
legislation, principles of natural justice, contractual and
tortuous liability of the State, and remedies available
to the individual against the State with relevant case
laws. Comparison with the systems prevailing in other
countries puts the topics in the right perspective.
Recent developments including legitimate expectation,
proportionality, and misfeasance in public office are
discussed at appropriate places.
The most remarkable feature of the book is that it has
transformed the complex subject of administrative law
into an easily understandable subject within the grasp of
even an average student. The compact size of the book
and simple treatment of the subject make this text the
best introduction to administrative law.
Contents: Preface. Table of Cases. Introduction. Delegated
Legislation. The Principles of Natural Justice. Discretionary
Powers of the Administration. Judicial Control of
Administrative Action. Remedies against Administrative
Action. Liability of the State in Tort. Liability of the State
in Contract. Government Privileges in Legal Proceedings.
Services under the Union and the States. Maladministration
and Its Remedies. Public Enterprises. Index.
Latest Print 2005 / 192 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2850-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-428-0 (e-Book)
Business Law
BHATIA & SETHI
Corporate and Compensation Laws
NISHWAN BHATIA, Associate Professor, Department
of Commerce, Jesus and Mary College, New Delhi.
JYOTSNA SETHI, Associate Professor, Department of
Commerce, Jesus and Mary College, New Delhi.
Primarily intended as a text for undergraduate students
of Commerce, this book gives a comprehensive analysis
of the legal aspects of corporate and compensation laws.
The book begins with an overview of the nature, kind
and formation of a company and different kinds of
companies. Then it goes on to give a detailed discussion on
Memorandum of Association, Articles of Association and
Prospectus. Besides, it enumerates the ways by which one
becomes a member of a company, and discusses the legal
provisions concerning share capital, shares, dividends,
interest and bonus shares. Furthermore, it dwells on
company management, meetings and proceedings, and
provisions regarding investigation of company affairs, the
conduct and consequences of winding up of a company
and the concepts of corporate governance and producer
company. The book concludes with a discussion on the
developments in corporate laws, the Depositories Act,
1996, the Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923, and the
Employees’ State Insurance Act, 1948. The Appendices
cover Corporate Governance-Voluntary Guidelines 2009,
the Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923-Schedules I-IV
and the Employees’ State Insurance Act, 1948-Schedules
II and III.
Besides students of Commerce, those pursuing MBA,
ICWA, Chartered Accountancy and Company Secretary-
ship will also find the book extremely useful.
KEY FEATURES
• Gives uptodate information on the subject.
• Incorporates all the amendments including the latest
amendment regarding corporate and compensation laws.
• Illustrations with relevant Case Law reinforce the text.
• Provides Test Questions and Practical Problems.
Contents: Preface. Nature of A Company. Kinds of
Companies. Formation of A Company. Memorandum
of Association. Articles of Association. Prospectus.
Membership in a Company. Share Capital. Shares.
Dividends, Interest and Bonus Shares. Company Manage-
ment. Meetings and Proceedings. Investigation. Winding
Up. Corporate Governance. Producer Company. Significant
Developments In Corporate Laws. The Depositories Act,
1996. Compensation Laws: The Workmen’s Compensation
Act, 1923. Compensation Laws: The Employees’
State Insurance Act, 1948. Appendices—A: Corporate
Governance-Voluntary Guidelines 2009. B: The Workmen’s
Compensation Act, 1923-Schedules I-IV. C: The Employees’
State Insurance Act, 1948-Schedules II and III. Index.
Latest Print 2011 / 396 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 350.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4483-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-223-1 (e-Book)
CHANDRA BOSE
Business Law, 2nd ed.
D. CHANDRA BOSE, Professor Emeritus of Commerce and
formerly Principal, Sree Narayana College, Chengannur
(Kerala), a constituent college of the University of Kerala.
The Second Edition of the book continues to explain
the legal aspects of the different business laws of the
land to help students understand and gain knowledge of
the legal environment in which the businesses operate.
The knowledge of the business laws is of paramount
importance to every business manager and chartered
accountant, who need to deal with legal matters regularly.
This book is specifically designed to introduce the students
to the legal environment and thus includes all important
Acts, such as the Law of Contracts, the Sales of Goods
Act, 1930, the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, the Law
of Insurance, the Company Law, the Factories Act, 1948,
the Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, the Trade Unions Act,
1948, the Minimum Wages Act, 1948, the Employees’
State Insurance Act, 1948, the Consumer Protection Act,
1986, the Pollution Control Acts, 1974 and 1981, and the
other important legal issues.
The book presents a systematic and in-depth treatment
of the various Acts in a concise, lucid and illustrative
manner, using several suitable practical examples and
studies of different law cases with a view to making the
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
subject more intelligible, interesting and authentic. Review
questions and practical assignments provided at the end
of each chapter are designed to help the students grasp
and apply the provisions of different Acts.
NEW TO THE SECOND EDITION
The following new chapters have been introduced in the
second edition to enrich the contents:
• Corporate Governance
• Intellectual Property Rights
• Right to Information Act
• Telecom Regulatory Authority of India
In addition, the part three of the book, which is on
the Company Law, has been updated with the latest
Companies Act, 2013.
The book is primarily designed to serve the needs of
undergraduate students of Commerce (B.Com). It is
equally useful for BBA and MBA students and those
pursuing professional courses at The Institute of Chartered
Accountants and The Institute of Company Secretaries,
besides meeting the growing needs of aspirants preparing
for competitive examinations.
Contents: Preface. Table of Cases. Part One: Mercantile
Law—Section 1: Law of Contracts—Introduction. Nature
of Contracts. Offer or Proposal. Acceptance. Conside-
ration. Capacity of Parties. Free Consent. Legality of
Consideration and Object. Contingent Contracts and
Wagering Contracts. Quasi Contracts. Performance of
Contract. Discharge of Contract. Remedies for Breach of
Contract. Section 2: Special Contracts—Indemnity and
Guarantee. Bailment and Pledge. Agency. Section 3: Other
Laws—Sale of Goods Act, 1930. Negotiable Instruments
Act, 1881. Partnership. Part Two: Law of Insurance—
Insurance. Life Insurance. General Insurance. Insurance
Regulatory and Development Authority (IRDA). Part Three:
Company Law—Formation and Incorporation of Company.
Memorandum of Association. Articles of Association.
Prospectus. Membership in a Company. Share Capital.
Shares. Application and Allotment of Shares. Calls and
Forfeiture of Shares. Share Certificate and Share Warrant.
Transfer and Transmission of Shares. Borrowing Powers.
Directors. Board Meetings and Committees. General Body
Meetings. Disclosure and Transparency. Compliances,
Governance and CSR. Dividends. Accounts and Audit.
Supremacy of Majority and Protection of Minority.
Prevention of Oppression and Mismanagement.
Compromises, Arrangements and Reconstructions.
Winding Up. Compromises, Arrangements and
Reconstructions. Winding Up. Part Four: Industrial Law—
The Factories Act, 1948. The Industrial Disputes Act,
1947. The Trade Unions Act, 1926. The Minimum Wages
Act, 1948. The Employees’ State Insurance Act, 1948.
Part Five: General Law—The Consumer Protection Act,
1986. Pollution Control Act. Corporate Governance. 56.
Intellectual Property Rights. Right to Information Act.
Telecom Regulatory Authority of India. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 736 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 650.00
ISBN-978-93-87472-23-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-87472-24-2 (e-Book)
59
PADHI
Legal Aspects of Business
P.K. PADHI, Professor, Xavier Labour Relations Institute
(XLRI), Jamshedpur.
This comprehensive and student-friendly text discusses
the various laws and Acts relating to business laws such
as The Indian Contract Act, The Sale of Goods Act and
The Companies Act. It presents the topics in a systematic
and illustrative manner, providing many case laws with
a view to making them more intelligible and authentic.
Legal jargon has been completely avoided so that the
students can understand these laws with ease.
The book is primarily meant for the undergraduate
and postgraduate students of law, management and
the undergraduate students of commerce. Besides,
students pursuing professional courses such as Company
Secretaryship (CS), CA and ICWA would also find the book
quite useful.
Contents: Preface. Table of Cases. 1. The Indian Contract
Act, 1872—Of the Communication, Acceptance and
Revocation of Proposals. Of Contracts, Voidable Contracts
and Void Agreements. Of Contingent Contracts. Of the
Performance of Contracts. Of Certain Relations Resembling
Those Created by Contract. Of the Consequences of
Breach of Contract. Of Indemnity and Guarantee. Of
Bailment. Agency. 2. The Arbitration and Conciliation
Act, 1996—Part I: Arbitration—General Provisions.
Arbitration Agreement. Composition of Arbitral Tribunal.
Jurisdiction of Arbitral Tribunals. Conduct of Arbitral
Proceedings. Making of Arbitral Award and Termination of
Proceedings. Recourse against Arbitral Award. Finality and
Enforcement of Arbitral Awards. Appeals. Miscellaneous.
Part II: Enforcement of Certain Foreign Awards—New York
Convention Awards. Geneva Convention Awards. Part III:
Conciliation. Part IV: Supplementary Provisions—3. The
Sales of goods act, 1930—Preliminary. Formation of
the Contract of Sale. Conditions and Warranties. Effects
of the Contract. Transfer of Title. Performance of the
Contract. Rights of Unpaid Seller against the Goods.
Suits for Breach of the Contract. Miscellaneous. 4. The
NEgotiable Instruments Act, 1881—Preliminary. Of Notes,
Bills and Cheques. Parties to Notes, Bills and Cheques.
Of Negotiation. Of Presentment. Of Payment and
Interest. Of Discharge from Liability on Notes, Bills and
Cheques. Of Notice of Dishonour. Of Noting and Protest.
Of Reasonable Time. Of Acceptance and Payment for
Honour and Reference in Case of Need. Of Compensation.
Special Rules of Evidence. Of Crossed Cheques. Of Bills
in Sets. Of International Law. Of Penalties in Case of
Dishonour of Certain Cheques for Insufficiency of Funds
in the Accounts. 5. The Consumer Protection Act, 1986—
Preliminary. Consumer Protection Councils. Consumer
Disputes Redressal Agencies. Miscellaneous. 6. The
Companies Act, 1956—Meaning and Features. Kinds of
Company. Registration and Incorporation. Memorandum of
Association. Articles of Association. Prospectus. Share and
Share Capital. Shareholders and Members. Debentures.
Directors. Meetings. Majority Powers and Minority Rights.
 60 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Prevention of Oppression and Mismanagement. Winding
up of a Company. Appendix. Index.
Latest Print 2020 / 660 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4675-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-448-8 (e-Book)
RAO
Business Law
PEDDINA MOHANA RAO was formerly Reader,
Department of Commerce, Sri Krushna Chandra Gajapati
(SKCG), an Autonomous College in Orissa.
This student-friendly text on Business Law discusses
in detail different laws and Acts relating to business,
commerce, trade and industry. Divided into six parts,
Part I, The Indian Contract Act, 1872 discusses topics
such as agreement and contract, offer and acceptance,
and consideration. Part II, The Sale of Goods Act, 1930
deals with formation of contract of sale, conditions and
warranties, and performance of contract of sale. Part III,
The Indian Partnership Act, 1932 explains the nature of
partnership and registration and dissolution of a firm. Part
IV, The Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881 describes parties
to negotiable instruments, presentation of negotiable
instruments, and so on. Part V, The Indian Companies
Act, 1956 discusses the formation and incorporation of
a company and appointment of directors and their legal
position. Part VI, General Acts, gives an overview of The
Consumer Protection Act, 1986 and The Foreign Exchange
Management Act, 2000.
The book is intended as a text for the undergraduate
students of commerce and postgraduate students of
management. Besides, students pursuing professional
courses such as CA, ICWA and CS and those appearing
for Judicial Services examination will also find the book
quite useful.
KEY FEATURES
• Cites examples, wherever necessary, to clarify the
implication of the law.
• Illustrates concepts with the help of worked out
examples.
• Furnishes a Glossary on the legal terms used.
• Cites case laws to make the concepts clear.
• Supplements the text with pedagogical features such as
bird’s-eye view to make the book more practical and
easy to understand.
Contents: Preface. Part I: The Indian Contract Act,
1872—Law an Overview. Business Laws an Introductory
View. Nature of Contract. Agreement and Contract. Offer
and Acceptance. Consideration. Capacity to Contract.
Free Consent. Legality of Object and Consideration.
Void Agreements. Performance of Contract. Discharge
of Contract. Breach of Contract. Contingent Contracts.
Quasi Contracts. Indemnity and Guarantee. Bailment and
Pledge. Law of Agency. Part II: The Sale of Goods Act,
1930—Formation of the Contract of Sale. Conditions and
Warranties. Transfer of Ownership in Goods. Performance
of the Contract of Sale. Unpaid Seller and Restorative
Measures. Part III: The Indian Partnership Act, 1932—
Nature of Partnership: A General View. Relations of
Partners to One Another. Registration and Dissolution
of a Firm. Part IV: Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881—
Negotiable Instruments: An Introductory View. Parties
to Negotiable Instruments. Negotiation. Presentment
of Negotiable Instruments. Dishonour and Discharge
of Negotiable Instruments. Banker and Customer. Part
V: The Indian Companies Act, 1956—Formation and
Incorporation of Company. Legal Position of Directors,
their Appointment and Remuneration. Meetings and
Resolutions. Part VI: The Consumer Protection Act,
1986—The Consumer Protection Act, 1986: An Aggregate
View. Part VII: The Foreign Exchange Management Act,
2000—Foreign Exchange Management Act, 2000: A Brief
View. Index.
Latest Print 2013 / 496 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 350.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4708-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-655-0 (e-Book)
SULPHEY & BASHEER
Laws for Business, 5th ed.
M.M. SULPHEY, Professor, Department of Human Resource
Management, College of Business Administration, Prince
Sattam Bin Abdulaziz University, Al-Kharj, Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia.
AZ-HAR BASHEER, Assistant Professor at TKM Institute of
Management, Kollam, Kerala.
The knowledge of business laws is very important
for the survival and growth of any organisation. This
comprehensive and well-written book, in its Fourth Edition,
continues to present a thorough discussion of various
legal topics such as contract laws, corporate laws, labour
legislations, taxation laws and the related acts, including
the Sale of Goods Act, 1930, the Negotiable Instruments
Act, 1881, the Consumer Protection Act, 1986, the
Insurance Act, 1938, the Limited Liability Partnership Act,
2008, the Companies Act, 2013, the Foreign Exchange
Management Act, 1999, the Information Technology Act,
2000, the Environment Protection Act, 1986, the Right to
Information Act, 2005, the Right to Education Act, 2009,
the Companies Act, 2013, the National Food Security Act,
2013 and other important acts.
The book contains many practical examples and studies of
different law cases, which make it more interesting and
authentic. In addition, the book incorporates chapter-end
questions. Moreover, mind maps provided in most of the
chapters give readers a brief idea about the concepts
discussed. More practical exercises in the form of case
studies in the questions section, and format of a number
of documents make the book quite informative.
The book is primarily designed for the undergraduate
and postgraduate students of management and other
related courses for their subject Business Law. Besides,
the professionals and legal practitioners will also find the
book very useful.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Chapter on Code on Wages, 2019.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Preface to the First Edition.
Section I: Introduction to Law and Its Implication in
Business—Introduction. Section II: Law of Contracts—
Indian Contract Act, 1872. Special Contracts. Sale of Goods
Act, 1930. Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881. Consumer
Protection Act, 1986. Insurance Act, 1938. Indian
Partnership Act, 1932. Limited Liability Partnership Act,
2008. Section III: Corporate Laws—Companies Act, 2013.
Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999. Competition
Act, 2002. Securities and Exchange Board of India Act,
1992. Section IV: Administrative Law—Administrative
Law. Section V: Labour Legislations—Factories Act, 1948.
Trade Unions Act, 1926. Industrial Disputes Act, 1947.
Employees’ Compensation Act, 2009. Employees’ State
Insurance Act, 1948. Employees’ Provident Funds and
Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952. Payment of Gratuity
Act, 1972. Maternity Benefit Act, 1961. Payment of Wages
Act, 1936. Minimum Wages Act, 1948. Payment of Bonus
Act, 1965. Industrial Employment Standing Orders Act,
1946. Section VI: Taxation Laws—Introduction to Taxation
Law and Income Tax. Wealth Tax. The Central Goods
and Services Tax Act, 2017. Section VII: Miscellaneous
Acts—Intellectual Property Right. Information Technology
Act, 2000. Environment Protection Act, 1986. Right to
Information Act, 2005. Right to Education Act, 2009. The
National Food Security Act, 2013. The Sexual Harassment
of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and
Redressal) Act, 2013 Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 456 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-56-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-57-9 (e-Book)
Civil Procedure Code
DAS
Code of Civil Procedure
JATINDRA KUMAR DAS, Professor, Dean and Secretary,
Faculty of Law at the University of Calcutta, Kolkata.
The book written with a rich teaching experience of the
author at National Law University and State University,
attempts to critically analyse Indian High Court and
Apex Court cases on the Law of Civil Procedure. It also
evaluates the relation between statutory procedural law
and case laws as subject. Most importantly, the book
presents recent judgments of Supreme Court, particularly
based on Post Amendment Acts of 1999 and 2002. Also,
these cases have been analysed in addition to a critical
examination of the radical and far reaching effect of the
Code.
This lucid and well-organised book is divided into five
parts. Part I develops theoretical foundations of the
readers on Civil Procedure Code. Part II demonstrates
certain important issues on the (i) scope of jurisdiction of
civil courts to entertain disputes, (ii) principles governing
61
res sub judice, res judicata and foreign judgement,
(iii) nature of powers exercised by civil courts in matters
relating to place of suing, institution of suit, transfer of
cases, withdrawal and compromise of suits, (iv) necessary
conditions for first hearing, interim order, trial as well
as special suits, (v) scope and ambit of law relating to
pleadings, appearance and non-appearance of parties,
discovery, inspection, production of documents, death,
marriage, insolvency of parties, judgment and decrees.
Part III explores various issues on appeals, reference,
review and revision. In this part, an attempt has also
been made to discuss different facets of law on first
appeal, second appeals, appeals from orders, appeal by
indigent persons, appeals to the Supreme Court. Part IV is
devoted to discuss various principles on execution. Part V
deals with miscellaneous issues on the Law of Civil Proce-
dure and includes Appendix on the Law of Limitation.
The book will prove useful to the students of LLB and
LLM for their course study. Besides, the book will be of
immense use to the professionals.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Preliminary—Theoretical
Foundations of Code of Civil Procedure. Definitions.
Part II: Suits—Jurisdiction of Civil Courts. Res Sub Judice
and Res Judicata. Foreign Judgments. Place of Suing.
Institution of Suit, Parties to Suit, Framing of Suit,
Recognised Agents and Pleaders. Pleading: Plaint and
Written Statement. Issuing Summons, Appearances of
Parties, Consequence of Non-appearance and Remedies
against ex-parte Decrees. First Hearing. Discovery,
Inspection, Admissions, Production of Documents and
Affidavits. Trial. Withdrawal, Adjustment and Compromise
of Suits. Effect of Death, Marriage and Insolvency of
Parties. Special Suits and Proceedings. Judgment, Decree,
Interest and Costs. Interlocutory and Interim Orders.
Part III: Appeals, Reference, Review and Revision—
Appeals from Original Decrees: First Appeal. Appeals
from Apellate Decrees: Second Appeal. Appeals from
Order. Appeals by Indigent Persons. Appeals to the
Supreme Court. Reference. Review. Revision. Part IV:
Execution—General Principles of Execution. Modes for
Execution. Arrest and Detention. Attachment of Property
and Distribution of Assets. Sale and Delivery of Property.
Part V: Miscellaneous—Restitution. Caveat. Inherent
Powers of Court. Appendix: Law of Limitation. Index.
Latest Print 2013 / 1100 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 750.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4829-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-354-2 (e-Book)
Constitution of India
'kekZ
Hkkjr dk lafo/ku&,d ifjp;] pkSngoka laLdj.k
cztfd'kksj 'kekZ] izfrfyI;f/dkj (dkihjkbV) cksMZ ds vè;{k
FksA iwoZ esa Hkkjr ljdkj ds fof/ ea=kky; esa vij lfpo FksA
bl iqLrd dh yksdfiz;rk ;Fkkor f'k[kj ij gSA xr
o"kZ ds lHkh egÙoiw.kZ fu.kZ;ksa dk bl laLdj.k esa ;Fkks-
 62 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
fpr lekos'k dj fy;k x;k gSA fof/k ds fo|kfFkZ;ksa vkSj
U;kf;d rFkk flfoy lsok dh ijh{kkvksa esa Hkkx ysus okys
vH;FkhZ bls vrho mi;ksxh ekurs gSaA mudh lQyrk dk
;g mi;qDr lk/ku gSA oLrqijd vkSj o.kZukRed] nksuksa
izdkj dh ijh{kkvksa ds fy, ;g iqLrd mi;ksxh gSA
pkSngosa laLdj.k dh fo'ks"krk
1- tEew&d'ehj ds izR;sd igyw ij izdk'k Mkyrs gq,
,d laiw.kZ u;k v/;k;A
2- lcjheky eafnj dk oknA
3 yksdfgrokn vkSj jk"Vªh; lqj{kk ¼jkQsy lkSnk½—
U;k;ky; fdl lhek rd tkap dj ldrs gSa\
4- fuf"Ø; lgte`R;q vuqKs; gSA
5- lafonktkr vkSj voS/k fu;qfD;kaA
6- vk/kkj dh fof/kekU;rkA
7- ,dkarrk ds vf/kdkj ds mYya/ku dk vo/kkj.k
djus ds fy, ijh{k.kA
8- udyh bZlkbZ vkSj vYila[;d laLFkk,aA
9- lafo/kku 103oka vkSj 104oka la'kks/ku vf/kfu;eA
fo"k; lwph% rsjgosa laLdj.k dh HkwfedkA izFke laLdj.k
dh HkwfedkA fu.kZ; lwphA lafo/ku dh jpuk ds iwoZ
dh ?kVuk,aA lafo/ku ds izeq[k y{k.kA ifjla?k iz.kkyhA
mísf'kdkA la?k dk jkT;{ks=k vkSj jkT;ksa dk fuekZ.kA
ukxfjdrkA ewy vf/dkjA jkT; dh uhfr ds funs'kd rÙoA
ewy dÙkZO;A la?k dh dk;ZikfydkA la?k dk fo/ku&eaMyA
jkT; dh dk;ZikfydkA jkT; fo/ku&eaMyA U;k;ikfydkA
Hkkjr dk mPpre U;k;ky;A mPp U;k;ky;A la?k
jkT;{ks=kA LFkkuh; 'kkluA lgdkjh lkslkbVhA la?k vkSj
jkT;ksa ds chp laca/A laifÙk] lafonk,a vkSj okn&ljdkj
dk nkf;RoA laifÙk dk vf/dkjA O;kikj] okf.kT; vkSj
lekxe dh Lora=krkA la?k vkSj jkT;ksa ds v/hu lsok,aA
yksd lsok vk;ksxA fuokZpuA jktHkk"kkA vkikr mica/A
lafo/ku dk la'kks/uA vuqPNsn 370A ny ifjorZu&nloha
vuqlwphA dqN oxks± ds laca/ esa fo'ks"k mica/A izR;k;ksftr fo/kuA
uSlfxZd U;k;A yksdfgroknA Hkkjr dk fu;a=kd&egkys[kk
ijh{kdA 'kCn lwphA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2020 / 536 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-93-90544-15-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90544-16-5 (e-Book)
SHARMA
Introduction to the Constitution of India,
10th ed.
BRIJ KISHORE SHARMA, Former Chairman, Copyright
Board. Earlier he was Chairman, National Book Trust
(NBT), India.
Written in a simple and an easy-to-understand language,
this comprehensive text gives a broad perspective of
the framework of the Indian Constitution and its salient
features. It gives all provisions and principles of Indian
Constitution, and incorporates all important and leading
cases. All landmark judgements of the past year have been
duly incorporated in the present edition. The students of
LL.B. and LL.M. and those who appear for judicial services
or Civil Services examination find it extremely helpful.
This book is a key to their success. It is useful for both
types of papers—objective as well as narrative.
NEW TO THE TENTH EDITION
1. A whole new chapter dealing with every aspect of
Jammu and Kashmir.
2. Sabarimala Temple case.
3. PIL and national security (Rafale Deal)—How far the
courts would go?
4. Passive euthanasia is permissible.
5. Contractual and illegal appointments.
6. Validity of Aadhaar.
7. Tests to determine violation of Right to Privacy.
8. Fake Christians and minority institutions.
9. Constitution 103rd and 104th Amendment Acts.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Table of
Cases. Events Before the Framing of the Constitution.
Salient Features of the Constitution. The Federal System.
The Preamble. Territory of the Union and Formation
of States. Citizenship. Fundamental Rights. Directive
Principles of State Policy. Fundamental Duties. The Union
Executive. The Union Legislature. The State Executive.
State Legislatures. The Judiciary. The Supreme Court
of India. The High Courts. Union Territories. Local
Government. The Cooperative Societies. Relations between
the Union and the States. Property, Contract and Suits—
Government Liability. Right to Property. Freedom of Trade,
Commerce and Intercourse. Services under the Union
and the States. Public Service Commissions. Elections.
Official Language. Emergency Provisions. Amendment of
the Constitution. Article 370. Defections—Tenth Schedule.
Special Provisions Relating to Certain Classes’. Delegated
Legislation. Natural Justice. Public Interest Litigation.
Comptroller and Auditor General of India. Index.
Latest Print 2020 / 504 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-93-90544-05-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90544-13-4 (e-Book)
Copyright Law
DAS
Law of Copyright, 2nd ed.
JATINDRA KUMAR DAS, Professor, Head, Department
of Law and Dean, Faculty of Law at the University of
Calcutta, Kolkata.
The book attempts to critically analyse the cases on the
law of copyright as well as statutory provisions of law of
copyright.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
When the first edition of the book was published in
2015, there was no readable and dependable book for
the general reader interested to be acquainted with the
changing features of the law of copyright immediate after
the enactment of the Copyright (Amendment) Act 2012.
Since the publication of this book, the Finance Act 2017
has introduced Appellate Board in place of Copyright Board
as well as the Supreme Court and High Courts in India
have also delivered a large number of judicial decisions
on the law of copyright. In this edition the author has
surveyed all such Courts decisions and analysed them and
inserted them in appropriate places of the book and also
examined the impact of the Appellate Board. It presents
not only the provisions of the Copyright Act 1957 in the
form of a normative, but points out the changes made
thereon by formal amendments as well as conflicts of law
which have been settled by judicial interpretations.
The book is divided into ten chapters. Chapter 1 is
introductory, while Chapters 2 and 3 discuss the origin
and development of law of copyright at international as
well as national level. The most important debatable issue
in copyright law is “works in which copyright subsists”,
and the Chapter 4 is devoted to this aspect. Chapter 5
explores various issues relating to author of work, owner
of copyright and recognised rights of copyright owner.
The terms of copyright, licensing of copyright, international
copyright and registration of copyright are the subject
matter of Chapter 6, while rights of broadcasting
organisation and of performers (neighbouring rights) are
the subject matter of Chapter 7. Internet is the greatest
communication medium of the contemporary era, and
there is an inherent link between law of copyright and
internet. Therefore, Chapter 8 is devoted to discuss
various issues relating to “protection of copyright in
internet.” While Chapter 9 demonstrates the law relating
to infringement of copyright and defences of copyright
liability. Chapter 10, the concluding chapter, discusses the
enforcement of copyright in India in detail.
Though the book is designed for the undergraduate and
postgraduate students of Law, it will be equally beneficial
for the researchers, academicians, jurists, lawyers, judges
as well as members of civil society.
Contents: Preface. Table of Cases. Theoretical Foundations
of Law of Copyright. Origin and Development of Law of
Copyright at International Level and its Utility in India.
Origin and Development of Law Relating to Copyright
at National Level: England, America and India. Works
in which Copyright Subsists. Author of Work, Owner
of Copyright and Recognised Rights of Copyright
Owner. Term of Copyright, Licencing of Copyright,
International Copyright and Registration of Copyright.
Rights of Broadcasting Organisation and of Performers
(Neighbouring Rights). Protection of Copyright in Internet.
Infringement of Copyright and Defences of Copyright
Liability. Enforcement of Copyright. Appendix: Copyright
Act, 1957. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 728 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 995.00
ISBN-978-81-948002-0-0 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-81-948002-1-7 (e-book)
63
Cyber Law
HARISH CHANDER
Cyber Laws and IT Protection
HARISH CHANDER, formerly Professor-in-Charge, Law
Centre II, Faculty of Law, University of Delhi.
India has emerged as a hub of the IT industry due to
the phenomenal growth of the IT sector. However, this
huge growth rate has brought with it the inevitable
legal complications due to a switch over from paper-
based commercial transactions to e-commerce and
e-transactions. This book discusses the legal position of
Information Technology (IT), e-commerce and business
transaction on the cyberspace/Internet under the
Information Technology (IT) Act in India.
Divided into five parts, Part I of the text deals with the
role of the Internet, e-commerce and e-governance in
the free market economy. Part II elaborates on various
laws relating to electronic records and intellectual
property rights with special reference to India. Efforts
are being made internationally to rein in cyber crimes
by introducing stringent laws, Part III deals with various
rules and regulations which have been introduced to get
rid of cyber crimes. Part IV is devoted to a discussion on
various offences committed under the IT Act, penalties
imposed on the offenders, and compensations awarded
to the victims. Finally, Part V acquaints the students with
the miscellaneous provisions of the IT Act.
This book is designed as text for postgraduate students of
Law (LLM) and undergraduate and postgraduate students
of Information Technology [B.Tech./M.Tech. (IT)] and for
Master of Computer Applications (MCA) wherever it
is offered as a course. Besides, it will prove handy for
scholars and researchers working in the field of IT and
Internet.
KEY FEATURES
• Includes Appendices on the role of electronic evidence,
information technology rules, ministerial order on
blocking websites, and the rules relating to the use of
electronic records and digital signatures.
• Provides a comprehensive Table of Cases.
• Incorporates abbreviations of important legal terms
used in the text.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Table of Cases.
Abbreviations (Citation of Cases). Part I: Internet,
E-commerce and E-governance with Reference to Free
Market Economy—Understanding Computers, Internet
and Cyber Laws. Conceptual Framework of E-commerce:
E-governance. The Role of Electronic Signatures in
E-commerce with Reference to Free Market Economy
in India. Part II: Law Relating to Electronic Records and
Intellectual Property Rights in India—Legal Aspects of
Electronic Records/Digital Signatures. The Rules and
Regulations of Certifying Authorities in India. Protection
of Intellectual Property Rights in Cyberspace in India.
Part III: International Efforts Relating to Cyberspace
Laws and Cyber Crimes—International Efforts Related to
 64 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Cyberspace Laws. Council of Europe (COE) Convention
on Cyber Crimes. Part IV: Penalties, Compensation and
Offences under the Cyberspace and Internet in India—
Penalties, Compensation and Adjudication of Violations of
Provisions of IT Act and Judicial Review. Some Important
Offences under the Cyberspace Law and the Internet in
India. Other Offences under the Information Technology
Act in India. Part V: Miscellaneous Provisions of IT Act
and Conclusions—The Role of Electronic Evidence and
the Miscellaneous Provisions of the IT Act. Appendices—
I: Information Technology Act as Amended up to 2008.
II: The Information Technology (Certifying Authorities)
Rules, 2000. III: Ministerial Order on Blocking of Web-
sites. IV: The Information Technology (Use of Electronic
Records and Digital Signatures) Rules, 2004. Bibliography.
Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 288 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4570-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-349-8 (e-Book)
Environmental Law
SENGAR
Environmental Law
DHARMENDRA S. SENGAR, Vice Chancellor, Indian Law
Institute, New Delhi.
Today, more than ever before, there is considerable
concern about the deterioration of the environment
arising from environmental pollution—water, air, noise,
radiation and others. For, such pollution has a huge
adverse impact on human health, and the hazards
it poses are too numerous. There is also a felt-need
for environmental protection and management and
effective implementation of environmental laws. This
comprehensive book, authored by Prof. Sengar, an
eminent academic, with his wealth of experience in
various areas of environmental law and management,
brings these issues into sharp focus.
The book highlights problems such as public health and
safety, right to carry on trade vis-à-vis duty to protect
environment, right to information about hazardous
installations, right to clean environment, and ecological
balance for sustainable development. It stresses the
need for striking a balancer between environment and
development to bring about sustainable development.
Finally, the text shows how important it is to formulate a
legal framework for environmental protection.
KEY FEATURES
• While giving a broad conceptual overview of environ-
mental law, the text explains the major environmental
laws, examines the relevant provisions, and traces
the origin of constitutional support to environmental
protection.
• Refers to all leading cases on environmental law and
highlights the role of judiciary on entertaining as well
as restraining public interest litigations (PILs) to stop
environmental violations.
• Provides Appendices containing various environmental
laws.
• The accompanying CD-ROM contains text of all relevant
environmental laws—both general and specific—to
help readers have access to those laws instantly.
Primarily intended as a text for students of law (LL.B./
BA LL.B./LL.M., MBL) and management (MBA), the
book should also prove to be an excellent reference
for academics, lawyers, judges, environmental activists,
environmental managers and corporates concerned with
environmental protection.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. List of Cases.
Introduction. Industrial Pollution: Causes and Conse-
quences. Legal Control of Hazardous Substances and
Processes. Law Relating to Water Pollution. Industrial Air
Pollution and Law. Enforcement Machinery. Environmental
Issues and Judicial Trend. Corporate Environmental Liability.
Bibliography. Selected Environmental Statutes. Specific
Environmental Legislations and Their Amendments.
Appendices. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 376 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3059-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-085-5 (e-Book)
VENKAT
Environmental Law and Policy
ARUNA VENKAT, Associate Professor of Law at NALSAR
University of Law, Hyderabad. She is the Centre Head
of Centre for Humanitarian and Refugee Laws. She also
heads the Centre on Law and Society at NALSAR.
This book presents a comprehensive account of the
various contours of the environmental jurisprudence
in India. It covers the Indian constitutional, legislative,
administrative and judicial strategies that have shaped
the Indian environmental jurisprudence against the
backdrop of the various international efforts to control
pollution and preserve the global environment. It deals
with the constitutional framework provided for the
preservation and protection of Indian environment. In
this context, the book gives an extensive picture of Indian
administrative and legislative policy framework along with
the latest developments in the area. The salient and most
important feature of the book is its in-depth account of
the innovative judicial enforcement of the constitutional
and legislative prescriptions as reflected in the catena of
judicial decisions including the latest ones. In this respect,
the fundamental right to life guaranteed by Article 21
of the Indian Constitution has been given a very liberal
interpretation in order to make it the chief constitutional
edifice of the Indian environmental jurisprudence and
environmental justice in India.
The book is intended for the students of LL.B. and LL.M. It
would also be useful to faculty, research scholars, lawyers
and other legal professionals.
Contents: Preface. List of Cases. Abbreviations.
Introduction. Environmental Protection: International
Legislative and Administrative Efforts. Environmental
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Protection: Constitutional Perspectives. Environmental
Protection: Legislative Strategies. Environmental Protection
and Administrative Strategies. Environmental Protection,
Preservation and Role of Judiciary: Constitutional Format.
Need for Prevention and Control of Water Pollution:
Judicial Responses And Strategies. Prevention and
Control of Air Pollution Through Judicial Intervention and
Enforcement. Protection of Forests and Ecology: Judicial
Concern and Perception. Conclusions and Suggestions.
Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2011 / 472 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 350.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4436-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-676-5 (e-Book)
Governance
SINGH & ZAHID (Eds.)
Strengthening Governance through
Access to Justice
AMITA SINGH, Professor of Law and Governance at
the Centre for the Study of Law and Governance,
Jawaharlal Nehru University (JNU), New Delhi.
NASIR ASLAM ZAHID, Dean, Hamdard School of Law at
the Hamdard University, Karachi.
This book tries to reunite and rebuild faith in public
institutions by highlighting the availability of judicial
remedies for the poor and the excluded in South Asia. The
central idea of this book is the inevitable link between
judicial capacity and good governance. It critically
discusses the state of ‘access to justice’ to the poor
and addresses the problems of various structures and
procedures approached by the poor to seek justice. The
formal system remains locked in the whimsical fantasies
of the lawyers and the state structure which aborts the
rule of law for the privileged and works in open defiance
of the increasing disempowerment of the poor due to an
overwhelming judiciary.
This book highlights the growing need for restorative
justice as against retributive and thus emphasizes a
more intensive action research in alternative dispute
resolution systems (ADRs). This argument is further
developed to assess the competence of many people’s
led informal institutions of judiciary such as Saalish in
Bangladesh, Jirgas in Pakistan or Lok Adalats in India.
The book is also radical in its approach towards the
use of alternative dispute resolution systems to support
marginalized communities, including women in distress,
through mediation and arbitration which are gaining a
new intellectual space in justice discourse.
This book is an indispensable guide to administrators,
and social scientists interested in governance and legal
research. It would also be useful for those working in the
non-state sector of pro-poor reforms.
Contents: Preface. About the Editors. About the
Contributors. Introduction, Amita Singh. Section I: Just
65
Space for the Poor in Judicial Systems—Gram Adalat
in Bangladesh: Theory and Practice, M. Abdul Wahhab.
Panchayats and Jirghas (Lok Adalats): Alternative Dispute
Resolution System in Pakistan, Irum Ahsan. Lok Adalats
and Judicial Reform in India, Archana Agarwal. Formal
Perceptions of Informal Justice: Village Councils and Access
to Justice, Kripa Ananth Pur, Anirudh Krishna. Poverty and
Access to Justice: Dimensions of Public Interest Litigation,
Anindita Pujari. Revitalizing Judiciary: Enhancing Access to
the Poor, Pallavi Bahar. Justice Without Lawyers: Getting
Ideas from China, Xiong Ying. Section II: Procedural
Fairness and Restorative Justice—Gender, Violence
and Power: Retributive versus Restorative Justice in
South Asia, Ferdous Jahan. Alternatives to the Judicial
Mess: Suggesting Mediation, Dale Bagshaw. Issues of
Equity and Justice in Climate Change: A South Asian
Perspective, Angela Williams. Judicial intervention for
the environmentally Distressed in Pakistan, Saima Amin
Khawaja. Elusive Justice Denial frame for the Tribal Poor
in India, Priti Singh. Governance and Justice: Challenge
of Weaving the Severed Bond in South Asia, Justice Nasir
Aslam Zahid.
Latest Print 2008 / 188 pp. (Hard Cover) / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 350.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3697-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-619-2 (e-Book)
Human Rights
DAS
Human Rights Law and Practice
JATINDRA KUMAR DAS, Professor, Dean and Secretary,
Faculty of Law at the University of Calcutta, Kolkata.
The book, written with a rich teaching and research
experience of the author, emphasises the critical
evaluation of contemporary human rights law and
practice with special reference to India. It also evaluates
the ongoing discourse on various issues relating to life,
liberty, equality and human dignity and their reflections in
international human rights law referring the state practices
through constitutional guarantees, judicial decisions as
well as through enacting appropriate legislations.
This lucidly written book is logically organised into nine
chapters. Beginning with the theoretical foundations
of human rights law referring to origin, development
and theories of human rights at preliminary level, the
book proceeds to “International Bill of Human Rights”
demonstrating various facets of civil and political
rights as well as economic, social and cultural rights. It
further discusses the importance of human rights law
in protection against inhuman wrongs and examines
a large number of debates concerning human right to
development and protection of environment. Then, it
moves on to explore various issues relating to human
rights in Indian Constitutional Law.
The latter part of the book emphasises on the protection
of rights of women and children, which has been the
focal point of all human rights discussions. It also deals
 66 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
with the scope and ambit of the rights of indigenous
peoples and minorities including their protection. At the
end, the book examines the utility and justifications of
human rights law in protecting the rights of persons with
disabilities (divyang).
Though the book is primarily designed for undergraduate
and postgraduate students of LLB, BALLB and LLM, it will
be equally beneficial for the researchers, academicians,
jurists, lawyers, judges as well as members of civil society.
Contents: Preface. Table of Cases. Theoretical Foundations
of Human Rights Law. International Bill of Human Rights.
Human Rights Law and Protection Against Inhuman
Wrongs. Human Right to Development and Protection of
Environment. Human Rights in Indian Constitutional Law.
Human Rights Law and Protection of Women and Children.
Human Rights Law and Protection of Indigenous Peoples.
Human Rights Law and Minority Protection. Human
Rights Law and Protection of Persons with Disabilities.
Appendix I: Universal Declaration of Human Rights.
Appendix II: International Covenant on Economic, Social
and Cultural Rights. Appendix III: International Covenant
on Civil and Political Rights. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 736 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 995.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5272-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-001-5 (e-Book)
RAI
Fundamental Rights and
Their Enforcement
UDAI RAJ RAI, formerly Krishna Iyer Chair Professor at
National Law School of India University (NLSIU), Bangalore
for six years and Visiting Professor, National University of
Juridical Sciences (NUJS), Kolkata.
India is credited with having one of the finest democratic
constitutions in the world. And rightly so. For, even though
the Indian Constitution has undergone many amendments
and has been subjected to a lot of criticism, it has stood
the test of time and has emerged as the beacon of hope,
ensuring liberty, equality and justice to the citizens.
It is in this context this comprehensive and systemically
organized book on Fundamental Rights and Their
Enforcement, written by Prof. Udai Raj Rai, an eminent
academic with great legal acumen, becomes so significant.
The book is a study on the fundamental rights guaranteed
under Part III of the Constitution. Divided into 15
chapters—each chapter is again divided into parts—the
book discusses in detail Liberty-based rights such as right
to freedom of expression and other article 19 rights;
life and personal liberty; preventive detention, capital
punishment and prisoner’s rights; and freedom of religion.
Then it goes on to give an in-depth analysis of Equality-
based rights—equality before law; non-discrimination and
equal opportunity; social reservation; Liberty and Equality-
based-rights—social equality and right to education as well
as minority rights to establish and administer educational
institutions. The book concludes with a comprehensive
coverage on reach of fundamental rights; its violation;
enforcement of the rights; Directive Principles of State
Policy; and the fundamental duties of citizens.
The book being a juridical study, the emphasis throughout
is on analytical and critical study of important Supreme
Court judgments. So, such major judgments as A.K.
Gopalan and Maneka are highlighted. The distinction
between pre-Maneka and post-Maneka jurisprudence is
also clearly brought out. Besides, there is an elaborate
discussion on the right to information, special problems
regarding media freedom, and the Law of Contempt of
Court which, the author feels, needs amendment.
This well-balanced and well-researched book is intended
as a text for postgraduate students of law (LL.M.) and
as a reference for undergraduate students of law (LL.B.,
BA LL.B.). It should also serve as a valuable reference to
lawyers, judges, and the teaching community.
KEY FEATURES
• Gives an analytical and critical study of Supreme Court
judgments in relation to fundamental rights.
• Highlights the need for testing the laws on the
touchstone of Secularism.
• Shows the need for balancing the State's regulatory
power and educational rights of the minorities.
• Gives recent Supreme Court decisions in the Addenda
at the end of the book.
Contents: Preface. Table of Cases. Introduction. Liberty-
based Rights I: Freedom of Expression. Liberty-based
Rights II: Rest of Article 19 Rights. Liberty-based Rights III:
Meaning of Life and Personal Liberty. Liberty-based Rights
IV: Punitive Deprivation of Life and Personal Liberty.
Liberty-based Rights V: Preventive Detention, Death
Sentence and Prisoners’ Rights. Liberty-based Rights VI:
Freedom of Religion. Equality-based Rights I: Equality
Before Law. Equality-based Rights II: (Non-discrimination
and Equal Opportunity). Equality-based Rights III: Social
Reservation. Liberty- and Equality-based Rights I. Liberty-
and Equality-based Rights II: Identity, Minority and Other
Private Educational Institutions. Reach of Fundamental
Rights. Violation of Fundamental Rights. Enforcement of
the Rights. Directive Principles and Fundamental Duties.
Index.
Latest Print 2011 / 848 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 550.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4432-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-497-6 (e-Book)
Intellectual Property
PANDEY & DHARNI
Intellectual Property Rights
NEERAJ PANDEY, Associate Professor at National Institute
of Industrial Engineering (NITIE), Mumbai. He is also a
Visiting Faculty at IIM Ahmedabad and IIT Bombay.
KHUSHDEEP DHARNI, Associate Professor (Business
Management) at School of Business Studies, Punjab
Agricultural University, Ludhiana.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Creations of mind can vary in its form—from a brilliant
thought to a gizmo gadget to a popular fiction—all come
under the legal term called Intellectual Property. In the
world of upheaval technology, where information on
anything and everything is freely available and accessible,
guarding these intellectual properties legally becomes a
prerequisite.
This book comprehensively discusses how to manage
and secure the intellectual property and the legal norms
associated with it. The book begins with introducing the
concepts related to Intellectual Property and the WTO
Agreement. The following chapters explain various types
of Intellectual Property Rights such as Patents, Copyrights,
Trade Marks, Industrial Designs, Integrated Circuits, and
Geographical Indications. These chapters also provide in-
depth and detailed insight on regulations and procedures
for protection of Intellectual Property Rights.
The book further explicates the creation of Intellectual
Property and spells out the conceptual framework for
creativity and innovation. Management of Intellectual
Property is as important as its creation, and therefore
the concluding chapters describe the activities for
management and commercialization of Intellectual
Property Rights, and the emerging issues surrounding
them. Two separate cases have been added at the end of
the book, to provide an analytical insight of the subject
to the students.
The book is meant for the undergraduate and postgraduate
students of management and technology. Besides, the
book can be useful for the undergraduate students of law
as a ready reference.
Contents: Preface. Introduction to Intellectual Property
and World Trade Organization. Fundamentals of Patent.
Transfer and Infringement of Patent Rights. Copyright.
Trade Marks. Industrial Designs and IC Layout Design.
Geographical Indications. Creating Intellectual Property.
Intellectual Property Management. Emerging Issues in IPR.
Case Study 1: Research and Development in India. Case
Study 2; Apple versus Samsung Patent Dispute. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 192 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 350.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4989-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-544-7 (e-Book)
SOPLE
Managing Intellectual Property:
The Strategic Imperative, 5th ed.
VINOD V. SOPLE, Director at ITM-SIA Business School,
Dombivli (Mumbai).
The book, now in its fifth edition, offers a comprehensive
treatment of Intellectual Property concepts and their
applications in Indian industry. It provides a strategic
framework for IP management, leading to competitive
advantage for a business enterprise. Besides explaining the
conceptual framework and practices of IP management,
the book discusses IP as a strategic tool, its commercial
exploitation and strategies for risk management of IP.
Web-based material comprising chapter-wise PowerPoint
67
Presentations (PPTs) and Multiple Choice Questions is
available at www.phindia.com/sople.
This book is primarily intended as a text for postgraduate
students of management, students of engineering and
those who are pursuing certificate, postgraduate diploma
or degree courses in IPR. In addition, professionals and
corporate decision-makers should find the text valuable.
NEW TO THE FIFTH EDITION
• A new chapter has been introduced on Filing Patent
Applications.
• Numerous sections such as clinical research regulations,
planned purification, combination therapy, alternate
delivery, trade dress trademark protection, trademark
caution notice, comparative advertising and trademark
violation, contributory and vicarious infringement, two
statutes for farmers’ rights, incremental innovation,
piracy in fashion design, patentable or not patentable
biotech inventions have now been incorporated in the
respective chapters.
• More cases/caselets have been introduced in the
present edition.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Intellectual Property—A
Strategic Tool—Intellectual Property System. IP Rights and
Marketing Regulations. IP Management Framework. IP
Audits. Part II: Intellectual Property—Legal Protection—
Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs). Patents. Trademarks.
Copyrights. Trade Secrets. Industrial Designs. Geographical
Indications (GI). Semiconductor Integrated Circuit
Layout Design Farmers’ Rights. The Protection of Plant
Varieties and Farmers’ Rights (PPVFR) Biodiversity and
Traditional Knowledge. Part III: Intellectual Property—
Industry Practices and Issues—IPRs in Cyber Space. IPRs
in Pharmaceutical Sector. IPRs in Fashion Industry. IPRs
in Biotechnology Sector. Part IV: Intellectual Property—
Exploitation and Risk Coverage—Intellectual Property
Licensing. Intellectual Property Insurance. Securitisation
of Intellectual Property. Valuation of Intellectual Property.
Filing Patent Applications. Annexures—Glossary. Company
Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 500 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5265-0 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-747-2 (e-Book)
Jurisprudence
 68 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Latest Print 2007 / 284 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3132-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-833-2 (e-Book)
Labour Law
PADHI
Labour and Industrial Laws, 4th ed.
P.K. PADHI, Professor, Xavier Labour Relations Institute
(XLRI), Jamshedpur. Also, he is Advisor to HR Federation
of India.
This comprehensive and well-organised text, now in its
Fourth Edition, explains, with great clarity and precision,
the labour and industrial laws such as the Industrial
Disputes Act, the Factories Act, and the Contract Labour
Act. While giving a broad perspective of the subject,
the text brings out the objectives behind the enactment
of every legislation, discusses the relevant case laws
and shows how the Constitution is related to labour
laws. Formulas for the calculation of compensation for
retrenchment, death, permanent disablement are also
provided. Legal jargon has been completely avoided so
that anyone who is not expert in this particular subject
can also understand these laws with ease.
The book is primarily meant for the undergraduate
and postgraduate students of law and management as
well as for the postgraduate students of commerce/
personnel management and industrial relations. Besides,
students pursuing professional courses such as Company
Secretaryship (CS) and ICWA would also find the book
very useful.
NEW TO THE FOURTH EDITION
• Incorporates amendments made in the Payment of
Wages Act; the Payment of Gratuity Act; and recent
judgement of the Supreme Court on PF, Gratuity, the
Industrial Disputes Act, and the Factories Act.
• Introduces a new chapter on Prevention of Sexual
Harassment of Working Women.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Table of
Cases. Introduction. The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947.
The Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970.
The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965. The Payment of Gratuity
Act, 1972. The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders)
Act, 1946. The Apprentices Act, 1961. The Minimum
Wages Act, 1948. The Payment of Wages Act, 1936. The
Trade Unions Act, 1926. The Employees’ Compensation
Act, 1923. The Employees’ State Insurance Act, 1948. The
Employees’ Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Provisions
Act, 1952. The Factories Act, 1948. The Sexual Harassment
of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and
Redressal) Act, 2013. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 976 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 795.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-93-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-94-3 (e-Book)
SHARMA
Industrial Relations and Labour
Legislation
R.C. SHARMA, Founder Vice Chancellor, Amity University
Haryana (AUH), Professor Emeritus, Amity Business School
(ABS), AUH and Advisor to Additional President, RBEF.
This textbook, organised into two parts and comprising
20 chapters, maintains the fundamental concepts
of industrial relations and labour legislation in a
chronological order. The text apprises the reader with
the intricacies of the various concepts, theories, tools
and techniques, approaches, methods, legislations and
interventions and other concerned mechanisms that are
relevant to the maintenance of good industrial relations.
While the beginning and middle chapters are based on
anatomy of industrial relations, viz. various concepts
and approaches to IR, industrial disputes, collective
bargaining, trade unions, workers’ participation in
management, discipline, grievance handling procedure,
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
wage fixation, technological changes, industrial safety,
health and hygiene, workers’ education, quality circles,
structuring of jobs, fringe benefits, labour policy of the
Government of India, and so on, the remaining chapters
give an analysis of the issues pertaining to the ILO and
its impact on Indian labour legislation, the machinery
of labour administration in our country, labour reforms
being undertaken since the NDA Government came in
power, and labour legislation, including protective and
employment legislation, regulatory legislation and social
security legislation.
The book is intended for the postgraduate students of
industrial relations and labour legislation/human resource
management/personnel management and industrial
relations/business economics/social work/human resource
and organisation development/personnel management/
public administration and also for the students pursuing
postgraduate diploma courses in labour laws, labour
welfare and personnel management/labour law and
administrative law/personnel management and industrial
relations/human resource and management. It is also
of immense use to the students opting for executive
programme in ‘industrial, labour and general law’ (offered
by ICSI), and similar courses at undergraduate and
diploma level.
DISTINGUISHING FEATURES
• The book is rich in pedagogical features, including
learning objectives in the beginning of the chapter, and
summary, key terms, discussion questions, individual
and group activities at the end of each chapter.
• Numerous case studies are provided in the text.
• The text throws light on the recent developments
in relevant topics and the probable management
strategies for the same.
• Numerous defining terms, relevant questions and
annotations/bird’s-eye views in between the text help
in easy grasping.
• Authentic figures/tables/exhibits are provided to
enhance the conceptual understanding.
• Annexures provided in some of the chapters give
rigorous approach to the chapters.
• Footnotes widen the scope for further study.
• Author and Subject indices are provided.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Part A: Industrial
Relations—Industrial Relations—A Conceptual and
Historical Overview. Industrial Disputes. Collective
Bargaining. Trade Unions. Workers’ Participation in
Management. Discipline and Disciplinary Action. Grievance
Handling Procedure. Employee Compensation: Wages,
Incentives and Supplementary Compensation. Institutional
Framework/Systems for Wage Fixation. Fringe Benefits
and Industrial Relations. Technological Changes, Industrial
Accidents and Safety, Industrial Health and Hygiene and
Industrial Relations. Motivating and Adding Value to
the Workers. Labour Policy and Five-Year Plans. India
and the International Labour Organisation (ILO). Labour
Administration and Consultative Machinery. Part B: Labour
Legislation—Labour Legislation and Labour Reforms.
69
Protective and Employment Legislation and Industrial
Relations (I). Protective and Employment Legislation and
Industrial Relations (II). Regulatory Legislation. Social
Security Legislation. Author Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 940 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 895.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5221-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-720-5 (e-Book)
SIVARETHINAMOHAN
Industrial Relations and Labour Welfare:
Text and Cases (Rev. ed.)
R. SIVARETHINAMOHAN, Director, Department of
Management Studies, MIET Engineering College,
Trichirappalli and former Professor of Finance, Alliance
Business School, Bangalore.
Building good industrial relations is so crucial for any
industrial organization. Harmonious relationship between
employers and employees (who are the best assets of
any organization) contributes to greater productivity
and growth. This comprehensive and well-organized text
gives an in-depth analysis of the fundamental principles
and practice of industrial relations as well as the
implementation of labour welfare measures, the social
security systems and labour laws, such as the Trade Union
Act, 1926, the Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, and the
Mines Act, 1952. It focuses on the Indian context within
the larger global scenario.
Divided into four parts—Part I, Industrial Relations; Part
II, Industrial Disputes; Part III, Labour Welfare; and Part
IV, Safety and Occupational Health, the book provides
a detailed discussion on labour-management relations,
different aspects of trade unions, and their management
and legislative background. Dr. Sivarethinamohan gives
a masterly analysis of the major areas of industrial
relations, namely, industrial disputes and their resolution,
the philosophy of labour welfare as well as the statutory
and non-statutory measures for labour welfare, the
Government machinery for labour welfare, and collective
bargaining which contributes in a significant way to better
industrial relations. In the concluding part, the author
dwells on industrial accidents and safety for preventing
industrial disasters, mines safety and safety management,
industrial hygiene, workplace discipline, counselling and
the legal framework for industrial safety and health.
KEY FEATURES
• Each chapter starts with a case study written in a story
style for a better grasp of the chapter.
• Provides Case Studies to illustrate the theories discussed.
• Two Appendices at the end of the book provide
the complete text of Child Labour (Prohibition and
Regulation) Act, 1986, and Contract Labour (Regulation
and Abolition) Act, 1970.
• The book’s website, www.phindia/srm, gives more
real-time cases, experimental cases and cases relating
to the subject decided by the courts of India as well as
those of other countries.
 70 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021

Primarily intended as a text for undergraduate and post-

graduate students of management and commerce, the
book would also be useful to the students pursuing
courses in chartered accountancy, ICWA courses, and
diploma courses in industrial relations and labour laws. In
addition, practising managers should find this book very
useful.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Part One:
Industrial Relations—Introduction to Labour–Management
Relations. Trade Unions and Labour–Management
Relations. Registration and Recognition of Trade Union.
Legislative Background for Indian Trade Unions. Part Two:
Industrial Disputes—Industrial Conflict and Industrial
Action. Statutory Machineries Available for the Prevention
and Settlement of Industrial Disputes. Industrial Disputes
Resolution System under the Industrial Disputes Act,
1947. Part Three: Labour Welfare—Philosophy of Labour
Welfare. Statutory and Non-statutory Labour Welfare for
Standard Work Life. Labour Welfare Funds and Workers
Education Scheme for Harmony. Statutory Government
Machineries and Legislations for Labour Welfare in India.
Collective Bargaining. Part Four: Safety and Occupational
Health—Industrial Accident and Safety. Mines Safety
and Safety Management. Industrial Hygiene and Health.
Workplace Discipline and Counselling for Employees’
Resilience. Legal Framework and Statutory Provisions
Pertaining to Industrial Safety and Health. Social Security
for Future Generations. Appendices. Glossary. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 492 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3973-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-691-8 (e-Book)

Legal Language

Latest Print 2008 / 248 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 225.00

ISBN-978-81-203-3664-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-836-3 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Latest Print 2009 / 132 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 95.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3663-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-835-6 (e-Book)
Media Law
NEELAMALAR
Media Law and Ethics
M. NEELAMALAR, Assistant Professor in the Department
of Media Sciences, Anna University Chennai, Chennai.
Designed as a textbook for undergraduate and post-
graduate students of journalism, mass communication,
visual communication, electronic media and other related
media courses, this compact text provides a detailed
description of the rules, acts and ethics concerning print,
electronic, film and advertising media as prevalent in India.
The book begins with the history of media law in India
and discusses the specific provisions in the Constitution
71
of India which are essential for a journalist to know.
It then goes on to define the concepts of freedom of
media, defamation and Intellectual Property Rights.
Besides, the text discusses in detail the provisions of
the Indian Penal Code and the Criminal Procedure Code
relevant to the media. In addition to covering different
types of cyber crimes such as hacking, cracking and
e-mail bombing, it includes regulations related to film
media and advertising. Finally, the book throws light on
media law concerning women and children. The book also
includes several important cases to enable students to
relate various acts and regulations to real-life situations.
Besides students, journalists and other media professionals
who cover courts and law-related beats would also find
this book immensely valuable.
Contents: Preface. History of Media Law in India. Indian
Constitution (Specific Provisions Related to Media).
Freedom of Media. Defamation. Provisions of Indian Penal
Code and Criminal Procedure Code. Official Secrets Acts
1923. The Contempts of Courts Act 1971. Print Media:
Acts. Intellectual Property Rights. Advertising. Cyber
Crimes. Media Law and Woman. Media Law and Children.
Broadcasting. Film Media. Media Ethics. Appendix I–III.
Reference. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 236 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 295.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3974-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-88-2 (e-Book)
Public International Law and
Human Rights
SHARMA
Charter of the United Nations and The
Statute of International Court of Justice
BRIJ KISHORE SHARMA, Former Chairman, Copyright
Board. Earlier he was Chairman, National Book Trust
(NBT), India.
The Charter of the United Nations is a bold step towards
making the world a family of Nations, an attempt to
ensure that wars do not scourge the world, an endeavour
to make this world peaceful, cooperative and worth living.
The Charter is of seminal importance to understand the
U.N. and its agencies. The book gives in brief the historical
background of the U.N. Charter.
International Court of Justice is of prime importance to all
nations. The book gives how the Court is constituted and
functions. It introduces to the readers those distinguished
Indians who sat as judges in the Court.
The book in its present form is useful to students of
Political Science, International Organisation and of Law.
It will be great help to all candidates appearing for Civil
Service examinations conducted by U.P.S.C. and State
Public Service Commissions.
 72 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021

Contents: Preface. Charter of the United Nations—

Brief History. Preamble. I. Purposes and Principles.
II. Membership. III. Organs. IV. The General Assembly.
V. Security Council. VI. Pacific Settlement of Disputes.
VII. Action with Respect to Threats to the Peace,
Breaches of the Peace and Acts of Aggression.
VIII. Regional Arrangements. IX. International Economic
and Social Co-operation. X. The Economic and Social
Council. XI. Declaration Regarding Non-self-governing
Territories. XII. International Trusteeship System. XIII. Latest Print 2010 / 124 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 95.00
The Trusteeship Council. XIV. The International Court ISBN-978-81-203-4044-2 (Print Book)
of Justice. XV. The Secretariat. XVI. Miscellaneous ISBN-978-93-5443-841-7 (e-Book)
Provisions. XVII. Transitional Security Arrangements.
XVIII. Amendments. XIX. Ratification and Signature.
Statute of the International Court of Justice—Brief
History and Comments. I. Organization of the Court.
II. Competence of the Court. III. Procedure. IV. Advisory
Opinion. V. Amendment. Statement of the Four Sponsoring
Powers on Voting Procedure in the Security Council—Brief
History and Comments.
Latest Print 2016 / 100 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 95.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4042-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-713-7 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES 73

Author’s Universal Declaration of Human Rights and

Indian Law together with this books gives a complete
view of Human Rights and Indian Law. They form a duo,
a set of two.
Contents: Preface. Interrelation of Human Rights with
Fundamental and Other Rights in India. The Two Human
Rights Covenants—An Overview. Optional Protocols.
Reservations. The Optional Protocol to The International
Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights.
Preamble. PART I to PART V—Articles. International
Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR). Introduction.
Preamble. PART I to PART VI—Articles. Optional Protocol
to the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights.
Articles. The Second Optional Protocol to The International
Covenant on Civil and Political Rights.
Latest Print 2016 / 116 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 95.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4043-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-714-4 (e-Book)

Latest Print 2010 / 48 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 50.00

ISBN-978-81-203-4045-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-842-4 (e-Book)

SHARMA
Human Rights Covenants and Indian Law
BRIJ KISHORE SHARMA, Former Chairman, Copyright Board.
Earlier he was Chairman, National Book Trust (NBT), India.
The Universal Declaration of Human Rights was a sincere
effort by the U.N.O. to underscore the acceptance by
civilized nations that all human beings are endowed with
certain inalienable rights which deserve respect by all
nations of the world.
But this declaration was not a binding treaty. The world
body evolved a consensus to divide the human rights into
two classes. The rights against the State were collected
in the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights
and the positive rights in the International Covenant on
Economic, Social and Cultural Rights.
This book gives parallel provisions contained in the
Constitution and various Acts in force in India. It also
refers to decisions of the Supreme Court.
There is no other book which gives Indian Law alongwith
each article of these two covenants.
 74 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Latest Print 2010 / 108 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 95.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4046-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-850-9 (e-Book)
SHARMA
Universal Declaration of Human Rights
and Indian Law
BRIJ KISHORE SHARMA, Former Chairman, Copyright
Board. Earlier he was Chairman, National Book Trust
(NBT), India.
The Charter of the United Nations contained a statement
that the people of the United Nations reaffirm their
faith in certain inalienable Human Rights, in the dignity
of human beings and in essential equality of rights of
men and women. This statement led to the Universal
Declaration of Human Rights which was adopted by the
United Nations on 10th December 1948.
This Declaration guided, encouraged and in some cases
put pressure on the nations to recognise these rights
and embody them in their Constitution or Acts as rights
which may be claimed and enforced by citizens and other
human beings.
This book contains the text of the Declaration with
explanatory comments by the author.
India framed its Constitution soon after the Declaration
and gave effect to many of the rights contained in the
Declarations. Later some of them form part of a statute
and some have been knit in the Constitution by our
Courts.
The book contains references to relevant articles of the
Constitution and sections of various Acts. It also refers to
judgements of the Supreme Court of India.
It is the only book that gives parallel provisions of Indian
Law—parallel to each article of the Declaration.
The book will immensely benefit all students of Human
Rights as part of the courses in Political Science, Law and
other related fields.
It will be helpful to all those who are appearing for civil
services and other examinations conducted by various
Public Service Commissions.
Contents: Preface. Universal Declaration of Human
Rights—Preamble. Proclamation by General Assembly—
Articles—Freedom and equality in dignity and rights.
Prohibition of discrimination on grounds of religion, race,
caste, sex or place of birth etc. Right to life and property.
Prohibition of slavery. Prohibition of inhuman treatment.
Right to recognition as a person. Right to equality before
law and equal protection. Right to effective remedy.
Prohibition of arbitrary arrest and detention. Right to public
hearing. Right to public trial and protection in respect of
conviction for offences. Right to privacy. Right to freedom
of movement and residence. Right to seek asylum. Right
to nationality. Right to marry. Right to property. Right to
freedom of conscience and religion. Right to freedom
of opinion and expression. Right to freedom of peaceful
assembly and association. Right to governance and
universal franchise. Right to social security. Right to work
and equal pay. Right to rest and leisure. Right to standard
of living. Right to free education. Right to freely participate
in cultural life. Right to social and international order.
Duties and limitations on the exercise of rights. Prohibition
of activity against this Declaration.
Latest Print 2010 / 44 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 50.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4047-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-719-9 (e-Book)
Philosophy/Religion  
Ethics
MANNA & CHAKRABORTI
Values and Ethics in Business and
Profession
SAMITA MANNA, Professor in the Department of Sociology,
University of Kalyani, West Bengal.
SUPARNA CHAKRABORTI, is with the Department of
Humanities, Heritage Institute of Technology, Kolkata.
Primarily intended for undergraduate students of all
disciplines of engineering and students of computer
applications (MCA), this book is a comprehensive
exposition of the values and ethical principles that one
needs to adopt to become a responsible and accountable
professional.
The book is organized in nine chapters that addresses
the three broad areas of concern—values, ethics, and
sustainable development. It first discusses the prevalent
concept of values in human society, the various types of
values, and the crisis of values that seems to be engulfing
the contemporary society. The concept of ethics, the
various ethical values, and the ethical requirements for
a professional in the modern workplace are highlighted
in detail. The ramifications of industrialization, the
respective roles of science, technology and engineering,
as well as the need for preservation of the environment
and the use of eco-friendly technologies are explained.
Finally, the ethical issues involved in the management of
resources are discussed.
A number of case studies have been provided in the book
to enable a clear understanding of the topics presented.
Each chapter contains short answer as well as long answer
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
questions to test the students’ grasp of the underlying
concepts
Contents: Preface. Values in Human Society. Types of
Values. Value Crisis in Contemporary Society. Ethics
and Ethical Values. Professional Ethics. Industry and
Industrialization. Science, Technology and Engineering.
Environment and Eco-Friendly Technology. Ethics and
Management of Human Resources. Index.
Latest Print 2020 / 208 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm  / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4098-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90464-42-5 (e-Book)
Fundamentals of Religion
BRAHMA
Fundamentals of Religion, The
NALINI KANTA BRAHMA, was formerly Professor of
Philosophy, Presidency College, University of Calcutta and
Principal, Hooghly Mohsin College, Kolkata.
We find today in different parts of the world fierce feuds
and strifes. Religious fanaticism and fundamentalism
contribute in a substantial way to such strifes and
conflicts among people. We also find a large number of
people are steeped in superstitions, irrational beliefs, and
indulge in mere ritualism. Where true religion prevails,
such fanaticism and fundamentalism find no place. A
deep comparative study of world religions enables one to
drive away all superstitions and fanaticism. For religion, in
the true sense, is an abiding faith in the values of life, and
God is the embodiment of all values. Religious experience
accordingly implies the realisation of the Absolute.
What Prof. Nalini Kanta Brahma tries to do in this well-
researched book, written in a clear and straightforward
style, is to demonstrate the nobility and positive aspects
of each religion he has discussed. He classifies religion
into three categories: Impersonal—under which he brings
in Buddhism, Jainism and Confucianism; Personal—in this
category he describes Christianity, Islam and Vaishnavism;
and Supra-personal—under which he analyzes Vedantism,
Sufism, Taoism and the Johanine Gospel (the Gospel of
St. John, one of the twelve disciples of Jesus Christ). The
fundamentals of each religion are discussed with great
clarity and genuine appreciation.
Knowing very well there are a large number of opponents
to religion, the author vigorously defends the religious
view. He successfully meets the various objections of
Freud, Marx and Bertrand Russel, among others. For, he
says, agnosticism, atheism and scepticism are based on a
narrow and limited view of life.
Realisation of divinity by man is the universal
characteristic of all religions, and the author contends
that it should aptly be called the universal religion. This
realisation of the divinity is so marked in the supra-
personal religions and being a votary of such religions,
he stresses that they are on a different level. If a study
75
of this world religion is included in the course on
comparative religion for students, it would certainly
help towards dispelling erroneous notions about religion
and drive away many superstitions, fanaticism and
communalism, the last being a cancerous growth that
eats into the very fabric of a nation.
Besides students of philosophy who study comparative
religion as one of their subjects, all enlightened persons
who have an abiding faith in religion should find reading
this text an exhilarating and ennobling experience.
Contents: Preface. Introductory Note. The Fundamentals of
Religion. Objections Considered. Confucianism, Buddhism
and Jainism. Personal or Theistic Religions: Vaishnavism,
Christianity and Islam. The Supra-Personal Religions.
Religions and Religion: The One Universal Religion.
Latest Print 2009 / 312 pp. (Hard Cover) / 13.9 × 21.6 cm  / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3303-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-150-0 (e-Book)
General
MOSES
Last Frontiers of the Mind: Challenges of
the Digital Age
A. MOHANDAS MOSES, Retd. IAS.
In this original and brilliantly written book, Mohandas
Moses has embarked on a daring theme—the challenge
of artificial intelligence to the human mind and human
creativity. The mind, he says, is the greatest invention
in the universe; it has created the greatest works of art
and science: its dimensions and potential are yet to be
fathomed. But now the marvellous human mind stands
challenged by the machine.
To illustrate the central theme of his book, the author
has brought together the views of a galaxy of eminent
philosophers, cognitive scientists and neuroscientists
who have explored the phenomenon and evolution of
the human mind and consciousness, and the growth
of Artificial Intelligence. The author describes the
contribution made by the ‘Artificial Intelligentsia’,
the human-computer interaction, and emphasizes
the formidable power of the machine mind to usurp
the grandeur of the human mind. He has described
the manner in which memory, language, creativity,
mathematics, teaching-learning and chess-playing could
be altered by the digital culture. He says that ‘the
question we need to ask ourselves as thinking men
is—would we like to sense sensations, experience
experiences and think thoughts with understanding as
human beings should or are our personas to be blue
matched to the template of the machine mind?’
With erudition and wry humour the author takes the
reader on a fascinating journey of exploration. Written
with brilliance and clarity, there is freshness in his
perspective and a lucid presentation of ideas. This book
 76 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
will be of great interest as much to academics, experts on
artificial intelligence, as to the general reader who wishes
to know about the challenges to the human intellect and
creativity in the digital age.
Contents: Foreword. Prelude. Acknowledgements.
Part I: Setting the Scene—The Jeremiah Scenario “2084”:
Cargo Pants in the Brain. Methods of Study of Cognitive
Sciences. Brain Looks at Mind. The Language of the
Brain. Brain Research. Part II: Debate on the Brain-
Mind—Neuroscientists Look at Brain-Mind. Evolution of
Brain-Mind. Time Looks at Mind. Mind Looks at Mind.
Teilhard de Chardin’s Views on the Future of Mind. Part
III: Consciousness—Cognitive Sciences and Metaphysics.
Philosophy of the Mind. Darwin, Mendel and the 1%
Genetic Difference. The Origin of Consciousness in
the Breakdown of the Bicameral Mind: Julian Jaynes.
James Meets Joyce: Views from the Martello Tower.
Part IV: Artificial Intelligence and Cognitive Science—C.P.
Snow: The Two Cultures—A Second Look. Prophets and
Visionaries of the Digital Age. The Architecture of the
Machine Mind. The Artificial Intelligentsia. The Symbiotic
Age. The Drive of Technology. Computer Invasion. Part V:
Reclaiming the Human Mind—Lord Macaulay, Tim Lee-
Berners and Language Death. Computer and Surrogate
Memory. Computer and Education. Computer and
Reading-Writing. The Future of Books and Libraries in
the Digital Age. Computer and Feel for Numbers. Chess
and Computer. Aesthetics and Calligraphy in the Digital
Age. Part VI: Flavour of the DIGital Age—The World of
Computer Tycoons. Values of the Digital Age. Part VII: The
Individual and Creativity—Is Man the Measure of All Things
or Is He a Chimpanzee Putting On Airs. The Individual is
An Embarrassment for Science. The Genius Type. The
Wellsprings of Creativity. Challenge to Creativity. The
Importance of the Individual. Forecasts and Prescriptions
for the Future. Summary. Last Frontiers of the Mind.
Latest Print 2007 / 440  pp. (Hard Cover) / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2851-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-917-9 (e-Book)
Hinduism
BASU
Essence of Hinduism, The, 2nd ed.
ACHARYA DURGA DAS BASU, Sarasvati Vacaspati,
Vidyavaridhi, Prajnabharati, Nyayaratnakara,
Neetibhaskara, Nyayabharati, Nyaya Sarasvati, Manava
Ratna, was National Research Professor of India. A
renowned expert in Constitutional Law, he wrote many
books including his magnum opus, Commentaries on the
Constitutional Law of India.
If any religion in the world has been the least
understood, that is the Hindu religion, not because
it is inexplicable, not because it is irrational or
illogical—but because it is so big.
Thus begins Dr. Durga Das Basu’s scholarly exploration of
the essence of Hinduism. Abandoning historical and non-
essential considerations, the book looks upon Hinduism,
not as a faith, but a set of certain universal principles
of truth, evolved, tested and verified through the ages
and on which there is a consensus amongst the various
Upanishads. It is these propositions that have been
gathered as the essence of Hinduism in this work. To
understand this essence is to grasp simultaneously the
ultimate aim of a person’s life, which is to achieve the
maximum of purity and perfection. The diverse paths and
the mental and physical exercises that lead to salvation
are defined and explained.
Like in his other works, the author adopts a comparative
approach that makes this a book on comparative religion
with special reference to the essential doctrines of the
Hindu religion. This approach also underscores the thought
that the surest way to achieve communal harmony is to
bring to the followers of different religions, the essential
principles of each.
Extensively explained and well documented, this is a
fascinating glimpse into the ascent of Hinduism.
Contents: Preface. Abbreviations and References.
Hinduism, an Encyclopaedia of Universal Principles. God
Exists. God is All-Pervading. Formless, Yet Manifested in
Endless Forms. Immortality and Divinity of the Soul. No
Set Formula. Diverse Paths Leading to the Same Goal. The
Process of Deification. The Religion of Service. Appendix:
The Religion of Ramakrishna. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 144 pp. (Hard Cover) / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2140-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-168-5 (e-Book)
BRAHMA
Hindu Spirituality: An Appreciation
NALINI KANTA BRAHMA, formerly Professor of Philosophy,
Presidency College (now Presidency University), Kolkata,
and Principal, Hooghly Mohsin College, Kolkata.
Many people have confused notions of Hindu spirituality.
In this compact book, Dr. Nalini Kanta Brahma, an erudite
scholar and a well-known exponent of Hindu spirituality,
captures the essence of Hindu spirituality, as embedded
in the Vedas and the Upanishads.
Divided into three parts—Part I, Essence of Hindu
Spirituality; Part II, Vedantic Transcendence; and Part III,
Studies in Brihadaranyaka Upanishad, the book gives a
clear analysis of the teachings of the Hindu scriptures.
The book starts with an Introduction which shows
the greatness of the Brihadaranyaka Upanishad and
the validity of the Upanishads, which Shankaracharya
unmistakably showed to be part of the Vedas. The book
then goes on to give, in the next three sections, studies
on Karma Yoga (performing selfless action as a path of
realization of emancipation), Bhakti Yoga (philosophy
and practice of devotion), and Jñna Yoga (knowledge as
a means for realization of the Absolute, that is,
Brahmavidya): Part II is devoted to a detailed discussion on
Vedantic Transcendence and Vedantic monism as expounded
by Shankaracharya. Finally, Part III delves deep into the
teachings contained in the Brihadaranyaka Upanishad.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
This well-researched and clearly enunciated study would
be valuable for postgraduate and senior undergraduate
students of Philosophy and students of Comparative
Religion. It would also be very useful to anyone who has
a keen desire to study about Hindu spirituality.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Essence of Indian Spirituality.
Introduction. Section 1: Karma Yoga. Section 2:
Bhakti Yoga. Section 3: Jñna Yoga. Section 4: Conclusion.
Part II: Vedantic Transcendence. Part III: Studies in the
Brihadaranyaka Upanishad. Index.
Latest Print 2013 / 228 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4712-0 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-256-9 (e-Book)
BRAHMA
Philosophy of Hindu Sdhan
NALINI KANTA BRAHMA, formerly Professor of Philosophy,
Presidency College, University of Calcutta and Principal,
Hooghly Mohsin College, Kolkata.
None else could have made a better presentation on
the practical side of Hindu religion, with its underlining
concepts of Hindu faith, than Dr. Nalini Kanta Brahma.
His classic work, Philosophy of Hindu Sdhan, is now
being relaunched in the Eastern Economy Edition for the
benefit of students, researchers, and all those who have
an abiding interest in philosophy and religion.
The author stresses those characteristics of Hindu religion
that bring out its kinship with the higher religious
thoughts of the world so that the reader can discern a
common fabric of organic unity of higher religions.
The text brings to fore the correlation between theory and
practice of different Hindu philosophical systems. Sdhan,
the instrument to attain perfection as propounded in
Hindu philosophy—being a means to a better end—has
been discussed in the text in its various forms as followed
by different religious systems of the Hindus.
Part I of the book deals with the function and characteristics
of Hindu Sdhan in general. Part II elucidates the specific
forms of Hindu Sdhan that includes Karma, the path of
prescribed actions, Jnana, the path of higher intellect, and
Bhakti, the path of devotional worship. The book also
deals with Yoga, the form of Sdhan as propounded by
Patanjali. Finally, it emphasizes the importance and value
of discipline and devotion that are inherent in the good
practice of Hindu religion.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Part I: Sdhan in General—
The Relation of Philosophy to Religion. Sdhan: Its
Place in Philosophy and Religion. Distinctive Features
and the Different Stages of Hindu Sdhan. Different
Forms of Sdhan. A Historical Survey of the Different
Forms of Sdhan. Part II: Special Forms of Sdhan—
Karma-Mrga or the Path of Action. Karma-Yoga. The
Yoga System of Patajali. The Path of Knowledge. How
to Attain Knowledge. The Path of Devotion. The Nature
of Devotion. The Determinants of Devotion. The Tantra
Form of Sdhan. The Different Stages of Sdhan and
77
the Synthesis of Its Different Forms in the Bhagavad Gt.
Index.
Latest Print 2007 / 292 pp. (Hard Cover) / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3306-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-155-5 (e-Book)
Logic
CHAKRABORTI
Logic: Informal, Symbolic, and Inductive,
2nd ed.
CHHANDA CHAKRABORTI, Department of Humanities and
Social Sciences, Indian Institute of Technology Kharagpur.
The Second Edition of this text continues to provide a
comprehensive introduction to Logic, a subject that is
increasingly becoming popular among students.
What distinguishes the text is its graded step-by-step
approach to the subject, with informal logic forming
the basis and Symbolic logic and Inductive logic forming
the more advanced steps. The book also uses a hands-
on approach to teaching of logic to induce self-learning,
as shown in sections such as on how to create a truth
table or a truth tree, on providing strategic tips for formal
derivations, and on how to approach symbolization in
predicate logic.
The Appendices, including those on Indian logic and the
nature of inference in Indian logic, are designed to create
greater awareness about the extent and depth of the
field among students.
WHAT’S NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A new Appendix on Basic Set Theory. It covers all the
fundamental concepts, principles and operations in
Basic Set Theory.
• Some sections in Chapter 3 on Fallacies have been
modified.
• Corrections/Modifications done wherever required.
KEY FEATURES
• In-depth and extensive coverage of Predicate logic.
• Covers both Informal and Formal logic.
• Each section has many worked-out examples and
exercises.
• Worked-out examples given in a step-by-step manner
for easy comprehension.
• Keywords at the end of each chapter.
Intended primarily as a text for students of Philosophy,
the book would also be useful to students of Mathe-
matics, Computer Science and Engineering where Logic is
offered as part of their course.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Acknow-
ledgements. Introduction. Preliminaries. Part A:   Informal
Logic—Informal Logic: Arguments. Informal Logic:
Fallacies. Part B:   Symbolic Logic—Symbolic Logic: Intro-
 78 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
duction. Propositional Logic: Syntax and Symbolization.
Propositional Logic: Semantics and Truth Tables.
Propositional Logic: Truth Trees. Derivations. Aristotelian
Syllogistic Logic. First Order Predicate Logic: Syntax and
Symbolization. First Order Predicate Logic: Semantics.
Predicate Logic: Derivation. Part C:   Induction—Inductive
Reasoning. Argument by Analogy. Argument by Causal
Reasoning. Probability and Induction. Science, Hypothesis,
and Induction. Appendices—A. Logical Paradoxes.
B. Philosophical Controversy with ‘if-then’ and ‘É’.
C. Alternative Logics in Western System. D. Metatheory.
E. Indian Logic. F. Inference in the Nyaya System.
G. Dynamic Logic and Temporal Logic. H. Basic Set Theory.
Solutions to Selected Exercises. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 584 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3248-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-123-4 (e-Book)
Latest Print 2009 / 160 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 125.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3650-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-859-2 (e-Book)
Western Philosophy
BRAHMA
Causality and Science
NALINI KANTA BRAHMA, formerly Professor of Philosophy,
Presidency College, University of Calcutta and Principal,
Hooghly Mohsin College, Kolkata.
Causality and Science may at first sound as abstract and,
perhaps, as esoteric subjects. For, while one seems to
touch on the transcendental and the metaphysical realm,
the other seems to be rooted on terra firma. However,
while reading through this compact and concise book,
written with great clarity and precision, one comes to
realize that there is no clash between these two, and
indeed reconciliation between them is possible.
The author, with his remarkable erudition and scholarship,
contends that the whole conception of science is so much
bound up with the causal concept that it seems hardly
possible that science could ever be able to do without
it. He argues that space, time and causality are the three
categories on which science is built.
The book also shows that of the four causes—material,
formal, efficient, and final, how the material and efficient
causes are given prominence. In this process, the book
demonstrates the inadequacy of the empirical view of
causation, and shows that material cause combines with
the efficient and final causes, or how these coalesce
into one and only the adequate cause remains. There
is no antagonism between the noumenon and the
phenomenon or the Brahma and the My.
Even though relativity may reign supreme for many,
the author says that there is no opposition between
perfect spontaneity and freedom and law and system
on the one hand, and causality and determinism on
the other. Ultimately, a reconciliation between causality
and freedom can be effected, and the Reality that there
is neither ‘free’ nor ‘unfree’, but transcends both the
qualities can emerge as the Absolute which can solve for
ever all oppositions.
The book would be of interest to students of philosophy
and any reader who has a philosophical and scientific
bend of mind to delve deeper into the relation between
causality and science.
Contents: Preface. Introduction. The Principle of Causality.
The Scientific Conception of the Cause. The Effect as Fully
Contained in the Cause or the Cause as Conscious Power
or Energy. The Cause as the Absolute. Conclusion.
Latest Print 2007 / 84 pp. (Hard Cover) / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 150.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3260-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-126-5 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Political Science   PALEKAR
Comparative Politics
HOOD
Political Development and Democratic
Theory: Rethinking Comparative Politics
STEVEN J. HOOD, Professor of Politics, Ursinus College,
Collegeville, Pennsylvania.
More and more nations have embraced democracy
over the last few years. Consequently, studies and
scholarship on democracy have been increasing.
Yet comparative studies on democracy and political
development do not seem to come to grips with the
problems of democracy. While the comparativists
look at the challenges of democratic transition,
consolidation and problems of mature democracies
as separate problems, this book contends that the
problems facing democratic regimes remain the same,
differing only by degree. The author attributes the success
of democracy to striking the right balance between rights
and virtues. By focusing only on the procedural aspects of
democracy, we would at best invent a symptomatic cure
for the ailments of democratic governments. A wholesome
solution would be provided only by a redefinition of
the basic terms and concepts of democracy and a
reconsideration of our assumptions regarding democracy.
In this book, the spirit of democracy and the views of
Alexis de Tocqueville and the founders of the American
system of democracy are examined as they are relevant to
the contemporary world. In analyzing democratic regimes,
the book goes beyond merely a technical or mechanical
perspective. The influence of various components such
as foreign policies, international rules, economic and
religious factors in the process of democratization has
been discussed for a complete study. By combining the
best of comparative theory and liberal democratic theory,
the book rediscovers the ideal of democracy.
The extensive list of notes (chapter wise) and the
comprehensive Bibliography given at the end of the book
would considerably help the readers in delving deeper into
the subject. Postgraduate students of Political Science as
well as political analysts would find this book extremely
useful and interesting.
Contents: Preface. The Spirit of Democracy. The Transition
from Authoritarianism to Democracy. Consolidating Demo-
cracy. Maintaining Democracy. Conclusion: Rethinking
Comparative Politics. Notes. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2009 / 188 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2618-7 (Print Book)
79
Comparative Politics and Government
S.A. PALEKAR, Professor, Department of Political Science,
Gulbarga University, Karnataka.
Considerable changes are taking place today in the
structure and working of governments all over the
world. This, in turn, has necessitated a change in the
approach to the study of government and politics. This
well-organized and systematic study takes into account
these developments and shift in approach in the field of
comparative government and politics.
As the empirical study of political processes, structures
and functions forms a major part of comparative
political studies, the author examines them in detail.
He also analyzes the many variables that are hetero-
geneous in nature. The book analyzes in tandem
comparative government—which involves the study
of different political systems with their institutions
and functions—and comparative politics, which covers
comparative governments and non-state politics. The
latter also studies rule making, rule implementing and
rule adjudicating.
Since different political systems are governed by the
constitutions of the nations concerned, the book deals
in detail with the constitutions of these countries. While
the text gives a comprehensive coverage of constitutions
of democracies such as UK, USA, France, Switzerland and
Japan, it also deals with the constitutions of authoritarian
States like Russia and China.
This text should be of great value to undergraduate and
postgraduate students of political science as well as
aspirants of civil services.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Introduction—Nature and Scope
of Comparative Politics. Part II: Constitution of The UK—
Introduction. The Executive—The King and the Prime
Minister. Civil Service in England. The British Parliament.
The Judiciary. Party System in England. Local Government
in England. Part III: Constitution of the USA—Introduction.
American Federalism. The Executive—American Presidency.
The Legislature—The American Congress. The Judiciary—
The Supreme Court. Political Parties. Pressure Groups
in American Political System. Bureaucracy in USA. Part
IV: Constitution of Switzerland—Introduction. Swiss
Federalism. The Executive—The Federal Council. The
Legislature—The Federal Assembly. Federal Judiciary. Rights
of Citizens. Direct Democracy. Party System. Government
of Cantons. Part V: Constitution of Russia—Introduction.
Salient Features of the Russian Constitution. Fundamental
Rights and Duties. Federal System. The President. The
Parliament. The Judicial System. Interest Groups. Party
System. Part VI: Constitution of China—Introduction.
Salient Features of the Constitution of China. Fundamental
Rights and Duties. The Legislature—The National People’s
Congress. The Executive—The President, the State Council,
and the Premier in China. The Judiciary. Chinese Communist
Party. Part VII: Constitution of Japan—Introduction.
 80 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Features of the Constitution of Japan. Fundamental Rights
and Duties. The Executive. The Legislature—The Diet. The
Judiciary. Local Self-Government. Political Parties. Part VIII:
Constitution of France—Introduction. Salient Features of
the French Constitution. The Executive—The President.
The Legislature—Parliament. The Judiciary—Judicial
System of France. The Local Government. Political Parties.
Latest Print 2021 / 332 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3335-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-171-5 (e-Book)
RAY
Modern Comparative Politics:
Approaches, Methods and Issues
SAMIRENDRA N. RAY, Professor of Political Science,
University of North Bengal, Darjeeling (West Bengal).
Designed primarily as an introductory textbook for
graduate and senior undergraduate students offering
comparative politics as a compulsory course, this finely
integrated text is by far the most comprehensive,
yet concise and critical analysis of the contending
approaches, methods, and models and the theory-building
efforts made in the second half of this century. The book
provides a lucid and up-to-date presentation of the
ramifications of the governmental process and political
dynamics, issues and problems relating to the structure,
function, process and operation of governmental and
political organizations in a genuinely comparative
perspective.
KEY FEATURES
• Emphasizes the emerging concerns of modern compara-
tive politics in dealing with the non-western political
systems and the politics of the developing areas.
• Gives a genuinely comparative analysis of the
government and politics in various political systems
prevailing across the world.
• Bases the analysis on authentic sources, with extensive
citations.
• Provides a detailed Bibliography.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Understanding
Comparative Government and Politics. Government in
Modern Society. Constitutions and Constitutionalism.
Distribution of Governmental Functions and Control
of Political Power. Political Dynamics, Systems, Parties,
Interest Groups and the Electoral Process. Organization of
Government: Institutions and Procedures. Non-Western
Government and Politics and the Politics of the Developing
Areas. Conclusion. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 316 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 225.00
ISBN-978-81-203-1488-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-882-0 (e-Book)
Constitution of India
SHARMA
Introduction to the Constitution of India,
10th ed.
BRIJ KISHORE SHARMA, Former Chairman, Copyright
Board. Earlier he was Chairman, National Book Trust
(NBT), India.
Written in a simple and an easy-to-understand language,
this comprehensive text gives a broad perspective of
the framework of the Indian Constitution and its salient
features. It gives all provisions and principles of Indian
Constitution, and incorporates all important and leading
cases. All landmark judgements of the past year have been
duly incorporated in the present edition. The students of
LL.B. and LL.M. and those who appear for judicial services
or Civil Services examination find it extremely helpful.
This book is a key to their success. It is useful for both
types of papers—objective as well as narrative.
NEW TO THE TENTH EDITION
1. A whole new chapter dealing with every aspect of
Jammu and Kashmir.
2. Sabarimala Temple case.
3. PIL and national security (Rafale Deal)—How far the
courts would go?
4. Passive euthanasia is permissible.
5. Contractual and illegal appointments.
6. Validity of Aadhaar.
7. Tests to determine violation of Right to Privacy.
8. Fake Christians and minority institutions.
9. Constitution 103rd and 104th Amendment Acts.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Table of
Cases. Events Before the Framing of the Constitution.
Salient Features of the Constitution. The Federal System.
The Preamble. Territory of the Union and Formation
of States. Citizenship. Fundamental Rights. Directive
Principles of State Policy. Fundamental Duties. The Union
Executive. The Union Legislature. The State Executive.
State Legislatures. The Judiciary. The Supreme Court
of India. The High Courts. Union Territories. Local
Government. The Cooperative Societies. Relations between
the Union and the States. Property, Contract and Suits—
Government Liability. Right to Property. Freedom of Trade,
Commerce and Intercourse. Services under the Union
and the States. Public Service Commissions. Elections.
Official Language. Emergency Provisions. Amendment of
the Constitution. Article 370. Defections—Tenth Schedule.
Special Provisions Relating to Certain Classes’. Delegated
Legislation. Natural Justice. Public Interest Litigation.
Comptroller and Auditor General of India. Index.
Latest Print 2020 / 504 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-93-90544-05-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90544-13-4 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
'kekZ
Hkkjr dk lafo/ku&,d ifjp;] pkSngoka laLdj.k
cztfd'kksj 'kekZ] izfrfyI;f/dkj (dkihjkbV) cksMZ ds vè;{k
FksA iwoZ esa Hkkjr ljdkj ds fof/ ea=kky; esa vij lfpo FksA
bl iqLrd dh yksdfiz;rk ;Fkkor f'k[kj ij gSA xr
o"kZ ds lHkh egÙoiw.kZ fu.kZ;ksa dk bl laLdj.k esa ;Fkks-
fpr lekos'k dj fy;k x;k gSA fof/k ds fo|kfFkZ;ksa vkSj
U;kf;d rFkk flfoy lsok dh ijh{kkvksa esa Hkkx ysus okys
vH;FkhZ bls vrho mi;ksxh ekurs gSaA mudh lQyrk dk
;g mi;qDr lk/ku gSA oLrqijd vkSj o.kZukRed] nksuksa
izdkj dh ijh{kkvksa ds fy, ;g iqLrd mi;ksxh gSA
pkSngosa laLdj.k dh fo'ks"krk
1- tEew&d'ehj ds izR;sd igyw ij izdk'k Mkyrs gq,
,d laiw.kZ u;k v/;k;A
2- lcjheky eafnj dk oknA
3 yksdfgrokn vkSj jk"Vªh; lqj{kk ¼jkQsy lkSnk½—
U;k;ky; fdl lhek rd tkap dj ldrs gSa\
4- fuf"Ø; lgte`R;q vuqKs; gSA
5- lafonktkr vkSj voS/k fu;qfD;kaA
6- vk/kkj dh fof/kekU;rkA
7- ,dkarrk ds vf/kdkj ds mYya/ku dk vo/kkj.k
djus ds fy, ijh{k.kA
8- udyh bZlkbZ vkSj vYila[;d laLFkk,aA
9- lafo/kku 103oka vkSj 104oka la'kks/ku vf/kfu;eA
fo"k; lwph% rsjgosa laLdj.k dh HkwfedkA izFke laLdj.k
dh HkwfedkA fu.kZ; lwphA lafo/ku dh jpuk ds iwoZ
dh ?kVuk,aA lafo/ku ds izeq[k y{k.kA ifjla?k iz.kkyhA
mísf'kdkA la?k dk jkT;{ks=k vkSj jkT;ksa dk fuekZ.kA
ukxfjdrkA ewy vf/dkjA jkT; dh uhfr ds funs'kd rÙoA
ewy dÙkZO;A la?k dh dk;ZikfydkA la?k dk fo/ku&eaMyA
jkT; dh dk;ZikfydkA jkT; fo/ku&eaMyA U;k;ikfydkA
Hkkjr dk mPpre U;k;ky;A mPp U;k;ky;A la?k
jkT;{ks=kA LFkkuh; 'kkluA lgdkjh lkslkbVhA la?k vkSj
jkT;ksa ds chp laca/A laifÙk] lafonk,a vkSj okn&ljdkj
dk nkf;RoA laifÙk dk vf/dkjA O;kikj] okf.kT; vkSj
lekxe dh Lora=krkA la?k vkSj jkT;ksa ds v/hu lsok,aA
yksd lsok vk;ksxA fuokZpuA jktHkk"kkA vkikr mica/A
lafo/ku dk la'kks/uA vuqPNsn 370A ny ifjorZu&nloha
vuqlwphA dqN oxks± ds laca/ esa fo'ks"k mica/A izR;k;ksftr fo/kuA
uSlfxZd U;k;A yksdfgroknA Hkkjr dk fu;a=kd&egkys[kk
ijh{kdA 'kCn lwphA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2020 / 536 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-93-90544-15-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90544-16-5 (e-Book)
81
Government and Politics
GHOSH
Indian Government and Politics, 3rd ed.
PEU GHOSH, Associate Professor in the Department
of Political Science, Lady Brabourne College, Kolkata,
West Bengal.
After years of subjugation by the British colonial rulers,
India attained a status of Independent State on 15 August
1947, a day to be reckoned with pride by all Indians.
Struggling for her Independence, facing the trauma of
partition, and finally establishing a sovereign democratic
status for itself, the journey has undoubtedly been a
roller coaster ride for India.
This book comprehensively outlines the evolution of the
Indian Politics, discussing all the constraints, challenges
and shortcomings faced by Indian Polity till date. The
book shows how State-Society interface, with special
emphasis on civil society activities, can play an integral
role in shaping the political fate of the country.
In addition, this book not only presents the institutional
aspects of Indian politics by underlying in details, the
provisions of the Constitution, but also brings out the
real working of the institutional framework in an ever-
changing social and political environment.
Organized into 23 chapters, the book discusses, in detail,
the Constitutional development, The Preamble, The
Fundamental Rights, The Directive Principles of State
Policy, The Executive, The Legislature and The Judiciary
at national and state levels followed by their critical
appraisals as well as the Centre-State relation with its
continuing tensions. To give a clear and panoramic view
of Indian Political Scenario the book also focuses on
local-self governments, national and regional parties in
India, challenges to Indian political system and new social
movements.
NEW TO THE THIRD EDITION
• Thorough updation with contemporary events in Indian
political scenario.
• Coverage of General elections to constitute the 17th
Lok Sabha.
• Political Developments of recent times.
Intended as a textbook for the undergraduate and
postgraduate students of Political Science and Law, this
book is also useful for the aspirants for Civil Service and
competitive examinations like NET and SLET.
KEY FEATURES
• Gives a wide coverage of conventional topics pertaining
to the Constitution of India, relating them to the
working of the Indian polity in the real world.
• Tackles issues related to new social movements in India
encompassing environmental movements, women's
movements, human rights movements and anti-
corruption movement.
 82 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
• Highlights the continuing challenges to the Indian
Political System from different social and cultural
factors, like religion, language, caste, tribe, regionalism
and also corruption and criminalization of politics.
• Deals with current developments in administrative policies.
Contents: Preface. History of Constitutional Development
in India. Framing of the Constitution of India—Demand,
Formation and Working of the Constituent Assembly.
The Preamble. Fundamental Rights—Part III of the Indian
Constitution. Directive Principles of the State Policy—
Part IV of the Indian Constitution. The Indian Federation.
The Union Executive—The President of India. The Union
Council of Ministers and the Prime Minister of India.
The Union Parliament. The Governor. Chief Minister and
the State Council of Ministers. The State Legislature.
The Judiciary in India. Amendment of the Constitution.
Local Government in India. Party System in India—Major
National Parties. Regional Parties in India. Electoral
Process in India. Role of Pressure Groups in Indian Politics.
Challenges to the Indian Political System. New Social
Movements in India. Commissions and Functionaries
in India. Development in Contemporary Administrative
Structures and New Programmes/Policies. Index..
Latest Print 2021 / 508 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-85-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-86-9 (e-book)
SINGH & SAXENA
Indian Politics: Constitutional
Foundations and Institutional
Functioning, 3rd ed.
M.P. SINGH was formerly, Professor in the Department
of Political Science, University of Delhi.
REKHA SAXENA, Professor, Department of Political Science,
University of Delhi.
Designed as a standard text for undergraduate and
postgraduate students of Political Science and also for
the aspirants of Civil Services Examinations, the third
edition of the book provides a thoroughly updated
account of Indian politics, taking into consideration the
Indian constitutional foundations and functioning of the
various democratic institutions. It gives a holistic view
of the political system of India that includes the State,
Government (both central and state governments), the
market, and the civil society, including infrastructures like
the party systems in the nation and the states that are
partly in the civil society and partly in the state.
NEW TO THE THIRD EDITION
• All new developments in the working of the institutions
of the various organs of the governments at the Union,
State, and local levels in their internal as well as
interactional settings.
• Perspective of governance that demands attention to
relationships among the governments, the civil society,
and the market which have acquired a new salience
since the parameter-altering economic reforms in
1991 but have suffered some reverses since 2008, a
phenomenon known as slowbalization or deglobalization
• New phase in Indian politics with Narendra Modi
government since 2014.
Contents: Preface. Indian Model of Constitutionalism: From
Quasi-Federal to Federal. The Making of the Constitution
and Its Operationalization. A Multicultural-Secularist and
Democratic-Developmental State in a Globalizing-cum-
Deglobalizing/’Slowbalising’ World. Parliament: Gulliver
in the Land of Lilliputs?. Union Executive: A Cabinet or
a Cabal?. Judiciary: The Battle of the Books and Beyond.
Towards Greater Federalization?. State Governments and
Regional Politics. Local Self-Government—The Third Tier
of Multi-Level Governance —An Unexplored Internal
Frontier?. Bureaucracy: The Permanent Government?.
Elections: An Area of Relative Success?. Whither Indian
Party System?. Civil Society: Going through the Process of
‘Civilianization’?. EPILOGUE: India’s Tryst with Democracy,
Development and Federal-National State. Name Index.
Subject Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 400 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-81-946851-2-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-81-946851-3-5 (e-book)
International Relations
GHOSH
International Relations, 5th ed.
PEU GHOSH, Associate Professor in the Department of
Political Science, Lady Brabourne College, Kolkata, West
Bengal.
What Reviewers have to say
This book is amongst the best on the subject, and by
far the best by any Indian Scholar as a textbook for the
postgraduate students, and also for those preparing for
any competitive examinations.
— Prof. Ashwini Kanta Ray
Former Professor, International Relation
and Comparative Politics, Jawaharlal Nehru University
Peu Ghosh has brought together an impressive range of
themes to provide a road map to students who want to
initiate an in-depth study of the subject. It has captured
the scale and complexity of different concepts, themes
and issues of International Relations covered in University
courses today.
— Dr. Rumki Basu, Professor, Department of Political
Science, Jamia Millia Islamia
HIGHLIGHTS OF FIFTH EDITION
• Newer theoretical perspectives—Post-structuralism and
Constructivism
• A new chapter on Migration and Refugees
• Gender and Development in IR and Sustainable
Development Goals (SDGs)
• Current events in International Relations: India and the
World (including topics like Uri and Pulwama terror
attacks, BREXIT, North Korean peace process and so on).
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
The Fifth Edition of this comprehensive and well-organized
book continues to delve into the multidimensional aspects
of international relations, taking into account the present
undergraduate and postgraduate curricula ofdifferent
universities.
The book gives a panoramic view of international relations
and is not only a useful guide for students and teachers of
International Relations, Political Science, History but also
for those aspiring for various competitive examinations
such as NET, SLET, and Civil Services examinations.
Contents: Preface. The Discipline of International
Relations: Meaning, Evolution, Nature and Scope. Theories
and Approaches to the Study of International Relations.
International System and the Role of Actors and Non-State
Actors. Basic Concepts in International Relations. Foreign
Policy: Concepts and Techniques. Cold War and Evolution
of Post-Cold War World. The Third World. Non-Aligned
Movement. Neo-Colonialism. Regional Arrangements and
their Role in International Relations. The United Nations
and International Relations. Disarmament and Arms
Control. Globalization. Development and International
Relations. Human Rights. Terrorism. International Law,
International Morality and World Public Opinion. Indian
Foreign Policy. Environment and International Relations.
Migration and Refugees. Prominent Economic Institutions/
Arrangements. Current Concerns in International Relations;
India and the World. Appendices. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 548 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-58-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-59-3 (e-book)
Political Processes
PRAMANICK & GANGULY (Eds.)
Globalization in India: New Frontier’s
Emerging Challenges
The Editors
SWAPAN KUMAR PRAMANICK, Vice Chancellor of
Vidyasagar University in Midnapore, West Bengal, India.
RAMANUJ GANGULY, Associate Professor and founder
head of the Department of Sociology in West Bengal State
University, Barasat, West Bengal (India).
Since the last decade of twentieth century, India has
witnessed a structural shift in GDP growth, propelled
largely by new investments and the growth of the
value enhancing services sector. Long established three-
headed social problem—poverty-Illiteracy-unemployment
—remains the biggest stumbling block for a post-colonial
country like India. New sets of problems have taken shape
in the last quarter of twentieth century when policy
makers and market participants have prioritized economic
activities for short-term gains.
This edited volume brings to the fore oft-neglected
interdisciplinary discussions and analysis in fifteen articles
to examine the process of globalization in India taking
insights from economics, political science and international
83
relations, sociology, cultural anthropology, social ecology
and cultural studies. It discusses the impact of the process
of globalization on social institutions like marriage, family,
economy, politics, education and religion.
The book is intended for postgraduate students and
research scholars. It provides readers with a clear
perspective about creating economics, environmental
and social capital that can produce multiplier effect for
making national progress more inclusive and sustainable.
Contents: Preface. Introduction. Economic Globalization:
Understanding the Process Beyond the Polemics. Globa-
lization and Sustainable Development: Contextualizing
a Sociological Discourse. Globalization, Crony Capitalism
and the Indian Context of SEZ. Impact of Globalization
on the Food Consumption of Urban India. The Impact
of Economic Liberalization on Employment and Wages in
India. Global Forces of Change and Innovation: Issues of
Organizational Stress. How to Govern Corporate Houses?
Significance of Industrial Democracy and Social Unionism
in the Context of Globalization. Globalisation and Neo-
liberal Economic Reforms in India: A Critical Review. The
Indo-US Nuclear Deal in an Era of Globalization. Falling in
Love in Mumbai: Professional Women and Companionate
Marriage. Changing Urban Landscape: A Socio-Semiotic
Profile of a Shopping Mall in Kolkata. Whose Water,
for Whom and at What Costs? The Water Privatization
Process, Global Politics and Ecological Struggles in India.
Beyond Globalization: A Cultural Study [A New Cmie
Matrix]. Hindi Popular Cinema: Negotiating the Global
and the Nation. Globalization and Terrorism. Index.
Latest Print 2010 / 448 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 425.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4038-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-605-5 (e-Book)
Political Sociology
ROY
Society and Politics in India:
Understanding Political Sociology
SHEFALI ROY is an Associate Professor and Head,
Department of Political Science, Patna Women’s College,
Patna University, Patna.
Politics cannot grow in isolation; at the same time society
learns from the changing ethos of polity. A relatively
young subject, Political Sociology tries to seek research
excellence, in its process of evolution.
This book on Political Sociology deals with different
variables of society which influence various facets
of political dynamics. It also analyzes attitude and
behavioural pattern of the public who act as political
actors. As a branch of political science, the book draws
attention to the very nature of this inter-disciplinary
study. All the chapters are conceptualized to strengthen
the bond between the polity and the society and vice-
versa. This book is an attempt to widen the frontier of
political science with an empirical approach.
 84 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Intended for the undergraduate and postgraduate students
of Political Science and Sociology, the book will enrich
the students indulged in research works and those who
are preparing for the Civil Services examinations as well.
Contents: List of Figures. List of Tables. Preface.
Acknowledgements. Political Sociology: Origin, Nature
and Scope. Approaches and Methods to the Study of
Political Sociology. Political Socialization. Political Culture.
Political Participation. Political Development. Political
Modernization. Political Recruitment. Elites and Society.
Bureaucracy Society and Polity. Political Communication.
Power Authority Legitimacy. Political Change Conflict and
Revolution. Political Efficacy Mobility and Leadership. New
Social Movements. Politics and Society. Bibliography. Key
Terms and Purport. Propounders. Index.
Latest Print 2018 / 260 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4992-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-39-4 (e-Book)
Political Theory
RAMASWAMY
Political Theory: Ideas and Concepts,
2nd ed.
SUSHILA RAMASWAMY is an Associate Professor,
Department of Political Science, Jesus and Mary College,
Delhi University.
Political theory and political philosophy are generally used
inter-changeably, though sometimes a distinction is made
between the two. This book on political theory deals with
the study of political instructions alongwith the theories
of State, Law, Liberty and Equality.
In its second edition, the book continues to analyse
the key concepts like Authority, Power, Sovereignty,
Political obligation, Civil disobedience, Citizenship, Rights,
Democracy and Justice. The non-western ideas, including
Indian and Chinese, are incorporated to underline cultural
plurality and shared values in an enterprise that tries to
set universal standards.
The book is designed for the undergraduate and
postgraduate students of Political Science. The book will
be equally beneficial for the students appearing for the
civil services examinations.
Contents: Preface. Nature of Political Theory. Contem-
porary Political Theory. Politics, Power and Authority. State:
Different Perspectives. State: Origins and Development.
Sovereignty. Political Obligation. Civil Disobedience.
Citizenship. Rights. Liberty. Justice. Equality. Property.
Democracy. Development. Welfare State. Theories of
Social Change. Recent Developments. References. General
Readings. Name Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 580 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5048-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-47-9 (e-Book)
VINOD & DESHPANDE
Contemporary Political Theory
M.J. VINOD, Professor in the Department of Political
Science at Bangalore University, Bangalore.
MEENA DESHPANDE, Professor of Thought and Theory
in the Department of Political Science at Bangalore
University, Bangalore.
Intended as a text for the postgraduate students of
political science, this well-researched book attempts to
track the evolution of political ideas in the recent past
and their background. It brings out the contemporary
epistemological and methodological debates within
the discipline and social sciences as a whole, and
incorporates the latest developments in the field.
Divided into forty chapters under eleven parts, the book
deals with the core concepts and debates in political
theory, and focuses on the state-society interactions. It
tries to explain how the states, societies and cultures
have responded to the emerging challenges thrown up
by the social, economic and political factors, and the
direction of the response. It also dwells on the impact
of globalisation on current trends. Finally, the book
analyses the ideas of modern Indian thinkers such as
V.D. Savarkar, Jawaharlal Nehru, Ram Manohar Lohia, B.R.
Ambedkar and Jayaprakash Narayan.
Besides the postgraduate students of political science,
the book would also be useful to the aspirants of civil
services examinations and the initiated readers.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Acknowledgements. Part I:
Approaching Political Theory—Positivism. Structuralism.
Postmodernism. Deconstructionism. Part II: State and
Rise in Human Dignity—Debates on Justice. Debates on
Equality. Debates on Liberty. Debates on Rights. Part III:
Issues of Legitimacy—Political Power. Political Authority.
Political Legitimacy. Political Obligation. Part IV: Porous
Borders and Retreating State—Sovereignty in the Age
of Globalisation. Citizenship. Human Rights in the Age
of Globalisation. Part V: Individual–Community–State:
Evolving Relations—Political Participation. Political
Toleration. Libertarianism. Communitarianism. Part VI:
State–Society Interface—Good Governance. Civil Society.
Social Capital. Part VII: State Economy Dynamics and
Beyond—Neo-liberalism. Market Socialism. Dependency
Theories. Post-Marxism. Part VIII: Assertion of Identity—
Multiculturalism. Identity Politics. Feminism and Political
Theory. Part IX: People’s Demand—State Response.
Debates on Democratic Political Community. New Social
Movements. Green Political Theory. Part X: Political
Alienation to Revolution—Political Alienation. Resistance.
Revolution. Part XI: Indian Political Thought and Theory—
Vinayak Damodar Savarkar. Jawaharlal Nehru. Ram
Manohar Lohia. Bhimrao Ramji Ambedkar. Jayaprakash
Narayan. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 600 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 525.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4713-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-732-8 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Political Thought
MUKHERJEE & RAMASWAMY
History of Political Thought, A:
Plato to Marx, 2nd ed.
SUBRATA MUKHERJEE has been a Professor and Head,
Department of Political Science, University of Delhi.
SUSHILA RAMASWAMY, Associate Professor, Department
of Political Science, Jesus and Mary College, University of
Delhi.
This lucidly written text, in its second edition, continues
to provide a comprehensive study of the classical political
theory tradition from Plato to Marx. The book elucidates
the fascinating evolution of the history of political ideas,
through the works of thirteen key political thinkers—which
includes Plato, Aristotle, Machiavelli, Hegel and Marx.
The text highlights the decline and revival of classical
political theory and portrays the clash of universalism
vs. localism in the classical tradition. It focuses on the
recent interpretations of the classical texts, for instance,
feasibility of the ideal State in Plato; civic humanism and
republicanism in Machiavelli; the radicalism of Locke, and
the contributions to the woman’s cause by John Stuart Mill.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Inclusion of two important Enlightenment liberal thinkers,
Mary Wollstonecraft, the founder of liberal feminism and
the other, Immanuel Kant, a de-ontological liberal.
Addition of an Appendix on John Rawls who is credited
as a seminal thinker of contemporary times, having played
a crucial role in the revival of normative political theory.
The text is intended for the undergraduate and
postgraduate students of Political Science in various
universities, and for all those who are appearing for the
civil services examinations.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. What is
Political Theory? Plato. Aristotle. Niccolò Machiavelli.
Thomas Hobbes. John Locke. Jean Jacques Rousseau.
Immanuel Kant. Edmund Burke. Jeremy Bentham.
Mary Wollstonecraft. George Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel.
John Stuart Mill. Karl Marx. Appendix. Bibliography.
References. Author Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 576 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4389-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-55-4 (e-Book)
PADHY
Indian Political Thought
K.S. PADHY, former Professor and Head, Department of
Political Science, Berhampur University (Orissa).
Intended as a text for the undergraduate and postgraduate
students of political science, and aspirants of civil services
this compact book brings to fore the political thought of
various Indian thinkers over the decades.
85
The book begins with a detailed discussion on the political
thought of Manu, the lawgiver, whose classification of
the different castes and their duties is highlighted. Then
it goes on to give a comprehensive account of such
thinkers as Kautilya, the author of Arthashastra, who
talks about the four stages of life and the duties of the
King; Raja Ram Mohan Roy, the religious reformer; Swami
Dayananda Saraswati, the Hindu reformer and advocate
of the Vedas. Besides, the book deals in detail with such
thinkers as Swami Vivekananda, Bal Gangadhar Tilak,
Gopal Krishna Gokhale, and Shri Aurobindo.
Further, the book analyzes the political thought of the
great Indian leaders—Mahatma Gandhi, the Father of
the Nation, whose ideas of Satyagraha, Ahimsa (Non-
Violence), Swadeshi, and Swaraj are too well known;
Jawaharlal Nehru, the Architect of Modern India and
the first Indian Prime Minister whose ideas on socialism,
democracy, and planning have guided the nation; the
indefatigable JP (Jaya Prakash Narayan), the pioneer of the
socialist movement; and Bhimrao Ambedkar, the Architect
of the Indian Constitution—the great social reformer who
championed the cause of the down-trodden.
Finally, the book makes an analysis of ideas of other
thinkers, such as Sir Sayyed Ahmed Khan, a great advocate
of communal harmony, Muhammad Ali Jinnah, Lala Lajpat
Rai, the Lion of Punjab and the propounder of Swaraj; and
Ram Manohar Lohia, a powerful exponent of socialism.
Contents: Preface. Manu. Kautilya. Raja Ram Mohan
Roy. Swami Dayananda Saraswati. Swami Vivekananda.
Bal Gangadhar Tilak. Gopal Krishna Gokhale. Shri
Aurobindo. Mahatma Gandhi. Manabendra Nath Roy.
Jawaharlal Nehru. Subhash Chandra Bose. Madhusudan
Das. Jayaprakash Narayan. Gopabandhu Das. Bhimrao
Ramjee Ambedkar. Sir Sayyed Ahmed Khan. Muhammad
Ali Jinnah. Lala Lajpat Rai. Ram Manohar Lohia. Vinayak
Damodar Savarkar. Mahatma Jyotirao Govindrao Phule.
Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 400 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 425.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4305-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-63-9 (e-Book)
Psychology  
Abnormal Psychology
 86 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Latest Print 2015 / 532 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5123-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-867-7 (e-Book)
Educational Psychology
KAKKAR
Educational Psychology
S.B. KAKKAR, Formerly, Head, Department of Psychology,
Government College of Education, Patiala.
Designed as a textbook for undergraduate courses in
Educational Psychology, this well-organized study gives
a detailed description of key concepts such as learning,
intelligence and personality and various contemporary
theories governing these. The present volume attempts
to provide teachers and prospective teachers with those
facts, principles and procedures which are of maximum
utility in the classroom situations. Apart from helping
the teacher-trainee gain a clearer understanding of
the nature and behaviour of the learner, the book also
provides assistance in evaluation and in understanding
the concept of guidance services. The significance
of educational and vocational guidance, particularly of
exceptional children, is clearly and forcefully brought out.
The text is well illustrated with diagrams to elucidate the
concepts discussed.
KEY FEATURES
• The book is child centred and practical in its approach
and views Educational Psychology from the standpoint
of actual problems faced by class-room teachers.
• A chapter is devoted to elementary statistics.
• Importance of guidance and counselling services is
clearly brought out.
• One full chapter is set apart for a discussion on
guidance of exceptional children.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Introduction. Growth
and Development. Learning. Intelligence. Personality.
Measurement and Evaluation. Elementary Statistics.
Guidance. Organization of Guidance Services. Guidance of
Exceptional Children. References. Bibliography. Suggested
Reading. Author Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2014 / 204 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-0810-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-693-2 (e-Book)
MANGAL
Advanced Educational Psychology, 2nd ed.
S.K. Mangal, formerly, Principal, Professor and Head,
Department of Postgraduate Studies at C.R. College of
Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
This revised and expanded edition is a sequel to
the first edition which was warmly received by
the student and teaching community for its in-
depth analysis and refreshing approach to the subject.
NEW CHAPTERS TO THIS EDITION
• Psychology of Individual differences
• Transfer of Learning or Training
• Emotional Development and Emotional Intelligence
• Learning Disabilities and Learning Disabled Children.
Beginning with an introduction to the nature and scope,
and the various schools of psychology, the book discusses
the systems propounded by Freud, Adler, Jung and
Piaget, taking into account their critical importance to
the subject. It then focuses on the psychology of growth
and development, psychology of individual differences,
motivation, attention and personality, with an emphasis
on the individual’s attitude towards learning, and the
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
factors influencing learning. The text also elaborates
the nature and theories of learning and the aspects
of memory such as remembering and forgetting. The
cognitive aspect, i.e. intelligence, and vital topics like
creativity and the psychology of thinking, reasoning and
problem-solving have been accorded due prominence. A
detailed discussion on exceptional children and learning
disabled children together with the educational measures
for overcoming such disabilities is also included. The text
concludes with an important aspect of human behaviour,
namely, adjustment.
Interspersed with examples, illustrations and tables,
this text is ideally suited for postgraduate students of
education and psychology. It can also be profitably used
by teachers, teacher-educators, guidance and counselling
personnel, and administrators of educational institutions.
Contents: Psychology—Meaning, Nature and Scope.
Educational Psychology—Meaning, Nature and Scope.
Methods of Educational Psychology. Systems or Schools
of Psychology and Their Bearing on Education. Psycho-
analysis—Freud’s System of Psychology. Adler’s System
of Individual Psychology. Analytical Psychology—Jung’s
System of Psychology. Piaget’s Developmental Psychology
and its Bearing on Education. Psychology of Growth
and Development. Psychology of Individual Differences.
Psychology of Motivation. Attention. Nature and Theories
of Learning. Transfer of Learning or Training. Memory—
Remembering and Forgetting. Intelligence. Emotional
Development and Emotional Intelligence. Creativity.
Psychology of Thinking, Reasoning and Problem-solving.
Aptitude. Personality. Educating Exceptional Children.
Learning Disabilities and Learning Disabled Children.
Psychology of Adjustment
Latest Print 2021 / 536 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2038-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-56-1 (e-Book)
MANGAL
Essentials of Educational Psychology
S.K. MANGAL, formerly, Principal, Professor and Head,
Department of Postgraduate Studies at C.R. College of
Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
A harmonious blend of the theoretical and practical
aspects of educational psychology, this student-friendly
text provides a base for the understanding of the subject.
The book discusses the various aspects of growth and
development, specifically during childhood and adole-
scence, and accords due importance to the cognitive
aspect of human behaviour with elaborate text on intelli-
gence, creativity, thinking, reasoning and problem-solving.
Besides maintaining a logical progression of topics, the
author has interspersed the text with examples and
illustrations to provide an in-depth analysis of the subject
matter.
The book is ideally suited for the B.Ed. and B.A.
(Education) courses but can also be a valuable reference
87
for teachers, teacher-trainees, and practising counsellors
at various levels of school education.
KEY FEATURES
• Cogent and coherent style of writing
• Assignment problems and sample tests at the end of
various chapters
• Wide range of examples and over 50 illustrations to
support and explain the topics discussed
Contents: Preface. Psychology—Meaning, Nature and
Scope. Educational Psychology—Meaning, Nature and
Scope. Methods of Studying Behaviour. Heredity and
Environment. Human Growth and Development—Stages
and Dimensions. Physical Growth and Development.
Cognitive or Mental Development. Emotional Develop-
ment and Emotional Intelligence. Social Development.
Spiritual Development (Development of Character). Stage
Specific Characteristics and Developmental Tasks. Growth
and Development during Adolescence. Maturation and
Training. Individual Differences. Learning—Concept,
Nature and Domains. Factors Influencing Learning.
Theories of Learning. Transfer of Learning or Training.
Motivational Aspect of Behaviour. Memory. Forgetting.
Intelligence—Concept, Theories and Measurement.
Creativity. Aptitude—Concept and Measurement.
Attitude—Concept and Measurement. Attention.
Interest—Meaning, Nature and Measurement. Habits—
Meaning, Nature and Development. Concept Formation.
Psychology of Thinking, Reasoning and Problem-Solving.
The Concept and Structure of Personality. Determinants
of Personality. Assessment of Personality. Exceptional
Children. Behavioural Problems—Meaning, Concept
and Treatment. Adjustment, Frustration and Conflicts.
Mental Health and Hygiene. Sex Education. Guidance
and Counseling. Group Dynamics and Group Behaviour.
Statistical Data—Meaning, Organisation and Presentation.
Measures of Central Tendency and Percentiles. Measures
of Variability or Dispersion. Correlation. Administration
and Interpretation of Psychological Tests (Practical Work).
Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 736 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 575.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3055-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-083-1 (e-Book)
,l-ds- eaxy] lh-vkj- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqd's ku jksgrd] gfj;k.kk
ds Ákpk;Z ,oa ÁksQslj in ls lsokfuo`r gSaA
 88 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Latest Print 2021 / 784 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 525.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3280-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-860-8 (e-Book)
MANGAL & MANGAL
Psychology of Learning and Development
S.K. MANGAL, formerly Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R. College
of Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
SHUBHRA MANGAL, Principal, Professor and Head of
the Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R.S. College
of Education, Noida.
The book furnishes proper understanding to its readers
for helping the growing children in their thoroughgoing
development. The subject-matter, dexterously divided into
35 chapters and organised in a simplified and logical manner,
first explicates educational psychology, development of
the growing children, process of learning, intelligence,
aptitude and attitude, and then expounds on psychology of
individual differences, learning styles, learning disabilities,
creativity, personality, mental health, adjustment, guidance
and counselling, and ultimately, social groups and group
dynamics.
The book is primarily designed for the postgraduate students
of education.
Contents: Preface. Educational Psychology: Concept,
Scope and Role. Methods and Techniques of Educa-tional
Psychology. Growth and Development. Heredity and
Environment. Characteristics of Various Stages of Deve-
lopment with Special Reference to Adolescence. Dimensions
of Individual Development.Theories of Development.
Developmental Tasks and Their Implications. Maturation-
Concept and Educational Implications. Learning: Concept
and  Importance. Factors Influencing Learning. Theories
of Learning. Constructivism and Constructivist Learning.
Transfer of Learning or Training. Psychology of Motivation.
Memory: Concept, Types, Measurement and Development
Forgetting: Nature, Causes and Minimisation of Forgetting.
Intelligence: Concept, Theories and Measurement.
Emotional Intelligence: Concept, Measurement and
Development. Social, Spiritual and Artificial Intelligences.
Aptitude: Concept and Measurement. Attitude: Nature,
Measurement and Development. Dimensions of Individual
Differences in Learners. Learning Styles: Concept, Types
and Implications. Learning Disabilities: Meaning, Concept
and Types. Creativity: Concept, Theories and Development.
Personality: Meaning, Nature and Theories. Determinants
of Personality. Assessment of Personality. Mental Health
and Hygiene. Defence or Mental Mechanisms. Psychology
of Adjustment. Frustration, Conflicts and Stress. Guidance
and Counselling. Social Groups and Group Dynamics.
Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 708 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-20-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-21-9 (e-Book)
eaxy ,oa eaxy
vf/xe ,oa fodkl dk euksfoKku
(Psychology of Learning and Development)
,l-ds- eaxy] lh-vkj- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqd's ku jksgrd] gfj;k.kk
ds Ákpk;Z ,oa ÁksQslj in ls lsokfuo`r gSaA
'kqHkzk eaxy] lh-vkj-,l- dkWfyt vkWQ ,tqds'ku] uks,Mk esa
izkpk;Z ,oa izksQslj in ij lsokjr gSaA
ckyd ds fodkl esa ifjiDou rFkk vf/kxe nksuksa gh dkQh izHkkoiw.kZ
Hkwfedk fuHkkrs gSaA LokHkkfod izfØ;k ds rkSj ij tgk¡ ifjiDou ckyd
dks mlds o`f) ,oa fodkl esa fcuk fdlh cká lgk;rk ds enn
djrk gqvk fn[kkbZ nsrk gS ogha vf/kxe dks viuh Hkwfedk fuHkkus gsrq
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
okrkoj.kh; 'kfDr;ksa rFkk ekrk&firk] f'k{kdksa ,oa vU; cM+ksa dh enn
dh dkQh t:jr jgrh gSA okLro esa ns[kk tk, rks vf/kxe vkSj
fodkl nksuksa izfØ;k;sa gh ,d nwljs dk lgk;d curh gqbZ ckydksa ds
okafNr fgr vkSj dY;k.k dk ekxZ iz'kLr djrh gSaA
'kk;n ;gh ,d cM+k dkj.k gS fd jk"Vªh; v/;kid f'k{kk ifj"kn (NCTE) ds
fn'kkfunsZ'kksa ij pyrs gq;s gekjs ns'k ds lHkh fo'ofo|ky;ksa rFkk f'k{kk
laLFkkuksa ds ,e-,M- ikB~;Øe esa vf/kxe ,oa fodkl dk euksfoKku
(Psychology of Learning and Development) tSls v/;;u dks LFkku fn;k
gSA izLrqr ikB~; iqLrd blh v/;;u dkslZ dh vko';drkvksa dks iwjk
djus ds fy;s fy[kh xbZ gSA bl mís'; dh iw£r gsrq tgk¡ blls ,e-,M-
ds fo|kfFkZ;ksa rFkk v/;kid f'k{kdksa dh vko';drkvksa dk mfpr /;ku
j[kk x;k gS ogha vius ns'k ds fo|ky;ksa esa dk;Zjr v/;kidksa rFkk
izf'k{k.kkfFkZ;ksa] ekrk firk rFkk vU; lHkh ftudk lEcU/k ckydksa ds
fgr fpUru ls gS ds bl lEcU/k ;s fufgr iz;kstu dk Hkh iwjk /;ku
j[kk x;k gSA
vius mís'; dh iw£r gsrq bl iqLrd dh fo"k; lkexzh 35 fofHkUu
v/;k;ksa esa foHkkftr dj izLrqr dh xbZ gSA
fo"k; lwph% izLrkoukA f'k{kk euksfoKku&vFkZ] izÑfr] {ks=k ,oa HkwfedkA
f'k{kk euksfoKku esa v/;;u ds fy;s iz;Dq r fof/k;k¡ ,oa rduhdsAa
o`f) ,oa fodkl&vo/kkj.kk] lkekU; fl)kUr ,oa dkjdA oa'kkuqØe
,oa okrkoj.kA fodkl dh fofHkUu voLFkkvksa dh fo'ks"krk,¡ ¼fo'ks"kdj
fd'kksjkoLFkk ds lUnHkZ es½a A O;fDrxr fodkl ds vk;keA fodkl ds
fl)kUrA fodklkRed dk;Z ,oa muds fufgrkFkZA ifjiDork&laiRz ;; ,oa
'kSf{kd fufgrkFkZA vf/kxe&vo/kkj.kk ,oa egÙoA vf/kxe dks izHkkfor
djus okys dkjdA vf/kxe ;k lh[kus ds fl)kUrA jpukRedrkokn
,oa jpukRedrkoknh vf/kxeA vf/kxe ;k izf'k{k.k dk LFkkukUrj.kA
vfHkizsj.kk dk euksfoKkuA Le`fr&laizR;;] izdkj ,oa fodklA
foLe`fr&izÑfr] fl)kUr ,oa foLe`fr esa deh ykukA cqf)&vFkZ]
iz Ñ fr] fl)kUr ,oa ekiuA la o s x kRed cq f )&vo/kkj.kk]
ekiu ,oa fodklA lkekftd] vk/;kfRed ,oa Ñf=ke cqf) A
vfHk#fp&la i z R ;; ,oa ekiuA vfHko` f Ùk&la i z R ;; ,oa ekiuA
vf/kxedÙkkZvksa esa oS;fDrd Hksnksa ds vk;keA vf/kxe 'kSyh&
vo/kkj.kk] izdkj ,oa fufgrkFkZA vf/kxe v{kerk,¡&vFkZ] vo/kkj.kk ,oa
izdkjA l`tukRedrk&laiRz ;; ,oa fodklA O;fDrRo&vo/kkj.kk ,oa
fl)kUrA O;fDrRo ds fu/kkZjdA O;fDrRo dk ewY;kaduA ekufld
LokLF; ,oa LokLF; foKkuA j{kkRed ;qfDr;k¡ ;k euksjpuk,¡A
lek;kstu dk euksfoKkuA daBq k ;k HkXuk'kk vUr%}U} ,oa nckoA
ekxZn'kZu ,oa ijke'kZA lewg xfr'kkL= ,oa lewg O;ogkjA vuqØef.kdkA
Latest Print 2019 / 784 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 725.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-22-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-23-3 (e-Book)
89
Emotional Intelligence
MANGAL & MANGAL
Emotional Intelligence: Managing
Emotions to Win in Life
S.K. MANGAL, has been Principal, and Professor and
Head of the Department of Postgraduate Studies,
C.R. College of Education, Rohtak, Haryana.
SHUBHRA MANGAL, Principal, Professor and Head of the
Department of Postgraduate Studies, C.R.S. College of
Education, Noida.
Emotional Intelligence (EI) is a personality development
tool which can be developed at any stage of life to
enhance one’s ability and get desired success in various
life pursuits. This book is conceived to prove as an
effective source of motivation and know-how of getting
imbibed with the EI skills.
The book describes emotional intelligence as a key
to attain success in life. It highlights how managing
emotional traits like anger, jealousy, empathy, love and so
on can help a person to be a better human being and
emerge as a winner in life. Organized well, the chapters
comprehensively explain the concept of emotional
intelligence with relation to its development and
utilization for getting desired success in one’s personal,
social and professional life.
The book, thus, have the needed potential to equip the
readers with the knowledge, skills and applied aspects
of EI and its measure, EQ, for deriving rich dividends
through the development and application of EI skills
(mostly emotional and social in nature). The book also
helps people with high IQ to analyze that EQ and IQ goes
hand-in-hand, and by developing the EI skills they can
excel in those spheres of life, where they otherwise fail
to excel with IQ alone.
The book is designed for the postgraduate students of
Psychology, Education and Management. Besides, the
book is also useful for the professionals and general
readers. It is going to prove an asset for those who are
suffering from failures and lack of confidence.
KEY FEATURES
• Provides an easy workable model of EI for utilizing EI
skills as key to success.
• Includes reader-friendly features like key ideas (within
boxes), figures, tables, case studies and illustrations
from daily life and Panchatantra stories and folk tales.
Contents: Preface. List of Tables. List of Figures. Unit I:
Emotional Intelligence-Composition and Contribution to
Success—Concept of Emotions. Concept of Emotional
Intelligence. Success and Emotional Intelligence.
Working with Emotional Intelligence. Unit II: Intra-
personal Awareness—Emotional Self-Awareness. Accurate
Self-Assessment. Self-Confidence. Unit III: Intra-
personal Management—Emotional Self-Control. Stress
 90 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021

Tolerance. Independence. Self-Regard. Assertiveness. SHERGILL

Self-Actualization. Optimism. Unit IV: Inter-personal
Awareness—Awareness about Others. Empathy. Reality Experimental Psychology
Testing. Unit V: Inter-personal Management—Managing HARDEEP KAUR SHERGILL, Consultant Counsellor and
Interpersonal Relationships. Flexibility. Problem Solving. Psychotherapist. She is teaching in a degree college.
Conflict Management. Cooperation and Collaboration. Focusing on the various aspects of human behaviour, the
Inspirational Leadership. Bibliography. Index. book introduces the nature and theories of sensation,
Latest Print 2021 / 328 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 550.00 perception, learning, memory, psychophysics and other
ISBN-978-81-203-5085-4 (Print Book) areas involved in psychology. It also highlights the
ISBN-978-93-5443-335-1 (e-Book) importance of cognitive processes such as thinking,
reasoning and problem-solving. Besides, the book pro-
vides essential knowledge and skills for using statistical
Experimental Psychology tools in organising and computing research data.
Designed in an easy-to-understand and illustrative manner,
this book is primarily aimed at undergraduate students of
HUSSAIN psychology. The text will also prove useful to all those
Experiments in Psychology students who have been introduced with this subject for
AKBAR HUSSAIN, Senior Faculty in the Department of the first time.
Psychology, Jamia Millia Islamia, New Delhi. Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Part A—Experi-
Primarily intended for the undergraduate and postgraduate mental Method. Variables. Sensation. Perceptual Proce-
students of psychology, this book will help understand the sses. Statistics. Part B—Psychophysics. Learning. Memory.
methodology of experiments and the basic concepts of Thinking And Problem-solving. B.A. Syllabus. Index.
experimental psychology. Latest Print 2015 / 376 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 295.00
Since the experiments are described in detail with the ISBN-978-81-203-4516-4 (Print Book)
help of purely hypothetical data, the readers will easily ISBN-978-93-5443-737-3 (e-Book)
understand the procedure and the steps involved in
each experiment. Complete reports of more than fifty
experiments will certainly help understand the significance Foundations of Psychology
of each step in an experiment. The detailed description
of experiments will also help in conceptualising relevant
problems and designing appropriate experiments. Another
feature is that, more than half of the experiments described
in the book do not require sophisticated apparatus.
KEY FEATURES
• Sample data are provided in each experiment.
• Theoretical background of experiments is sufficient and
clear.
• Sample data are analysed with the help of statistical
techniques.
• Language is lucid and easy to comprehend.
• Experiments on most of the topics have been covered.
Contents: Preface. Introduction to Psychological
Experiment. Conducting and Reporting an Experiment.
Psychophysics and Psychophysical Methods. Psychophysical
Experiments. Sensory Motor Learning. Verbal Learning.
Transfer of Training. Remembering and Forgetting.
Attention. Perception. Thinking and Problem Solving.
Feeling and Emotion. Motivation. Reaction Time. Work
and Fatigue. Index.
Latest Print 2014 / 324 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 350.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5037-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-365-8 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Latest Print 2010 / 816 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 425.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3847-0 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-866-0 (e-Book)
MISHRA
Psychology: The Study of Human
Behaviour, 2nd ed.
BRAJ KUMAR MISHRA, formerly Professor and the Head
of the Department of Psychology, Doranda College, Ranchi.
Human behaviour—both complex and simple—is such a
fascinating subject for study and research, and therefore,
psychology as a subject is of tremendous importance to
the students and the researchers.
This accessible and student-friendly text in its second
edition, shows the ‘what,’ ‘why’ and ‘how’ of human
behaviour patterns. The text emphasizes controlled and
systematic studies to explain such behavioural aspects as
sensing, perceiving, modifications of human behaviour,
memorizing, the recollection of past events, and affecting
processes.
The text is interspersed with many examples to illustrate
the concepts discussed. The concepts are well-supported
with experimental as well as observational facts. What’s
more, the book acquaints the reader with the recent
advances in the field of psychology.
KEY FEATURES
• Liberal use of examples to give a clear idea of the
concept discussed.
• Step-by-step analysis of various psychological facts to
facilitate better understanding of the subject.
• Presentation of new advances and discoveries in the
field of various psychological processes.
• Glossary of terms besides chapter-end exercises and
summaries.
The New Edition of the book is incorporated with a new
chapter on Socio-cultural Bases of Behaviour, which forms
most integral part of a human behaviour.
Primarily intended as a text for undergraduate students
of psychology, the book can also be profitably used by
postgraduate students and all those who have an abiding
interest in the study of human behaviour.
91
Contents: Preface. Part I: Curiosity of Man to Study
Himself—Introduction. Historical Perspectives of Modern
Psychology. Methodology of Psychology. Part II: Biology of
Behaviour—Biological Bases of Behaviour. Socio-cultural
Bases of Behaviour. Part III: Knowing the World Around
Us—Sensory Processes and Psychophysics. Visual and
Other Sensory Processes. Perceptual Processes. Attentional
Processes. Part IV: Modification of Behaviour—Learning.
Some Other Principles (Theories) and Aspects of Learning.
Part V: Memory Processes—Remembering and Forgetting.
Part VI: Symbolic Processes—Thinking. Part VII: Conative
Aspects of Behaviour—Motivation. Part VIII: Affective
Processes—Emotion. Part IX: Individual Differences—
Intelligence. Personality. Glossary. Author Index. Subject
Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 644 pp. / 17.8 x 23.5 cm / ` 550.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5247-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-71-4 (e-Book)
SHERGILL
Psychology, Part I
HARDEEP KAUR SHERGILL, Consultant Counsellor and
Psychotherapist. She is teaching in a degree college.
Designed for the undergraduate students of psychology,
this comprehensive text presents the fundamental
principles and concepts of psychology. It discusses in
detail various human behavioural patterns.
The book describes the nature, goals and different
schools of psychology. It explains various methods of
psychological research such as experimental, observation,
interview, questionnaire and case-study methods.
Besides describing the biological bases of human
behaviour, it examines different types of psychological
tests which are conducted to differentiate one individual
from another.
This student-friendly book also elaborates the processes
of learning and memory, the nature and types of memory
and other important aspects of human behaviour such as
motivation, emotion and intelligence. The James–Lange
and Cannon–Bard theories of emotion, psychometric
theory and cognitive theory of intelligence are also
thoroughly dealt with. Finally, different concepts of
personality and techniques of assessment of personality
are explained.
KEY FEATURES
• Includes a number of figures and illustrations to clarify
the concepts.
• Gives interesting facts and health tips.
• Provides chapter-end exercises for practice.
• Offers several examples for easy understanding of the
subject matter.
Contents: Preface. Part A—Nature of Psychology. Methods
of Psychological Research. Biological Bases of Behaviour.
Nervous System. Understanding Individual Differences.
Central Tendency. Variability. Part B—Introduction to
 92 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Learning. Introduction to Memory. Motivation. Emotion.
Intelligence. Personality. Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 512 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 375.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3978-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-736-6 (e-Book)
Organizational Psychology
CHITALE, MOHANTY & DUBEY
Organizational Behaviour:
Text and Cases, 2nd ed.
AVINASH K. CHITALE, Academic Advisor, and former
Director, Govindram Seksaria Institute of Management
and Research, Indore.
RAJENDRA PRASAD MOHANTY, Vice Chancellor, Shiksha
‘O’ Anusandhan University, Bhubaneswar, Odisha.
NISHITH RAJARAM DUBEY, Professor at National Institute
of Technical Teacher’s Training & Research Institute, Bhopal.
For creating a balance in the organizational environment,
harmony amongst the employees and the employer
is a prerequisite. The factors that help in determining
an organizational balance are the sociology of an
environment, psychology of the people working
there, channels of communication along with a sound
and rational management. The book highlights the
fundamental concepts of organizational behaviour, and its
applications in the Indian organizational scenario.
The second edition of the book, maintaining the same
chapters' organization as in the previous edition, comprises
28 chapters based on the fundamental concepts of
organizational behaviour, and case studies from various
Indian industry verticals. These case studies reveal the
authors' experience in real-life scenario as consultants as
well as their observations pertaining to the concepts of
organizational behaviour. Besides, the text lays emphasis
on some modern tools of management such as TQM, BPR
and Knowledge Management, which is a unique feature
of this book.
The book is designed for the students of management and
psychology. Moreover, it is useful for the postgraduate
students of commerce as well as it is of immense use
to the personnel associated with technical, commercial
and IT-based industries requiring human resource
management.
KEY FEATURES
• Every chapter is concluded with a real-life case study.
• Appendices added to most of the chapters contain
research-based questionnaire instruments.
• Discussion Questions on Case studies enhance learning
among students.
NEW TO THE SECOND EDITION
Includes three new sections on 'Case Study Method as an
Important Pedagogy', 'Classification of Case Studies' and
'Steps of Solving a Case'.
Incorporates 29 new short and sharp cases at the end of
the book to make the reader aware of real-life situations.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition.
Acknowledgements. Organizational Behaviour—A Curtain
Raiser. The Emerging Challenges and Opportunities
to Organizational Behaviour. History and Evolution of
Organizational Behaviour. Fundamentals of Individual
Behaviour. Personality. Attitudes and Job Satisfaction.
Learning and Learning Theories. Perception. Motivation
and Work Performance. Practical Motivation Approaches.
Group and Team Dynamics. Transactional Analysis and
Organizational Behaviour. Leadership. Emotional and
Spiritual Intelligence. Authority, Power and Politics.
Management of Conflict. Organizational Structures.
Organizational Culture and Creative Change. Dynamics of
Change. Organizational Development. The Dynamics and
Management of Stress. Organizational Communications.
Human Resource Policies and Procedures. Organizational
Effectiveness. Organizations of the Future. International
Organizational Behaviour. Corporate Governance and
Social Responsibility. Organizational Behaviour and
Knowledge Management. Case Studies from Corporate
World. Index.
Latest Print 2019 / 696 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 525.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-06-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-07-4 (e-Book)
Psychological Testing/Statistical
Methods in Psychology
MANGAL
Statistics in Psychology and Education,
2nd ed.
S.K. MANGAL, formerly, Principal, Professor and Head,
Department of Postgraduate Studies at C.R. College of
Education, Rohtak (Haryana).
This extensively revised and fully updated second edition
is designed as a textbook for MA (Education), MEd, MA
(Psychology and Sociology) and for research students
pursuing courses in Statistics related to these subjects. It
takes into account the present syllabi of various univer-
sities and institutes of education across the country.
WHAT’S NEW TO THE SECOND EDITION
• Six new chapters added with emphasis on advanced
statistical concepts and techniques such as the following:
– Biserial correlation, point biserial correlation,
tetrachoric correlation, phi coefficient, partial and
multiple correlation.
– Transfer of raw scores into standard scores, T, C and
Stanine scores.
– Non-parametric tests like the McNemar test, Sign
test, Wilcoxon test, Median test, U test, Runs test,
and KS test.
– Analysis of covariance.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
• Some chapters modified and reshuffled to reflect the
new emphasis.
• Entire text thoroughly checked and marked improve-
ments made to bring the topics up-to-date.
KEY FEATURES
• Statistical procedures and methods have been simplified
to facilitate understanding of the subject, and only the
minimum necessary mathematics is presented
• Gives detailed discussion on parametric tests using very
small samples for drawing valuable statistical inferences.
• Numerous solved examples and assignments are
provided for practice and to illustrate the concepts and
applications.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Statistics—
Meaning and Use. Organization of Data. Graphical
Representation of Data. Measures of Central Tendency.
Percentiles and Percentile Rank. Measures of Variability.
Linear Correlation. The Normal Curve and its Applications.
Significance of the Mean and Other Statistics. Significance
of the Difference between Means. Chi Square and
Contingency Coefficient. Further Methods of Correlations.
Partial and Multiple Correlation. Regression and Prediction.
Scores Transformation. Non-Parametric Tests. Analysis of
Variance. Analysis of Covariance. Answers. Appendices.
Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 416 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2088-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-72-1 (e-Book)
RADHA MOHAN
Measurement, Evaluation and
Assessment in Education
RADHA MOHAN, former Principal, Rajalakshmi College of
Education, Chennai.
Assessment and evaluation are central to the educational
system of a country as they impact the national policy
of education, besides helping in framing future strategies
for growth of the nation. The process of measurement,
evaluation and assessment is interlinked with curriculum
and teaching–learning methods enabling learning
outcomes to be determined. Good quality assessment is
instrumental in determining a student’s future goal and
career path, besides impacting all stakeholders of the
school system. An effective school system cannot be built
where the students are examined on the basis of mere
paper and pencil tests. Today schools have access to the
use of a range of techniques for student’s assessment,
teacher performance, school’s effectiveness and the
evaluation of the school system as a whole.
The aim of the book is to provide an in-depth knowledge
and understanding of measurement, evaluation and
statistics in education—both from theoretical and
practical aspects. It also offers a concise, step-by-step
guide that helps in making assessment simple and
economical in terms of money and time, besides being
a boon for any institution. The book contains effective
93
strategies to facilitate enhanced learning by explaining
the interpretation of test scores. It has several Illustrative
examples drawn from the authors experience. Portfolios
are proving to be a great way of assessment, and how to
incorporate them in the teaching–learning process is dealt
with in detail. Instructions for constructing rubrics for
evaluation of different domains of learning, i.e., cognitive,
psychomotor and affective have also been included in the
book. Item analysis, basic statistics and different types of
tests are discussed elaborately.
The book is intended for the students of B.Ed, M.Ed
and M.A. (Education). Besides, the teachers teaching at
various universities and colleges will also find this book
useful for classroom teaching.
KEY FEATURES OF THE BOOK
• Comprehensive and lucidly written.
• Easy-to-understand because of the illustrations,
flowcharts and graphs.
• Chapter-end assignments to promote reflective thinking.
• A go-guide for teachers and trainers.
Contents: Preface. Goals, Objectives and Learning
Outcomes. Measurement, Evaluation and Assessment in
the Classroom. Basic Concepts Used in Measurement. A
Brief Introduction to Statistics–Definitions, Characteristics,
Place in Education. Interpreting Test Scores. Measurement
Errors. Reliability and Validity. Item Analysis. Achievement
Test. Diagnostic Tests. Intelligence Testing. Performance
Tests. Portfolio Assessment. Aptitude Testing. Attitude
Measurement. Grading and Scoring. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 312 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / `695.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5250-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-449-5 (e-Book)
RAMAMURTI
Introduction to Psychological
Measurement, An
P.V. RAMAMURTI, Professor and Dean of Social and
Behavioural Sciences and Honorary Director, Center
for Research on Aging, Department of Psychology, SV
University, Tirupati.
Primarily intended for undergraduate and postgraduate
students of psychology, the book aims to provide a
succinct yet reasonably comprehensive account of
psychological measurement techniques (psychometry) in
a single volume.
Written in a lucid style with the author’s rich teaching
experience, the book focuses on the technique of
development and use of psychological tests and scales. It
also describes essential features and steps to be followed
in constructing a psychological test.
The book, divided into three parts, covers psychophysical
methods, psychological scaling and test methods, and
some elementary but essential statistical concepts used
in the measurement and interpretation of psychological
test data.
 94 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Besides psychology students, the book will be useful for
undergraduate and postgraduate students of education
and professionals in the field of psychology and education.
Contents: Preface. List of Figures. Part I: Nature
and Historical Development of Measurement and
Psychophysical and Psychological Scaling Methods—The
Nature of Psychological Measurement. The Early History of
Psychological Measurement. The Psychophysical Methods.
The Psychological Scaling Methods. The Rating Techniques.
Part II: Nature and Construction of Psychological
Tests—Psychological Testing Methods. Constructing a
Psychological Test. The Reliability of a Psychological Test.
Validity of a Psychological Test. Item Analysis. The Use and
Interpretation of Test Scores. Miscellaneous Techniques.
Part III: Some Simple Statistical Indices used in Psychological
Measurement—Measures of Central Tendency of Scores.
Measures of Variations of Scores. Measures of Association
(Correlation) Between Scores on Variables. Graphic Rep-
resentation of Test Data. The Normal Probability Curve
(NPC). Tests of Significance of Some Statistics. Index.
Latest Print 2014 / 200 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 225.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4881-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-632-1 (e-Book)
Social Psychology
SINGH
Social Psychology, 2nd ed.
ARUN KUMAR SINGH, has been Professor and Head, Post-
graduate Department of Psychology, Patna University, Bihar.
This comprehensive book is an earnest endeavour to
acquaint the reader with a thorough understanding of
all important basic concepts, methods and facts of social
psychology. The exhaustive treatment of the topics, in a
cogent manner, enables the students to grasp the subject
in an easy-to-understand manner.
Logically organised into 17 chapters, the book commences
with the introduction of social psychology, research
methods, theoretical foundations, self and identity, social
cognitions, perception and attribution, socialisation, social
attitude and persuasion, and goes on to provide in-depth
coverage of stereotyping, prejudices and discrimination,
behaviours in groups, social norms and conformity
behaviour, leadership and social power, interpersonal
attraction and relationship, social influence, aggression,
prosocial behaviour, language and communication, along
with applications of social psychology.
The theme of the book incorporates latest concepts and
researches, especially Indian researches and findings, thus
making the book more understandable and applicable in
Indian context.
Written in an engaging style, the book is intended for
the undergraduate and postgraduate students of social
psychology and sociology/social works.
HIGHLIGHTS OF THE BOOK
• The text encompasses adequate content of the subject
required at the university level as well as for UGC/JRF
examination.
• Every chapter begins with learning objectives, followed
by key terms and ends with summary and review
questions.
• The text emphasises clarity (avoids technical language)
to enhance its effectiveness.
• Objective-type questions given at the end of the book
test the students’ understanding of the concepts
• Glossary is provided at the end of the book to provide
reference and at-a-glance understanding.
Contents: Preface. Introducing Social Psychology. Research
Methods in Social Psychology. Theoretical Foundations
of Modern Social Psychology. Self and Identity. Social
Cognition, Social Perception and Attribution. Socialisation.
Social Attitudes and Persuasion. Stereotyping, Prejudice
and Discrimination. Behaviours in Group. Social Norms
and Conformity Behaviour. Leadership and Social
Power. Interpersonal Attraction and Relationship. Social
Influence. Aggression and Social Violence. Prosocial
Behaviour: Altruistic and Helping Behaviour. Language
and Communication. Applications of Social Psychology.
Objective-type Questions. Glossary. References. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 752 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-25-8 (Print book)
ISBN: 978-93-89347-26-5 (e-book)
Public Administration 
Administrative Theory
SAHNI & VAYUNANDAN
Administrative Theory
PARDEEP SAHNI, Professor in the Faculty of Public
Administration at Indira Gandhi National Open University,
New Delhi.
ETAKULA VAYUNANDAN, Professor in the Faculty of
Public Administration at Indira Gandhi National Open
University, New Delhi.
This book presents a detailed introduction to the funda-
mental concepts, principles and processes of the field of
public administration. It provides comprehensive coverage
of the major topics of this diverse field. Intended primarily
for undergraduate and postgraduate students of public
administration and political science as well as for civil
services aspirants, this book will also be a handy reference
for professionals in public service and social service.
The book presents an overview of the field of public
administration as well as its fundamental aspects,
which include the theory of administration and the
nature, typology and structure of organisations. It
explains the major theoretical perspectives as well as
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
two major specialised areas of the field—public policy
and development administration. It also provides an
extensive presentation of the prominent aspects of the
public administration and management process—span
of control, coordination, communication, authority and
responsibility, centralisation and decentralisation, and
accountability and control.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Public
Administration: Meaning and Importance. Nature and
Typologies of Organisation. Theory of Administration.
Administrative Management. Structure of Organisation.
Development Administration. Public Policy. Bureaucratic
Theory. Neo-classical Theory (Human Relations).
Behavioural Theory. Decision Making with Special Reference
to Herbert A. Simon. Participative Management. Hierarchy
or Scalar Principle. Span of Control. Unity of Command.
Coordination. Delegation. Communication. Supervision.
Leadership. Authority and Responsibility. Centralisation
and Decentralisation. Accountability and Control. Index.
Latest Print 2011 / 544 pp. / 17.8 x 23.5 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3082-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-094-7 (e-Book)
SAPRU
Administrative Theories and Management
Thought, 3rd ed.
R.K. SAPRU, formerly Professor and Head, Department of
Public Administration, Panjab University, Chandigarh.
The Third Edition of this well-received text encompasses
the manifold administrative theories and management
thought propounded and enunciated by administrative
and management thinkers over the past several decades.
The text incorporates major additions and revisions to make
it more up-to-date, comprehensive and reader-friendly.
The text not only gives a complete and up-to-date analysis
of administrative theories, but also introduces the reader
to new concepts, approaches and techniques in public
administration. Undergraduate and postgraduate students
of public administration, and postgraduate students of
political science and management should find this fully
revised text to be of immense value.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Part I:
Introduction—Toward a Theory of Public Administration.
Public Administration: An Overview as a Discipline. Public
Administration: Theoretical Aspects. Public and Private
Administration: The Dichotomy. Politics-Administration
Dichotomy. Public Administration: Interdisciplinary Nature.
Part II: Administrative and Management Thinkers—
Kautilya: Administrative Content in Arthasastra. Woodrow
Wilson: The Politics–Administration Dichotomy. Max
Weber: The Bureaucratic Theory. Frederick Taylor: The
Scientific Theory of Management. Henri Fayol: Principles
of Administration. Gulick and Urwick: Organizational
Principles. Mary Follett: The Group Dynamics. Elton
Mayo: The Human Relations Approach. Chester Barnard:
Organizations as Cooperative Social Systems. Herbert
95
Simon: A Decision-Making Perspective. Douglas McGregor:
Theories X and Y for Human Motivation. Abraham
Maslow: Hierarchy of Needs Theory. Frederick Herzberg:
Motivation-Hygiene Theory. Rensis Likert: Participative
Management Systems. Chris Argyris: Humanistic Approach
to Management. Fred Riggs: The Prismatic–Sala Model.
Dwight Waldo: Reflections on Public Administration. Karl
Marx: Transforming Managerial Work. Vladimir Lenin:
Socialist Theory of Organization. Mahatma Gandhi: A
Federal Perspective. Jawaharlal Nehru: A Moderate
Approach to Administration. Peter Drucker: Management
Paradigm. Parkinson’s Law and the Peter Principle.
Part III: Approaches to Public Administration—Different
Approaches: Managerial, Political, and Legal. Classic
Organization Theory. The Systems Approach. The Human
Behaviour Approach. Bureaucracy and Democracy: A
Dilemma of Incompatibility. Public Choice Theory. The
Principal-Agent Theory. Part IV: Administrative Behaviour—
Motivation Theories. Leadership Theories and Roles.
Communication Principles. Corruption in Administration.
Part V: Public Administration: The New Paradigm—New
Public Administration. Comparative Public Administration:
Models and Prospect. Development Administration and
Management: An Overview. New Public Management
Approach. Globalization, Governance and Role of Public
Administration. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 628 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 1295.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4734-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-80-6 (e-Book)
Governance and Public Policy
ABEL & SEMENTELLI
Evolutionary Critical Theory and
Its Role in Public Affairs
CHARLES FREDERICK ABEL, Assistant Professor of
political science and public administration and director
of the Center for Applied Social Research at Stephen
F. Austin State University.
ARTHUR J. SEMENTELLI, Assistant Professor of public
administration at Florida Atlantic University.
Time and again, the status of Public Administration as
a discipline has been called in question particularly by
those who are involved in the practical implementation
of public administration principles. Theories on Public
Administration border on the realms of philosophy and
idealism and are therefore generally believed to do little
business on the ground. For instance, Thorstein Veblen’s
interpretation of the critical theory inspite of its immense
potential and practical implications was side-lined and
fated to remain in the background, thanks to the erroneous
general notion that theories in Public Administration are
at best abstractions with no applicability.
In this compact, well-knit and hard-hitting book,
the authors explain from a practical perspective, the
‘Evolutionary Critical Theory’ as a cardinal theory in Public
 96 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Administration whose practical connotations are patent
in good governance, a subject that concerns all and
sundry. The application of ‘Evolutionary Critical Theory’
for creating a free, fair and ‘good’ society is vividly
presented.
The sure, steady and pacy narrative, the straight and
simple language and the comprehensive coverage renders
this book fascinating, rewarding and of a kind of its own.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgments. Précis. Public
Administration as Discipline and the Estrangement of
Theory. Ontology and Theory in Public Administration.
Critical Theory and Public Administration. Evolutionary
Critical Theory. Evolutionary Critical Theory, Power and
Emancipation. Evolutionary Critical Theory and the
“Good Society”. Evolutionary Critical Theory and Public
Administration. Notes. Index. About the Authors.
Latest Print 2004 / 228 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2587-6 (Print Book)
BHATTA
International Dictionary of Public
Management and Governance
GAMBHIR BHATTA.
A masterful summary of what policy analysts, public
managers, and public service providers need to know and
why.
—Clay Wescott, Asian Development Bank, Manila
This volume
• attempts to provide an authoritative, up-to-date
resource and standard reference on the theory and
practice of public management.
• addresses strategy, policy processes, and governance
as well as the bureaucratic concerns of public adminis-
tration.
• incorporates concepts from various other fields
including economics, political science, management,
sociology, and psychology reflecting this diversity.
• provides ready information for students, researchers,
scholars, and practitioners for a collection of terms that
they are likely to come across in their everyday work.
Latest Print 2009 / 708 pp. / 15.3 × 22.9 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3768-8 (Print Book)
BINGHAM & O’LEARY (Eds.)
Big Ideas in Collaborative Public
Management
Editors: LISA BLOMGREN BINGHAM and ROSEMARY O’LEARY
When I’m asked what is new and important in
contemporary public management, my answer is
collaboration. The Bingham and O’Leary book is the best
on the subject, well ahead of the rest.
—George Frederickson, University of Kansas
With the advent of technological innovations such as
the Internet, and globalism that permits us to outsource
functions anywhere in the world, public managers find
themselves collaborating across borders in contrast
to being unitary leaders of unitary organizations. This
practical book with chapters written by distinguished
experts in the field
• brings together a rich variety of perspectives on
collaborative public management.
• covers topics ranging from examinations of under what
conditions collaborative public management occurs to
what it means to be a collaborative leader.
• addresses tough issues such as legitimacy building in
networks.
• discusses ways to engage citizens in collaboration.
• examines the design of collaborative networks and the
outcomes of collaboration.
• summarizes and critiques in detail state of collabo-
rative public management today.
Contents: Acknowledgements. Frameshifting: Lateral
Thinking for Collaborative Public Management. The
Paradoxical Nature of Collaboration. Intersectoral
Collaboration and the Motivation to Collaborate:
Toward on Integrated Theory. Failing into Cross-Sector
Collaboration Successfully. Incentivizing Collaborative
Performance: Aligning Policy Intent, Design, and
Impact. Linking Collaboration Processes and Outcomes:
Foundations for Advancing Empirical Theory. Legitimacy
Building in Organizational Networks. Managing for Results
Across Agencies: Building Collaborative Capacity in the
Human Services. Collaboration for Knowledge: Learning
from Public Management Networks. Institutional Collective
Action and Local Government Collaboration. Outcomes
Achieved Through Citizen-Centered Collaborative Public
Management. The Space Station and Multinational
Collaboration: A Merger of Domestic and Foreign Policy.
Legal Frameworks for Collaboration in Governance and
Public Management. Learning to Do and Doing to Learn:
Teaching Managers to Collaborate in Networks. About the
Editors and Contributors. Index.
Latest Print 2009 / 316 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 350.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3766-4 (Print Book)
GERSTON
Public Policymaking in a Democratic
Society: A Guide to Civic Engagement,
2nd ed.
LARRY N. GERSTON.
In a democracy, politics is the primary vehicle for citizens
to influence the decisions and decision makers that shape
public policy at every level. This widely acclaimed work
• provides an overview of public policymaking in all
its aspects along with basic information, tools and
examples that will equip citizens to participate more
effectively in the policymaking process.
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
• serves as a handbook for service-learning students,
and as a resource for any organized effort to involve
citizens in community service and the exercise of civic
responsibility.
• includes a new case study.
Contents: Foreword. Preface to the Second Edition.
Acknowledgements. The Public Policymaking Process
and How It Relates to Our Lives. Identifying Public Policy
Issues. Developing a Public Policy Proposal: Inventing the
Better Lightbulb. Taking Action in the Political World: How
to Advocate a Public Policy. Implementation: Carrying
Out Decisions and Making Them Stick. Evaluation:
Does the Policy Make Sense? Participation, Politics,
and Policymaking: Putting It Together. Appendices—A:
Glossary. B: Project Citizen—A Brief Introduction. C:
Recommended Readings. D: Recom-mended Web Sites as
Research Source Materials. Index. About the Author.
Latest Print 2009 / 240 pp. / 15.3 × 22.9 cm
ISBN-978-81-203-3769-5 / ` 295.00
KOVEN
Responsible Governance:
A Case Study Approach
STEVEN G. KOVEN.
“Koven’s skillful use of case studies brings a fresh
approach to the well-worn topic of responsibility and
public officials. His positions are carefully researched and
well-argued.”
—John A. Rohr
Center for Public Administration and Policy
Virginia Polytechnic Institute
This book is designed to
• show readers how ethics can constrain improper
behavior.
• demonstrate the relationship of ethics to good
government through high profile case studies that were
selected for their notoriety and their ability to connect
the reader to fundamental ethical questions.
• discusses concepts that help to define responsible
behavior in terms of behavior in elections, honesty and
competence, and international law.
Contents: Preface. Responsible Governance: A Case Study
Approach. The Foundations of Responsible Governance.
The Influence of Money on Elections. Images of
Responsibility: Honesty and Patronage in Government.
Responsibility and International Law. Conclusions.
Bibliography. Index. About the Author.
Latest Print 2009 / 224 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 225.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3767-1 (Print Book)
97
MAHAJAN & MAHAJAN
Financial Administration in India, 2nd ed.
SANJEEV KUMAR MAHAJAN, Professor, Department of
Public Administration, Himachal Pradesh University, Shimla.
ANUPAMA PURI MAHAJAN, a researcher and a freelance
writer served as a postdoctoral research fellow in the
Department of Public Administration in Himachal Pradesh
University.
The second edition of the book comprehensively covers
the vast subject of Financial Administration in a coherent
and simple language. Providing vivid explanation with
suitable examples of the topics prescribed in the core
paper offered to undergraduate and postgraduate
students of public administration, it thoroughly discusses
all the key topics as per the UPSC syllabus. The book
deals with the major types and the process of budgeting,
committees, commissions and tax administration in India.
Creating foundation of the concepts laid by Kautilya, the
book gives a clear understanding and view how they have
evolved into modern concepts in India.
KEY FEATURES
• Blend of theoretical and practical aspects
• Evolution of the concepts in Financial Administration
• Across-the-board study of original government reports
• Includes topics like NITI Aayog; XIV and XV Finance
Commission
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Financial Administration.
Union-State Fiscal Relations. Finance Commission. Ministry
of Finance. Budgeting—Part I. Budgeting—Part II. Budget as
an Instrument of Economic Development and Management.
(Part I: Budget as an Instrument of Economic Development.
Part II: Budget as an Instrument of Management).
Budget Preparation. Budget in the Legislature. Execution
of Budget and Control Over Expenditure. Performance
Budgeting. Zero-based Budgeting. Program Budgeting.
Program Planning Budgeting System. Sunset Budgeting.
Incremental Budgeting. Tax Administration in India.
Accounting System. Financial Control of Parliament Over
Executive. Audit. Financial Committees. Public Debt. Deficit
Financing. Monetary and Fiscal Policy. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 476 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 795.00
978-81-946851-4-2 (Print Book)
978-81-946851-5-9 (e-Book)
PALEKAR
Development Administration
S.A. PALEKAR, Professor, Department of Political Science,
Gulbarga University, Karnataka.
Development administration is based on two important
concepts—administration of development and adminis-
trative development. It involves modernization of
administrative structure, capabilities of personnel,
and attitudinal and behavioural changes among the
 98 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
administrators. This book simplifies the administrative
functions through its examples, theories and concepts,
and deals with the field of development administration
with an integrated approach.
This book throws light on the administrative development
processes in and around the world. It also draws a
parallel between how the administrative development
has helped the nation in overall development, and what
is the scenario in the developing countries, especially in
India. It also focuses on the issues like programme and
project management in India, Planning machinery of
Social Welfare Service in India. It further dwells into the
impact of the economic reforms on the social sectors of
India. The book skillfully explains how the State plays a
critical role in its socio-economic development, and how
it faces the new challenges because of globalization and
liberalization.
The book is intended for the postgraduate students of
Public Administration and Political Science. Besides, it is
equally beneficial for the students preparing for the Civil
Services Examination.
Contents: Preface. Development Administration. Features
of Developed and Developing Countries. Development
Programmes their Planning and Implementation. The
Riggsian Model and Development Administration. Ecological
Dimension of Development Administration. Project
Management. Planning Machinery and Development
Planning in India. Administration of Social Welfare.
International AID and Technical Assistance Programme.
Bureaucracy and Development Adminis-tration. Educa-
tional Administration. Role of Voluntary Agencies in Social
Welfare. Administrative Capability for Development.
Citizens Participation in Development. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 224 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4582-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-536-2 (e-Book)
SAPRU
Public Policy: Art and Craft of Policy
Analysis, 2nd ed.
R.K. SAPRU, formerly Professor and Head, Department of
Public Administration, Panjab University, Chandigarh.
The subject of Public Policy has assumed considerable
importance in response to the complexity of economic
downturns, social upheavals, political crises, institutional
weaknesses and technology. It is concerned not only
with the description but also with the developing scientific
knowledge about the forces shaping public policy.
The textbook, now in its second edition, continues to
provide an in-depth study of the various approaches
for policy formulation, implementation and evaluation.
It addresses issues in policy analysis, and explains
the forces that influence the functioning of executive,
legislature, judiciary, civil society and administration. The
book excellently reviews and evaluates the public policy
literature, and exemplifies the author's long teaching and
research experience in Panjab University.
The book is primarily intended for postgraduate students
of Political Science and Public Administration for their
courses in Public Policy and Policy Analysis, besides
meeting the requirements of candidates offering public
administration subject for the civil services examination.
It will be equally useful for policymakers, planners and
bureaucrats concerned with policy management.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Updation of the chapter Policy Approaches and Models
with the inclusion of the topic ‘Public choice model of
policy-making’
• Addition of the two new chapters—Power Approaches
to Policy Making and Strategic Planning Approach for
Improving Public Policy—to study the subject in detail.
Contents: Preface. Preface to the First Edition. Policy
Sciences: Perspectives on Public Policy. Public Policy:
Nature, Scope and Significance. Policy Analysis: Contextual
Perspectives. Policy Approaches and Models. Power
Approaches to Policy-making. Institutional Approaches to
Policy Analysis. Strategic Planning Approach For Improving
Public Policy. Rational Approach and Simon’s Rationality
Model. Decision-making Process and Techniques. Policy-
making Techniques. Structure of Power and Public
Policy-making Process. Power and Role of Non-officials
In Policy-making. Policy-making Power Within The
Executive. Intergovernmental Relations and Public Policy
Issues. Public Policy Implementation: Approaches and
Models. Interorganizational Relations and Public Policy
Implementation. Public Policy Delivery Agencies and
Implementers. Public Policy Implement-ation: Gaps and
Problems. Policy Monitoring: Approaches and Techniques.
Policy Evaluation: Techniques and Approaches. Policy
Evaluation: Role, Process and Criteria. Policy Performance:
Evaluating Impact. International Agencies and Globalization
of Policy Agendas. Author Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 392 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4438-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-466-2 (e-Book)
SARKAR
Public Administration in India, 2nd ed.
SIULI SARKAR, Professor of Political Science and Principal,
Lady Brabourne College, Kolkata.
This book presents an encompassing and updated analysis
of the public administrative system existing in India,
covering primarily the different administrative structures
as well as functions at the Central, State, district and local
levels of our country.
Starting from a brief historical outline of Indian
administration, it makes a detailed analysis of the
changing role of that fabric. The new, enlarged edition
provides a thorough discussion on the structure of the
civil services, and the functions and roles of the:
• President
• Prime Minister
• Council of Ministers
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
• Finance, Home and External Affairs Ministries
• Central Secretariat
It also explains vividly the roles of the State administration
with special emphasis on the:
• Governor
• Chief Minister
• Chief Secretary
• State Secretariat
• District Collector
Moreover, one can find in the book a thorough analysis
of the local self governments at the rural and urban areas
of India, and women’s participation in the rural local self
government. Besides, financial administration, welfare
administration, citizens and administration and major
Indian committees and commissions have also been
thoroughly dealt with in the text. It carefully discusses
such issues as Personnel Administration, Administration
of Law and Order, Information Technology, Human Rights,
Globalisation and Civil Society etc.
In its second edition the book has been thoroughly updated
and modernised regarding data and information of every
existing chapter. Some new concepts and topics have been
incorporated with detailed analyses there including:
• Kolkata Municipal Corporation
• Changing Nature of Planning—NITI Aayog
• MGNREGA
• Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan (SSA)
• NRHM
• Gender and Administration
Finally, a completely new chapter (Chapter 16) has been
introduced in this edition consisting of:
• Public Administration in the Era of Liberalisation and
Privatisation
• Governance and Government
• Right to Information and Citizen Charter
This comprehensive book will be extremely helpful for
the undergraduate and postgraduate students of Political
Science and Public Administration. Besides, students
preparing for various competitive (including civil services)
examinations and those who are interested in the study
of Indian Administration will benefit.
Contents: Preface. Continuity and Change in Indian
Administration: A Brief Historical Outline. The Civil Service
in India. Administration and Politics of India: The Central
Picture. Administration and Politics of India: The Provincial
(State) Picture. District Administration: Changing Role of
the Collector. Local Self Government in India: An Urban
Picture. Local Self Government in India: A Rural Picture.
Women’s Participation in Local Self Government. Planning
and Plan Administration. Financial Administration.
Citizens and Administration. Communications between
the Panchayats and the Marginalized: A Development
Perspective. Administrative Reforms in India: Major
Committees and Commissions. Welfare Administration.
Issue Areas in Indian Administration. Some Recent
99
Developments in the Concept of Administration. Name
Index. Subject Index.
Latest Print 2018 / 476 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 425.00
ISBN-978-93-87472-91-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-87472-92-1 (e-Book)
SINGH & ZAHID (Eds.)
Strengthening Governance through
Access to Justice
AMITA SINGH, Professor of Law and Governance at
the Centre for the Study of Law and Governance,
Jawaharlal Nehru University (JNU), New Delhi.
NASIR ASLAM ZAHID, Dean, Hamdard School of Law at
the Hamdard University, Karachi.
This book tries to reunite and rebuild faith in public
institutions by highlighting the availability of judicial
remedies for the poor and the excluded in South Asia. The
central idea of this book is the inevitable link between
judicial capacity and good governance. It critically
discusses the state of ‘access to justice’ to the poor
and addresses the problems of various structures and
procedures approached by the poor to seek justice. The
formal system remains locked in the whimsical fantasies
of the lawyers and the state structure which aborts the
rule of law for the privileged and works in open defiance
of the increasing disempowerment of the poor due to an
overwhelming judiciary.
This book highlights the growing need for restorative
justice as against retributive and thus emphasizes a
more intensive action research in alternative dispute
resolution systems (ADRs). This argument is further
developed to assess the competence of many people’s
led informal institutions of judiciary such as Saalish in
Bangladesh, Jirgas in Pakistan or Lok Adalats in India.
The book is also radical in its approach towards the
use of alternative dispute resolution systems to support
marginalized communities, including women in distress,
through mediation and arbitration which are gaining a
new intellectual space in justice discourse.
This book is an indispensable guide to administrators,
and social scientists interested in governance and legal
research. It would also be useful for those working in the
non-state sector of pro-poor reforms.
Contents: Preface. About the Editors. About the
Contributors. Introduction, Amita Singh. Section I: Just
Space for the Poor in Judicial Systems—Gram Adalat
in Bangladesh: Theory and Practice, M. Abdul Wahhab.
Panchayats and Jirghas (Lok Adalats): Alternative Dispute
Resolution System in Pakistan, Irum Ahsan. Lok Adalats
and Judicial Reform in India, Archana Agarwal. Formal
Perceptions of Informal Justice: Village Councils and Access
to Justice, Kripa Ananth Pur, Anirudh Krishna. Poverty and
Access to Justice: Dimensions of Public Interest Litigation,
Anindita Pujari. Revitalizing Judiciary: Enhancing Access to
the Poor, Pallavi Bahar. Justice Without Lawyers: Getting
Ideas from China, Xiong Ying. Section II: Procedural
 100 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Fairness and Restorative Justice—Gender, Violence
and Power: Retributive versus Restorative Justice in
South Asia, Ferdous Jahan. Alternatives to the Judicial
Mess: Suggesting Mediation, Dale Bagshaw. Issues of
Equity and Justice in Climate Change: A South Asian
Perspective, Angela Williams. Judicial intervention for
the environmentally Distressed in Pakistan, Saima Amin
Khawaja. Elusive Justice Denial frame for the Tribal Poor
in India, Priti Singh. Governance and Justice: Challenge
of Weaving the Severed Bond in South Asia, Justice Nasir
Aslam Zahid.
Latest Print 2008 / 188 pp. (Hard Cover) / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 350.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3697-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-619-2 (e-Book)
SINGH, et al. (Eds.)
Governance and Poverty Reduction:
Beyond the Cage of Best Practices
AMITA SINGH, Professor of Law and Governance at the
Centre for the Study of Law and Governance, Jawaharlal
Nehru University (JNU), New Delhi.
KAPIL KAPOOR, Country Manager for Zambia at The
World Bank, Washington DC.
RABINDRANATH BHATTACHARYYA, Reader in Political
Science and Public Administration at the University of
Burdwan, West Bengal.
Poverty reduction in South Asia is a precondition for
sustaining any form of reforms in governance. The new
public management reforms which started in South Asia
from Sri Lanka taking the initiative in 1977–78 have been
a decisive break from the previously practised State
driven protectionist system. Investment in the region
has been rising and even per capita income has shown
some increase, yet the state has not been able to lead
these reforms appropriately and efficiently. Thus poverty
has not been reduced, ordinary people continue to
languish under government programmes and the socially
excluded remain outside the mainstream decision making
bodies. Governance in South Asia faces the single most
important challenge of poverty reduction which continues
to blunt and disfigure capacity, self esteem and service
delivery system to the poor. This book attempts to bring
out microlevel studies from many regions in South Asia
to address issues of entrepreneurship, knowledge and
professionalism.
As an initiator of the idea on developing a critique
to the straightjacketed ‘best practice’ research, this
book questions the standard practice in evaluating
administrative reforms as not being the true base for
knowledge. Administrators need to balance capacity and
control in every implementation programme. Confining to
the knowledge of ‘best practices’ may conceal enormous
amount of information from the ‘less than best’ practices
which may be necessary to sustain good initiatives of
public managers.
This book highlights areas of active networking, partner-
ships and collaborations amongst state and non-state
bodies, NGOs and specialist Science and Technical
Organizations. The true nature of governance is explained
and demonstrated through the processes which
otherwise pass off undetected in macro-understanding of
governance.
Contents: Acknowledgement. Introduction: Governance,
Poverty Reduction and Best Practices, Amita Singh.
Section I: Understanding Poverty in South Asia—
Conceptualizing Poverty: The Importance of Stories,
Steven E. Aufrecht and Rashmi Prasad. Poverty
Eradication: Lessons from History, Alan Mayne.
Understanding Poverty, Cause Analysis and Response:
Case Study of Pakistan, Sarfraz H. Khawaja. How to
Make Public Administration Reform Work for the
Rural Poor? Potentials and Challenges of Collaborative
Governance, Regina Birner. Engendering Growth for
Poverty Reduction: The Pakistan Experience, Sarfraz Khan
Qureshi. Governance Intervention for Alleviating Poverty
in Nepal, Tek Nath Dhakal. Section II: Poverty Reduction
Good Practices, Stray Experiments—Poverty Eradication
through Participatory Democracy: An Experience in West
Bengal, Debjani Sengupta. Poverty and Its Management
in Pakistan, Aqila Khawaja. Globalization, Decentralization
and Micro-Finance: A Study of Self-Help Groups in the
District Burdwan, Rabindranath Bhattacharyya. Role of
Self Help Groups (SHGs) in Promoting Human Rights: A
Sample Study on a Village of North-24 Parganas District,
West Bengal, Sanghamitra Majumdar and Jhumpa Ghosh
Roy. Poverty Eradication through Technology Integration
in Sri Lanka, S.W.S.B. Dasanayaka. Section III: Case Studies:
Making Services Reach Ordinary People—Resolving the
Quagmire of Service Delivery in Nepal, Narendra Raj
Paudel. Capability Approach and the Distribution of Land,
Housing and Access to Metro in the National Capital
Territory of Delhi, Ashok Kumar. Life and Livelihood of
the Poor Children Living in Metropolis Dhaka: Problems,
Prospects and Challenges, Taiabur Rahman. 15. Poverty,
Female Labour Migration and Rural Development: A
Gendered Study Based on Sri Lankan Context, Wasana S.
Handapangoda and M.H. Ajantha Sisira Kumara. Women’s
Participation and Leadership in ICTs: An Action Agenda
for Global Change, Claudia Morrell. Tele-Medicine in
Karnataka Good Practice and Technology in a Public-
Private Partnership, James Warner Björkman and A. Venkat
Raman. Assessment of Implementation of Employment
Guarantee Scheme in India: A Spatial Dimension, Mahi
Pal and S.P. Singh. An Evaluation of Samurdhi Programme
in Sri Lanka (With Reference to Ten Villages in Panadura
Divisional Secretariat) Fernando R. Lalitha S. Decentralized
Planning and Poverty Alleviation: A Case Study of Two
Village Panchayats in Kerala State (India), E.M. Thomas.
Governance, Social Accountability, and Civil Society:
Liberalism Bypassing Politics? Raza Ahmad.
Latest Print 2008 / 352 pp. (Hard Cover) / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 550.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3698-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-635-2 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Public International Law
and Human Rights
(See pages 71–74)
Research Methodology
GUPTA & GUPTA
Research Methodology
MUKUL GUPTA, Professor and Head—MBA at G.L. Bajaj
Institute of Technology and Management, Greater Noida.
DEEPA GUPTA, Professor—MBA at G.L. Bajaj Institute of
Technology and Management, Greater Noida.
This well-organised and lucid text on Research
Methodology is intended to fulfill the felt-need for
an introductory, accessible and student friendly book.
Written with the aim of making the teaching and learning
of research methods and methodology simple, the book
provides theoretical information in an operational manner
about the various methods, techniques and procedures
followed in research.
This book based on the practical experiences of the
authors as researchers, practitioners and teachers
intends to cater to the needs of students of MBA, BBA,
Humanities and Social Sciences. The book will also be of
immense use to the researchers, practicing managers and
public health organisations.
KEY FEATURES
• Contains case studies and sample questionnaires.
• Covers brief knowledge of statistics and its applications
required in research.
• Objective type questions, review questions, sample
question papers and previous years’ examination papers
have been included for brushing up of the knowledge.
• Gives working knowledge of various useful computer
software used in the research analysis such as SPSS,
Excel etc.
• Report writing is explained in the systematic manner
explaining the process, layout, types, mechanics
involved, various principles and precautions to be
taken while writing a good report to make the research
worth.
Contents: Preface. Research Methodology. Research
Process and Problem. Hypothesis. Research Design.
Sampling Design. Data Collection: Methods and Techniques
of Data Collection. Preparation of Questionnaire
and Schedule. Analysis of Data-I. Analysis of Data-II.
Hypothesis Testing. Role of SPSS and Excel in Research.
Report Writing. Appendix. Case Studies. Objective Type
Questions. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 224 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4381-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-309-2 (e-Book)
101
McNABB
Research Methods in Public
Administration and Nonprofit
Management: Quantitative and
Qualitative Approaches, 2nd ed.
DAVID E. McNABB, Professor of Business Administration,
Pacific Lutheran University, Tacoma, Washington, USA.
Designed for both students and practitioners, this text
incorporates the latest thinking in public administration
and nonprofit management. The book integrates both
quantitative and qualitative approaches to research,
and also provides specific instruction in the use of
commonly available statistical software programs such
as Excel and SPSS. Coverage includes such important
topics as research design, specifying research problems,
writing questions and designing questionnaires, designing
and carrying out four classes of qualitative research
approaches, and analyzing both quantitative and qualitative
research data. The book is exceptionally well illustrated,
with plentiful exhibits, tables, figures, and exercises.
CHANGE IN THE SECOND EDITION
• New chapter on how to prepare a research proposal.
• The section on qualitative methodologies has been
expanded to include action research, critical research,
empowerment research, and feminist research models.
• Quantitative methodologies are expanded to include
multivariate and nonparametric statistics.
• The step-by-step instructions on the use of both Excel
and SPSS packages are updated to include their latest
versions. These chapters have been widely acclaimed
for their clarity and usefulness.
Contents: List of Tables, Figures, and Boxes. Preface
to the Second Edition. Introduction. Part 1: Research
Fundamentals—Introduction to Research Methods.
Research Ethics: Doing the Right Thing. The Building Blocks
of Research. Public Administration Research: Theory and
Practice. Research in Nonprofit Organi-zations. Part 2:
Understanding the Research Process—The Eight Steps of
the Research Process. Selecting a Research Topic. Choosing
a Research Design. Putting Together a Research Proposal.
Part 3: Quantitative Research Strategies—Fundamentals
of Quantitative Research. Introduction to Sampling.
Writing Questions and Developing Questionnaires. Part 4:
Quantitative Research Methods—Summarizing Data with
Descriptive Statistics. Using Tables, Charts, and Graphs.
Research Hypotheses. Testing Hypotheses About Two or
More Groups. Testing Relationships with Correlation and
Regression. Experiments and Experimental Design. Non-
parametric Statistics. Exploring Multivariate Statistics.
Conducting Statistical Tests with SPSS. Part 5: Quantitative
Research Strategies and Methods—Introduction to
Qualitative Research. Research Using the Case Study
Approach. Research Using the Grounded Theory Approach.
Research Using the Ethnographic Approach. Critical
Research: Action Research Approaches. Critical Research:
Empowerment and Feminist Models. Part 6: Analysis and
 102 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Interpretation of Qualitative Data—Analyzing Qualitative
Data. Analyzing Texts, Documents, and Artifacts. Part 7:
Preparing the Research Report—Writing the Research
Report. References. Author Index. Subject Index. About
the Author.
Latest Print 2012 / 488 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3669-8 (Print Book)
PANNEERSELVAM
Research Methodology, 2nd ed.
R. PANNEERSELVAM, Professor, Department of Manage-
ment Studies, School of Management, Pondicherry
University, Puducherry.
This comprehensive text designed for MBA, MCom, MA
(Economics), MA (Sociology) and PhD (Management,
Commerce, Economics, and Engineering) courses continues
to give complete account of concepts and statistical tools of
research methodology in its Second Edition. The textbook
also serves as a reference for consultants to carryout
projects/consultancies in industries or service organizations.
DISTINGUISHING FEATURES OF THE BOOK
• Written in an easy to read style
• Each technique is illustrated with sufficient number
of numerical examples
• Gives complete account of statistics and aspects
of research methodology
• Ch. 8 gives complete account of testing of hypotheses
• Design and analysis of experiments, advanced multiva-
riate analysis, multidimensional scaling and conjoint
analysis, algorithmic research, models for industries
and public systems, simulation are unique to this text.
• Graded chapter-end questions
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Introduction of a chapter on SPSS (Chapter 17), is new
to this edition which gives readers an idea to obtain
statistics for different techniques presented in this text.
The different screenshots for different modules of SPSS
applied to suitable example problems on sample session
for data creation, reports, descriptive statistics, tables,
compare means, general linear model, correlation, simple
regression, nonparametric tests, classify, data reduction and
graphs help readers to understand the features of SPSS.
Contents: Preface. Overview of Research Methodology.
Data Collection and Presentation. Review of Basic
Statistical Measures. Design and Analysis of Experiments.
Attitude Measurement and Scales. Probability Distri-
butions. Sampling Methods and Distributions. Tests of
Hypotheses. Nonparametric Tests. Basic Multivariate
Analysis. Advanced Multivariate Analysis. Multi-
dimensional Scaling and Conjoint Analysis. Algorithmic
Research. Models for Industries and Public Systems.
Simulation. Report Writing and Presentation. Introduction
to SPSS. Annexures. Bibliography. Answers. Index.
Latest Print 2020 / 716 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4946-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-81-948848-4-2 (e-book)
TAYLOR, SINHA & GHOSHAL
Research Methodology: A Guide for
Researchers in Management and Social
Sciences
BILL TAYLOR, Formerly a Principal Lecturer at Sheffield
Business School (UK).
GAUTAM SINHA, Professor, Vinod Gupta School of
Management and Professor-in-Charge (Training and
Placement) at Indian Institute of Technology Kharagpur.
TAPOSH GHOSHAL, Assistant General Manager (Academic),
Management Training Institute, SAIL, Ranchi.
Intended to serve as a text for postgraduate students
of commerce, management, and social sciences, and
especially for the first-time researchers, this well-
organized book deals with the variety of research
methods used in management and social sciences, with
particular emphasis on the implementation of these
methods. It offers readers practical guidelines for research
and directs them through all the stages of research—from
identifying a viable research project to the submission of a
dissertation, report, or research article. The text identifies
three dimensions of research methodology—research
strategies, research methods and research data—that
provide a structure for the book.
KEY FEATURES
• Many real-world examples extracted from actual
research projects of students will help the readers
develop their research skills.
• Due attention is given to both quantitative and
qualitative research methodologies in order to help
readers make informed choices about methods.
• Statistical appendices are provided to acquaint readers
with the underlying mathematical concepts involved in
the research methods discussed.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. An Overview of
Research  Methodology. Setting up a Research Project.
Case Studies as a Methodological Strategy. Surveys as
a Methodological Strategy. Experiments as a Metho-
dological Strategy. Action Research as a Methodological
Strategy. Interview Methods. The Use of Questionnaires.
Observational Methods. Documentary Sources. The
Concept of Level of Measurement. Methodology of
Analysing Quantitative Data. Methodology of Analysing
Qualitative Data. Writing About Research. Appendixes—
A. Basic Statistical Measures. B. Significance Tests for Use
with an Experimental Strategy. C. Testing Hypotheses
about the Shape of Distribution. D. Factor Analysis in
Constructing a Likert Scale. E. Analysis of Variance.
F. Basic Elements of Sampling Theory. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 240 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2991-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-868-4 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES 103

Sociology and Social Work  

Fundamentals of Sociology
GOODE
Family, The, 2nd ed.
WILLIAM J. GOODE, Stanford University.
This book, a revision and substantial expansion of a core
introduction to the sociological study of the family, surveys
a great deal of important theory accompanied by an array
of comparative descriptive information and illustration. It
incorporates new material and research findings on key
areas, such as: historical knowledge of the family, women,
evolutionism, sociobiology, kin relations, and a wide
variety of social units—families. It also emphasizes the
complex relations between family systems and the larger
social structure.
Contents: Preface. The Theoretical Importance of The
Family. The Biological Foundations of Family Behavior. The
Processes of Illegitimacy. Mate Selection and Marriage.
Role Relations in Family and Society. Social Processes in
the Extended Household. Kinship Groups and Networks.
Working Wives: Steps Toward Equality in the Society and
the Home. Marital Dissolution. Understanding Family
Change: Theory and Method. How Does Industrialization
Affect the Family? Index.
Latest Print 2017 / 216 pp. / 15.3 × 22.9 cm / ` 175.00
ISBN-978-81-203-0470-3 (Print Book)
Latest Print 2008 / 712 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 650.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3699-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-844-8 (e-Book)
104 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021

Latest Print 2021 / 768 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 650.00

ISBN-978-81-203-4860-8 (Print Book)
Latest Print 2011 / 336 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 250.00 ISBN-978-93-5443-849-3 (e-Book)
ISBN-978-81-203-4449-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-851-6 (e-Book)
Governance

SAHNI & MEDURY (Eds.)

Governance for Development: Issues and
Strategies
PARDEEP SAHNI, Professor and Chairman, Public
Administration at the Indira Gandhi National Open
University (IGNOU), New Delhi.
UMA MEDURY, Reader in the Faculty of Public
Administration, IGNOU, New Delhi.
This well-presented collection with contributions from
academics and administrators reflects the growing concern
towards the present-day practice of governance. It focuses
on the need for Governance for Sustainable Human
Development to manage the country’s social as well as
economic resources leading to better development—
founded on four pillars of Accountability, Transparency,
Predictability, and Participation. It thus calls for unfolding
various issues and devising suitable strategies towards
humane governance through appropriate political,
bureaucratic, economic, and legal reforms.
Highlighting its theme in the initial chapters in the
New Public Management perspective, the book goes
on to unravel the major administrative loopholes in
Indian administration, such as lack of transparency and
accountability, and the stranglehold of corruption, all of
which lead to human deprivation. Later chapters give
a synoptic overview of administrative reforms so far
undertaken in India, and emphasize the effectiveness of
governance in establishing appropriate balance in relative
roles of public, private and civil society organizations,
rights and responsibilities of politicians, bureaucrats and
community, and economic and social justice. The book
closes on a positive note strongly reiterating adminis-
trative re-engineering to meet the challenges of the
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
twenty-first century for ensuring a holistic development
of the country.
Recent and real life happenings infused in the text to
substantiate arguments, make it an interesting reading.
The book will be of immense use to the students and
teachers of public administration, social science, political
science, and those who practise public administration.
It will also be useful to a large number of government
departments—both at the union and the state levels.
Contents: Acknowledgements. About the Editors.
Contributors. Introduction. Governance for Develop-
ment: Key Concerns. Effective Governance: The New
Public Management Perspective. Nexus between
Accountability and Good Governance: Conceptual
and Practical Issues. Good Governance and Pursuit
of Transparency in Administration: The Indian Efforts.
Governance Through Participative Development: The Role
of People’s Movement. Governance for Development:
Corruption. Corruption in Public Service–Then and Now.
Corruption in Public Life. Governance in India: The Issue
of Corruption. Good Governance and the Desideratum
of Sustainable Efficiency: The Indian Experience.
Administrative Reforms in India During 1990s: A Synoptic
View. Decentralization and Women Empowerment at the
Grassroots Level. Re-engineering for Good Governance.
Re-engineering Indian Bureaucracy to Meet the 21st
Century Challenges. Terrorism, Insurgency and Subversion
in India: Implications for Governance and Development.
List of Contributors. Index.
Latest Print 2002 / 176 pp. (Hard cover) / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2204-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-694-9 (e-Book)
VAYUNANDAN & MATHEW (Eds.)
Good Governance: Initiatives in India
E. VAYUNANDAN, Reader, Public Administration, Indira
Gandhi National Open University, New Delhi.
DOLLY MATHEW, Reader, Public Administration, Indira
Gandhi National Open University, New Delhi.
This edited volume focuses on the issues and strategies
of good governance. It takes up the problems and
strategies pertaining to the delivery of public services in
India. The emphasis is on how to make the public service
delivery in India, efficient and effective. The questions of
accountability, transparency, equity, efficiency, effective-
ness, participation responsiveness, decentralisation, and
ethics are first dealt with, being of vital importance in
today’s governance of public service delivery. The book
then discusses a threefold strategy to address these
issues:
• The first is based on reforming administration, which
involves restructuring, reinvention, realignment,
reengineering, and rethinking.
• The second is based on the application of Information
and Communications Technology and e-governance in
public service delivery.
105
• The third strategy is based on decentralisation through
people’s participation, interactive policy making, and
privatisation.
In addition, the book highlights various initiatives
undertaken in India for effective public service delivery
and proposes an action plan for an effective and
responsive government.
The book will be of immense use to the students,
teachers, and practitioners of public administration, and
to a large number of government departments at the
union and state levels.
Contents: Preface. Contributors. Introduction. Develop-
ment and Reforms in Good Governance with Special
Reference to India. Governance for Development:
Issues and Strategies. Bureaucracy: Changing Roles and
Relationships A Transformative Agenda. Responsive
Administration of the Criminal Justice System in India.
E-governance: Options and Opportunities. Achieving
Excellence Through E-governance. Information Techno-
logy and Governance. E-governance by Information
Technology: Initiatives of a Metropolitan City. Issues and
Strategies in Good Governance with Special Reference to
Karnataka. FRIENDS: An E-governance Project of Kerala.
Governance for Development: New Initiative Grams at
Pilot Project, Orissa. E-Governance for Improved Service:
Choices Made by Tamil Nadu. Perspectives on Democratic
Decentralized Governance for Rural Development in
Mizoram. Lessons in Organising Self Help: A Case Study
of the Sukhomajri Water Resources Management Project.
Index.
Latest Print 2003 / 156 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-2203-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-644-4 (e-Book)
Indian Social Structure
GANGULY & MOINUDDIN
Samakalin Bhartiya Samaj
(Contemporary Indian Society)
(in Bengali), 2nd ed.
RAMANUJ GANGULY & SYED ABDUL HAFIZ MOINUDDIN.
This book presents a detailed introduction to Indian
society as it has existed from the ancient times right up to
the modern age. All major aspects, be it social structures,
institutions, daily life, processes of change or issues of
current importance, have been covered comprehensively.
The book is primarily meant for students of B.A. (Hons.)
and B.A. (General) courses in Sociology of all universities
in West Bengal. It will also be highly useful for students
of M.A. (Sociology) of these universities, as well as
professionals in the field of social service in West Bengal.
Contents: Preface. Indian Society Through Ages. Unity in
Diversity: Characteristics of Indian Society. Indian Society:
Classical View. Indian Society: Day to Day Living. Indian
 106 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021

Varna System. Indian Ashrama System. Concept of Dharma Social Movements. Politics and Society. Bibliography. Key
in India. Concept of Karma and Cycle of Rebirth. Concept Terms and Purport. Propounders. Index.
of Purushartha. Social Stratification: Basis and Form.
Indian Caste System. Class in Indian Society. Structure Latest Print 2018 / 260 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 450.00
and Composition of Indian Society: Village and Town. ISBN-978-81-203-4992-6 (Print Book)
Composition of Indian Society: Tribes. Weaker Section: ISBN-978-93-90669-39-4 (e-Book)
Dalits. Other Backward Classes. Indian Women. Minorities.
Population Profile. Marriage: Hindu Marriage. Muslim
Marriage and Family. Indian Family: Major Features,
Functions and Structure. Major Religions of India and Their
Impact. Indian Social Problems. Processes of Social Change.
Land Reforms and Decentralised Panchayat System.
Sanskritisation. Westernisation. Urbanisation. Planned
Change: Directions and Major Schemes. Bibliography.
Latest Print 2021 / 508 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 795.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5282-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-725-0 (e-Book)

Political Sociology

ROY
Society and Politics in India:
Understanding Political Sociology
SHEFALI ROY is an Associate Professor and Head,
Department of Political Science, Patna Women’s College,
Patna University, Patna.
Politics cannot grow in isolation; at the same time society
learns from the changing ethos of polity. A relatively
young subject, Political Sociology tries to seek research
excellence, in its process of evolution.
This book on Political Sociology deals with different
variables of society which influence various facets
of political dynamics. It also analyzes attitude and
behavioural pattern of the public who act as political
actors. As a branch of political science, the book draws
attention to the very nature of this inter-disciplinary
study. All the chapters are conceptualized to strengthen
the bond between the polity and the society and vice-
versa. This book is an attempt to widen the frontier of
political science with an empirical approach.
Intended for the undergraduate and postgraduate
students of Political Science and Sociology, the book will
enrich the students indulged in research works and those
who are preparing for the Civil Services examinations
as well.
Contents: List of Figures. List of Tables. Preface.
Acknowledgements. Political Sociology: Origin, Nature
and Scope. Approaches and Methods to the Study of
Political Sociology. Political Socialization. Political Culture.
Political Participation. Political Development. Political
Modernization. Political Recruitment. Elites and Society.
Bureaucracy Society and Polity. Political Communication.
Power Authority Legitimacy. Political Change Conflict and
Revolution. Political Efficacy Mobility and Leadership. New
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Latest Print 2015 / 1048 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5122-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-843-1 (e-Book)
Social Change in India
107
Latest Print 2019 / 656 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 550.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5232-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-852-3 (e-Book)
Social Psychology
SINGH
Social Psychology, 2nd ed.
ARUN KUMAR SINGH, has been Professor and Head,
Postgraduate Department of Psychology, Patna University,
Bihar.
This comprehensive book is an earnest endeavour to
acquaint the reader with a thorough understanding of
all important basic concepts, methods and facts of social
psychology. The exhaustive treatment of the topics, in a
cogent manner, enables the students to grasp the subject
in an easy-to-understand manner.
Logically organised into 17 chapters, the book commences
with the introduction of social psychology, research
methods, theoretical foundations, self and identity, social
cognitions, perception and attribution, socialisation, social
attitude and persuasion, and goes on to provide in-depth
coverage of stereotyping, prejudices and discrimination,
 108 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
behaviours in groups, social norms and conformity
behaviour, leadership and social power, interpersonal
attraction and relationship, social influence, aggression,
prosocial behaviour, language and communication, along
with applications of social psychology.
The theme of the book incorporates latest concepts and
researches, especially Indian researches and findings, thus
making the book more understandable and applicable in
Indian context.
Written in an engaging style, the book is intended for
the undergraduate and postgraduate students of social
psychology and sociology/social works.
HIGHLIGHTS OF THE BOOK
• The text encompasses adequate content of the subject
required at the university level as well as for UGC/JRF
examination.
• Every chapter begins with learning objectives, followed
by key terms and ends with summary and review
questions.
• The text emphasises clarity (avoids technical language)
to enhance its effectiveness.
• Objective-type questions given at the end of the book
test the students’ understanding of the concepts
• Glossary is provided at the end of the book to provide
reference and at-a-glance understanding.
Contents: Preface. Introducing Social Psychology. Research
Methods in Social Psychology. Theoretical Foundations
of Modern Social Psychology. Self and Identity. Social
Cognition, Social Perception and Attribution. Socialisation.
Social Attitudes and Persuasion. Stereotyping, Prejudice
and Discrimination. Behaviours in Group. Social Norms
and Conformity Behaviour. Leadership and Social
Power. Interpersonal Attraction and Relationship. Social
Influence. Aggression and Social Violence. Prosocial
Behaviour: Altruistic and Helping Behaviour. Language
and Communication. Applications of Social Psychology.
Objective-type Questions. Glossary. References. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 752 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 695.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-25-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-26-5 (e-Book)
Social Research Methods
PANNEERSELVAM
Research Methodology, 2nd ed.
R. PANNEERSELVAM, Professor, Department of Manage-
ment Studies, School of Management, Pondicherry
University, Puducherry.
This comprehensive text designed for MBA, MCom, MA
(Economics), MA (Sociology) and PhD (Management,
Commerce, Economics, and Engineering) courses continues
to give complete account of concepts and statistical
tools of research methodology in its Second Edition. The
textbook also serves as a reference for consultants to
carryout projects/consultancies in industries or service
organizations.
DISTINGUISHING FEATURES OF THE BOOK
• Written in an easy to read style
• Each technique is illustrated with sufficient number of
numerical examples
• Gives complete account of statistics and aspects of
research methodology
• Chapter 8 gives complete account of testing of hypotheses
• Design and analysis of experiments, advanced multi-
variate analysis, multidimensional scaling and conjoint
analysis, algorithmic research, models for industries
and public systems, simulation are unique to this text.
• Graded chapter-end questions
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Introduction of a chapter on SPSS (Chapter 17), is new
to this edition which gives readers an idea to obtain
statistics for different techniques presented in this text. The
different screenshots for different modules of SPSS applied
to suitable example problems on sample session for data
creation, reports, descriptive statistics, tables, compare
means, general linear model, correlation, simple regression,
nonparametric tests, classify, data reduction and graphs
help readers to understand the features of SPSS.
Contents: Preface. Overview of Research Methodology.
Data Collection and Presentation. Review of Basic Statistical
Measures. Design and Analysis of Experiments. Attitude
Measurement and Scales. Probability Distributions.
Sampling Methods and Distributions. Tests of Hypotheses.
Nonparametric Tests. Basic Multivariate Analysis.
Advanced Multivariate Analysis. Multi-dimensional Scaling
and Conjoint Analysis. Algorithmic Research. Models for
Industries and Public Systems. Simulation. Report Writing
and Presentation. Introduction to SPSS. Annexures.
Bibliography. Answers. Index.
Latest Print 2020 / 716 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 450.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4946-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-81-948848-4-2 (e-Book)
Social Work
PATIL
Community Organization and
Development: An Indian Perspective
ASHA RAMAGONDA PATIL, Associate Professor, Department
of Continuing and Adult Education and Extension Work,
SNDT Women’s University, Mumbai.
In a democratic country like India, community organi-
zation and development has a great significance. This
concise yet comprehensive book explains the basic
concepts of community organization and development
and other related issues in an accessible manner.
The book deals with different aspects of community orga-
nization and describes in detail the process of community
development. It dwells on the concept of community
mobilization covering needs, benefits and challenges
related to it and explains different models of community
organization for bringing social change. Besides, the book
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
focuses on conflict management in a constructive way
and suggests that conflicts, if dealt proactively, can bring
positive changes and harmony among people. Finally,
it concentrates on models and strategies used in social
action and different roles of the community worker while
working with the people. Examples, especially from the
Indian situation, are given to clarify the topics discussed.
Chapter-end questions will help the student to understand
the subject in a better way.
The book is intended for the undergraduate and post-
graduate students of Social Work. Besides, professionals
in the field will also find the book quite useful.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Historical
Perspective of Community Organization. Community
Organization and Development. Community Mobilization.
Models of Community Organization. Understanding the
Community through Participatory Appraisal. Holding
Meetings in the Community. Conflict Management in
Community Organization. Power Structure and Leadership.
Social Action. Roles of a Community Worker. Records.
Annexure: Saul David Alinsky (1909–1972). References.
Index.
Latest Print 2013 / 232 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4694-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-573-7 (e-Book)
RAMACHANDRAN, et al.
Survey Research in Public Health
Late P. RAMACHANDRAN, was a research consultant,
Valmar International, Applied Behavioral Sciences
Research, Mumbai.
C.A.K. YESUDIAN, Dean, School of Health Systems Studies,
Tata Institute of Social Sciences, Mumbai.
K.R. THANKAPPAN, Professor and Head, Achuta Menon
Centre for Health Science Studies, Sree Chitra Tirumal
Institute for Medical Sciences and Technology, Kerala.
P. SANKARA SHARMA, Professor (Biostatistics), Achuta
Menon Centre for Health Science Studies, Sree Chitra
Tirumal Institute for Medical Sciences and Technology,
Kerala.
Health education plays a pivotal role in creating awareness
among the masses, and survey research in public health
forms an integral part of the subject. This book is a step-
by-step study guide to educate the researchers and the
students on how to conduct health surveys and prepare
the reports.
The book begins with a discussion on health research
and its importance. It then moves on to the sensitive, yet
most important health research areas like Child Health,
Adolescent Health, Women Health, Communicable
diseases and Non-communicable diseases, by citing
their sample reports. The examples are cited to explain
the methods of data collection, research strategies and
problem formulation strategies, besides illustrating the
methodologies of sample design, analysis design, and
field data collection.
109
The book also helps in learning the advanced tools to
conduct researches like SPSS statistics software and
EpiInfo software. The concluding chapter shows how to
write a report skillfully and in an organised manner.
The book is intended for the postgraduate students of
Public Health, Management, and Social Work.
KEY FEATURES
• Easy language and simple presentation
• Sample Examples taken from the Real-Life cases
• Chapter-end Questions to judge Students knowledge on
the subject
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Introduction.
Problem Formulation. Research Strategy. Methods of
Data Collection. Sample Design. Analysis Design. Field
Data Collection. Computer Data Processing and Analysis
Using SPSS. Computer Data Processing and Analysis Using
EpiInfo. Report Writing. Planning for Action. References.
Index.
Latest Print 2012 / 152 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4595-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-624-6 (e-Book)
Womens Studies
KAUL & SINGH (Eds.)
New Paradigms for Gender Inclusivity:
Theory and Best Practices
ASHA KAUL, Professor, Communication Area, Indian
Institute of Management Ahmedabad. She is also a
founding Chairperson of Gender Resource Centre, IIMA.
MANJARI SINGH, Associate Professor, Personnel and
Industrial Relations Area, Indian Institute of Management
Ahmedabad.
Diversity, inclusivity, and gender mainstreaming have
today become the buzzwords in the corporate arena and
civil society. The reason is increased business requirement
for diverse competencies and skill sets. Hence, the need
to have a mixed gender group has become a business
imperative. Furthermore, there is heightened awareness
that women are equally competent and talented, if
not more, than men in various professional jobs. With
increasing job opportunities, tapping and retaining this
talent through initiation of various programmes within
organizations has shown positive results. New Paradigms
for Gender Inclusivity: Theory and Best Practices scripts
some of the practices, in the form of case studies,
which organizations have followed to enhance gender
inclusiveness. These real-life case studies highlight the
role played by organizations in facilitating the progression
of women which indirectly has helped in their growth,
development and recognition of being a forerunner in
promoting diversity.
The book is divided into three parts. Parts I and III begin
with a theoretician’s perspective on gender inclusiveness
and gender mainstreaming in India, respectively and close
 110 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
with an academic detailing on reasons and causes for the
same. Statistical data and models in the last chapter for
the two parts validate the corporate, governmental and
civil society attempts at introducing creative yet simple
methodologies to make gender diversity and inclusion
a reality in the workplace. In Part I, six case studies on
the following companies: Broadridge, IBM Daksh, Infosys,
Shell India, Jamshedpur Utilities and Services Company
Ltd.: A Tata Enterprise, and Wipro have been presented
which discuss the need for gender diversity and
inclusiveness, drivers and barriers, and showcase measures
adopted to overcome those barriers. Five cases: SEWA,
Indian Police, Sakti, Indian Railways, and RUDI have been
presented in Part III which highlight tasks accomplished
by women in their area of expertise, marketing
strategies adopted by the civil society to promote goods
produced by women, sensitization workshops to address
harassment, and training workshops. Part II (Interlude)
is a break from organizational cases and shares some
experiences, angst, insights and observations on gender
diversity and inclusion through a narration, a poem and
a reflective piece.
This book on case studies will be extremely useful
for postgraduate students pursuing gender studies in
Management Institutes, students working on gender related
dissertation topics and corporate houses keen to learn from
best practices of other organizations. Additionally, it would
benefit readers who wish to learn about organizational
policies and practices for gender inclusivity.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. List of Contri-
butors. Part I: Gender Inclusiveness in Corporate India—
Scenarios for Gender Inclusivity in Corporate India.
Ardhanareshwar: Unison of Ultimate Reality. Building
an Inclusive Workplace: An IBM Daksh Perspective. The
Business Case for Gender Inclusion in the Indian Context.
Diversity and Inclusion ... Not Just a Nice Thing to Do. I
am Ready to Resume My Career. Gender Inclusivity at
Wipro. Gender Inclusivity in Corporate India: A Business
Imperatives Based Framework. Part II: Interlude—Alisha:
A Case of Assumptions and Presumptions; Work Dance;
State of Indian Women. Part III: Gender Mainstreaming
in India—Gender Mainstreaming. Building Business
Organizations of the Home Based Workers: Women
Artisans of SEWA. Policing and Gender Sensitivity.
Changing the Gender Paradigm: Puppet to Goddess?
On the Gender Equality Track: Vijayawada Division,
South Central Railway. Ensuring Food Security for the Rural
Poor. Revisiting Capabilities Approach to Review Gender
Mainstreaming in Work-life Context in India. Index.
Latest Print 2012 / 256 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4513-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-310-8 (e-Book)
SARKAR
Gender Disparity in India:
Unheard Whimpers
SIULI SARKAR, Principal and Professor of Political Science,
Lady Brabourne College, Calcutta University, West Bengal.
Radical ideologies, revolutionary movements, political
upheavals, legal frameworks and many such initiatives
have been taken up to prove a Woman’s Equality, and
uplift her status all over the world. Though the voices
raised are loud and are heard; but the moot question is
whether the word ‘Feminism,’ in its true sense, has been
understood and implemented in the ‘still very much’
patriarchal society of today. The undercurrent answer
to this question is echoed and retorted in this book on
Gender studies.
Elaborating on the Indian woman, this book comments
on the condition of women, from ancient India to the
modern day India—her transforming status; the laws
devised to protect her; social taboos surmounting her;
and the changing social patterns that are being brought
to nullify the gender differences—be it at home, within
an office and within the society.
The book begins with a feminist approach to politics,
movements led by the feminists, their treatment in
literature, autobiographies, their contribution towards
economic sectors, their health, education, e-governance,
and role towards environment.
A dedicated chapter elaborates on women in Tagore’s
work, with original text excerpts in Bengali and their
literal translations. The final chapter deals with Indian
women and their tryst with crime day in and out; the
unchanged age-old laws which are in need of serious
review; and the role of media and society in providing
them the due accreditation of ‘being someone’.
The book is intended for the students of Gender Studies,
Political Science, English, Sociology, and Media Studies.
Contents: Preface. Feminist Approach to Politics.
Participation of Women in Movements: India Now and
Then. Women’s Participation in Politics: The Case of
Indian Local Self Government. Women and Literature:
Some Female Writers and Female Characters in Bengali
Literature. Woman in the Hands of Man: Tagore’s Ten
Female Characters. Diaries and Memoirs: Autobiography
of Rassundari Dasi. Females in the Economic Sectors:
Hawkers, Labourers, Entrepreneurs. Female Education in
India in the 21st Century Continuity and Change. Gender
Disparities in Health: An Indian Scenario. E-Governance
in India Explicit Gender Gaps. Environment and Indian
Women. Women—Crime, Law, Media, Society. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 360 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 425.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5251-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-522-5 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
Journalism/Mass Communication
Communication Skills
BASU
Technical Writing
B.N. BASU, Dean (Research), College of Engineering
and Technology, Lodhipur, Moradabad and Consultant
at Microwave Tube Research and Development Centre,
Bangalore.
This book deals with technical writing with an emphasis
on how to write a thesis for a university degree or a
research paper for publication in a journal. It teaches
students, step by step through several examples, how
to plan, organize, draft, develop and prepare such a
document for presentation.
The book gives, besides usage in grammar, a precise
method of preparing a document simply, clearly and
concisely, and organizing it by going into the details
of its front matter, main text and end matter and its
subdivisions, without missing the finer details like
figures, tables, equations, references, etc. It describes
how to compile and locate the original sources and view
the specific topic to be researched in the background
of earlier contributions. It addresses issues related to
identifying such authors and their writings through their
names and affiliations, and abstracts of the work, etc.
Some peripheral issues such as certificate and copyright
have also been discussed.
The book will be useful to students, engineers and
scientists alike, helping them break the ice by removing
their confusion, bewilderment and hesitation in technical
writing. It would be a boon to the beginners, as it would
help them understand quickly many of the steps of
the technique of technical writing instead of learning
the hard way from long experience, which the author
has shared in this book with the prospective readers.
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Acknowledgements.
Introduction. Motivation and Requirements. Organization.
Basic Elements. Identification of the Author and His
Writing. Chapters and Sections. Text-Support Materials.
Numbering of Elements. Peripherals. Technical
Communication. Appendix I: A Typical Specimen of a
Thesis. Appendix II: A Typical Specimen of a Research
Paper. Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 168 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 325.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3334-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-166-1 (e-Book)
111
DASH
Professional Learner’s Dictionary of
Spoken English
RAJENDRA KUMAR DASH, Associate Professor, Gandhi
Institute of Engineering and Technology, Gunupur, Odisha.
He is also a life member of Liguistic Society of India and
Comparative Literature Association of India.
Flipping through a dictionary pages will now be having a
new meaning with our Professional Learner’s Dictionary
of Spoken English. Besides making a user aware of the
meaning of a term, this book educates skillfully how to
speak effective English by teaching the key terms/phrases
in order to communicate flawlessly.
Conceptualised and conceived for the ESL (English as a
Second Language) learners, i.e., whose mother tongue is
not English, but who are eager to speak Real English like
the native speakers of English, this book attempts to go
beyond the traditional approaches to Spoken English, and
takes a communicative approach.
This dictionary contains hundreds of idioms, sayings and
phrases which are used in conversations in both formal
and informal situations. Conversational ability, fluency in
speaking, situation-specific (such as welcome speech) and
format-based speaking (such as participating in a group
discussion) are some other features of the book that will
help a learner pick up the language effortlessly with ease.
The book will be of immense utility for the students of
Engineering, Management, Communication and all those
for whom expressing in words is a barrier, and who want
to learn English and succeed in Professional and Personal
life.
KEY FEATURES
• Practical English Usage has been exemplified with
suitable Examples.
• Loaded with sample conversations, models sentences
for carrying out major functions in English (such as
expressing various emotions), and collocations for
developing fluency.
• Demonstrates the difference between Formal and
Informal English.
• 50 Sets of Exercises and 1000+ Questions for Practice.
• Key to the Exercises also included.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. How to Use This
Dictionary. A to Z. Exercises. Key to the Exercises.
Latest Print 2016 / 608 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 795.00
ISBN-978-81-203-5225-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-081-7 (e-Book)
 112 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
GANGAL
Practical Course for Developing Writing
Skills in English, A
J.K. GANGAL, Director of the Centre for Creativity and
Human Resource Development (CCHRD), Delhi.
Today, more than ever before, there is a realization that
communicating properly, especially in writing, is essential
for all the job aspirants as well as those employees—
budding managers and others—eager to build up their
career. Taking this scenario into account, this book equips
the reader with the ability to learn and enhance the
writing skills in English.
From fundamentals of grammar to precis, paragraph
and essay writing, this book dwells on all aspects of the
language besides listing the words (both new and old) to
enhance one’s word power, and the foreign words used in
the English language.
Divided into eight sections, the book describes eight
effective tools to master the art of writing. The book
begins with the basics of writing, and it then goes to
give a careful analysis of functional grammar, vocabulary,
common errors committed and their rectifications. Finally,
the book showcases the intricacies of formal and informal
writings and creative writing to make a learner proficient
in these areas. Each section is supported with simple
examples, and easy-to-perform Practice Exercises along
with their answers.
The book is intended for the undergraduate students (both
regular and correspondence courses) of all universities,
and higher secondary (plus 2) students of all boards. The
book will also be beneficial for the students appearing
for the competitive examinations and interviews as well
as for the general reader who wishes to improve his/her
English writing skills.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Part I: Learning
to Write—The Writing Process. Controlled and Guided
Composition. Part II: Functional Grammar—Parts of
Speech: A Quick Review. Subject–Verb Agreement.
Determiners. Revisiting Tenses. Speech. Active and
Passive Direct—A Review. Conditionals. Modals. Part
III: Common Errors and Their Rectification—Common
Errors and Their Rectification. Part IV: Working with
Words—Vocabulary Enrichment. Methods and Strategies
of Vocabulary Enrichment. Synonyms and Antonyms.
Prefixes and Suffixes. One Word For and Odd Word Out.
Frequently Used Foreign Words and Phrases. Hymonym:
The Problem Words. Phrasal Verbs and Idioms. Part V:
Composition Paragraph Writing—Writing a Paragraph.
Writing a Free Composition [Writing an Essay]. Part VI:
Mechanics of Writing—Graphics. Spelling. Punctuation
and Capitalization. Part VII: Writing with a Purpose—
Writing Personal Letters. Writing Official/Business/Formal
Letters. Writing Applications and Résumé/CV. Writing for
Official Meetings. Making a Diary Entry. Note-making
and Summarizing. Abstracting and Summarizing. Précis
Writing. Message Writing. Letter to the Editor. Lodging a
Police Complaint. Writing a Book Review. Report Writing.
Writing a Memorandum (Memo). Advertisements and
Notices. Writing for Examinations. Part VIII: Creative
Writing—Figures of Speech. ABC of Creative Writing.
Promoting Creativity and Creative Writing. Writing a
Research Paper/Term Paper/Dissertation/Thesis. Drawing
the Curtains. Index.
Latest Print 2015 / 380 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4287-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-369-6 (e-Book)
GANGAL
Practical Course in Effective English
Speaking Skills, A
J.K. GANGAL, Director of the Centre for Creativity and
Human Resource Development (CCHRD), Delhi, is a well-
known ELT expert.
A sequel to the author’s well received book A Practical
Course in Spoken English, this comprehensive yet compact
book provides a practical course for enhancing one’s
English speaking skills. Divided into six parts and 44
chapters, the book in Part I—The Knowledge Paradigm: The
What and Why of Effective Speaking—discusses, among
others, about phonetics and phonology, the phonemes,
and stress and intonation. Part II—The Skill Paradigm A—
Public Speaking Skills—covers such areas as using the 4Rs
for effective speaking, combating stage fear, using audio-
visual aids, and non-verbal communication. Part III—The
Skill Paradigm B—Communicating with People—deals with
such topics as making effective telephone calls, celebrating
teacher’s day, expressing gratitude, participating in
group discussions, and participating in TV/radio debate.
Part IV—Further Strengthening Your Communication
Skills—is devoted to a study of reinforcing the reader’s
vocabulary through such means as using phrasal
verbs, linking words, consulting the Ready Reference
Wordbook, and frequently used foreign words and phrases.
The final two parts—Part V, The Desire to Achieve:
Getting Motivated, and Part VI, Effective English Speaking
Skills in Action—provide the meaning and techniques
of self-motivation, evaluating daily progress, besides
giving some memorable speeches delivered by great
speakers like Pandit Jawaharlal Nehru, US Presidents
Kennedy and Lincoln, and the civil rights activist, Martin
Luther King.
The book, written in an accessible and student-friendly
manner, is meant for anyone who possesses a fair amount
of English speaking skills but wishes to further enhance
those skills. Undergraduate students of different disciplines
and even plus two students should find the book quite
useful and interesting. As acquiring communication skills
is a must in today’s extremely competitive world, this
book would do wonders to the student as well as the lay
reader.
Contents: Preface. Part I: The Knowledge Paradigm—
The What and Why of Effective Speaking—Why Do You
Need to Speak Effectively? Effective Speaking–Meaning
and Constituents. Some Myths about Effective English
Speaking. English Phonetics and Phonology—The Sounds
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
of English. The Phonemes. Stress and Intonation. Part II:
The Skill Paradigm—A Public Speaking Skills—Using 4Rs
for Effective Speaking. How to Achieve Effective Public
Speaking Skills. Combating Stage Fear. Using Audio-Visual
Aids. Handling Questions from Audience. Non-Verbal
Communication—The Body Language. Part III: The Skill
Paradigm—B Communicating with People—Talking on the
Phone. Congratulating People. Farewell Function for the
Principal. Offering Condolences. Replying to Felicitations
and Thanking. Celebrating Teacher’s Day. Celebrating
Valentine’s Day. Expressing Gratitude. Expressing Admiration
and Offering Compliments. Expressing Disapproval and
Displeasure. Seeing People Off. Participating in Group
Discussions (GDs). Responding to Criticism and Negative
Remarks. Participating in Interactive TV/Radio Debate.
Interacting with the Media. Communicating with
Your Boss. Negotiating for a Lasting Gain. Proposing
a Vote of Thanks. Part IV: Further Strengthening Your
Communication Skills—Phrasal Verbs Frequently Used for
Effective Speaking. Additional Expressions for Acquiring
Effective English Speaking Skills. Linking Words. Using
One Word for Group of Words. Personal Interview. Words
Often Mispronounced. Your Ready Reference Wordbook.
Frequently Used Foreign Words and Phrases. Part V:
The Desire To Achieve Getting Motivated—Meaning and
Techniques for Self-Motivation. Evaluating Daily Progress.
Drawing the Curtains. Part VI: Effective English Speaking
Skills in Action—Some Memorable Speeches from World
History. Some Good Anecdotes. Some Thought-Provoking
Quotes and Epigrams.
Latest Print 2021 / 340 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 595.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4584-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-370-2 (e-Book)
KONAR
Communication Skills for Professionals,
2nd ed.
NIRA KONAR, Assistant Professor of English and Head
of the Department of Basic Sciences and Humanities,
College of Engineering and Management, Kolaghat
(affiliated to WBUT).
In today’s competitive and globalized world, communi-
cation has become an essential tool for everyone—be
they students, academics or professionals. For techno-
crats and professionals, it becomes all the more necessary
to acquire good communication skills as they have to
communicate effectively with all their business and
professional colleagues. This book on Communication
Skills for Professionals, now in its Second Edition, strives
to equip the students of engineering and technology with
the requisite knowledge of effective communication.
Divided into seven parts, this compact and student-friendly
text discusses the various aspects of language such as
vocabulary, grammar, verbs, phrasal verbs, voices, tenses,
transformation and synthesis of sentences. Besides,
the book gives a clear analysis of such skills as writing,
reading, listening and public speaking. Finally, the book
ends with means of effective communication, business
113
communication, situational dialogues, public speaking
skills, body language, and group discussions (GDs).
The book which is suffused with plenty of examples and
skillfully designed questions, is primarily intended as a
textbook for the first-year engineering students of West
Bengal University of Technology (WBUT) for their core
course on English Language and Communication. It is
activity based and classroom tested and would be highly
useful also for B.Tech./BE students across the country.
WHAT’S NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A new chapter on Business Communication
• New sections on Business Talk and Meetings
• Gives the characteristics of a good speaker
• Has more indepth study of listening and reading skills.
Contents: Preface. PART I: Introduction—Vocabulary.
PART II: Grammar—Sentences. Prepositions. Verbs,
Phrasal Verbs, Parallel Structure and Verb Forms. Active
and Passive Voice. Direct and Indirect Speech. Tenses.
Short Form Responses. Question Tags. Transformation
of Sentences. Synthesis of Sentences. Rectifying
Grammatical Errors. PART III: Writing Skills—Technical
Writing. Report Writing. Memos. Precis Writing. Essay
Writing. PART IV: Comprehension—Reading Compre-
hension. PART V: Listening and Reading Skills—Listening
Skills. Reading Skills. PART VI: Communication, Public
Speaking, Situational Dialogues, Making Effective
Telephone Calls and Body Language—Communication.
Business Communication. Public Speaking Skills.
Situational Dialogues. Making Effective Telephone Calls.
Body Language. PART VII: Conclusion—Group Discussion
(GD). Bibliography. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 224 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4420-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-462-4 (e-Book)
KONAR
English Language Laboratories:
A Comprehensive Manual
NIRA KONAR, Assistant Professor of English and Head of
the Department of Basic Sciences and Humanities, College
of Engineering and Management, Kolaghat (affiliated to
WBUT).
Today, acquiring English language skills has become so
essential, especially for those who are looking for new
jobs in reputed organizations as well as for the practising
professionals. Many engineering students, even though
they have adequate knowledge of their subject, are
unable to express themselves well in English. Taking
this into account, engineering colleges/institutes have
introduced exclusive English Language Laboratories where
students are drilled in the practical aspects of the English
language.
This compact and comprehensive book is a step-by-
step practical guide to students, telling them how to
prepare technical reports and how to acquire the basic
communication skills—listening, speaking, reading and
writing. The book deals with conversation, situational
 114 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
dialogues and role plays, and Group Discussions (GDs). It
also gives detailed discussion about Interviews—step-by-
step preparation, practical and psychological preparation,
the dos and don’ts for interview—besides dealing
with different kinds of interviews: telephonic, video-
conferencing, and others. In addition, the text stresses
the importance of researching the organization, and salary
negotiations. Finally, the book shows the students how to
make powerpoint presentations (PPTs), the structure of
presentation and using audio visuals.
This activity based, skill-oriented, learner centred book
is designed according to the WBUT syllabus on Technical
Report Writing and Language Laboratory Practice for the
B.Tech. students. However, it would be equally useful for
B.Tech./B.E. students across the country.
Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements. Introduction.
Part A: Technical Report Writing—Technical Report
Writing. Part B: Language Laboratory Practice—Need
for and Working of Language Laboratory. Conversation
Practice Sessions. Group Discussions. Job Interviews.
Presentations. Competitive Examinations. Bibliography.
Latest Print 2011 / 248 pp. / 21.6 × 27.8 cm / ` 225.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4342-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-461-7 (e-Book)
PUSHP LATA & KUMAR
Communicate or Collapse:
A Handbook of Effective Public
Speaking, Group Discussions and
Interviews
PUSHP LATA, Assistant Professor, Languages Group and
nucleus member, Public and Media Relations Unit, Birla
Institute of Technology and Science (BITS), Pilani, Rajasthan.
SANJAY KUMAR, Consultant, Communication and Soft
Skills Development Training, Triumphant Institute of
Management Education (T.I.M.E.), Jaipur.
Effective communication is of immense significance to
all organizations as the professional world thrives on
its capacity to be articulate and expressive, innovative
and improvising. The book, based on the vast and
variegated experience of the authors gathered while
training thousands of aspiring professionals, discusses
how to hone the career management skills such as writing
good resumés, presenting oneself in job interviews, and
making a good impression in group discussions.
The text explains in detail all the elements of
communication, for example, different types of speeches,
group discussions and interviews. The book also deals
with the art of developing a speech in a planned manner,
preparing an outline, and writing catchy introductions
and emphatic conclusions. In addition, it shows how
to combat nervousness in a scientific manner, and use
microphones and lecterns.
Intended primarily for courses in public speaking,
communicative English and managerial communication,
this practical text should also be of great utility and
worth to students who have to appear for civil services
examination at the interview and those pursuing
professional courses in their group discussion part. Finally,
it would be of help to all those who wish to engage
themselves in debates and public speaking.
Contents: From Authors’ Desk. Photo Credits. Part
I: Fundamentals of Effective Public Speaking—Public
Speaking: An Overview. Combating Nervousness. Listening
Effectively. Using Body and Voice to Communicate.
Part II: Preparing, Organizing and Delivering the
Contents—Preparing and Organizing the Message. Sizing
up Your Audience. Preparing an Outline. Using Audio-
Visual Aids. Supporting Material for Speeches. Part III:
Speaking to a Large Group—Casting Effective Introduction
and Conclusion. Speaking on Special Occasions.
Speaking to Inform. Persuading without Pushing. Using
Humour and Wit. Speeches for Analysis and Discussion.
Part IV: Public Speaking for CarEer Advancement—
Placing Mind over Matters: Interviews. Shoring up
in Group Discussion. Appendices—A: Sounds of English.
B: Sample Interviews. C: Sample Group Discussion. Index.
Latest Print 2011 / 304 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3323-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-163-0 (e-Book)
PUSHP LATA & KUMAR
Communicate to Conquer:
A Handbook of Group Discussions and
Job Interviews (DVD Included)
PUSHP LATA, Assistant Professor, Languages Group
and nucleus member, Public and Media Relations Unit,
Birla Institute of Technology and Science (BITS), Pilani,
Rajasthan.
SANJAY KUMAR, Consultant, Communication and Soft
Skills Development Training, Triumphant Institute of
Management Education (T.I.M.E.), Jaipur.
Every good student’s dream is to get into the best
professional course—management, computer, law or any
other—and every graduate’s and postgraduate’s dream
is to get the best job possible—in terms of both
remuneration and reputation of the company. And for
these, good performance in Group Discussions (GDs)
and Interviews is so essential. What’s more, even if a
manager or a senior professional wants to go up the
ladder, he/she has to master the art of communication.
This compact and concise book shows how the reader
can excel in group discussions and interviews—all these
with an accompanying DVD.
This book gives the tools and techniques for conducting
and preparing Group Discussions and Interviews and
clearly explains all their components and the entire
procedure. Besides, the book provides tips for effective
participation and performance in GDs and interviews.
The provision of a large number of examples and
extensive practice material lends a practical flavour to
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
the text. The book includes sample HR and technical
interviews, brain-teasing questions, sample group
discussion, and Case Study.
KEY FEATURE
• DVD records mock GDs and interviews (good and bad).
Contents: Preface. Meeting Challenges Head-on. Building
a Meaningful Career. Sailing Successfully through Group
Discussions. Learning by Example: An Annotated Text of
Sample Group Discussion. Winning the Final Frontier in
Job Interviews. Learning by Example: An Annotated Text of
Sample Job Interview. Annexure: Sample Technical Interviews.
Latest Print 2011 / 144 pp. / 13.9 × 21.6 cm / ` 195.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3878-4 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90464-97-5 (e-Book)
SENGUPTA
Business and Managerial Communication
SAILESH SENGUPTA, Visiting Professor in a number of
leading business and professional institutes in Delhi and
adjoining states.
This well organised book with numerous attractive
features provides a comprehensive and holistic approach
to business and managerial communication. It deals with
the modern practices of both verbal and non-verbal
communication, which has today become a core part of
our personality. The book has a blend of theories and
strategies adopted in speaking, listening and writing
with their practical applications at the managerial,
organisational, corporate, individual and group levels.
Thus, the book will be of immense use to the students
of management and related fields of study and
professionals-managers, advertising, marketing and
public relations executives, businessmen and HR experts.
Besides, the book will prove helpful to the job seekers.
Contents: Preface. Fundamentals and Functions
of Communication. Barriers and Malfunctions in
Communication: Perception and Reality. Building
Active Communication Skills: The Process, Context
and Classifications. Communication Requirements and
Characteristics of Managerial Communication. Speech and
Speaking ... Towards Endless Perfection. Conversational
Skills: Listening and Persuasive Speaking. Effective Business
Communication: A Bundle of Skills. Communication in
Organisations. Business Writing. Business Correspondence,
Business Meetings and Technology. Business Letters.
Business and Technical Report Writing. Lateral and Soft
Skills in Communication and Managing Self. Research
in Business and Organisational Communication. Group
Communication and Group Problem Solving Process.
Management of Information. Motivation, Morale and
Communicative Leadership. Conflict and Negotiation in
Organisations. Corporate Communication I. Corporate
Communication II. Resume, Cover Letters and Thank You
Letters. The Interview Process. Index.
Latest Print 2011 / 688 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 375.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4435-8 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-698-7 (e-Book)
115
SHARMA & MISHRA
Communication Skills for Engineers and
Scientists
SANGEETA SHARMA, Group Leader and Assistant Professor
in the Language Group at Birla Institute of Technology
and Science (BITS), Pilani (Rajasthan).
BINOD MISHRA, Assistant Professor in the Department
of Humanities and Social Sciences, Indian Institute of
Technology Roorkee.
In the era of information technology, organizations seek
employees who have excellent communication skills. The
advantage is for the individuals who, with their excellent
communicative ability, are able to meet the challenges
of the professional world through diverse paths such as
writing, speaking, reading, and listening.
This comprehensive and student friendly book dwells on
various aspects of technical communication that students
of science and engineering should be familiar with.
Divided into two parts, Part A of the text describes in
detail the planning, designing and drafting of documents
for a broad range of situations and applications. The
text explores the types of business letters reflecting
current practices, and different techniques of drafting
them. Since, in the professional settings, executives have
to work in teams, the book explains various causes of
communication breakdown and ways to overcome them.
A separate chapter is devoted to Advertising.
Part B elaborates on Group Communication taking into
consideration the collective and individual requirements.
This part also includes individual chapters on Effective
Presentation, Non-Verbal Cues, Speeches, Interviews,
and Negotiation Skills so as to orient young professionals
towards new challenges.
This compact book is intended primarily as a text for
undergraduate students of engineering and science.
Besides, students of business management would also
find the book immensely valuable. In addition, the text
would be a handy reference for practicing professionals
who wish to hone their communication skills for achieving
better results and should prove extremely useful for those
involved in everyday communication.
Contents: Preface. Foreword. PART  A—Technical Report
Writing: An Overview. Communication Breakdown.
Listening. Business Letters. Types of Business Letters.
Techniques of Writing. Report Writing. Sample
Reports. Advertising. PART  B—Effective Presentation.
Communicating without Words. Interviews. Speeches.
Negotiation Skills. Group Discussions. Most Frequently
Wrongly Spelt Words. Appendix A: List of Frequently
Misused Words. Appendix B: British vs American
Vocabulary. Index.
Latest Print 2015 / 372 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3719-0 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-722-9 (e-Book)
 116 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
TYAGI & MISRA
Advanced Technical Communication
KAVITA TYAGI, Associate Professor and Head, Department
of English, Bharat Institute of Technology (BIT), Meerut
(Uttar Pradesh).
PADMA MISRA, Assistant Professor, School of Manage-
ment, BIT, Meerut.
Businesses use technical writing extensively to
communicate both within and outside the organization.
And so, it is essential for an individual aspiring to be
an executive to master the art of communication. This
accessible and compact book on Advanced Technical
Communication discusses how students can learn and
master not only the basic skills of communication but
also complex skills such as soft skills and skills required
for preparing technical documents.
The book begins with a discussion on the concept of
technical communication and then it goes on to describe
the differences between technical writing and general
writing, and layout and format of business letters
and résumé. What is more, it elaborates on technical
documents such as technical proposals, reports, and
specialized documents like theses, research papers and
dissertations, differentiating them adequately. Finally,
the text covers many of the soft skills required today,
for example, presentation skills, interpersonal skills, and
group discussion (GD) skills.
This student-friendly book, suffused with practical examples,
is primarily intended as a text for the first year students of
Engineering (B.Tech.) of Uttarakhand Technical University
for their course on Advanced Technical Communication. It
will also be of immense benefit to undergraduate students
in other universities and engineering colleges/institutes as
well as technical professionals.
Contents: Foreword by Vice Chancellor, Uttarakhand
Technical University. Preface. Part I: Technical
Communication—Introduction to Technical Communi-
cation. Process of Technical Writing. Part II: Business
Communication—Introduction to Business Communi-
cation and Letter Writing. Types of Letter. Notice,
Agenda and Minutes. Job Application Letters. Part III:
Technical Documents—Report Writing—Types of Report.
Elements of a Formal Report. Style and Formatting in
Report Writing. Special Technical Documents: Thesis,
Dissertation and Scientific Article. Special Type of
Technical Documents: Proposal Writing. Part IV: Critical
Reading—Critical Reading: Animal Farm—George Orwell.
Part V: SOFT SKILLS—Non-Verbal Communication: Kinesics
and Proxemics. Presentation Skills and Paralanguage.
Interpersonal Skills. Corporate Communication Skills.
The Technique of Conducting Group Discussion and
JAM Session. Facing Interview and Tips for Interview.
Index.
Latest Print 2016 / 320 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4172-2 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-824-0 (e-Book)
TYAGI & MISRA
Basic Technical Communication, Rev. ed.
KAVITA TYAGI, Associate Professor and Head, Department
of English, Bharat Institute of Technology (BIT), Meerut
(Uttar Pradesh).
PADMA MISRA, Assistant Professor, School of Manage-
ment, BIT, Meerut.
The younger generation today aspires to work for
multinational corporations, large organizations, or the
civil services. With the competition becoming stiffer
each passing day, the ability to communicate effectively,
precisely as well as acquiring communication skills has
become an important determinant in success. A plethora
of books have flooded the market to capitalize on this
frantic effort of the younger generation to become
adept in communication and more so in technical
communication. This comprehensive book on Basic
Technical Communication strives to focus on the
communication skills needed by professionals.
Divided into five parts and 19 chapters, the text deals
with the four essential ingredients of communication—
reading, writing, listening and speaking skills—as well
as their importance, objectives, types, and methods
of improving these skills. The book also discusses how
these skills can be effectively applied and provides
considerable practice exercises. One of the major aims
is to enable students to acquire proficiency in English
language.
This student-friendly book, suffused with practical
examples, is primarily intended as a textbook for the first
year students of engineering (B.Tech.) of Uttarakhand
Technical University for their course on Basic Technical
Communication. It will also be of immense benefit to
undergraduate students and technical professionals across
the country.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Basics of Technical Com-
munication—Introduction to Technical Communication.
Process and Barriers to Communication. Part II: Reading
Skills—Learning Reading Skills. Word Formation.
Vocabulary. Paragraph Development. Practice Readings
(Reading 1–Of Discourse). Practice Readings (Reading 2–
Unity of Minds) Dr. A.P.J. Abdul Kalam. Part III: Writing
Skills—Learning Technical Writing Skills. Functional
Grammar. Requisites of Sentence Construction. Precis
Writing. Value based Critical Reading of Short Stories.
Part IV: Listening Skills—Learning Listening Skills. Study of
One-Act Play. Part V: Speaking Skills—Learning Speaking
Skills. Organs of Speech and Phonetics. Syllable, Stress,
Rhythm and Intonation. Part VI: Writing Skills—Formal
and Informal Letters. General Speaking Skills and Methods
of Improving Speaking Skills. Bibliography.
Latest Print 2012 / 284 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4238-5 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-572-0 (e-Book)
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
TYAGI & MISRA
Professional Communication
KAVITA TYAGI, Associate Professor and Head, Department
of English, Bharat Institute of Technology (BIT), Meerut
(Uttar Pradesh).
PADMA MISRA, Assistant Professor, School of Manage-
ment, BIT, Meerut.
With the younger generation today seeking jobs in
multinational corporations, large companies, or the
civil services in the government, and the competition
becoming stiffer and stiffer with each passing day, it is
only natural that the ability to communicate effectively,
precisely as well as to acquire communication skills has
become more important than ever before. A plethora
of books have flooded the market to capitalize on this
frantic effort of the younger generation to become adept
in communication. And professional communication is
no exception to this. This accessible and compact book
on Professional Communication strives to focus on the
communication skills needed for the professionals.
Divided into five parts and 19 chapters, the book begins
with a discussion on the concept of communication, and
then it goes on to give in detail features of a language
as a tool of communication, the communication process
models and barriers to communication. The text also
elaborates on word formation, vocabulary, sentence
structure and paragraph development. In addition, it
explains different forms of technical communication;
the format, layout and style of business communication;
technical documents such as theses, scientific articles and
research papers; and technical proposals. Furthermore,
the book provides value-based text reading from
celebrated writers.
This student-friendly book, suffused with practical
examples, is primarily intended as a textbook for the first
year students of engineering (B.Tech.) of UP Technical
University for their course on Professional Communi-
cation. It will also be of immense benefit to undergraduate
students and technical professionals across the country.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Basics of Technical Commu-
nication—Introduction to Technical Communication.
Process of and Barriers to Communication. Communi-
cation Channels and Directions. Part II: Constituences
of Technical Written Communication—Word Formation.
Vocabulary. Requisites of Sentence Construction.
Paragraph Development. The Art of Condensation (Precis
Writing). Part III: Forms of Technical Communication—
Business Correspondence—Introduction, Format and
Layout. Types of Business Correspondence. Resume
and Job Applications. Report Writing—Types of Report.
Elements of a Formal Report. Style and Formatting in
Report Writing. Special Technical Documents. Special Type
of Technical Documents. Part IV: Soft Skills—Presentation
Skills and Paralanguage. Visual Aids and Illustrations
in Technical Communication. Part V: Visual Based Text
Reading—Value Based Text Reading. Index.
Latest Print 2011 / 288 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 250.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4228-6 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-564-5 (e-Book)
117
Journalism
NEELAMALAR
Media Law and Ethics
M. NEELAMALAR, Assistant Professor in the Department
of Media Sciences, Anna University Chennai, Chennai.
Designed as a textbook for undergraduate and post-
graduate students of journalism, mass communication,
visual communication, electronic media and other related
media courses, this compact text provides a detailed
description of the rules, acts and ethics concerning print,
electronic, film and advertising media as prevalent in
India.
The book begins with the history of media law in India
and discusses the specific provisions in the Constitution
of India which are essential for a journalist to know.
It then goes on to define the concepts of freedom of
media, defamation and Intellectual Property Rights.
Besides, the text discusses in detail the provisions of
the Indian Penal Code and the Criminal Procedure Code
relevant to the media. In addition to covering different
types of cyber crimes such as hacking, cracking and
e-mail bombing, it includes regulations related to film
media and advertising. Finally, the book throws light on
media law concerning women and children. The book
also includes several important cases to enable students
to relate various acts and regulations to real-life situations.
Besides students, journalists and other media professionals
who cover courts and law-related beats would also find
this book immensely valuable.
Contents: Preface. History of Media Law in India. Indian
Constitution (Specific Provisions Related to Media).
Freedom of Media. Defamation. Provisions of Indian Penal
Code and Criminal Procedure Code. Official Secrets Acts
1923. The Contempts of Courts Act 1971. Print Media:
Acts. Intellectual Property Rights. Advertising. Cyber
Crimes. Media Law and Woman. Media Law and Children.
Broadcasting. Film Media. Media Ethics. Appendix I–III.
Reference. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 236 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 295.00
ISBN-978-81-203-3974-3 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-90669-88-2 (e-Book)
RAO
Feature Writing, 2nd ed.
RAO is a Feature Writer and Columnist with over three
decades of experience in the field.
If we ask the lay readers why they read newspapers, the
obvious answer would be to get news. However, what
keeps the newspaper endearing and, in a way, enduring
are the longer stories about people behind the news,
about the humorous everyday experiences we all have, or
the closer look at someone and the unexpected surprises
we get in the process. In short, we call these features.
In this substantially revised book on Feature Writing,
the author with her vast experience discusses various
 118 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
aspects of Feature Writing. She focuses on different types
of features found in newspapers—Humour and Satire,
Brights, Human Interest Features, Travel Features and
News Features—and illustrates each of these. In addition,
she provides a detailed description of Profiles, Interviews,
and Online Features with examples, and gives a clear
analysis of Feature Writing Techniques.
Intended as a text for students offering courses in
Journalism, this book would also be extremely useful for
freelance writers, and anyone who has a flair for writing.
WHAT IS NEW TO THE SECOND EDITION
• Includes two new chapters on Obituary and Tribute,
and Sports and new sections such as Blogs and
Professionalism in Journalism.
• Provides more illustrations culled from recent news-
papers.
• Gives explanatory notes on some key words used in the
book, and a section on Vocabulary.
What the Reviewers Say
In this delightful book on FW [Feature Writing], Meera
Raghavendra Rao brings home to us that writing a story or
a novel is one way of discovering sequence in experience, of
stumbling upon cause and effect in the happenings of a writer’s
own life. In my view Meera Raghavendra Rao’s book on FW is an
exceptionally good and useful book not only for all students of
Journalism but also for all writers interested in FW.
—V. Sundaram, News Today
The author has used instances from her career spanning more
than two decades to illustrate various situations in this book.
—Deccan Chronicle
The book is a rather exhaustive guide on ways to tell a feature
story. Among the other pluses is the Indianness permeating the
book—most sample articles are home-brewn.
—The Hindu, Metroplus Weekend
Contents: Foreword. Preface. Preface to the First Edition.
Introduction to Journalism. Introduction to Features.
Feature Writing Techniques. Writing Headlines and
Importance of Photographs. Humour, Satire and Brights.
Human Interest Features. Travel Features. News Features.
Interviews and Profiles. Features Online and Blogs. Writing
Features for Rural Page. Obituary and Tribute Features.
Sports Features. Afterword. Further Reading.
Latest Print 2021 / 212 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 395.0
ISBN-978-81-203-4579-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-649-9 (e-Book)
Mass Communication
NEELAMALAR
Radio Programme Production
M. NEELAMALAR, Assistant Professor in the Department
of Media Sciences, Anna University, Chennai.
This comprehensive textbook has been designed keeping
in mind the undergraduate and postgraduate students of
Journalism, Mass Communication, Visual Communication,
Electronic Media, Broadcast Journalism and other media
courses. It gives a detailed account of the different
formats (radio news, interview, documentary, feature,
drama, docudrama, discussion and phone-in programmes),
methods of production, basics of script writing, studio
set-up, special audience and specialized broadcasting
including educational broadcasting, and legal regulations
and ethics related to radio broadcasting in India.
The book imparts a thorough understanding of the
history of India, community radio, radio journalism, and
the different wings and functionaries of radio. Practical
knowledge needed to succeed in a career in radio by
providing the qualities needed to become a successful
news presenter, news writer, radio producer and radio
jockey have also been furnished.
Not only the media students, but also radio professionals
and those who aspire to have a career in radio would find
the book immensely valuable.
KEY FEATURES
• Chapter-end questions to help students in preparing for
their exams.
• Practical exercises and field projects for hands-on
experience.
• Well-structured tables and neat illustrations to explain
the concepts.
• Box items to highlight the key points in each chapter.
• Model flowcharts for students to create and produce
their own programmes.
• Annexure and references for further study of the
subject.
Contents: Preface. Introduction to Radio Medium. Radio
in India. Model of Radio in India. FM Revolution in India.
Radio Formats. Production and Functionaries of Radio.
Radio News Writing. Radio Interview. Radio Feature. Radio
Documentary. Phone–in–Programmes. Radio Magazine.
Outside Broadcasting. Radio Drama and Docudrama.
Radio Script Writing. Special Audience Radio Programmes.
Talk-Based Programmes. Radio Jingles. Community Radio.
Researching for Radio. Radio for Development. Educational
Broadcasting. Radio for Entertainment. Radio Studio and
Production. Special Interest Programmes. Radio Reporting.
Legal Regulations and Ethics for Radio in India. Annexure
1: List of Operational Private FM Radio Stations in India.
Annexure 2: List of Operational Community Radio Stations
as on 1-11-2016. References. Index.
Latest Print 2018 / 256 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 295.00
ISBN-978-93-87472-16-7 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-87472-17-4 (e-Book)
REDDI
Effective Media Relations
C.V. NARASIMHA REDDI, the Editor of Public Relations
Voice (a premier journal on Public Relations in India) and
Senior Academic Consultant of Dr. B.R. Ambedkar Open
University, Hyderabad.
Media relations may be defined as a process of public
relations to accomplish maximum media coverage of
 HUMANITIES, SOCIAL SCIENCES AND LANGUAGES
organisational activities as a measure to create knowledge
among the stakeholders and gain their understanding
and acceptance. Good media relations are created and
maintained only by providing newsworthy and trustworthy
information of public interest in an atmosphere of mutual
respect and candour between an organisation and the
media.
The systematically organised book, written in ‘teach
yourself’ style with clear illustrations, gives a thorough
understanding of the various aspects of media relations.
The main distinguishing feature of the book is the
inclusion of numerous case studies to help students
understand the concepts better and learn how theory is
applied in practice. Also, the book enables the students
to write good press releases and utilise broadcast media,
Internet and social media. Thus, it helps its readers to
become an effective media relations manager.
The book is a must-read text for the postgraduate students
of mass communication, public relations, journalism and
business management disciplines. Moreover, it is of
immense use for the HR professionals.
Contents: Preface. PART ONE CONCEPTS—Concept
of Organisation. Public Relations and the Media.
Understanding the Media. Media Laws—Ignorance of Law
is No Excuse. PART TWO MEDIA STRATEGY—Government
Media. Media Scene in India. Media Relations Strategy.
PART THREE TACTICS AND APPLICATION—Media Release
and Other Written Tactics. Media Conferences and
Press Tours. Broadcast Media—Radio and Television.
The Internet and Social Media. Photography for Media
Relations. PART FOUR GLOBAL PUBLIC RELATIONS—Global
Media Relations. Media Relations in Crisis Management.
PART FIVE PROFESSIONAL EXCELLENCE IN MEDIA
RELATIONS—Measurement/Evaluation. How to Be an
Effective Media Relations Manager. Best Practices. Media
Ethics. Appendices. Suggested Reading. Index.
Latest Print 2021 / 272 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 495.00
ISBN-978-93-89347-95-1 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-89347-96-8 (e-book)
REDDI
Effective Public Relations and
Media Strategy, 3rd ed.
C.V. NARASIMHA REDDI, the Editor of Public Relations
Voice (a premier journal on Public Relations in India) and
Senior Academic Consultant of Dr. B.R. Ambedkar Open
University, Hyderabad.
The author with over five decades of professional and
academic experience has considerably revised and updated
every chapter of the book to present, contemporary
diverse public relations and media practices. As a result,
the new edition contains the best of previous editions
and at the same time replaces all the dated material with
new figures and advanced information. Subjects like Mass
Communication, Public Relations, Journalism, Advertising,
Media Studies, Event Management, PR 2.0 New Model
119
and eight case studies including Mahatma Gandhi World's
Greatest Communicator—all in one make this edition
truly unique and the only textbook of this type in India.
The other key topics that have been given attention in
the book include PR as a Strategic Management Function;
Communication Models: History of Indian PR; Standards
and Ethics in PR; Corporate Communications; PR in
Government, Public Sector and NGOs; Global PR; Internet
and Social Media; Multimedia PR Campaign and PR into
the Future.
LEARNING TOOLS
• Students learning tools such as Chapter Opening
Preview, Relevant Case Problems in the Text, End of
the Chapter Summary for quick understanding, Review
Questions for practice, the Glossary and traits needed
for success in PR career are added value to this edition.
The text is a must read for every student, faculty and
practitioners of Mass Communication, Media Relations,
Journalism, PR & Advertising and all management disciplines.
Contents: Part One: Principles Of Public Relations
And Communication—What is Public Relations? .
Communication. Principles of Public Relations. Evolution
of Public Relations: Ancient India to Modern India
(World's Biggest Democracy). History of Public Relations
in USA (World's Oldest Democracy). Part Two: Strategy—
Strategic Public Relations. Public Relations Process: Four
Stages. Public Relations Departments and R Agencies.
Crisis Management: PR Centre Stage. Public Relations
and the Law. Standards and Ethics in Public Relations. PR
Professional Organisations. Part Three: Public Relations
Practice—Corporate Public Relations Vs Corporate
Communications. Stakeholders' Public Relations. Public
Relations in Government. Public Sector Public Relations,
PR in Municipal Government. Public Relations in Banks
and Tourism. Public Relations for NGOs. Global Public
Relations. Part Four: Media Strategy And Tactics—Public
Relations and the Media. Interpersonal Media. Traditional
Folk Media. Newspapers in Public Relations. Electronic
Media—Radio and Television. E-PR: IT New Mass Media.
Audio-Visual Media: Films. Visual Media—Photographs
and Exhibitions. Event Management: Open House.
Multimedia PR Campaigns. Media Relations. Part Five:
Professional Excellence In Public Relations—How to Be
an Effective PR Manager. Public Relations into the Future.
Part Six: Actions Speak—Pr Case Studies—Mahatma
Gandhi: World's Greatest Communicator. Actions Speak—
PR Case Studies. Case 1: Dogs are Man's Best Friends:
Multi-media Approach. Case 2: Media Relations in a Crisis
Situation: ONGC. Case 3: Corporate Social Responsibility:
TISCO. Case 4: Janmabhoomi: A Unique Exercise in Rural
Communication in erstwhile Andhra Pradesh. Case 5:
Satellite Instructional Television Experiment (SITE). Case
6: Kheda Rural Communication Project (UNESCO Award
Winner). Case 7: India: A Polio Free Country—A Case Study
in Health Communication. Glossary. References. Index
Latest Print 2019 / 600 pp. / 16.0 × 24.1 cm / ` 525.00
ISBN-978-93-88028-89-9 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-88028-90-5 (e-Book)
 120 PHI Learning — CATALOGUE 2021
Library Science
SINGH
Information Sources, Services and
Systems
GURDEV SINGH, Librarian, Sri Guru Gobind Singh College
of Commerce, Delhi.
Reference and information services are considered as an
important activity of a modern library. These services can
be provided by means of reference sources. This book
provides the overviews of different types of reference
sources, such as encyclopaedias, directories, yearbooks,
dictionaries, geographical sources, biographical sources,
statistical sources and handbooks.
Dexterously organised into four parts, this book describes
various aspects of reference/information services, such
as translation service, reference service, referral service,
Selective Dissemination of Information (SDI) and Current
Awareness Services (CAS). Besides, a number of important
national and international information systems are also
covered in this book.
It is specially designed to cater to the needs of the
students of BLibSc and MLISc of various universities
and institutions. This book will also be very useful for
teachers, working librarians, information scientists, and
informational professionals in general.
Contents: Preface. Part I: Reference Sources—Information
Source. Kinds of Reference Books and their Evaluation.
Dictionaries. Encyclopedias. Ready Reference Sources.
Statistical Sources. Geographical Sources. Biographical
Sources. Indexing Sources and Services. Abstracting Sources
and Services. Bibliographies. Patents and Standards. Non-
documentry Sources of Information. Electronic/Digital
Information Sources. Internet as Source of Information.
Part II: Reference and Information Services—Reference
Services. Reference Services in Different Types of
Libraries. Organisation of Reference Section. Role of
Reference Librarian/Information officer in Electronic
Environment. Part Iii: Information Services—Concept and
Need for Information. Information Services: An Overview.
Translation Services. Literature Search Service. Document
Delivery and Electronic Document Delivery Service.
Current Awareness Service (CAS). Selective Dissemination
of Information (SDI). Reprographic Service. Docuentation/
Information Centers. National Documentation Centers.
Computer based Information Services. Information
Literacy Programmes. Users and Their Information Needs.
Part IV: Information Systems—Information Systems and
Their Functions. Bibliography/Reference. Index.
Latest Print 2013 / 536 pp. / 17.8 × 23.5 cm / ` 525.00
ISBN-978-81-203-4639-0 (Print Book)
ISBN-978-93-5443-547-8 (e-Book)
 AUTHORWISE ALPHABETICAL LISTING
Price
(`) 
ABEL & SEMENTELLI: Evolutionary Critical Theory and Its Role in Public Affairs, 95 195.00
ABRAHAM: Women’s Writing in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries: Short Stories, 57 250.00
AHMAD: Teaching of Biological Sciences (Intended for Teaching of Life Sciences, Physics, Chemistry and
General Science), 2nd ed., 33 325.00
AHMED & ALAM: Business Environment: Indian and Global Perspectives, 3rd ed., 3 895.00
AKMAJIAN, et al.: Linguistics—An Introduction to Language and Communication, 7th ed., 51 795.00
AKSHAR BHARATI, CHAITANYA & SANGAL: Natural Language Processing—A Paninian Perspective, 52 450.00
ASTHANA & BRAJ BHUSHAN: Statistics for Social Sciences (with SPSS Applications), 2nd ed., 39 595.00
BALKRISHAN & SHARMA: fof/k 'kkL=% ,d v/;;u (Jurisprudence), 71 195.00
BASU: Essence of Hinduism, The, 2nd ed., 76 250.00
BASU, et al.: Industrial Organization and Management, 8 350.00
BASU: Technical Writing, 111 325.00
BHATIA & SETHI: Corporate and Compensation Laws, 58 350.00
BHATTA: International Dictionary of Public Management and Governance, 96 595.00
BINGHAM & O’LEARY (Eds.): Big Ideas in Collaborative Public Management, 96 350.00
BRAHMA: Causality and Science, 78 150.00
BRAHMA: Fundamentals of Religion, The, 75 325.00
BRAHMA: Hindu Spirituality: An Appreciation, 76 595.00
BRAHMA: Philosophy of Hindu Sdhan, 77 325.00
CABRAL: Introduction to Industrial Organization, 2nd ed., 9 895.00
CHADHA: Game Theory for Managers: Doing Business in a Strategic World, 2nd ed., 6 450.00
CHAKRABORTY (Ed.): Indian Drama in English, 2nd ed., 48 295.00
CHAKRABORTI: Logic: Informal, Symbolic, and Inductive, 2nd ed., 77 450.00
CHANDRA BOSE: Business Law, 2nd ed., 58 650.00
CHATTERJEE: Linear Programming and Game Theory, 6 250.00
CHAUHAN: Microeconomics: An Advanced Treatise, 2nd ed., 13 695.00
CHAUHAN: Microeconomics—Theory and Applications, Part I, 14 295.00
CHAUHAN: Microeconomics—Theory and Applications, Part II, 14 250.00
CHITALE, MOHANTY & DUBEY: Organizational Behaviour: Text and Cases, 2nd ed., 92 525.00
CHOUDHARY: Adolescence Education, 24 425.00
CHOUDHURY: English Social and Cultural History: An Introductory Guide and Glossary, 2nd ed., 53 325.00
CHOUDHURY (Ed.): Amitav Ghosh—Critical Essays, 2nd ed., 49 195.00
CHOUDHURY (Ed.): Charles Dickens: Great Expectations, 44 275.00
CHOUDHURY (Ed.): William Shakespeare—The Tempest, 44 195.00
DAS: Code of Civil Procedure, 61 750.00
DAS: Law of Copyright, 2nd ed., 62 995.00
DAS: Human Rights Law and Practice, 65 995.00
DASH: Professional Learner’s Dictionary of Spoken English, 111 795.00
DATTA: Managerial Economics, 15 695.00

TBA — To be announced 
121
 122 Authorwise Alphabetical Listing

Price
(`) 
DAVAR: Teaching of Science, 33 250.00
DEAN: Managerial Economics, 15 450.00
DUA (Ed.): William Shakespeare—As You Like It, 45 225.00
GANGAL: Practical Course for Developing Writing Skills in English, A, 112 250.00
GANGAL: Practical Course in Effective English Speaking Skills, A, 112 595.00
GANGAL: Practical Course in Spoken English, A, 2nd ed., 54 695.00
GANGULY & MOINUDDIN: ledkyhu Hkkjrh; lekt (Contemporary Indian Society) (in Bengali), 2nd ed., 105 795.00
GERSTON: Public Policymaking in a Democratic Society: A Guide to Civic Engagement, 2nd ed., 96 295.00
GHOSH & RADHA MOHAN: Education in Emerging Indian Society: The Challenges and Issues, 2nd ed., 26 295.00
GHOSH: Indian Economy, (Forthcoming), 7 TBA
GHOSH: Indian Government and Politics, 3rd ed., 81 695.00
GHOSH: International Relations, 5th ed., 82 495.00
GHOSH & GHOSH: Indian Economy: A Macro-theoretic Analysis, 7 325.00
GHOSH & GHOSH: Macroeconomics, 2nd ed., 10 395.00
GHOSH & GHOSH: Public Finance, 3rd ed., 19 595.00
GOODE: Family, The, 2nd ed., 103 175.00
GOODWIN, et al.: Microeconomics in Context, 2nd ed., 15 350.00
GOSWAMI: Mulk Raj Anand: Early Novels, 50 95.00
GOWDA: Learning and the Learner: Insights into the Processes of Learning and Teaching, 2nd ed., 34 275.00
GUPTA: Current English Grammar and Usage, 2nd ed., 47  425.00
GUPTA & GUPTA: Research Methodology, 101  450.00
HARISH CHANDER: Cyber Laws and IT Protection, 63 695.00
HOOD: Political Development and Democratic Theory: Rethinking Comparative Politics, 79 195.00
HOY et al.: Mathematics for Economics, 3rd ed., 12 795.00
HUSSAIN: Experiments in Psychology, 90 350.00
JAYAKUMAR: Administrative Law, 57 325.00
JOSHI & SALUNKE: Content Based Methodology, 23 175.00
KAKKAR: Educational Psychology, 24, 86 195.00
KALRA: Science Education for Teacher Trainees and In-service Teachers: Learning to Learn Modern Science, 34 195.00
KALRA & GUPTA: Teaching of Science: A Modern Approach, 35 250.00
KANAGASABAPATHI: Indian Models of Economy, Business and Management, 3rd ed., 8 275.00
KAUL & SINGH (Eds.): New Paradigms for Gender Inclusivity: Theory and Best Practices, 109 325.00
KENNEDY: International Economics, 20 325.00
KENNEDY: Macroeconomic Essentials: Understanding Economics in the News, 3rd ed., 10 495.00
KENNEDY: Macroeconomic Theory, 11 595.00
KENNEDY: Public Finance, 19 325.00
KONAR: Communication Skills for Professionals, 2nd ed., 113 395.00
KONAR: English Language Laboratories: A Comprehensive Manual, 113 225.00
KOVEN: Responsible Governance: A Case Study Approach, 97 225.00
MAHAJAN & MAHAJAN: Financial Administration in India, 2nd ed., 97 795.00
MAHESHWARI: Managerial Economics, 3rd ed., 16 325.00
MANGAL: Advanced Educational Psychology, 2nd ed., 24, 86 395.00
MANGAL: Educating Exceptional Children: An Introduction to Special Education, 28 895.00
 Authorwise Alphabetical Listing 123

Price
(`) 
MANGAL: Essentials of Educational Psychology, 25, 87 575.00
MANGAL: f'k{kk euksfoKku (Educational Psychology), 26, 87 525.00
MANGAL: Statistics in Psychology and Education, 2nd ed., 40, 92 395.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: Assessment of Learning, 31 395.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: vf/kxe ds fy, ewY;kadu (Assessment of Learning), 32 595.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: Childhood and Growing Up, 20 595.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: ckY;dky ,oa o`f)&mUeq[k ckyd (Childhood and Growing up), 21 895.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: Creating An Inclusive School, 29 395.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: lesfdr fo|ky; dh LFkkiuk (Creating An Inclusive School), 29 595.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: Emotional Intelligence: Managing Emotions to Win in Life, 35, 89 550.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: Essentials of Educational Technology, 41 595.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: Learning and Teaching, 42 625.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: vf/kxe ,oa f'k{k.k (Learning and Teaching), 43 895.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: f'k{kk rduhdh (Educational Technology), 42 795.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: Pedagogy of Social Sciences, 2nd ed., 36 595.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: Psychology of Learning and Development, 30, 87 695.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: vf/xe ,oa fodkl dk euksfoKku (Psychology of Learning and Development), 31, 88 725.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: O;kogkfjd foKkuksa esa vuqla/kku fof/k;k¡ (Research Methodology in Behavioural Sciences), 41 650.00
MANGAL & MANGAL: Research Methodology in Behavioural Sciences, 40 595.00
MANNA & CHAKRABORTY: Values and Ethics in Business and Profession, 74 250.00
McNABB: Research Methods in Public Administration and Nonprofit Management: Quantitative and Qualitative
Approaches, 2nd ed., 101 395.00
MEHTA: 'kSf{kd izca/ku (Educational Management), 37 250.00
MICHL: Macroeconomic Theory: A Short Course, 12 225.00
MISHRA: Psychology—The Study of Human Behaviour, 2nd ed., 91 550.00
MISHRA: ekul jksx ¼vlkekU;½ foKku% ,d laf{kIr ifjp;, 85 395.00
MISHRA: euksfoKku% ekuo O;ogkj dk vè;;u (Psychology: The Study of Human Behaviour), 96 425.00
MITRA (Ed.): Indian Poetry in English: Critical Essays, 2nd ed., 50 495.00
MITRA (Ed.): William Shakespeare—Julius Caesar, 45 225.00
MOSES: Last Frontiers of the Mind: Challenges of the Digital Age, 75 395.00
MUKHERJEE & RAMASWAMY: History of Political Thought, A: Plato to Marx, 2nd ed., 85 395.00
MUKHERJEE, et al.: Microeconomics, 16 595.00
MUKHERJEE & CHAKRABARTI: Development Economics: A Critical Perspective, 5 395.00
MUTHUKRISHNAN: Economics of Environment, 2nd ed., 5 250.00
NADAR & VIJAYAN: Managerial Economics, 3rd ed., 17 595.00
NEELAMALAR: Media Law and Ethics, 71, 117 295.00
NEELAMALAR: Radio Programme Production, 118 295.00
NIAZI & RAMA GAUTAM: How to Study Literature: Stylistic and Pragmatic Approaches, 53 325.00
PADHI: Labour and Industrial Laws, 4th ed., 68 795.00
PADHI: Legal Aspects of Business, 59 595.00
PADHY: Indian Political Thought, 85 425.00
PAILWAR: Business Environment, 3 795.00
PAILWAR: Economic Environment of Business, 3rd ed., 4 450.00
 124 Authorwise Alphabetical Listing

Price
(`) 
PALEKAR: Comparative Politics and Government, 79 595.00
PALEKAR: Development Administration, 97 450.00
PANDEY: fganh Hkk"kk vkSj bldh f'k{k.k fof/k;k¡ (Methods of Teaching Hindi), 37 325.00
PANDEY & DHARNI: Intellectual Property Rights, 66 350.00
PANNEERSELVAM: Elimaikkural, 54 250.00
PANNEERSELVAM: Research Methodology, 2nd ed., 102, 108 450.00
PARCHURE: Macroeconomics, 12 550.00
PATIL: Community Organization and Development: An Indian Perspective, 108 195.00
PRAMANICK & GANGULY (Eds.): Globalization in India: New Frontier’s Emerging Challenges, 83 425.00
PRASAD: Course in Linguistics, A, 3rd ed., 52 395.00
PRUSTY: Managerial Economics, 18 250.00
PUSHP LATA & KUMAR: Communicate or Collapse: A Handbook of Effective Public Speaking,
Group Discussions and Interviews, 114 225.00
PUSHP LATA & KUMAR: Communicate to Conquer: A Handbook of Group Discussions and Job Interviews
(with DVD), 114 195.00
PUTATUNDA: R.K. Narayan: Critical Essays, 51 225.00
RADHA MOHAN: Innovative Science Teaching: For Physical Science Teachers, 3rd ed., 38 425.00
RADHA MOHAN: Measurement, Evaluation and Assessment in Education, 32, 93 695.00
RADHA MOHAN: Teacher Education, 43 350.00
RAI: Fundamental Rights and their Enforcement, 66 550.00
RAMACHANDRAN, et al.: Survey Research in Public Health, 109 195.00
RAMAMURTI: Introduction to Psychological Measurement, An, 93 225.00
RAMASWAMY: Political Theory: Ideas and Concepts, 2nd ed., 84 495.00
RAO: Business Law, 60 350.00
RAO: Feature Writing, 2nd ed., 117 595.00
RAY: Modern Comparative Politics—Approaches, Methods and Issues, 80 225.00
RAY & SINHA: Mine and Mineral Economics, 6 325.00
REDDI: Effective Media Relations, 118 495.00
REDDI: Effective Public Relations & Media Strategy, 3rd ed., 119 525.00
REDDY & SARASWATHI: Managerial Economics and Financial Accounting, 18 375.00
ROY: Society and Politics in India: Understanding Political Sociology, 83, 106 450.00
SAHNI & MEDURY (Eds.): Governance for Development—Issues and Strategies, 104 450.00
SAHNI & VAYUNANDAN: Administrative Theory, 94 495.00
SAMUEL RAVI: Comprehensive Study of Education, A, 27 995.00
SAMUEL RAVI: Education in Emerging India, 27 675.00
SAMUEL RAVI: Philosophical and Sociological Bases of Education, 2nd ed., 28 995.00
SAPRU: Administrative Theories and Management Thought, 3rd ed., 95 1295.00
SAPRU: Public Policy: Art and Craft of Policy Analysis, 2nd ed., 98 595.00
SARKAR: Gender Disparity in India: Unheard Whimpers, 110 425.00
SARKAR: Public Administration in India, 2nd ed., 98 425.00
SENGAR: Environmental Law, 64 695.00
SENGUPTA: Business and Managerial Communicaton, 115 375.00
SENGUPTA: Myriad-Minded Shaw: Perspectives on Shavian Drama (Politics, War and History), 45 195.00
 Authorwise Alphabetical Listing 125

Price
(`) 
SENGUPTA (Ed.): William Shakespeare—Hamlet, 46 225.00
SENGUPTA (Ed.): William Shakespeare—The Tragedy of Macbeth (Forthcoming), 46 TBA
SEN GUPTA: Early Childhood Care and Education, 22 295.00
SEN GUPTA: Knowledge and Curriculum, 23 650.00
SEN GUPTA: ÁkjafHkd ckY;koLFkk% ns[k–Hkky vkSj f'k{kk (Early Childhood Care and Education), 22 325.00
SETHI: Standard English and Indian Usage: Vocabulary and Grammar, 2nd ed., 48 150.00
SETHI & DHAMIJA: Course in Phonetics and Spoken English, A, 2nd ed., 55 250.00
SETHI & JINDAL: Handbook of Pronunciation of English Words, A (with Two CD-ROMs), 56 250.00
SETHI, SADANAND & JINDAL: Practical Course in English Pronunciation, A (with Two CD-ROMs), 56 395.00
SHARMA: Charter of the United Nations and the Statute of International Court of Justice, 71 95.00
SHARMA: la;qDr jk"Vª dk pkVZj vkSj varjjk"Vªh; U;k;ky; dk lafo/kku, 73 95.00
SHARMA: Human Rights Covenants and Indian Law, 71 95.00
SHARMA: ekuo vf/kdkj varjjk"Vªh; izlafonk,a vkSj Hkkjr dh fof/k, 72 95.00
SHARMA: Industrial Relations and Labour Legislation, 68 895.00
SHARMA: Introduction to the Constitution of India, 10th ed., 62, 80 495.00
SHARMA: Hkkjr dk lafoèkku% ,d ifjp; (Introduction to the Constitution of India), 14th ed., 61, 80 495.00
SHARMA: Universal Declaration of Human Rights and Indian Law, 74 50.00
SHARMA: ekuo vf/kdkjksa dh lkoZHkkSe ?kks"k.kk vkSj Hkkjrh; fof/k, 72 50.00
SHARMA: fof/k Hkk"kk izcks/k (Learning Legal Language), 70 95.00
SHARMA: fof/k dh 'kCnkoyh vkSj fof/k dk vuqokn% bfrgkl] izfØ;k] fl)kar vkSj iz;qfDr, 70 225.00
SHARMA & MISHRA: Communication Skills for Engineers and Scientists, 115 250.00
SHASTRI: Fundamental Aspects of Translation, 57 295.00
SHARMA: jktuhfrd lekt'kkL= dh :ijs[kk (Introduction to Political Sociology), 2nd ed., 111 450.00
SHERGILL: Experimental Psychology, 90 295.00
SHERGILL: Psychology, Part I, 91 375.00
SINGH: vk/kqfud Hkkjr esa lkekftd ifjorZu (Social Change in Modern India), 2nd ed., 112 550.00
SINGH: lekt'kkL=&&vo/kkj.kk,a ,oa fl)kar (Sociology: Concepts and Theories), 3rd ed., 104 650.00
SINGH: lekt'kkL= ds ewyrRo (Fundamentals of Sociology), 3rd ed., 103 250.00
SINGH: lektfoKku fo'odks"k (Encyclopedia of Sociology and Allied Sciences), 103 650.00
SINGH: Information Sources, Services, and Systems, 120 525.00
SINGH (Ed.): William Shakespeare—A Midsummer’s Nights Dream, 46 195.00
SINGH (Ed.): William Shakespeare—The Merchant of Venice, 47 195.00
SINGH: Social Psychology, 2nd ed., 94, 107 695.00
SINGH, KAPOOR & BHATTACHARYA (Eds.): Governance and Poverty Reduction: Beyond the Cage of
Best Practices, 100 550.00
SINGH & SAXENA: Indian Politics: Constitutional Foundations and Institutional Functioning, 2nd ed., 82 250.00
SINGH & ZAHID (Eds.): Strengthening Governance Through Access to Justice, 65, 99 350.00
SIVARETHINAMOHAN: Industrial Relations and Labour Welfare: Text and Cases (Rev. ed.), 69 395.00
SOPLE: Managing Intellectual Property: The Strategic Imperative, 5th ed., 67 495.00
SULPHEY: Behavioural Finance, 20 395.00
SULPHEY & BASHEER: Laws for Business, 5th ed., 60 695.00
SYAL & JINDAL: Introduction to Linguistics, An—Language, Grammar and Semantics, 2nd ed., 52 195.00
TAYLOR, et al.: Research Methodology: A Guide for Researchers in Management and Social Sciences, 102 450.00
 126 Authorwise Alphabetical Listing

Price
(`) 
TIROLE: Theory of Industrial Organization, The, 10 595.00
TIWARI: Hkkjrh; rdZ'kkL= (Indian Logic), 78 125.00
TYAGI & MISRA: Advanced Technical Communication, 116 250.00
TYAGI & MISRA: Basic Technical Communication, Revised ed., 116 250.00
TYAGI & MISRA: Professional Communication, 117 250.00
VAYUNANDAN & MATHEW (Eds.): Good Governance: Initiatives in India, 105 395.00
VENKAT: Environmental Law and Policy, 64 350.00
VINOD & DESHPANDE: Contemporary Political Theory, 84 525.00
VYAS & PATEL (Eds.): Teaching English as a Second Language: A New Pedagogy for a New Century,
2nd ed., 38 395.00
 OUR WHOLESALERS AND STOCKISTS
NORTHERN REGION
WHOLESALERS
ALLIED PUBLISHERS PVT. LTD.
1/13–14, Asaf Ali Road, New Delhi-110002
Phones: 011-23239001, 23233002
Fax: 011-23235967
E-mail: delhi.books@alliedpublishers.com
PRAKASH BOOKS (I) PVT. LTD.
113A, Bharat Scouts Building
Ansari Road, Daryaganj
New Delhi-110002
Phone: 011-23247065
E-mail: sanjay.giri@prakashbooks.com
naveen.bagga@prakashbooks.com
SHRI ADHYA EDUCATIONAL BOOKS PVT. LTD.
23/23, B EMCA House, Ansari Road,
Daryaganj, New Delhi-110002
Phones: 011-43507216, 43507217
E-mail: sales@booksae.com
STOCKISTS
ALLIED INFORMATICS
B-83, Golden Jewel Apartments,
Ganesh Marg, Bapu Nagar, Jaipur-302015
Phone: 0141-4003870 • Mobile: 9414069109
E-mail: allied.info@yahoo.com
ANIL BOOK DEPOT
199, A-Market, Sector 6, Bhilai
Phone: 0788-2224250
E-mail: anilbookdepotbhilai@hotmail.com
BOOK PALACE
10 No Market, Shop 57, Arera Colony,
Bhopal-462001 • Phone: 0755-2673639
CENTRAL BOOK HOUSE
Sadar Bazar, Raipur-492001
Phone: 0771-2234150
E-mail: centralbookhouse@gmail.com
GANGA SHARAN & GRAND SONS
Nitishalya, D-58/51, A/K Opp. Kuber Complex
Rathyatra, Varanasi-221010
Phone: 0542-2361089 • Mobile: 9935523813
E-mail: books.gs@rediffmail.com
J.K. JAIN BROTHERS
Opp. Moti Masjid, Sultania Road, Bhopal-462001
Phones: 0755-2549730, 2542577, 3042653
E-mail: manishjain26@hotmail.com
MEDIAMATICS
Rimjhim House, 111, Patparganj Industrial
Estate, Delhi-110092
Phones: 011-43031100, 22154984
Fax: 011-43031144
E-mail: contact@mediamatics.co.in
SAVERA BOOK DISTRIBUTOR
4754, Akarshan Bhawan, 23, Ansari Road,
Daryaganj, New Delhi-110002
Phone: 011-43551008
E-mail: sales@saverabooks
saverabookdistributor@gmail.com
UDH PUBLISHERS & DISTRIBUTORS
4762-63/23, Ansari Road, Daryaganj
New Delhi-110002
Phones: 011-41562623, 41562603, 43587393
E-mail: udhbooks@gmail.com
ANAND PUSTAK SADAN
Sanatan Dharam Mandir Road, Lashkar,
Gwalior-474001
Phones: 0751-2323516, 6537516
E-mail: rohit_apsgl@yahoo.com
BOOK PARADISE
M.P. Nagar, Zone-1, Bhopal-462011
Phone: 0755-4272247
E-mail: bookparadisebpl@gmail.com
BOOK WORLD
10-A, Astley Hall, Dehradun-248001
Phone: 0135-2655845
E-mail: bookworld_ddn@yahoo.co.in
randhir.arora@gmail.com
FRIENDS BOOKS DEPOT
17, University Road, Allahabad-211004
Mobile: 9415237813
E-mail: deepbookagency@rediffmail.com
INDIA BOOK HOUSE
213, Radha Damodar Ki Gali, Loha Mandi,
Chaura Rasta, Jaipur-302003
Phone: 0141-2314983
E-mail: indiabookhouse@yahoo.com
MITTAL BOOK DISTRIBUTOR
4723/23, Ansari Road, Daryaganj,
New Delhi-110002
Mobile: 9810565956
NEW JAIN BOOK STALL
627, Subhash Chowk, Khajuri Bazar,
Indore-452002
Phone: 0731-4054829
E-mail: newjainbookstall2007@yahoo.com
RAGHAV BOOKS PVT. LTD.
A–184A, Nand Gram, Gaziabad
Mobile: 9650337111
E-mail: raghavbooks16@gmail.com
UNIVERSAL BOOK STALL
1697, Nai Sarak, Delhi-110006
Phones: 011-23250653, 23261903, 23272595
E-mail: ubsns@bol.net.in
UNIVERSAL BOOK SERVICE
718, Marha Tal, Near City Coffee House,
Jabalpur-482001 • Phone: 0761-2480591
E-mail: ubsmp@rediffmail.com
UNIQUE BOOK DEPOT
Sanatan Dharm Mandir Road, Lashkar,
Gwalior-474001
Phone: 0751-4076419 • Mobile: 9826257932
E-mail: uniquebook_depot@rediffmail.com
EASTERN REGION
WHOLESALERS
A.K. MISHRA AGENCIES PVT. LTD.
‘Satyabhama’, Roxy Lane, Badambadi,
Cuttack-753009
Phones: 0671-2322244 / 55 / 66 / 77
Fax: 0671-2322288
E-mail: ctk_akagency@bsnl.in
STOCKISTS
A.K. MISHRA AGENCIES PVT. LTD.
Metro House, Shop No. B-17, Ground Floor,
Vani Vihar Square, Bhubaneswar-751007
Phone: 0674-2544991, 2544992
AMIT BOOK DEPOT
Plot No. 830, Lane No. 5, Jayadev Vihar,
Near Biju Pattnaik College, Bhubaneswar-751013
Mobiles: 9238323348, 9238323349
E-mail: bbsr@amitbooks.com
BOOK ZONE
Shop No. LL08, Hari Om Tower
70, Circular Road, Ranchi-834001 Jharkhand
Phone: 0651-2563143 • Mobile: 9304538949
E-mail: bookzoneranchi.com
RADHA KRISHAN ANAND & CO.
Pacca Danga Road, Jammu-180001
Phones: 0191-2546691, 2578357
E-mail: rka_books@rediffmail.com
TRIPATHI BOOK DISTRIBUTOR
NPA-Arcade, Shop/Flat-212,
2nd Floor, 23, M.G. Marg, Civil Lines,
Allahabad-211001
Mobile: 9415235892
E-mail: tbxalld@gmail.com
UNIVERSAL BOOK SELLER
82, Hazrat Ganj, Post Box No. 20
Lucknow-226001
Phones: 0522-2625894, 3919708
E-mail: universal3@satyam.net.in
USEFUL BOOK SERVICE
C-369, Opp. Sekher Hospital, Indira Nagar,
Lucknow-226016
Mobiles: 9415017416, 8948858567
E-mail: useful@airtelmail.in
usefulbookservice@gmail.com
VEDI BOOKS PVT. LTD.
24/24 Ansari Road
Daryaganj, New Delhi-110002
Phone: 011-43563107
E-mail: cscvedibooks.com
MEDIAMATICS
59/10, Prince Bakhtiar Shah Road, Kolkata-700033
Phones: 033-32009632, 32957955
Fax: 033-24227924
E-mail: mediam@dataone.in
AMIT BOOK DEPOT
Tulsi Apartments, 1st Floor, Govind Mitra Lane,
Patna-800004 • Phones: 0612-2300819, 2300557
E-mail: amitbooks@sify.com
info@amitbooks.com
BOOK EMPORIUM
Jaswanta Road, Panbazar, Guwahati-781001
Mobile: 9864042491
Sister Concern:  Book Corner
Saraswati Plaza, Panbazar, Guwahati-781001
E-mail: book.emporium@rediffmail.com
KATHA O KAHINI (BOOK SELLER) PVT. LTD.
No. 13, Bankim Chatterjee Street
Kolkata-700073
Phone: 033-22419071
SHARDA BOOK DEPOT
508, Jaiswal Complex
Shop No. 12, Sakchi, Jamshedpur–831001
Mobile: 9431566455
TRIO ENTERPRISE
25, Bhawani Dutta Lane, Kolkata-700073
Phone: 033-22198749 • Mobile: 9331030780
E-mail: trioenterprise@yahoo.co.in
WESTERN REGION
WHOLESALERS
STUDENTS’ AGENCIES (I) PVT. LTD.
102, Konark Shram, Behind Everest Building
Opp. Tardeo Road, Mumbai-400034
Phones: 022-40496106, 40496111, 40496161
E-mail: students@vsnl.com
Fax: 022-24904212
STOCKISTS
ASTHA BOOK AGENCY
407, Asha Complex, Behind Navrangpura Police
Station, Near Railway Crossing, Navrangpura
Ahmedabad-380009 • Phone: 079-26466914
Mobiles: 9426010643  /  9377437225  /  9376767555
E-mail: asthabookagency@yahoo.com
asthabookagency@gmail.com
BOOKS INDIA
P.K. House, Behind M.J. Library, Ellis Bridge,
Ahmedabad-380006 • Phone: 079-26575542
Fax: 079-26577349 • E-mail: bookind@gmail.com
HIMANSHU BOOK CO.
6-7, Shri Jayendrapuri Bhavan, Near Sanyas Ashram
Ells Bridge, Ahmedabad-380006
Phones: 079-26579685, 26563782
Mobile: 9979880089
E-mail: orders@himanshubook.com
NILESH BOOK CENTER
SB2, Galar Chamber,
Opp. Dairy Dane Circle,
Sayajiganj, Vadodara, Gujarat–390001
Mobile: 9924458748
VENUS BOOK CENTRE
Opp. Rajaram Dixit Library, Ramnagar Road
Gokulpeth, Nagpur-440010
Mobile: 7387157598
TECHNO WORLD
90/6A, M.G Road, Ist Floor, College St. Crossing
YMCA Building, Kolkata-700007
Phones: 033-22196116, 22571650
UNIQUE BOOKS
Ganesh Traders Building, 2nd Floor
N.C.B. Road, Opp Cotton University Arts Building
Panbazar, Guwahati–781001
Phones: 0361-2733721, 2607107
E-mail: uniquebooksghy@gmail.com
ATUL BOOK STALL
Under Fernandis Bridge, Gandhi Road
Ahmedabad-380006
Phone: 079-22160475 • Mobile: 9328201377
E-mail: atulbookstall13@gmail.com
BOOKS UNLIMITED
15, Yogesh Sadan, Hingwala Lane,
Ghatkopar (East),
Mumbai-400077 • Phone: 022-25013118
E-mail: shahjayesh_123@rediffmail.com
MICROMEDIA
3–5, Mahendra Chamber, 150–154, D.N. Road,
Next to McDonald’s, Opp. C.S.T. Station,
Mumbai-400001
Phones: 022-22078296 , 22078297
E-mail: mumbai@bpbonline.com
PRADEEP BOOK DISTRIBUTORS
631/32, Budhwar Peth, Shop No. 102/103/104
1st Floor, Shan Bramha Complex, Pune-411002
Phone: 020-24458333 • Mobile: 9422087031
E-mail: pbdogo@gmail.com
VIKAS BOOK DISTRIBUTORS
151, Budhwar Peth, Appa Balwant Chowk
Near Jogeshwari Mandir, Pune–411002
Phone: 020-24475551
Mobiles: 8459907741, 9860288838
 SOUTHERN REGION
WHOLESALERS
BOOKIONICS
29-2-35, Vemuri Vari Veedhi, Near Kotha
Vanthena Anjaneya Swami Temple, Suryaraopet,
Vijayawada-520002 • Phone: 0866-2433383
E-mail: vja@bookionics.com
SHAH BOOK HOUSE PVT. LTD.
343, Sri Krupa Market, Near BSNL Office
Mahaboob Mansion, Malakpet
Hyderabad-500036
Phones: 040-23445601, 23445622/633/644
E-mail: info@shahbookhouse.com
TBH PUBLISHERS AND DISTRIBUTORS
25/9A, Karpaga Complex, Good Shed Street
Madurai-625001
Phone: 0452-4371552
E-mail: tbhlbs_mdu@airtelbroadband.in
TBH PUBLISHERS & DISTRIBUTORS
41/1212, Krishnaswamy Road, Pullepady,
Ernakulam, Cochin-682035
Phone: 0484-4022190
E-mail: ekm.info@tbhpd.com
STOCKISTS
AMMAN BOOK GALERY
4, MKP Complex, West Car Street,
Tiruchengode, Namakkal-637211
Phone: 9842767666
CHERAN BOOK HOUSE
238, Big Bazar Street, Coimbatore-641001
Phone: 0422-2396623
MAHALAXMI ENTERPRISES
Post Box No. 5617, Door No. 66, 57th ‘A’ Cross,
6th Main, 4th Block, Rajajinagar,
Bengaluru-560010 • Phone: 080-26742950
E-mail: hrr@vsnl.com / hrsatish@rediffmail.com
MOTHERLAND BOOK HOUSE
8/120, Raja Complex, Prakasam Street
Near P.S. Park, Erode-638001
Phone: 0424-2226164
BOOK SELECTION CENTRE
K.D. House, H. No. 3-5-121/E/1/2,
Near Shalimar Theatre Opp. Saboo Enterprises
Hyderabad-500027
Phones: 040-23446841, 23446843
Fax: 040-24752054 • E-mail: bschyd@hd2.dot.net.in
TBH PUBLISHERS & DISTRIBUTORS
Laxmi Narayan Niwas, 3, Nallathambi Street,
Wallajah Road, Chennai-600002
Phones: 044-28524547, 28553168, 52157192
E-mail: viji@tbhpd.com
TBH PUBLISHERS & DISTRIBUTORS
No. 88, N.G. Narayanaswamy Street
New Siddhapudur, Coimbatore-641044
Phones: 0422-2520491, 2520496
E-mail: tbhcbe@vsnl.net
TBH PUBLISHERS & DISTRIBUTORS
Vikram Trinetra House, 81/10, Vatal Nagaraj Road
Okalipuram, Rajajinagar, Bengaluru-560021
Phone: 080-23422976
Mobiles: 9448049867 / 9686113194
AYYANAR BOOK CENTRE
13, 14, Dudley School, Dindigul-624001
Phone: 0451-2426561
DURGA BOOK DISTRIBUTORS
4-5-172, 1st Floor, Gokul Towers,
Behind Gokul Chat, Koti
Hyderabad-500095
Phones: 040-24752801, 64542801
MANGALA BOOK DISTRIBUTORS
No. 32 (45), Ground Floor, Near to Janatha Office
V.N.R. Road, Madhavanagar, Bengaluru-560001
Phone: 080-22268755 • Mobile: 9845729610
E-mail: mangalabooks2017@gmail.com
jagadeeshadaviyappa56@gmail.com
NATIONAL BOOK AGENCY
19, First Floor, Good Shed Street,
Madurai-625001
Phone: 0452-2341304
PAI & SONS
Next to UCO Bank,
Near Suguna Kalyanamantapam Avinashi Road,
Peelamedu, Coimbatore-641004
Mobile: 9443339453
Phones: 0422-2564239, 2568177
SAPNA BOOK HOUSE PVT. LTD.
Narayan Shastry Road (Near Fab City)
Devaraja Mohalla, Mysore-570001
Phone: 0821-4004499
E-mail: sapna.mys@sapnaretail.com
SKB BOOK SHOP
33/33-A, 2nd Floor, Kalaimagal Kalvi Nilayam Road
Erode-638001 • Mobile: 9443304929
SRI VINAYAKAR BOOK CENTRE
316/7, M.A.M. Building, Sekkalai Road
Karaikudi-630001 • Phone: 04565-235660
Mobile: 9443123037
TRICHY BOOK HOUSE
87-A, Devar Colony, Ist Floor, Thillai Nagar
West Extention, Trichy-620018
Phones: 0431-27661815 / 2764198
E-mail: trichybookhouse@yahoo.co.in
SAPNA BOOK HOUSE PVT. LTD.
3rd Main Road (Opp. to Hotel Vijay Residency)
Bengaluru-560009 • Phone: 080-40114455
Fax: 080-22269648
E-mail: sapnabooks@vsnl.com
customercare@sapnaretail.com
SELVI BOOK SHOP
89, 1st Floor, Nethaji Road,
Near Arya Bhavan Signal, Madurai-625001
Phone: 0452-5380169
SKB BOOK SHOP
137-A, Cherry Road, Salem-636001
Phone: 0427-2452579
E-mail: skbbookshop_salem@yahoo.co.in
TBH LIBRARY BOOK SUPPLIERS
7-A, Sunkurama Street (Opp. Madras High Court)
Parry’s Corner, Chennai-600001
Phones: 044-22537156
TURNING POINT
Ist Floor, Sri Venkatesh Towers,
75, Town Hall Road, Madurai-625001
Phones: 0452-2347398, 4370937
For more information visit us at: www.phindia.com

PHI Learning Private Limited

Rimjhim House, 111, Patparganj Industrial Estate, Delhi-110092
Phones: 011- 43031100, 22154984 • Fax: 011-43031144
E-Mail: phi@phindia.com